.1 Refer to Project Manual, Section 00 01 10 - Table of Contents, for indication ofdocument responsibility (DR). Abbreviations for entity responsible for documentpreparation are as follows:
.1 A - Denotes documents prepared by Architect.
.2 E - Denotes documents prepared by Electrical Engineer.
.3 M - Denotes documents prepared by Mechanical Engineer.
.2 Professional seals if applied next to company names in the project directory (below)govern only those specification sections and schedules identified by the correspondingdocument responsibility (DR) abbreviation in Section 00 01 10.
.1 With regard to Section 00 31 00: The architect’s seal governs only Section00 31 00 proper, and not the documents listed therein.
1.2 Project Directory
.1 Owner:
Board of Governors of Lakehead University955 Oliver RoadThunder Bay, OntarioP7B 5E1
.2 Architect (the Consultant):
Moriyama & Teshima Architects117 George StreetToronto, OntarioM5A 2N4
Tel: 416-925-4484Fax: 416-925-4637
.3 Mechanical Engineer:
Crossey Engineering Ltd.2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E-331Toronto, OntarioM2J 4Y1
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 05)
Document Identification DR Pgs Issued
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION00 01 01 Project Manual Title Page................................................A 1 September 13, 201300 01 05 Document Responsibility and Project Directory................A 2 September 13, 201300 01 10 Table of Contents ............................................................A 2 September 13, 201300 01 15 List of Drawings ...............................................................A 1 September 13, 2013
SCHEDULESAbbreviation Schedule ......................................................................A 1 September 13, 2013Room Finish Colour Schedule............................................................A 1 September 13, 2013
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders ....................................................A 9 September 13, 201300 31 00 Information Available for Review......................................A 1 September 13, 2013
PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS00 41 13 Stipulated Price Bid Form ................................................A 3 September 13, 201300 43 23 Alternative Prices Bid Form Supplement..........................A 1 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 General Instructions.........................................................A 6 September 13, 201301 21 00 Allowances ......................................................................A 2 September 13, 201301 25 00 Product Substitution Procedures .....................................A 2 September 13, 201301 26 00 Requests for Interpretation...............................................A 2 September 13, 201301 26 00 RFI Form .........................................................................A 1 not dated01 31 13 Coordination ...................................................................A 3 September 13, 201301 31 19 Project Meetings ..............................................................A 6 September 13, 201301 32 16 Construction Progress Documentation.............................A 2 September 13, 201301 32 33 Photographic Documentation...........................................A 1 September 13, 201301 33 00 Submittals........................................................................A 7 September 13, 201301 35 13 Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings.........A 7 September 13, 201301 45 00 Quality Control .................................................................A 4 September 13, 201301 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ...................................A 5 September 13, 201301 60 00 Products and Workmanship ............................................A 6 September 13, 201301 73 29 Cutting and Patching .......................................................A 2 September 13, 201301 74 13 Progressive Cleaning ......................................................A 2 September 13, 201301 77 00 Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals ................A 8 September 13, 201301 78 36 Warranties .......................................................................A 1 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 16 Demolition........................................................................A 3 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork ..................................................A 4 September 13, 2013
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 05)
Document Identification DR Pgs Issued
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 42 26 Glass Partition and Door System .....................................A 7 September 13, 201308 71 00 Finish Hardware ..............................................................A 5 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 00 Metal Supports for Gypsum Board ...................................A 7 September 13, 201309 29 00 Gypsum Board.................................................................A 9 September 13, 201309 31 00 Tiling ...............................................................................A 6 September 13, 201309 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems ......................................A 5 September 13, 201309 65 13 Resilient Base..................................................................A 3 September 13, 201309 68 00 Carpet .............................................................................A 6 September 13, 201309 77 13 Acoustic Wall Panels .......................................................A 3 September 13, 201309 91 00 Painting............................................................................A 7 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Refer to Mechanical Specification for Table of Contents ................... M 243 September 13, 2013
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Refer to Electrical Specification for Table of Contents........................E 121 September 13, 2013
A-001 OBC DATA MATRIX, GENERAL NOTES, AND KEY PLANA-002 ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, AND PARTITION TYPES SCHEDULEA-011 SECOND FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN - DEMOLITIONA-101 GROUND FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN - OPEN STUDY SPACEA-102 SECOND FLOOR PARTIAL PLAN - TELEPRESENCE FACILITYA-601 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS GROUND FLOOR - OPEN STUDY SPACEA-801 SECOND FLOOR PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
M-001 MECHANICAL DRAWING LIST AND LEGENDM-200 PLUMBING & DRAINAGE - LEVEL 1M-201 PLUMBING & DRAINAGE - LEVEL 2M-400 HVAC DUCTWORK - DEM0 & NEW - LEVEL 2M-500 HVAC PIPING - DEM0 & NEW - LEVEL 2M-501 HVAC PIPING - LEVEL 3 AND ROOFM-800 MECHANICAL DETAILS - SHEET 1
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
E-001 ELECTRICAL DRAWING LISTE-002 ELECTRICAL LEGENDE-202 LIGHTING - LEVEL 2 - NEW AND DEMOLITION LAYOUTE-301 POWER – LEVEL 2 – PARTIAL PLANE-302 POWER - LEVEL 2 - NEW AND DEMOLITION LAYOUTSE-303 POWER - LEVEL 3 NEW AND DMOLITION PLANE-402 SYSTEMS - LEVEL 2 - NEW AND DEMOLITION LAYOUTSE-502 SECURITY - LEVEL 2 - NEW AND DEMOLITION LAYOUTSE-700 ELECTRICAL DETAIL
END OF SECTION
Moriyama Teshima Architects
Project: LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ORILLIA CAMPUS
Project: LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA TELEPRESENCE FACILITYDoor and Frame Schedule Page No: DS-1
Date: 2013.09.13Project #: 800210
ISSUED FOR BUILDING PERMIT AND TENDER2013.09.13
Symbol Symbol
B.F. GLSTL GL-T7WD
ADO PT-2
Note 1Note 2Note 3Note 4Note 5
Provide joint sealant around all interior steel frames (both sides).
Glazing, 19mm clear tempered and laminated glass with acid etch finish. See Specifications.
Barrier Free
Structural silicone joint sealant to be clear.
All stainless steel components to have brushed finish, uless noted otherwise.
For locations of power assited doors, refer to Drawings.At steel screen , locate glass with stop on the inside face of the room (secure side), unless noted otherwise.
Paint, steel doors, frames and screens (interior).
G E N E R A L N O T E S
Glazing (See Door Schedule)
Automatic Door Opener for barrier-free access
SteelWood
Description Description
Moriyama Teshima Architects
Project: LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA TELEPRESENCE FACILITYDoor and Frame Schedule Page No: DS-1
Date: 2013.09.13Project #: 800210
ISSUED FOR BUILDING PERMIT AND TENDER 2013.09.13
ROOM DOOR FRAME
No. Room Name No. Type No. Leaf Thk Size
W x H Matl Fin./ Colr.
Glass Type Type Matl Fin./
Colr.
Side Light Glass
GROUND FLOOR
X1020 OPEN STUDY SPACE 1020a C 2 45 1035 x 3000 **GL ** **GL-T7 S2** ** ** **GL-T7 - ADO ** SEE INTERIOIR DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS, SEE SPECIFICATIONS
SECOND FLOOR
2020 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY 2020 B 1 45 *EXISTING *WD *CLR *GL-T *S1 *STL *PT-2 GL-T *EXISTING *EXISTING *EXIST. FRAME AND DOOR TO BE RELOCATED, REPAIR/ REFINISH AS REQUIRED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. SEE DRAWINGS.
Project/Contract: Lakehead University – Orillia Campus – Renovation-Telepresence Facility
From (Bidder): ________________________________________________company name
________________________________________________street address or postal box number
________________________________________________city/town, province and postal code
To (Owner): Board of Governors of Lakehead University955 Oliver RoadThunder Bay, Ontario P7B 5E1
1.1 Bid Price
.1 We, the undersigned, having examined the Bid Documents and addenda numbered_______________ (inclusive), and having examined the Place of the Work, andexamined conditions thereon that affect the Work; hereby accept and agree to enter intoa Contract with the Owner to perform the Work required by the Contract Documents forthe stipulated bid price of:
$ _________________________ in Canadian dollars, excluding Value Added Taxes.amount in figures
1.2 Declarations
.1 We understand that the Owner will pay the Value Added Taxes payable with respect tothe Contract Price and such is not included in the bid price.
.2 We accept and agree to submit to the Owner required bonds and proofs of insurancespecified in the conditions of the Contract, and as described in the Bid Documents, andto execute the Contract within 2 weeks from the date of notification of acceptance of thisbid. We understand and agree that the submittal, by us, to the Owner of the requiredbonds and proofs of insurance, within 7 days after receipt of notification of conditionalaward, will be a condition of the final award of the Contract to us by the Owner, to theextent permitted by any other conditions contained in the notice of conditionalacceptance.
.3 We undertake if our bid is accepted to commence the Work at the Place of the Work,actively, within 10 Working Days of the Owner’s written authorization to commence theWork.
.4 We declare that no person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has anyinterest in this bid or in the proposed Contract for which this bid is made.
.5 We accept and agree that we will attain Substantial Performance of the Work as certifiedby the Consultant, no later than the 29th day of November in the year of 2013.
.6 We accept and agree that this bid is irrevocable and may not be withdrawn by theundersigned, subject to the conditions of the Bid Documents pertaining to the withdrawalof bids, and is open for acceptance by the Owner during the Bid Acceptance Period.
.7 We have thoroughly examined the complete Bid Documents, and have visited the Placeof the Work and carefully examined conditions affecting the Place of the Work and workto be done thereon, and have included in our bid price for all conditions that may affectthe execution of the Work that are known, knowable, or reasonably inferable from suchexaminations, and agree and accept that no payments for extra work on account of suchconditions will be allowed during the performance of the Work.
.8 We attach hereto a bid bond, in the form of Canadian standard construction documentCCDC 220 in an amount equal to not less than 10% of our bid price. This bid bond isvalid for the Bid Acceptance Period. The cost of this bid bond is included in our bid price.
.9 We attach hereto an agreement to bond valid for the Bid Acceptance Period and issuedby a bonding company acceptable to Owner and licensed to issue such instruments inthe Province of Ontario. The costs of all bonds so required are included in our bid price.This agreement to bond obliges the bonding company to issue a performance bond anda labour and material payment bond, each in the amount of 50% of the bid price, in theforms as follows:
.1 Performance bond: CCDC 221.
.2 Labour and material payment bond: CCDC 222.
.10 We accept and agree that nothing contained in the Bid Documents or elsewhere, no actdone or expense incurred by us in the preparation and submission of our bid, no trade orindustry custom or practice, and no representation or assurance that may have beenmade or given to us by or on behalf of the Owner, shall in any manner legally bind theOwner, in any circumstances, to accept this bid.
.11 We accept and agree that the Owner shall in no event be responsible for any costsincurred by us in the preparation and submission of our bid.
Project/Contract: Lakehead University – Orillia Campus – Renovation-Telepresence Facility
From (Bidder): ________________________________________________company name
Signature: ________________________________________________Signature of authorized signing officer
Dated this ___________________ day of _____________________________, 20_______.
Note: Affix corporate seal as required by Bid Documents.
We, the above named Bidder, offer the alternative prices requested below. The amount to beadded to, or deducted from, our bid price (as entered in Section 00 41 13, previously submitted)is entered for each alternative requested. All alternative prices exclude Value Added Taxes. Ifthere is no change to the base bid price for an alternative, we have so indicated. Weunderstand, agree, and accept that:
(a) the Owner shall have the right to accept any of the alternatives and correspondingalternative prices in any order or combination, including all or none,
(b) alternative prices will not be considered in determining the most appropriate Bidder,
(c) alternatives and alternative prices are open for acceptance by the Owner for the durationof the Bid Acceptance Period.
(d) the Work of the Contract and the Contract Price will reflect the alternatives andalternative prices, if any, accepted by the Owner at the time of contract award, and
(e) acceptance of any alternatives will not affect the Contract Time, unless we havespecifically indicated an increase or decrease in the Contract Time, in number of days,on account of a particular alternative.
AlternativePrice # Description of Alternative
Amount to beadded to bid
price
Amount to bededucted from
bid price
1. Add acoustic wall panels as specified inSection 09 77 13, to locations indicated. $ $
.1 The use of the words “include” or “including”, or variations thereof, within the ContractDocuments is not limiting.
1.2 The Contract Documents
.1 The Contract Documents have been arranged into various divisions, sections, drawings,and schedules for the purpose of presenting the Work in a logical and organized formand to enable ease of reference and interpretation, and are not intended to be anarrangement of precise and independent Subcontractors, or jurisdiction of responsibilityfor the various parts of the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible forcoordinating the execution of the Work of this Contract in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents.
.2 As a result, the Consultant shall not be required to decide on questions arising withregard to agreements or contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors orSuppliers, nor to the extent of the parts of the Work assigned thereto.
.3 Further, no extra will be allowed as a result of the failure to coordinate and allocate theWork such that the Work is Provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.4 This section coordinates, relates, and governs the work of other sections of thespecifications.
.5 Specifications contained in Division 15 may also be referred to as “Mechanical”.
.6 Specifications contained in Division 16 may also be referred to as “Electrical”.
1.3 Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees
.1 The building code - Ontario Regulation 350/06, including amendments, shall govern theWork.
.2 Comply with codes, by-laws, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over thePlace of the Work. Codes and regulations form an integral part of the ContractDocuments.
.3 Owner shall apply and pay for the building permit. The Contractor shall pick up buildingpermit from the municipal department having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work. Obtainand pay for all other permits, licenses, deposits and certificates of inspection as part ofthe Work.
.4 Arrange for inspection, testing and acceptance of the Work required by the authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Be responsible for necessary preparations, provisions and pay costs.
.5 Obtain permits required to execute work on municipal rights of way. Obtain damagedeposits for sidewalks, roads and services, unless otherwise indicated.
.6 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications and inspections requiredby authorities having jurisdiction such that notifications can be properly received and thatinspections can be properly undertaken without causing a delay in the Work. TheContractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delayin the Work caused by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.
.7 The Contractor shall provide to the chief building official or the registered code agency,where a registered code agency is appointed under the Ontario Building Code Act inrespect of the construction to which the notice relates, the required notices set out inDivision C – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.1(2) and Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the Ontario BuildingCode, O. Reg. 350/06 as amended. The Contractor shall be present at each siteinspection by an inspector or registered code agency as applicable under Division C –Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the building code.
.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications to the chiefbuilding official or the registered code agency such that the inspection pertainingto the notifications can be made within the time frame as required under DivisionC – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.3 of the Ontario Building Code, O. Reg. 350/06 asamended, without causing a delay in the Work. The Contractor, at no additionalcost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delay in the Work causedby failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.
1.4 Examination of the Place of the Work, Documents, Surfaces and Conditions
.1 Carefully examine the Place of the Work and investigate matters relating to the nature ofthe Work, means of access and egress, obstacles, rights and interests of other partieswhich may be interfered with during the execution of the Work, conditions and limitationsincluding obstructions, existing structures or facilities, local conditions, actual levels,character and nature of the Work, and other consideration which may affect performanceof the Work.
.2 Carefully examine the extent of work to be performed and matters which are referred toin the Contract Documents prior to start of the Work.
.3 Examine work to which work is to be applied, anchored or connected, and relevant as-built conditions.
.4 Each work operation following on a previous work operation of a differing Subcontractor,as in the case of finishing and surfacing work, shall include a thorough examination ofthe condition of the previous work. Conditions found unacceptable, either for thecommencement of the new work or its satisfactory completion, shall be reported inwriting to the Consultant.
.5 Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencement ofwork implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions and existing conditions will not beaccepted as a contributing factor to subsequent failure or acceptability of the Work.
1.5 Quantity of Items
.1 Where a component, device, item or part of materials or equipment is referred to in thesingular number, such reference shall require the provision of as many components,devices, items or parts of material or equipment necessary to complete the Work.
1.6 Standards and Codes
.1 Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals and installation, applicationand maintenance instructions referred to in these specifications, unless otherwisespecified, amended or date suffixed, shall be latest published editions at Contract date.
.1 Advise Consultant of discrepancies discovered in requirements of the ContractDocuments and request clarification in written form.
.2 Advise Consultant when clarifications are required pertaining to meaning or intent ofrequirements of Contract Documents and request clarification from Consultant in writtenform.
.3 Do not proceed with related work until written clarification is provided by Consultant.
.4 Failure to notify Consultant shall result in Contractor incurring responsibility for resultingdeficiencies and expense at no additional cost to the Owner.
.5 Written instructions issued by Consultant for the purpose of clarification, implicitlysupersede applicable and relevant aspects of the Contract Documents irrespective ofwhether or not these documents are explicitly or specifically cited in clarification requestsor clarification instructions.
1.8 Setting out the Work
.1 Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of the Work to requiredlocations, lines and elevations.
.2 Arrange meeting with Consultant to discuss critical setting out assumptions for the Workand establish limiting conditions for setting out the Work. Consultant shall chair andprepare minutes of the meeting, and prepare and submit sketches recordingunderstanding of key setting out principles.
.3 Provide devices needed to lay out and construct the Work.
1.9 Documents at the Place of the Work
.1 Maintain at the Place of the Work, one copy of each of following:
.1 Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, addenda, and othermodifications to the Contract.
.2 ‘Reviewed' or 'Reviewed as Modified' shop drawings.
.7 Difficulties (work scheduled to start but did not with the reason why, delays,labour inefficiencies, labour shortage).
.8 Products and materials delivered.
.9 Equipment mobilized and/or demobilized.
.10 Demolition conditions.
.11 Start and finish date of each part of the Work.
.10 As-built drawings recording as-built conditions, instructions, changes forstructure, equipment, wiring, plumbing, and the like, as called for in Section01 77 00 and Division 15 and 16 prior to being concealed.
.2 Make above material available to Consultant upon request.
1.10 Overloading
.1 Protect the existing building from loads which may cause permanent deformation.
.2 Protect the Work from loads which may cause permanent deformation.
1.11 Inserts, Anchors and Fasteners
.1 Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports andanchors, properly sized for load to be carried.
.2 Where inserts cannot be placed, use factory made expansion shields for light weightsonly.
.3 Supply and locate inserts, holes, anchor bolts and sleeves during placement orfabrication of structural elements.
.4 Fasteners stressed in withdrawal are not acceptable, except where otherwise indicated.
.5 Metal fastenings shall be uniform to metals materials and components being anchoredor of a metal which will not set up a galvanic action causing damage to the fastening ormetal component under moist conditions.
.6 Fastenings for prefinished materials shall be of concealed type unless otherwiseindicated, and when exposed finish is required, of matching prefinishing materials.
.7 Metal fastenings and accessories shall be same texture, colour and finish as material onwhich they occur, as selected by Consultant.
.8 Power actuated fasteners:
.1 Power actuated fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for applicationindicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing perASTM E1190-95(2007) conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
.2 Do not use power actuated fasteners which are stressed in withdrawal in finishedwork.
.3 Do not use power actuated fasteners within 100 mm (4") of the edge of concreteor masonry, unless otherwise accepted in writing by Consultant.
.4 Do not use power actuated fasteners in post-tensioned concrete.
1.12 Penetrations
.1 Holes or voids created in assemblies or partitions for penetrating mechanical, electrical,or sprinkler service items, shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the penetrating itemas well as additional required fill materials, such as sealants, firestopping and smokesealants, insulation, and the like, without exceeding the maximum opening allowable bythe manufacturer of the additional required fill material.
1.13 Concealed Services
.1 Conceal wiring, conduit, pipes and ductwork in finished areas, unless otherwiseindicated.
1.14 Trademark and Labels
.1 Trademarks and labels, including applied labels, shall not be visible in finished work infinished areas, unless otherwise accepted or indicated by Consultant.
.2 The exceptions to this requirement are trademarks and labels which are essential toidentify materials, systems, assemblies, and equipment for maintenance andreplacement purposes, and for life safety, fire resistance and temperature rise ratings.
1.15 Waste Audits/Plans for Waste Reduction
.1 Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Deliver to nearest appropriate depot materials accepted for recycling by region ormunicipality having jurisdiction over the Place of the Work, including but not limited tocardboard, paper, plastic, aluminum, steel, and glass. Deliver to nearest appropriatedepot scrap and excess gypsum wallboard for recycling of this material. Costs for thiswork are included in the Contract Price.
1.16 Interferences
.1 Coordinate placement of equipment to ensure that components will be properlyaccommodated within spaces provided prior to commencement of the Work.
.2 Take complete responsibility for remedial work that results from failure to coordinateaspects of work prior to its fabrication/installation.
.3 Ensure that accesses and clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and/or for easymaintenance of equipment are provided in layout of equipment and services; notifyConsultant if indicated clearances are in conflict.
1.17 Not In Contract Items and Items Supplied by Owner
.1 NIC (Not In Contract) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that requirecoordination for installation although are not Provided as part of the Work.
1.18 Security
.1 Be responsible for security of the Place of the Work and material from time the Workcommences until completion of the Work.
.2 Provide and maintain signs, hoardings, guard-rails, barriers, warning lights and otherprotection as required by authorities having jurisdiction for safety of the Place of theWork. Be responsible for adequacy of protection.
1.19 Publicity Releases and Photographs
.1 No press or publicity releases will be permitted without prior written approval of theOwner.
.2 No photographs of the Place of the Work or of any portion of the Work will be permittedwithout written approval of the Owner, except as provided by the Contract Documents.
1.20 Smoking Policy
.1 Smoking in the Owner’s premises and on the Owner’s campus is prohibited except indesignated areas.
1.21 Electronic Files
.1 In the event that the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Supplier requests AutoCAD filesfrom the Consultant, a fee paid to the Consultant for preparing the electronic files ofplans will be required. The Consultant may require a copyright waiver to be signed, atthe Consultant‘s discretion. The fee required shall be as follows:
.1 Architectural drawings: $125.00 (+ HST) per sheet.
.2 Mechanical drawings: $125.00 (+ HST) per sheet.
.3 Electrical drawings: $125.00 (+ HST) per sheet.
.1 Named Products alternates or equals, indicated by the phrases "or approved alternateby XYZ Manufacturing" or "or approved equal by XYZ Manufacturing", shall beinterpreted to mean that named Product alternate or equal, if selected for use in lieu ofindicated or specified Product, meets or exceeds performance, appearance, generalarrangement, dimensions, availability, code and standards compliance, and colour ofspecified Product. Be responsible for costs and modifications associated with theinclusion of named Product alternate or equal at no additional cost to the Owner.
.2 The process for proposing and approving alternates or equals shall be the same processas for proposing and approving substitutions (refer to paragraph 1.2 below).
.3 Confirm delivery of specified items prior to proposing alternates or equals.
1.2 Substitutions
.1 Submission of substitutions:
.1 Proposals for substitutions of Products and materials must be submitted inaccordance with procedures specified in this section.
.2 Consultant may review submissions, if directed by Owner, but in any case withthe understanding that the Contract Time will not be altered due to the timerequired by the Consultant to review the submission and by the Contractor toimplement the substitution in the Work.
.3 Consultant’s services to review substitutions will be performed on an additionalservices basis to their contract with the Owner. Costs of these services will bediscounted from any reductions in the Contract Price that might be forthcomingfrom the substitution. Therefore, to be acceptable, a substitution must present areduction in the construction cost at least equal to the cost to the Owner of theConsultant’s additional services to review the substitution. Contractor shall coverdirectly costs and administration associated with courier services, reproductioncosts, and other direct costs associated with these substitution reviews.
.2 Submission requirements:
.1 Description of proposed substitution, including detailed comparative specificationof proposed substitution with the specified Product.
.2 Manufacturer’s Product data sheets for proposed Products.
.3 Respective costs of items originally specified and the proposed substitution.
.4 Confirmation of proposed substitution delivery, in writing by Productmanufacturer.
.5 Compliance with the building codes and requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.
.6 Affect concerning compatibility and interface with adjacent building materials andcomponents.
.7 Compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
.10 Detailed availability of maintenance services and sources of replacementmaterials and parts, including associate costs and time frames.
.3 Substitutions submitted on shop drawings without following requirements of this sectionprior to submission of the affected shop drawings will cause the shop drawings to berejected.
.4 Proposed substitutions shall include costs associated with modifications necessary toother adjacent and connecting portions of the Work.
.5 Consultant’s decision concerning acceptance or rejection of proposed substitutions isfinal. Should it appear to the Consultant that the value of services required to evaluatethe substitution exceeds the potential reduction, the Consultant will advise the Ownerthat the substitution does not merit consideration before proceeding with a fullevaluation. If the substitution will produce a reduction commensurate with or exceedingthe value of the Consultant’s services to evaluate the substitution, the Consultant willrequest the Owner’s direction to proceed with evaluation.
.6 Failure to order specified Products in adequate time to meet the approved constructionschedule will not be a valid reason to submit a request for substitution. In accordancewith GC 6.5 Delays, such delays remain the responsibility of the Contractor, and will notresult in an extension to the Contract Time or be subject to reimbursement by theOwner.
.7 The Owner is under no obligation to consider Product or system substitutionsrecommended by the Contractor.
.8 Remove and replace substitutions incorporated into the Work without the Consultant’swritten approval.
.1 A request for interpretation (RFI) is a formal process used during the Work to obtain aninterpretation of the Contract Documents pursuant to GC 2.2.7 through GC 2.2.10(inclusive).
.1 An RFI shall not constitute notice of claim for a delay.
.2 Submittal procedures:
.1 RFI form:
.1 Submit RFI on “Request for Interpretation” form, appended to this section.The Consultant shall not respond to an RFI except as submitted on this form.
.2 Where RFI form does not provide sufficient space for complete information tobe provided thereon, attach additional sheets as required.
.3 Submit with RFI form necessary supporting documentation.
.2 RFI log:
.1 Maintain log of RFIs sent to and responses received from the Consultant,complete with corresponding dates.
.2 Submit updated log of RFIs with each progress draw submittal.
.3 Submit RFIs sufficiently in advance of affected parts of the Work so as not tocause delay in the performance of the Work. Costs resulting from failure to dothis will not be paid by the Owner.
.4 RFIs shall be submitted only to the Consultant.
.5 RFIs shall be submitted only by Contractor. RFIs submitted by Subcontractors orSuppliers shall not be accepted.
.6 Number RFIs consecutively in one sequence in order submitted.
.7 Submit one distinct RFI per RFI form.
.8 Consultant shall review RFIs from the Contractor submitted in accordance withthis section, with the following understandings:
.1 Consultant’s response shall not be considered as a Change Order or ChangeDirective, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Price or ContractTime or changes in the Work.
.2 Only the Consultant shall respond to RFIs. Responses to RFIs received fromentities other than the Consultant shall not be considered.
.9 Allow 5 Working Days for review of each RFI by the Consultant.
.1 Consultant’s review of RFI commences on date of receipt by the Consultantof RFI submittal and extends to date RFI returned by Consultant.
.2 When the RFI submittal is received by Consultant before noon, review periodcommences that day; when RFI submittal is received by Consultant afternoon, review period begins on the next Working Day.
.3 If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of RFIs suchthat the Consultant cannot process these RFIs within 5 Working Days, theConsultant, will confer with the Contractor within 1 Working Day of receipt ofsuch RFIs, and the Consultant and the Contractor will jointly prepare anestimate of the time necessary for processing same as well as an order ofpriority between the RFIs submitted. The Contractor shall accommodate suchnecessary time at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional costto the Owner.
.10 Contractor shall satisfy itself that an RFI is warranted by undertaking a thoroughreview of the Contract Documents to determine that the claim, dispute, or othermatters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretationof the Contract Documents can not be resolved by direct reference to theContract Documents. Contractor shall describe in detail this review on the RFIform as part of the RFI submission. RFI submittals that lack such detailed reviewdescription, or where the detail provided is, in the opinion of the Consultant,insufficient, shall not be reviewed by the Consultant and shall be rejected.
.11 If an RFI inquiry is issued by the Contractor without due diligence in finding theinformation within the Contract Documents, it will be returned as such and a feeof $125.00 will be applied to such RFI from the Consultant to the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
Date # ofPages
To From
Co. Co.
Phone # Phone #
Contractor’s Request for Interpretation
Consultant’s Supplemental Instructions
Fax # Fax #
Email Email
Project: RFI No.:
Owner:Date ofRequest:
To: Contractor:(Consultant’s
Representative)
Project No.:Contractor’sRepresentative:
Consultant’s FaxNo.: Fax No.:
Interpretation Requested: (Description of request for interpretation and references to relevant
portions of Contract Documents)
Attachments:Requested by:
Consultant’s Supplemental Instruction:
Attachments:Reply By:
The work shall be carried out in accordance with these Supplemental Instructions issuedin accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Price or ContractTime. Prior to proceeding with these instructions, indicate acceptance of theseinstructions as being consistent with the Contract Documents by returning a signedcopy to the Consultant.
.1 Provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and be responsible fordelays or costs resulting from failure to properly inspect or coordinate the Work, and forreplacement or corrective work required.
1.2 Identification of Systems
.1 Provide identification of electrical and mechanical system installations and otherautomated systems or equipment in compliance with Contract Documents.
1.3 Commissioning and Systems Demonstrations
.1 Provide testing, adjusting, balancing and certification and commissioning of mechanicaland electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment in accordancewith Section 01 77 00.
.2 Instruct Owner’s designated representatives in operation and maintenance ofmechanical and electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment, inaccordance with Section 01 77 00.
1.4 Superintendence
.1 Provide superintendent and necessary supporting staff personnel who shall be inattendance at the Place of the Work while Work is being performed, with provenexperience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable natureand complexity.
.2 The Contractor shall appoint a superintendent at the Place of the Work who shall haveoverall authority at the Place of the Work and shall speak for the Contractor andrepresent the Contractor’s interest and responsibilities at meetings at the Place of theWork and in dealings with the Consultant and the Owner.
1.5 Dimensions
.1 Verify dimensions at the Place of the Work before commencing shop drawings. Beforefabrication commences report discrepancies to Consultant in writing. Incorporateaccepted variances on shop drawings and as-built records.
.2 Unconfirmed dimensions may be indicated on drawings, or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments. Such dimensions may be shown with either a suffix or a prefix ± (plus orminus), or indicated with wording “SITE VERIFY’, SITE CHECK” or such similarindication or notation or wording. Such dimensional indications or notations are placedonto drawings to enable Contractor to determine, in general terms only, the scope of theWork, and to assist in determining the Contract Price.
.3 Verify that the Work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions andpositions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out inaccordance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications, and ensure thatwork installed in error is rectified before construction continues.
.4 Thicknesses shown on drawings are nominal only. Ascertain actual sizes on site.
.5 Owner will accept no claims for extra expense on the part of the Contractor by reason ofnoncompliance with paragraph 1.5 of this section.
1.6 Coordination
.1 Coordinate and ensure workers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers cooperate to ensure thatthe Work will be carried out expeditiously and in proper sequence.
.2 Make adjustments to allow adjustable work fit to fixed work.
1.7 Building Dimension, Templates, Built-ins, and Coordination
.1 Take necessary dimensions for the proper execution of the Work. Assume completeresponsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and forcoordination.
.2 Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixedto or inserted in the Work and set in place or instruct separate Subcontractors as to theirlocation.
.3 Supply items to be built in, as and when required together with templates,measurements, shop drawings and other related information and assistance.
.4 Pay the cost of extra work and make up time lost as a result of failure to providenecessary information and items to be built in.
.5 Verify that the Work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions andpositions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out byrequirements of the Contract Documents, and ensure that work installed in error isrectified before construction resumes.
.6 Check and verify dimensions referring to interfacing of services. Verify such dimensionswith interconnected portions of the Work.
.7 Do not scale directly from drawings. Obtain clarification from Consultant if there isambiguity or lack of information.
.8 Details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installedshall be taken at the Place of the Work.
.9 Advise Consultant of discrepancies and omissions in the Contract Documents, thataffect aesthetics, or that interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. Do not proceedwith work affected by such items without clarification from Consultant.
.10 Prepare and submit setting drawings, templates and other information necessary for thelocation and installation of material, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories,fastenings, connections and access panels.
.11 Subcontractors shall direct related Subcontractors on site of specific locations requiredfor sleeves and openings.
.1 The Contractor shall schedule meetings as specified herein.
.1 Such scheduling shall be in consultation both with the Owner and with theConsultant.
.2 The Contractor shall prepare agendas for meetings specified herein.
.1 Agendas shall include, as a minimum, the agenda items specified in the ContractDocuments.
.3 The Contractor shall distribute written notice of each meeting specified herein, completewith meeting agenda, 4 Working Days in advance of meeting date to the Consultant andthe Owner and other affected parties.
.4 The Contractor shall chair and record the minutes of meetings specified herein.
.1 Contractor shall distribute copies of minutes to the Owner, the Consultant, and allothers in attendance within 3 Working Days after date of meeting.
.5 Representatives of parties attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of theparties they represent.
.6 Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not attend meetings unless authorized by theConsultant and the Owner.
.7 The Contractor shall prepare, and distribute to the Consultant and the Owner 4 days inadvance of next progress meeting date, the following:
.1 Monthly progress reports containing updated schedules, shop drawing logs,requests for interpretation logs, submittals and budget.
1.2 Contract Start-Up Meeting
.1 Within 5 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in Contract to discussand resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities prior to the commencement ofthe Work.
.2 The Owner, the Consultant, the Contractor, site superintendent(s), and inspection andtesting company will be in attendance.
.3 Agenda to include the following:
.1 Code-of-conduct for workforce at the Place of the Work.
.2 Owner’s guidelines and policies.
.3 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Project.
.4 Status of permits, fees and requirement of authorities having jurisdiction. Actionrequired.
.22 Workplace Safety and Insurance Board Certificate.
1.3 Pre-Installation Meetings
.1 During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, schedulepre-installation meetings as required by the Contract Documents and coordinated withthe Consultant.
.2 As far as possible, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on thesame day as regularly scheduled progress meetings.
.3 Agenda to include the following:
.1 Code-of-conduct for workforce at the Place of the Work.
.2 Owner’s guidelines and policies.
.3 Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
.4 Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
.5 Review of installation procedures and requirements.
.6 Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
.7 Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
.11 Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule.
.12 Revisions to construction schedule.
.13 Progress, schedule, during subsequent period of the Work.
.14 Review submittal schedules.
.15 Review status of submittals.
.16 Maintenance of quality standards.
.17 Pending changes and substitutions.
.18 Review of Contract modifications and interpretations including, but not limited to:requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders, Change Orders,Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on constructionschedule and on Contract Time.
.19 Review of status of as-built documents.
.20 Other business.
1.5 Pre-Takeover Meeting
.1 Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule a pre-takeovermeeting.
.2 Agenda to include the following:
.1 Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.
.2 Review of items arising from proceedings.
.3 Review of procedures for Substantial Performance of the Work, completion of theContract, and handover of the Work.
.4 Field observations, problems, conflicts.
.5 Review of outstanding Contract modifications and interpretations including, butnot limited to: requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders,Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect onconstruction schedule and on Contract Time.
.6 Problems which impede Substantial Performance of the Work.
.7 Review of procedures for deficiency review. Corrective measures required.
.8 Review of arrangements for hydro, heating, and other services.
.9 Progress, schedule, during succeeding period of the Work.
.10 Review submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and all demonstrationsand documentation required for Substantial Performance of the Work.
.11 Review of keying and hardware requirements.
.12 Review of status of as-built documents and record drawings.
.13 Status of commissioning and training.
.14 Review Contractor’s deficiency list and status.
.1 Prior to application for completion of Contract, schedule a post-construction meeting.Four days prior to date for meeting, Consultant shall confirm a date for meeting basedon evaluation of completion requirements.
.2 Agenda to include the following:
.1 Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.
.2 Confirmation that no business is arising from proceedings.
.3 Confirmation of completion of the Contract, and handover of revieweddocumentation from the Consultant to the Owner.
.4 Confirmation of completion of contemplated change orders, Change Orders,Change Directives, and Supplemental Instructions.
.5 Problems that impede Contract completion.
.6 Identify unresolved issues or potential warranty problems.
.7 Confirmation of completion of deficiencies.
.8 Corrective measures required.
.9 Confirmation of arrangements for hydro, heating and other services.
.10 Confirm submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and demonstrations anddocumentation for Contract completion are in order.
.11 Review of procedures for communication during post-construction period.
.12 Handover of reviewed record documents by the Consultant to the Owner.
.13 Handover of Contract completion insurance policy transcripts by Contractor.
.14 Submission of final application for payment.
.15 Review and finalize outstanding claims, pricing, and allowance amounts.
.16 Status of commissioning and training.
.17 Demobilization and the Place of the Work restoration.
.18 Review of requests for interpretation log.
.19 Other business.
1.7 Special Meetings
.1 Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to require special meetings which may beheld on short notice and at which attendance by Contractor and representatives ofaffected Subcontractors and Suppliers is mandatory. Contractor shall keep detailed andaccurate meeting notes and distribute copies promptly to all in attendance and thoseaffected by agreements made at such meetings.
.1 Include dates for delivery of Products, equipment, finish items, factory-finishedmanufactured items. Show last dates for order, shipment, and delivery in order tomeet construction schedule.
.5 Inspection and testing schedule:
.1 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing by advance discussion with theselected inspection and testing company to determine the time required for theinspection and testing company to perform its tests and to issue each of itsfindings, and allow for required time in the construction schedule.
.2 Refer to Section 01 45 00 for additional requirements for inspection and testingscheduling.
.6 Additional schedules:
.1 Concurrently with the construction schedule, submit a schedule of values, a cashflow schedule, and an equipment delivery schedule in formats acceptable to theConsultant.
.2 Cash flow schedule: Broken down on a monthly basis, indicating anticipatedmonthly progress billing for duration of the Contract.
.3 Schedule of values: in accordance with CCDC 24-1996.
.4 Refer to section 01 33 00 for additional requirements of scheduling of submittals.
.1 Provide photographic documentation in digital format and in accordance with proceduresand submission requirements specified in this section.
1.2 Digital Photographs
.1 Equipment: Provide photographs using minimum 10 megapixel digital camera.
.2 Submit the required photographs to the Consultant and to the Owner.
.3 Output: Supply date stamped maximum resolution colour photos to Consultant in JPEGformat, on CD-ROM format.
.4 Number of photos required:
.1 Prior to construction: Provide necessary number of photographs, as required todocument existing conditions and verify damage to adjacent streets and propertywhich may or may not have occurred during construction: Minimum 50 photos.
.2 Each Progress draw: Provide 24 construction photographs each month toaccompany each application for progress draw to document the stage of theWork from points selected by the Consultant showing as much as possible of theWork installed during the previous month.
.3 Provide minimum of 8 photographs on each meeting report and for eachprogress meeting.
.4 Completion: When the Work is completed, arrange to take final photographs ofthe Work from a minimum of 8 points of view.
.1 Submit submittals as requested by the Contract Documents, as specified herein, and inaccordance with the conditions of the Contract.
.2 In addition to submittals specifically requested by the Contract Documents, submit othersubmittals as may be reasonably requested by the Consultant, or as are required tocoordinate the Work and to provide the Owner with choices available, within the scope ofContract Documents.
.3 Procedures and requirements for Contract closeout submittals shall be in accordancewith the following sections:
.1 Review submittals for conformity to Contract Documents before submitting toConsultant. Submittals shall bear stamp of Contractor and signature of aresponsible official in Contractor’s organization indicating in writing that suchsubmittals have been checked and coordinated by Contractor. Contractor’sreview shall be performed by qualified personnel who have detailedunderstanding of those elements being reviewed and of the conditions at thePlace of the Work proposed for installation.
.2 Check and sign each submittal and make notations considered necessary beforesubmitting to Consultant for review. Where submittal is substantially andobviously in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents, reject submittalwithout submitting to Consultant and request resubmission. Note limited numberof reviews of each submittal covered under Consultant’s services as specifiedbelow.
.3 Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for any conflicts occurring in the Workthat result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals required for theWork.
.4 Submittals that have not been reviewed, checked, and coordinated by Contractorprior to submission to Consultant, will be rejected.
.5 Notify Consultant in writing of changes made on submittals from ContractDocuments. Consultant’s review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor ofresponsibility for changes made from Contract Documents not covered by writtennotification to Consultant.
.5 Consultant’s review of submittals:
.1 Review of submittals by Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertainingconformance with the general design concepts and the general intent of theContract Documents. This review shall not mean that Consultant approves thedetail design inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain withthe Contractor. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility forerrors or omissions in the submittals, or responsibility for meeting requirementsof Contract Documents.
.2 Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated atthe Place of the Work for information that pertains solely to fabrication processesor to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the Work.
.3 As part of their scope of work, Consultant shall review shop drawings no morethan twice. Should three or more reviews be required due to reasons ofContractor omissions causing resubmission requests, then Contractor shallreimburse the Consultant for time expended in these extra reviews. Time shall beinvoiced to the Owner (to be deducted from monies due to the Contractor andpaid to Consultant by Owner) at rates recommended by Consultant’sprofessional association and disbursements shall be invoiced at Consultant’scost. The Contractor shall cover directly costs and administration associated withcourier services and the like for these extra shop drawing reviews.
.4 Consultant’s review and markings on submittals do not authorize changes in theWork or the Contract Time, and will be accommodated at no additional cost tothe Owner. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Consultant’s markings onsubmittals constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change in the ContractTime, then the Contractor shall so notify the Consultant in writing and request aninterpretation following the procedures for requests for interpretation inaccordance with Section 01 26 00. If the Consultant finds that the Consultant’smarkings on submittals do constitute a change in the Work or will effect a changein the Contract Time, then a Change Order will be prepared therefore. The timetaken to process such a request for interpretation shall not, in and of itself,constitute a change in the Work nor increase the Contract Time.
.5 Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents or not requestedby the Consultant will not be reviewed by the Consultant and will be marked'NOT REVIEWED' by the Consultant and returned to the Contractor.
.6 Make submittals with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to causeno delay in the Work. Be responsible for delays, make up time lost and pay added costs,at no additional cost to the Owner, incurred because of not making submittals in duetime to permit proper review by Consultant.
.7 Submittals that contain substitutions will be rejected. Substitutions are permitted only onsubstitution submittals as specified in Section 01 25 00.
.8 Do not proceed with work affected by a submittal, including ordering of Products, untilrelevant submittal has been reviewed by Consultant.
.9 Prepare submittals using SI (metric) units.
.10 Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved byConsultant’s review of submittals.
.11 Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittal from requirements of ContractDocuments is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittal, unless Consultant giveswritten acceptance of specific deviations.
.12 Engineered submittals:
.1 Submittals for items required to be sealed by professional engineer (engineered)shall be duly prepared, sealed, and signed under the direct control andsupervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Place of theWork, having in force, professional liability insurance with minimum limit ofliability of $1,000,000 per claim.
.2 Include with engineered submittal, proof of insurance identifying insurer, policynumber, policy term, and limit of liability, on duly signed letterhead and / orcertificate of insurance.
.3 Design includes life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections,spans, and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements of applicablecodes, standards, regulations, authorities having jurisdiction, and designrequirements of the Contract Documents.
.4 Engineered submittals shall include design calculations, complete withreferences to codes and standards used in such calculations, supporting theproposed design represented by the submittal. Prepare calculations in a clearand comprehensive manner so that they can be properly reviewed.
.5 Professional engineer responsible for the preparation of engineered submittalsshall undertake periodic field review at locations wherever the work as describedby the engineered submittal is in progress, during fabrication and installation ofsuch work, and shall submit a field review report after each visit. Field reviewreports shall be submitted to the Consultant, to authorities having jurisdiction asrequired, and in accordance with the building code.
.6 Field reviews shall be at intervals as necessary and appropriate to the progressof the work described by the submittal to allow the engineer to be familiar withthe progress and quality of such work and to determine if the work is proceedingin general conformity with the Contract Documents, including reviewed shopdrawings and design calculations.
.7 Upon completion of the parts of the Work covered by the engineered submittal,the professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineeredsubmittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above, shallprepare and submit to the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction, asrequired, a letter of general conformity for those parts of the Work, certifying thatthey have been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of theContract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place ofthe Work.
.8 Costs for such field reviews and field review reports and letters of generalconformity are included in the Contract Price.
.13 Keep copies of reviewed submittals at the Place of the Work in a neat, orderly condition.Only submittals that have been reviewed by the Consultant and are marked withConsultant’s review stamp, as applicable, are permitted at the Place of the Work.
.14 The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the requirements of thissection. Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed submittalsat no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.2 Schedule of Submittals
.1 Before commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a detailed schedule ofsubmittals required by the Contract Documents.
.1 Schedule shall be accompanied by a checklist, correlated to each of theschedule of submittals, the construction schedule (specified under Section01 32 16), the Product delivery schedule (specified under Section 01 32 16), andthe schedule of inspections and tests (specified under Sections 01 32 16 and01 45 00), listing the following:
.2 Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, float time, and last date formeeting construction schedule.
.3 Consultant will review submittal schedule and advise Contractor if volume and timing ofsubmittals will permit timely review and response. Consultant may require modificationsto submittals schedule in order to allow adequate time for review of submittals. Adjustsubmittals schedule and construction schedule as required to comply with Consultant’sneeds.
.4 Make provisions in schedule for at least 10 Working Days for Consultant’s review ofsubmittals. When submittals have to be reviewed by one or more of Consultant’ssubconsultants, add 5 more Working Days for a total15 Working Day review period.
.5 If the Consultant requires resubmission of submittals, allow for an additional 10 WorkingDays review for each resubmission.
.6 If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of submittals such that theConsultant cannot process these submittals within 10 Working Days, the Consultant, inconsultation with the Contractor within 3 Working Days of receipt of such submittal, willprovide the Contractor with an estimate of the time necessary for processing same. TheContractor shall accommodate such necessary time at no increase in the Contract Timeand at no additional cost to the Owner.
.7 The Contractor shall periodically resubmit the submittal schedule to correspond tochanges in the construction schedule. Such resubmissions shall maintain the minimum10 Working Day period for the Consultant’s review.
.8 Schedule submissions of submittals well in advance of scheduled dates for installation,to provide lead time for reviews and possible resubmissions and for placing orders andsecuring delivery so as to avoid delays in the Work.
1.3 Submission Procedures
.1 Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.Individual submittals shall include related information.
.2 Distribute copies of submittals to parties whose work is affected by submittals exceptConsultant and Owner before final submission for review by Consultant.
.3 Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
.4 Each submittal shall be identified numerically by relevant specification section numberwith a numeric indicator for multiple submittals by that section followed by revisionsnumber, for example 04 05 19-01-R0.
.5 Make any changes in submittal that Consultant may require, consistent with ContractDocuments Contract Documents, and resubmit as directed by Consultant.
.6 Notify Consultant, in writing, when resubmitting, of any revisions other than thoserequested by Consultant.
.7 After Consultant’s review, distribute copies to affected parties.
1.4 Product Data Sheets
.1 Submit Product data sheets as 1 electronic PDF, maximum 275 mm x 432 mm (11" x17") in size
.2 Submit Product data sheets as called-for by the Contract Documents or as theConsultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to astandardized manufacture of a Product. Manufacturers' catalogue cuts will be acceptablein such cases, providing that they are 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2" x 11") originals, andthat they indicate choices including sizes, colours, model numbers, options and otherpertinent data, including installation instructions. Submissions showing only generalinformation are not acceptable.
.3 Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed onProduct data sheets, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.
.4 Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of Product data sheets will bereturned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution.
.5 Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed Product data sheets for issuance to Ownerimmediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, boundmanner and in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
1.5 Shop Drawings
.1 Submit shop drawings as 1 electronic PDF or on 3 prints. PDF’s shall be acceptable forshop drawings, providing they are up to 275 mm x 432 mm (11" x 17") in size; otherwisehard copy prints shall be submitted.
.2 Lettering on shop drawings shall be not less than 3mm (1/8") high.
.3 Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed onshop drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.
.4 Consultant markings and resulting action required:
.1 Shop drawings requiring no changes will be marked 'REVIEWED', and shall besubmitted for as-built drawings purposes.
.2 Shop drawings requiring several changes will be marked 'REVIEWED asNOTED' and shall be revised and submitted for as-built drawings purposes.
.3 Shop drawings requiring substantial changes will be marked 'REVISE AND RE-SUBMIT' and shall be revised and resubmitted until Consultant stamps drawingswith 'REVIEWED' or 'REVIEWED as NOTED'.
.5 Shop drawing size shall be multiple of 213 mm and 275 mm (8-1/2" and 11") excluding38 mm (1-1/2") binding margin and not larger than 838 mm x 1117 mm (33" x 44").Leave minimum 150 mm x100 mm (6" x 4") clear space for Consultant’s comments.
.6 Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of shop drawings will bereturned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution.
.7 Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed shop drawings for issuance to Ownerimmediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, boundmanner and in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.8 Submit copies of reviewed shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction as required.
.9 Shop drawings shall include:
.1 Fabrication and erection dimensions.
.2 Plans, sections, elevations, arrangements and sufficient full size details whichindicate complete construction, components, methods of assembly as well asinterconnections with other parts of the Work.
.3 Design calculations prepared by professional engineer, as required,substantiating sizes for members and connections based on design loads.
.4 Clear definition of the division of responsibility for the work described thereon.No Products, items or equipment, or description of work, shall be indicated to besupplied, or work to be done, “By Others” or “By Purchaser”. Shop drawingsmarked with either of these phrases will be rejected without having beenreviewed by the Consultant.
.5 Location and type of exposed anchors, attachments and locations and types offasteners, including concealed reinforcements to accept mounted fasteners.
.6 Adhesives, joinery methods and bonding agents.
.7 Kinds and grades of materials, their characteristics relative to their purpose,detailed description of finishes and other fabrication information.
.8 Configurations, types and sizes required; identify each unit type on drawing andon Product.
.9 Descriptive names of equipment and mechanical and electrical characteristicswhen applicable.
.10 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance andsafety or work shown on shop drawings, as well as other interconnected work.
.11 Assumed design loadings, dimensions of elements and material specifications forload-bearing members.
.12 Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts and holes in structural members.
.13 Wall thicknesses of metals.
.14 Location and types of welds. For structural welds use AWS symbols and clearlyshow net weld lengths and sizes.
.15 Materials, gauges, and sizes being supplied including connections, attachments,reinforcement, anchorage and locations of exposed fastenings.
.16 Installation instructions and details for Products to be installed by separateSubcontractors, including function of each part.
.17 A list of Products covered by, or included on, the shop drawing. List of Productsshall be complete and show manufacturer's name, Product name, genericdescription, standard certification where specified, manufacturer's completeinstallation data and precautions against wrong installation, operation andmaintenance.
.18 Refer to individual sections of the specifications for more particular requirementsfor shop drawings.
.10 Compatibility statement: Include with each shop drawing a statement that each Productand material indicated on the shop drawing is compatible with each Product and materialwith which it comes into contact.
1.6 Certificates and Certification Submittals
.1 Certificates and certifications submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature ofentity responsible for preparing certification.
1.7 Samples
.1 Submit a minimum of 3 samples unless a greater amount is specified.
.2 Deliver samples to the following location with expenses, including carrying costs,prepaid, unless otherwise instructed:
.1 Consultant’s office.
.3 Identify samples or assemblies by Project number and name, name of Consultant,Contractor and Subcontractor, and date of submission. Identify location, specifiedmaterial reference and any other pertinent information. Show construction by layeredmethod if necessary, clearly displaying textures and patterns.
.4 Resubmit samples until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.
.5 Upon completion of review by Consultant, 2 samples will be returned to Contractor fordistribution; 1 reviewed sample to remain at the Place of the Work.
.1 The words “worker” or “workers” shall mean the Contractor, Contractor’s staff oremployees, Subcontractors, Subcontractor’s staff or employees, Suppliers,Supplier’s staff or employees, or anyone engaged for the Work, directly orindirectly, by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated.
.2 The words “make good” or “making good” shall mean that, when a finish ormaterial has been altered, the material or finish shall be repaired or replaced,and refinished to match existing quality and appearance to acceptance ofConsultant, and that repaired or replaced and refinished Work shall not bediscernible from existing materials or finishes when judged by the Consultantfrom a viewing distance of 1830 mm (6'), and that such work is included in theContract Price.
.2 Operational limitations:
.1 The existing building will remain in full use and occupancy throughout the Work,except for such parts of the building that have been vacated for the Work.
.2 Contractor’s use of the Place of the Work is limited to permit regular use ofexisting Owner’s facilities to continue with the least amount of interference anddisruptions possible.
.3 In consultation with, and to acceptance of, the Consultant in the presence of theOwner, designate an entrance and a circulation route that workers shall use andthat shall not be used by Owner’s staff, building occupants, or the public.
.1 Deliveries shall be made in front of the OA and taken up the West stairwell tothe second floor. The elevator may not be used except where writtenpermission has been give by Owner.
.2 Workers are required to sign in and out of the Place of the Work.
.3 Dust tight enclosure and partition doors and entrance doors to the Place of the Workshall remain closed.
.4 Areas of the existing building adjacent to the Place of the Work or areas affected by theWork, including circulation and access routes, shall be maintained in a clean stateequivalent to the level of cleanliness maintained in the existing building, and as follows:
.1 Clean and vacuum the Place of the Work and areas surrounding the Place of theWork daily or more frequently as required.
.2 Wet mop floor areas in vicinity of access doors to the Place of the Work daily, ormore frequently as required.
.3 Vacuum carpeted areas daily or more frequently as required.
.4 Wet clean carpets in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations oncework in such areas is complete.
.5 Final cleaning shall be in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.1 Waste management and disposal shall be in accordance with Section 01 50 00as supplemented herein.
.2 Transport waste in containers with tightly fitting lids or cover waste with a wetsheet.
.3 Remove waste as it is created. Debris shall be contained and covered if it cannot be removed immediately.
.4 Do not transport waste through occupied areas of existing building.
.5 Remove waste at the end of each Working Day through construction accessroutes.
.6 Document condition of the existing building in areas immediately adjacent to the Place ofthe Work by means of construction photographs in accordance with Section 01 32 33.
1.2 Security
.1 Provide security for the Place of the Work by methods compatible with the securitysystem for the existing building.
.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Place of the Work andthe Work, and for securing areas used for the storage of Products or constructionmachinery and equipment. The Owner shall have no responsibility in this regard.
.2 Provide and maintain security lighting.
.3 Provide and maintain temporary locks. Premises to be locked after workinghours.
.2 Contractor shall coordinate the Work carefully with the Consultant in the presence of theOwner in order to ensure no disruption to the existing building’s security system.
.3 Where existing building’s security system is breached due to Contractor’s negligence, beresponsible for any damage or theft of property, regardless if area where damage ortheft occurred is under Contractor’s control or not.
1.3 Use of Existing Facilities
.1 Restrict access, parking, material deliveries, execution of work, operations andprocedures to designated locations and times and do not deviate from designatedprocedures without prior acceptance by the Consultant in the presence of the Owner.
.2 Periodically review proposed construction operations with the Consultant in the presenceof the Owner and cooperate as required to ensure that Owner’s interests andrequirements are not unduly compromised with regard to the normal operation andfunction of occupied areas on the existing building.
.3 Traffic through occupied areas of the existing building shall be kept to a minimum.Travel within occupied areas of the existing building shall be via the most direct route.
.4 Noise, dust and debris, and odours shall be minimized to ensure building occupants inadjacent areas are disturbed as little as possible. Corrective action to cease or limitdisagreeable annoyances to building occupants shall be implemented immediately uponnotification by the Consultant or the Owner.
.5 Use of existing laundry and garbage chutes shall not be permitted.
.6 Use of existing containers and garbage bins shall not be permitted.
.7 Use of existing elevators shall be permitted as made available by the Owner. Contractoris responsible for arranging and paying for repairs and damage, making good finishes asdirected by Consultant as a result of use.
.8 Existing fire protection equipment:
.1 Existing fire protection equipment shall only be used in an emergency situation.
.2 Do not remove existing fire protection equipment.
.3 If any existing fire protection equipment is used or interfered with in any way, theOwner’s fire equipment inspector shall be retained to inspect, test, recharge, andotherwise repair such equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 Parking
.1 A parking area has been designated for the use of workers engaged for the Project.
.1 The parking area has been designated for the exclusive use of workers.
.2 The Contractor is to Provide a lock on the parking lot gate along with a lockwhich will be Provided by the Owner and shall control access by issuing keys toworkers.
.3 The gate shall not be left unlocked or ajar.
.4 There is no reserved parking. Parking is on a first-come-first-served basis.
.2 Throughout the Work, ensure that there is no interference with the operation of theexisting premises, and that the existing parking areas and road system remain free andclear of obstructions including snow removal from parking lot and access routes toparking lot.
.3 Illegally parked vehicles will be ticketed and/or towed at vehicle owner’s expense, and atno additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 Existing Services
.1 Service interruptions:
.1 Connection or disconnection of services that will interfere with the operation ofthe Owner’s facilities shall not be done without the prior written acceptance of theConsultant in the presence of the Owner. Provide 24-hour advance notice ofrequirements for interruptions to building services for making connectionsthereto.
.2 Premium charges associated with such work shall be included in the ContractPrice.
.3 Provide at least 10 Working Days prior written notice to the Consultant and theOwner of requirement or intention to interrupt services, and obtain writtenpermission of the Consultant in the presence of the Owner prior to commencingsuch interruption.
.4 Provide Owner with minimum 1 Working Day advance notice of requirement fordisconnecting power supply circuits. Circuits shall be locked out of service andtagged by both the Owner’s electrician and the Contractor’s electrician, with theOwner’s lock being attached first and removed last.
.5 In no instance shall interruptions affect the entire existing building.
.6 Arrange to review locations and condition of service shutoff equipment withOwner’s maintenance staff to ensure that it is functional and will effectivelyisolate the point at which connections must be made. Perform work inaccordance with Owner’s Lock and Tag Procedure.
.7 Prior to performing work in machine rooms or other spaces containing elevatorequipment, consult with the firm contracted by Owner to provide elevatormaintenance service.
.8 Areas adversely affected by changes in air flows outside the construction areasas a result of a required shut-down of portions of the existing HVAC systemwithin the construction areas are to be re-balanced to comfortable levels asadvised by the Consultant.
.2 Should existing services be interrupted in breach of the above, Make Good immediatelyand provide protection against further such disruptions. Costs resulting from suchinterruptions and for making good shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at noadditional cost to the Owner.
1.6 Protection of the Existing Building
.1 Protection requirements shall be in accordance with Section 01 50 00, as supplementedherein.
.2 Keep Place of the Work safe and secure, denying access to unauthorized personnel.
.3 Protect existing work from damage. Make Good any damage caused. The onus is onthe Contractor to substantiate that damage existed prior to commencement of the Work.
.4 Do not overload the existing structure due to the Work.
.5 Take special measures to protect existing work from damage when moving heavy loadsor equipment. Protect areas used as passageways or through which materials aremoved. Use resilient tired conveyances only when moving materials and equipmentinside building. Provide coverings as required to protect existing work from damage.
.6 Separate exterior access, work and storage areas from Owner occupied existing areas,with fencing and hoarding as specified in Section 01 56 23. Rearrange fencing/hoardingas Work progresses to suit extent and configuration of the Work.
.7 Provide guards, barricades and other temporary protection to prevent injury to persons.
.8 Protect existing building components and contents from damage by weather, whenexecuting Work affecting integrity of the building envelope. Provide temporary insulatedand air tight weatherproof closures to protect openings made in existing buildingenvelope. Make Good existing building components and contents damaged by weatherresulting from inadequate temporary protection measures.
.9 Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing areas openings exposed toconstruction areas for the Work to maintain fire and life safety of existing building.
.1 Existing exterior walls with windows of plain glazing, when exposed to the Work,shall be protected with gypsum board for interior surfaces and plywood forexterior surfaces, mounted on suitable framing.
.1 Plywood: Exterior grade plywood, 9.5 mm (3/8”) thickness.
.2 Metal framing: in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.3 Gypsum board: 16 mm (5/8”) thick gypsum board in accordance with Section09 29 00.
.2 Maintain such protection throughout the Work.
.3 Other openings in the existing exterior walls, such as doors and louvres, shall besimilarly protected or replaced with doors of solid core wood or hollow steelconstruction.
1.7 Emergency and Fire Protection
.1 Provide and maintain ready access to fire protection equipment, in accordance withSection 01 50 00.
.2 Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing building openings exposed toconstruction areas.
.3 Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Owner in order to ensure nodisruption to the existing fire detection and annunciation systems. Failure to providesuch coordination shall result in the Contractor incurring the responsibilities andexpenses associated with disruption to the existing fire detection and annunciationsystems at no additional cost to the Owner.
.1 Provide fire watch when existing fire detection and annunciation systems are notoperational or on bypass.
.2 Whenever a changeover time occurs, which is an outage time of at least aportion of the fire alarm system, the municipal fire department shall be notified ofthe temporary shutdown and alternative measures shall be devised.
.4 Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Consultant in the presence of theOwner in order to prevent unapproved disruptions to the existing sprinkler system,standpipe system, or other fire protection systems.
.1 Where temporary shut-down is necessitated, such shut down shall be inaccordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and thebuilding code.
.5 Obtain ‘Hot Work Permit’ from Owner prior to hot work operation, which may cause thebuilding's fire alarm system to be activated or create an unwarranted fire risk condition.The prevention of fires and false fire alarms caused by hot work operations is theprimary goal of this procedure. Gas hoses, backflow preventers, fire resistive tarpaulins,curtains and other cutting and welding equipment must be in good repair before thepermit is issued.
.1 ‘Hot Work’ is defined as work using open flames or sources of heat that couldignite materials in the work area.
.1 Maintain the integrity of fire separations, fire protection systems , and fire ratedassemblies.
.2 Make Good fire separations, fire protection, and fire rated assembliescompromised as a result of the Work.
.7 Temporary fire separations:
.1 Provide temporary fire separations between existing occupied floor areas andnew areas under construction.
.2 Construct temporary fire separations out of steel studs and gypsum board toprovide a construction equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating,unless otherwise indicated.
.1 Firestopping and smoke sealant: in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
.2 Gypsum board: in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
.3 Steel studs: in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.3 Where access is required, the doorway shall be protected by a door of solid corewood or hollow steel construction.
.4 Finish hardware equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating, unlessotherwise indicated.
.8 Maintaining existing building exit facilities:
.1 Maintain exit facilities serving the existing building.
.2 Where an exit is blocked-off or deleted as a result of the Work, an alternative exitshall be Provided that is acceptable to the Consultant, the Owner, and authoritieshaving jurisdiction.
.3 Where it is necessary for access to be gained to an exit through the Place of theWork, the access shall be clearly defined and protected so that it is separatedfrom construction areas by a smoke tight fire separation equivalent to a minimumof 1 hour fire resistance rating, unless otherwise indicated.
.9 Fire department access:
.1 Do not obstruct access route designated for fire department equipment.
.2 If it is necessary that existing access routes be obstructed or deleted, alternativeaccess routes acceptable to the fire department and in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents and authorities having jurisdiction shallbe Provided prior to commencement of work that will obstruct or delete existingaccess.
.10 Combustible materials:
.1 Stockpiling of combustible materials adjacent to or inside the existing buildingshall not be acceptable.
.11 Temporary protection of openings in fire separations:
.1 Openings in existing floor assemblies and vertical fire rated assemblies requiredby the Work, shall be temporarily protected with materials as required to maintaincontinuity of the required fire resistance rating for existing fire rated assembly.
.1 General administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and qualitycontrol as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 Related Requirements
.1 Pre-installation meetings: in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2 Materials and workmanship quality assurance and reference standards: in accordancewith Section 01 60 00.
.3 Balancing and testing of systems - under Divisions 21, 22, and 23, andDivisions 26, 27, and 28.
1.3 Inspection and Testing
.1 Inspection and testing services will be used to verify compliance with requirements of theContract Documents. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility forcompliance with the Contract Documents.
.1 Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit the Contractor’sother quality assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with theContract Documents requirements.
.2 Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required byConsultant, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisionsof this section.
.2 The Owner will appoint inspection and testing agencies, representing, reporting andresponsible to the Owner. Payment will be by Owner, unless otherwise specified.
.3 Additional testing services required because of changes in materials, proportions ofmixes requested by Contractor or Subcontractors as well as additional testing servicesfor materials occasioned by lack of identification or by failure of such materials beingreplaced to meet requirements of the Contract Documents or testing of structure orelements including load testing, shall be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner.
.4 Inspection and testing required by codes or ordinances, or by an authority havingjurisdiction, and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of theContractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor and not be paid by Owner, unlessotherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
.5 Inspection or testing performed exclusively for Contractor’s convenience shall be soleresponsibility of Contractor, and will not be paid by Owner.
.6 Inspection and testing shall be performed by qualified and/or certified personnel underprofessional supervision or performed directly by a professional engineer qualified inconformance with applicable codes and certification programs.
.7 Requirements of regulatory agencies:
.1 Testing shall be conducted in accordance with requirements of the building code.
.2 Obtain certification where required by the building code and standards.
.8 Cooperation with inspection and testing agencies:
.1 Provide inspection and testing agencies with materials and installationinformation as required and /or requested.
.2 Provide access to the Work for representatives of inspection and testingagencies.
.3 Cooperate with inspection and testing agencies and give adequate notification ofany changes in source of supply, additional work shifts and other proposedchanges.
.4 Permit access to the Work for inspection and testing agencies wherever theWork is in progress, or wherever Products, materials, or equipment are storedprior to shipping.
.5 Supply labour required to assist inspection and testing agencies in sampling andmaking tests.
.6 Repair work damaged as a result of inspection and testing work.
.7 Inspection and testing agency services do not relieve the Contractor ofresponsibility for normal shop and site inspection, and quality control ofmanufacturing and installation.
.9 Where evidence exists that defective workmanship may have occurred, or that the Workmay have been carried out incorporating defective materials, or tests demonstrate thatinstalled conditions do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, theConsultant reserves the right to have appropriate inspections, tests, and surveysperformed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to helpdetermine the extent of defect and whether such work must be replaced. Inspections,tests, and surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at theContractor’s expense, and will not be paid by Owner, unless the results indicate that thework so tested, inspected or surveyed is not defective or that, in Consultant’s opinion,the work so tested, inspected, or surveyed may be accepted, in which case tests,inspections or surveys will be paid by Owner.
.10 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing agency services in accordance with Section01 33 00 and as follows:
.1 Establishing schedule:
.1 By advance discussion with the selected inspection or testing agency,determine the appropriate time necessary to perform the required servicesand to issue related reports.
.2 Allow for required time within construction schedule.
.2 Adherence to schedule:
.1 Contractor shall advise inspection and testing agencies in advance wheninspection and testing of the Work is required.
.1 Amount of advance notice shall be as required by the inspection andtesting company, but shall be no less than 2 Working Days.
.2 When inspection and testing agency is ready to perform inspection andtesting according to predetermined schedule, but is prevented frominspection and testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of theparts of the Work scheduled for inspection and testing, extra costs forinspection and testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged toContractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
.3 Notify inspection and testing agency at least 3 Working Days before workrequired to be inspected commences, and arrange for a meeting at the Place ofthe Work, to be held 1 Working Day before the work starts with the followingpresent:
.1 The Contractor, and the Subcontractor responsible for the work to inspectedand/or tested, the inspection and testing agency representatives, the productmanufacturer's representative when required, and the Consultant.
.4 Give 2 Working Days prior notice to inspection and testing agency of thecommencement of each phase of the Work requiring inspection, and provideinspection and testing agency with materials and installation information.
.11 Reports and documents
.1 Inspection and testing agencies shall submit shop inspection and site inspectionreports in electronic PDF format within 5 Working Days of each inspection.
.2 Distribute reports as follows:
.1 Owner; 2 copies.
.2 Consultant; 1 copy.
.3 Contractor; 2 copies.
.4 Consulting engineers, as applicable; 1 copy each.
.3 Inspection and testing agencies shall submit a written report for each inspectionor test, including pertinent data such as conditions at the Place of the Work,dates, test references, locations of tested materials, actual Product identification,testing methodology, procedures, and descriptions, site instructions given,recommendations and/or any other information required by standard applicableto reporting of tests and inspections.
.1 Report shall clearly indicate failure of Product or procedures to meetapplicable standards, give recommendations for retesting or correction.Inspector shall contact Contractor and Consultant immediately when Productor Product assembly fails to meet requirements of the Contract Documents.
.4 Upon completion of portions of the Work subject to independent inspection andtesting, submit to the Consultant duplicate certificates of acceptance of theinstallation issued by the independent inspection and testing company.
.12 Inspection and test specimens
.1 Inspection and testing will, generally, consist of procedures listed in the followingparagraphs, but additional tests may be performed as required to verifyconformance to Contract Documents.
.2 Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise specified in the ContractDocuments, will be taken by the inspection and testing agency; samplingequipment and personnel will be provided by the inspection and testing agency;and deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing agency will be performedby the testing agency unless otherwise specified.
.3 Inspection and testing agency shall take samples necessary to verify quality asspecified. Taking of samples shall not endanger the structure or life safety, andshall be taken so as to best represent the Work as a whole.
.4 Samples shall be handled, packaged, stored and delivered in accordance withspecified tests. Sample handling where required shall duplicate conditions at thePlace of the Work (such as site-cured concrete cylinders).
1.4 Manufacturer’s Field Review
.1 Where manufacturer’s field review is specified, manufacturer’s representative shallreview the relevant parts of the work at the Place of the Work, or wherever such affectedwork is in progress, to ensure that work is being executed in accordance withmanufacturer's written recommendations and verify its product to be fit-for-purposeintended.
.2 Manufacturer’s field review is to ensure that the Products specified are being used in theWork and are being applied on surfaces prepared in accordance with theirrecommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.3 Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer’s representative shall undertake a minimum of1 field review, with additional reviews as deemed necessary by the manufacturer, todetermine that the work of such sections is in accordance with the manufacturer’s writtenrecommendations.
.4 Manufacturer’s representative shall submit a type-written report on manufacturer’sletterhead within 2 Working Days after each field review. Report shall documentmanufacturer’s representative’s field observations and recommendations.
.5 Manufacturer’s field review reports shall be prepared and distributed following theprocedures specified for preparation and submittal of inspection and testing reportsgiven above.
.1 Temporary facilities and controls specified in this section shall be supplemented asapplicable in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
.2 Arrange, obtain and pay cost for permits required for temporary facilities and controls.
.3 Provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls for the Work and remove themfrom the Work upon issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work.
.4 Arrange and pay for required temporary services, unless otherwise indicated byConsultant.
.5 Protect and maintain without interruption, existing water, heating, drainage, telephoneand other services within the Place of the Work to existing buildings not within the scopeof the Work of this Contract. Obtain written permission of the Owner for servicesrequired to be temporarily shut off, at least 2 full Working Days in advance.
.6 Do not use permanent conveying, mechanical, or electrical systems, except standpipefor firefighting, during the course of the Work unless specific written permission isprovided by the Consultant. Use of permanent facilities or services for temporaryconstruction service shall not prejudice warranties.
.7 Provide connection and disconnection of temporary services and facilities required in theWork, including connection to existing services made available by the Owner.
1.2 Existing Services and Facilities
.1 Do not use any existing services and facilities during construction unless specific writtenpermission is provided by Owner.
1.3 Temporary Electrical Services
.1 Provide and maintain an adequate temporary electrical service for performance of theWork including, but not limited to, operation of electric pumps, motors, vibrators andother power tools, hoisting and related construction and general illumination during theWork.
.1 Use existing electrical service into building. Owner will pay electrical bills.
.2 Provide and maintain any components and equipment necessary to transform supplypower to necessary temporary power voltage.
1.4 Temporary Water Supply
.1 Provide and maintain a temporary supply of water for use in the Work.
.1 Use existing water supply. Owner will pay water bills.
.2 Extend supply pipe or pipes from nearest available sources and maintain in goodcondition until permanent system is installed and ready for use.
1.5 Temporary Sanitary Facilities
.1 Provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use by workers.
.2 Use of new building's sanitary facilities by workers is prohibited.
.3 The Owner will designate existing washrooms for use of workers. Regularly maintainand clean these washroom facilities, in compliance with applicable regulations, codesand by-laws, for the duration of the Work. At Substantial Performance of the Work, turnover to Owner, clean washroom facilities, in same condition facilities were prior tocommencement of the Work. Arrange and pay for repairs, making good and replacementif necessary, as directed by Consultant. Provision of such access to existing washroomsdoes not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to Provide and maintain, incompliance with applicable regulations, codes and by-laws, sufficient sanitary temporarywater closets and washbasins for use of workers as required by applicable regulations,codes and by-laws. Additional sanitary temporary water closets and washbasins for useof workers, as required, shall be provided at no increase in the Contract Price.
1.6 Temporary Site Offices
.1 Owner shall make available to Contractor a designated space within existing building foruse as temporary site office of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings for 12people. Contractor shall furnish with meeting table and chairs at minimum including anyother equipment required by Contractor.
1.7 Temporary Telephone, Fax Machine, and Computer
.1 Provide and maintain a telephone and fax machine (no combined units) in temporary siteoffice for exclusive use of Consultant, Contractor, and Subcontractors. Pay phone is notacceptable.
.2 Superintendent shall be equipped with mobile telephone device.
.3 Fax machine shall be capable of recording date and time on faxes. Fax machines shallhave dedicated telephone line.
.4 Long distance charges shall be paid by party making call.
1.8 Temporary Heating and Ventilation
.1 Provide and pay for temporary heating, cooling and ventilating required for the Work,including attendance, maintenance and fuel.
.2 Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to:
.1 Facilitate continuous uninterrupted progress of the Work.
.2 Protect the Work and Products against damage and defacement caused byweather, harmful levels of temperature, humidity, and moisture.
.3 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper storage, installationand curing of materials, in accordance with specified standards andmanufacturer's requirements.
.4 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe workingenvironment.
.3 Prior to enclosing building, maintain work areas at not less than 7°C. After enclosing,keep premises heated to at least 13°C using temporary heating devices that do notcause moisture and humidity build-up within the facility. Increase temperatures inisolated areas to 20°C as required by various sections of the specifications or by Productmanufacturers.
.5 Provide temporary heat or adequate protection by means of straw or other coverings tofloor slabs, footings, or any part of building not specifically designed to withstand frostpenetration.
.6 Furnish other temporary heating as required by various sections of the specifications orby Product manufacturers.
.7 Ventilate to the exterior of the building work areas as required when toxic materials arebeing utilized or cured.
.8 Replace with new, any work damaged due to failure to provide adequate heat at no costto Owner.
1.9 Temporary Enclosures and Protection
.1 Provide temporary enclosures and protection of adequate construction to preventdispersion of dust and dirt into other areas of existing building and to prevent dispersionof dust and dirt beyond the Place of the Work.
.2 Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures and protection for exterior openings inbuilding as soon as walls, floors and roofs are built so as to protect the Work fromweather and vandalism. Provide doors in enclosures as necessary to maintain fire exits.
.3 Temporary enclosure and protection shall be of finished appearance and painted tocolour approved by Owner.
.4 Provide dust seal and sound resistant enclosures to protect existing building andoperations as indicated. Include temporary doors, fastenings and keys.
.5 Insulate and airseal exterior enclosures to prevent condensation and drafts.
.6 Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
1.10 Plant, Machinery and Scaffolding
.1 Provide formwork, scaffolding, equipment, tools, machinery and incidentalappurtenances necessary for the proper execution of the Work.
.2 Erect plant, machinery and scaffolding to permit access to building and the Work.
.3 Use scaffolds in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades'operations.
.4 Support scaffolds from finished surfaces only after taking precautions to preventdamage. No supports, clips, brackets, or similar devices shall be welded, bolted, orotherwise affixed to any finished member or surface without prior permission.
1.11 Site Storage
.1 Handle and store materials so as to prevent damage or defacement to the Work andsurrounding property.
.2 Construct weather-tight storage sheds for storage of materials that may be damaged ordefaced by weather. Provide floors raised 150 mm (6”) clear of ground for storage ofProducts.
.3 Owner is not responsible for securing Products or materials at the Place of the Work.
.1 Provide fencing, barricades, hoarding, notices and warning boards and maintain lightsand signals for protection of workers engaged on the Work, for protection of adjoiningproperty and for protection of the public.
.2 Such protective measures shall be finish painted to Owner’s approved colour, whenvisible to the public.
.3 Where any special hazard exists from which it is not possible to protect the public safetyby other means, watchpersons shall be employed to preserve public safety until the areaof special hazard no longer poses a risk to public safety.
1.13 Protection of the Work
.1 Protect the Work from damage and defacement, and maintain protection until the Workis complete.
.2 Protect completed work from soiling, abrasion, punctures, damage, and defacement,and maintain protection until the surrounding or overhead work is complete.
.3 Keep surfaces free of oils, grease or other materials that may damage or deface them oraffect bond of applied Products.
.4 Remove and replace materials damaged or defaced as a result of failure to provideadequate protection.
.5 Have damaged or defaced work corrected by workers meeting qualification requirementsof the Contract Documents.
1.14 Waste Management
.1 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Place of the Work.
.2 Do not dispose of waste into waterways or storm or sanitary sewers.
.3 Do not burn waste materials at the Place of the Work.
.4 Comply with waste disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
.5 Remove waste material from the Place of the Work daily. If waste is collected in bins,bins to be removed from site once full.
.6 Arrange and pay for removal of debris and waste from the Place of the Work.
.7 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction fordisposal of waste and debris. Pay fees.
.8 Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
1.15 Control of Dust, Debris and Noise
.1 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.
.2 Control dust and dirt produced during the Work to prevent dispersion beyond theimmediate work areas.
.3 Prevent materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providingtemporary enclosures and ventilation/filtration.
.4 Limit noise levels in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction andthe Owner.
.5 Prevent abrasive-blasting, pressure-washing spray, and other extraneous materials fromcontaminating air beyond application area.
.6 Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
1.16 Security
.1 Provide security for the Place of the Work in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
1.17 Design and Safety Requirements for Temporary Facilities
.1 Be responsible for design, erection, operation, maintenance and removal of temporarystructural and other temporary facilities. Engage and pay for registered professionalengineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform these functionswhere required by law or by the Contract Documents; and in cases where suchtemporary facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature thatprofessional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.
.2 Designs provided by Consultant or Owner for such work cover general appearance only.
.1 In the event of delays in supply of Products, and should it subsequently appear that theWork may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves the right to substitute morereadily available Products of similar character, at no additional cost to the Owner.
.2 Prior to submitting bid, Bidders shall review Product delivery requirements and anticipateforeseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products are likely orpossible, notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial actionmay be contemplated.
.3 In the event of failure to notify the Consultant prior to submitting bid of potential delays insupply of Products, and should it subsequently appear that the Work may be delayed forsuch reason, the Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily availableProducts of similar character, at the Contractor’s cost and at no additional cost to theOwner
1.2 Product Handling
.1 Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deteriorationand soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's and Supplier’s recommendations andso as to ensure preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work, and protect fromvandalism and theft.
.2 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition withmanufacturer's seals and labels intact, facing to outside. Do not remove from packagingor bundling until required in the Work.
.3 Store materials susceptible to environmental damage in a weathertight enclosure raisedclear of ground so that they are protected from weather, dampness and deterioration. Donot use such materials which have been damaged by exposure to moisture.
.4 Keep sand, when used as ingredients for grout, mortar or similar mixed materials, cleanand dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins duringinclement weather.
.5 Store sheet materials, lumber and other Products susceptible to deterioration on flat,solid supports and keep clear of ground or slab. Slope to shed moisture.
.6 Handle materials to preclude damaging existing surfaces and work of others.
.7 Remove damaged Products and replace with new undamaged Products.
.8 Transportation:
.1 Pay cost of transportation of Products required in performance of Work.
.2 Transportation cost of Products supplied by Owner will be paid for by Owner.Unload, handle and store such Products at the Place of the Work.
.3 Reject Products damaged during transport.
.4 Transportation of Products must be undertaken to suit construction schedule.Contractor is responsible for determining mode of transport to ensure delivery,obtaining shop drawings, placement of orders, and on-time premium costs, airfreight, and the like.
.1 Products used for temporary facilities may have been previously used, providing theyare sound in structural qualities.
.2 Specified options: The Work is based on materials, Products and systems specified bymanufacturer's catalogued trade names, references to standards, by prescriptivespecifications and by performance specifications.
.1 Where only one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product, theProduct is single sourced and shall be supplied by the specified manufacturer.
.2 Where more than one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product,supply one Product from list of Products specified.
.3 When a Product is specified by reference to a standard, select one Product frommanufacturer that meets or exceeds the requirements of the standard andmanufacturer’s written application directions.
.4 When a Product or system is specified by prescriptive or performancespecifications, Provide one Product or system which meets or exceeds therequirements of the prescriptive or performance specifications andmanufacturer’s written application directions.
.5 The onus is on the Contractor to prove compliance with governing publishedstandards, prescriptive specifications and with performance specifications.
.6 Visual selection specification:
.1 Where specifications include the phrase "as selected by Consultant frommanufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complieswith requirements. Consultant will select color, gloss, pattern, density, ortexture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard andpremium items.
.7 Visual matching specification:
.1 Where specifications require "match Consultant’s sample", provide a productthat complies with requirements and matches Consultant’s sample.Consultant’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
.3 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout theContract Documents) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective,and of the quality standards specified, for the purpose intended. If requested, furnishevidence as to type, source and quality of Products Provided.
.4 Where Contract Documents list acceptable Products or acceptable manufacturers,select as applicable, one Product meeting performance of specifications andmanufacturer’s written application directions.
.5 Where Contract Documents require design of a Product or system, and minimummaterial requirements are specified, the design of such Product or system shall employmaterials specified within applicable section. Where secondary materials or componentsare not specified, augment with materials meeting applicable code limitations, andincorporating compatibility criteria with adjacent work.
.6 Defective Products, whenever identified prior to completion of the Work, will be rejected,regardless of previous reviews. Review of the Work by the Consultant or inspection andtesting companies does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for executing theWork in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, but is aprecaution against oversight or error.
.7 Should dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly withConsultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.8 Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, maintain uniformity of Productand manufacturer for any like item, material, equipment or assembly for the duration ofthe Work.
.9 Products exposed in the finished work shall be uniform in colour, texture, range, andquality, and be from one production run or batch, unless otherwise indicated.
.10 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products are not acceptable inprominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located inmechanical, electrical, machinery or like rooms.
.11 Owner retains right to select from choices available within specified Products for colours,patterns, finishes or other options normally made available. Submit full range of Productoptions in accordance with 01 33 00 for such selection.
.12 Quality control:
.1 Implement a system of quality control to ensure compliance with ContractDocuments.
.2 Notify Consultant of defects in the Work or departures from intent of ContractDocuments that may occur during construction. Consultant will recommendappropriate corrective action in accordance with requirements of the Contract.
.13 Exposed to weather: Products and materials in environments not protected by thebuilding’s HVAC and/or climate control systems shall be considered exposed to weather.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Manufacturer's Instructions
.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, install or erect Products inaccordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosuressupplied with Products. Obtain printed instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Contract Documents andmanufacturer's instructions.
.3 Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with theserequirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and re-installation at noadditional cost to the Owner.
.4 Manufacturers’ representatives shall have access to the Work at all times. Contractorshall render assistance and facilities for such access in order that the manufacturers’representatives may properly perform their function.
.1 Insulate dissimilar metals from each other by suitable plastic strips, washers or sleevesto prevent galvanic corrosion where conductive liquid or electrolyte (rainwater orcondensation) exists.
3.3 Workmanship
.1 General:
.1 Execute the Work using workers experienced and skilled in the respective dutiesfor which they are employed.
.2 Do not employ an unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.
.3 Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute restsolely with Consultant, whose decision is final.
.4 Upon request by the Consultant, submit proof, in the form of CCDC 11 -Contractor's Qualification Statement, of qualifications of Subcontractors to verifySubcontractor’s qualifications and experience meet or exceed the requirementsof the Contract Documents.
.1 If, upon review of the Contractor’s Qualification Statement, it is found that theSubcontractor does not meet the qualification requirements specified in theContract Documents pertaining to the parts of the Work for which theSubcontractor has been retained, the Contractor shall replace the unqualifiedSubcontractor with a qualified Subcontractor, satisfactory to the Contractorand the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner and at no increase in theContract Time.
.5 Remove Products or materials that have been broken, chipped, cracked,discoloured, abraded, or damaged during construction period and Provideundamaged Products or materials meeting the requirements of the ContractDocuments.
.2 Coordination:
.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in layout of the Work. Maintain efficient andcontinuous supervision.
.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves andaccessories.
.3 Backer plates:
.1 Provide backer plates to support and provide anchorage base to carry loads fromsurface or recessed applied materials.
.4 Concealment:
.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings,except where indicated otherwise.
.2 Before installation, inform Consultant of any contradictory situation. Install asdirected by Consultant.
.1 Perform cutting and remedial work required to make parts of the Work cometogether. Coordinate the Work to ensure this requirement is maintained. Obtainpermission from Consultant before commencing any cutting. Refer also torequirements of Section 01 73 29.
.6 Location of fixtures:
.1 Consider location of fixtures, access panels, outlets and mechanical andelectrical items indicated as approximate only. Locate fixtures, and the likeapproximately; Architectural drawings will relate these items to knowndimensions, such as ceiling tile grid or wall locations and the like.
.2 Obtain Consultant’s acceptance for precise locations of fixtures, access panels,outlets, mechanical, and electrical items.
.3 Consultant reserves the right to relocate electrical outlets and mechanical fixturesat a later date, but prior to installation, without cost, provided that the relocationper outlet does not exceed 3050 mm (10') from the original location.
.4 Inform Consultant of conflicting installations. Install only as directed byConsultant.
.7 Fastenings:
.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish asadjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.
.2 Prevent electrolytic action and corrosion between dissimilar metals andmaterials.
.8 Protection of work in progress:
.1 Take reasonable and necessary measures, including those required byauthorities having jurisdiction, to Provide protection.
.2 Adequately protect parts of the Work completed or in progress. Parts of the Workdamaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removedand replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant, at no additional cost tothe Owner.
.3 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve anyload bearing structural member without written permission of Consultant, unlessspecifically indicated. Refer also to Section 01 73 29.
.4 Adequately protect finished flooring from damage. Take special measures whenmoving heavy loads or equipment on them.
.5 Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affectbond of applied surfaces.
.6 Protect work of other Subcontractors from damage while doing subsequent work.Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate Subcontractors but atexpense of those causing damage.
.7 Protect existing buildings, curbs, roads and lanes. If, during the Work, anybuildings, curbs, roads or lanes are damaged, bear costs for repairs.
.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute theWork at times approved by Owner, with a minimum of disturbance to Owner’songoing operations, the Work, and traffic.
.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services areencountered, cap off in a manner approved by authority having jurisdiction andstake or otherwise record location of capped service.
.10 Protection of mechanical and electrical Products or materials:
.1 Wrap in protective plastic and seal mechanical and electrical items of mechanicaland electrical equipment prior to and during for shipment, storage at the Place ofthe Work and after installation.
.2 Remove protective coverings only to the extent required for installation of theitems. Re-install protection immediately following installation.
.3 Remove protective coverings in stages, as work areas are completed, or whendirected by Consultant.
.11 Operational requirements:
.1 Operable Products shall be Provided fully operational and ready for intendeduse.
.2 Adjust operating hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact points andweather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricatehardware and moving parts for smooth squeak-free function, in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions.
.12 Alterations:
.1 Restore new or existing work which is altered by new work and make good.Materials and workmanship shall be match existing materials and workmanship.Exposed materials shall match and blend in with the appearance of the existingundamaged surfaces in all respects, including, colours, textures, layout, jointing,and material types so as to not vary in appearance when compared to adjacentmaterials from a distance of 150 mm (6").
.1 Comply with administrative requirements of Section 01 33 00.
.2 Submit written request in advance of cutting, coring, and alteration that affects:
.1 Structural integrity of any element of Work.
.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
.5 Owner or work of other contractors.
.3 Include in request:
.1 Identification of Project.
.2 Location and description of affected work.
.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.
.4 Description of proposed work, and Products to be used.
.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.
.6 Effect on Owner or work of other contractors.
.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.
.8 Date and time work will be performed.
.9 Non-destructive structural survey: Radiography (X-ray) imaging of work to becut or cored.
.4 Do not commence cutting, patching, or remedial work until request has beenreviewed by Consultant.
.2 Preparation:
.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movementduring cutting and patching.
.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of the Work.
.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices andmethods to protect other portions of the Work from damage.
.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncoveringwork.
.6 Where uncovering of area exposes local deterioration, cracking, evidence ofwater infiltration, structural settlement, previous modifications, or otherunexpected conditions, advise Consultant immediately in writing and leaveconditions exposed until receipt of Consultant’s written instructions. If area isexposed to the exterior, Provide temporary protection from inclement weather.
.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the Work. Under nocircumstances will overcutting of corners of opening be accepted. Ensure cornersof openings to be cut are predrilled or sawed.
.2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
.3 Remove samples of installed work for testing if directed by Consultant.
.4 Shop drawings identifying precise locations and size of openings to be cored andcut are to be submitted for review by Consultant. Provide non-destructivestructural survey of structural concrete to be cored or cut, for Consultant review.Coring and cutting work locations shall be reviewed by Consultant for acceptancebefore proceeding.
.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of the Work for penetrations ofmechanical and electrical work
.6 Perform work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will Provideproper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
.7 Employ qualified installer with at least 3 years of relevant experience to performcutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, andsight-exposed surfaces.
.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools notallowed to be used anywhere within existing buildings unless approved byConsultant.
.9 Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of ContractDocuments.
.10 Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations throughsurfaces and with suitable allowance for deflection, expansion, contraction, andfirestopping.
.11 Enclose pipes, ducts, conduit and wires passing through floors at areas wherefaucets occur (for example, washrooms, kitchens, mechanical rooms onsuspended floors, janitor rooms) in a 100 mm (4") high metal sleeve and makeair and watertight with water resistant firestopping.
.12 Completely seal voids of penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling, and floorconstructions with firestopping and smoke seals.
.13 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Refinish continuous surfaces tonearest intersection. Refinish entire assembly units.
.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
.2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of the Workdaily.
.3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
1.2 Materials
.1 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleanedand as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
1.3 Cleaning During Construction
.1 Clean-up the Place of the Work daily. Maintain clean and clear egress routes at alltimes.
.2 Maintain Place of the Work, grounds and public properties free from accumulations ofwaste materials and rubbish.
.3 Provide containers at the Place of the Work for collection of waste materials and rubbish.Remove waste materials and rubbish from the Place of the Work when containersbecome full.
.4 Vacuum and clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, andcontinue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until Substantial Performance of theWork.
.5 Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting fromcleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
.6 Promptly as the Work proceeds, on a daily basis and upon completion, clean up andremove rubbish, surplus materials and equipment.
.7 Remove as the work of this section progresses, corrosive and foreign materials whichmay set or become difficult to remove at time of final cleaning or which may damagemembers.
.8 Wash exposed surfaces with a cleaning solution approved by Product manufacturers.
.9 Debris and waste not permitted within cavities of Work.
1.4 Final Cleaning
.1 Perform final cleaning in accordance with requirements of Section 01 77 00.
.1 The procedures for completing Contract and acceptance by the Owner shall be inaccordance with the methods described in OAA/OGCA Document 100 (December 12,2007) and any additional requirements described below.
.2 Stages will be reviewed at the Contract start-up meeting to ensure that partiesunderstand their responsibilities. Refer to Section 01 31 19 for procedures andrequirements for Contract start-up meeting.
.3 Within 4 weeks of commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a list ofcloseout submittals required by the Contract Documents.
1.2 Final Cleaning
.1 Environmental controls:
.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances andanti-pollution laws.
.2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of theWork daily.
.3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
.2 Materials:
.1 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to becleaned and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
.3 Final cleaning:
.1 Immediately prior to Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performanceof the Work has been achieved, remove surplus Products and constructionmachinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remainingWork.
.2 Remove waste Products and debris other than that caused by the Owner, andleave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by Owner.
.3 When the Contract is completed, remove surplus Products, tools, constructionmachinery and equipment.
.10 Inspect finishes, fittings and equipment and ensure specified workmanship andoperation.
.11 At completion of the Work, remove protective coatings, clean surfaces andremove excess compounds and sealant materials. Make good defective,scratched or damaged work.
.12 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters ofmechanical equipment.
.13 Remove seal wrap on mechanical and electrical Products and materials andclean as required.
.14 Clean and/or replace lamps, light fixtures, lenses and grilles.
.15 Remove protective covering and labels from lamps, hardware, and specialityitems.
.16 Under the direction of the Consultant, aim adjustable luminaires.
1.3 Closeout Submittals
.1 Collect reviewed submittals, and assemble required closeout submittals executed bySubcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers. Prior to submitting closeout submittals tothe Consultant, undertake the following:
.2 Review supply and completeness of spare parts required by Contract Documentsand manufacturers.
.3 Review in relation to Contract Price, Change Orders, Change Directives,holdbacks and other adjustments to the Contract Price.
.4 Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to intent of ContractDocuments and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.
.5 Execute transition of performance bond and labour and materials payment bondto warranty period requirements.
.6 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price,previous payments, and monies remaining at time of application for completion ofthe Contract. Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approvedadjustments to Contract Price not previously made.
.2 No later than 10 Working Days prior to submitting request for Consultant’s review todetermine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, submit to theConsultant the closeout submittals specified in this section, including, but not limited to,reviewed shop drawings, Product data sheets, samples, operating instructions, as-builtrecords, fully executed warranties and guarantees, reports recording demonstration andinstruction provided to Owner for operation and maintenance of building systems,software required for operation and maintenance of building systems, maintenancematerials, and keys.
.3 For equipment put into use with Owner’s permission during the Work, submit requiredcloseout submittals within 10 Working Days after start-up.
.4 For items of the Work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Performance of theWork, provide updated closeout submittals within 10 Working Days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
.5 Neither the Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance of the Work hasbeen achieved, nor acceptance of the Work, will take place until receipt, by theConsultant, of acceptable copies of the closeout submittals required herein and by theContract Documents.
.6 As-built documents:
.1 Owner will provide 1 set of Contract Documents to the Contractor for as-builtdocumentation purposes.
.2 Accurately record as-built conditions and deviations from Contract Documents asthe Work progresses.
.3 Mark changes in red ink.
.4 Record, without being limited to, the following:
.1 Field changes of dimensions/details.
.2 Changes by Change Orders, Change Directives, and SupplementalInstructions.
.3 Locations of interior mechanical and electrical equipment and distribution.
.4 Specification as-builts: Record as-built Products, including manufacturer,manufacturer’s model or system number.
.5 As-built documentation:
.1 Submit 4 copies of as-built documents.
.2 Submit DVD or CD containing digital scanned copy (“PDF” files) of as-builtdocuments.
.7 Operation and maintenance manuals:
.1 Submit 3 copies of operation and maintenance manuals, consisting of thefollowing general components:
.1 Operation and maintenance book.
.2 Shop drawing book.
.3 Warranty book.
.4 Project data book.
.2 Operation and maintenance books shall contain operating and maintenance dataand information specified below for supplied Products, in English, and shall bemade up as follows:
.1 Charts, diagrams and reports identified in Division 15 and Division 16 of thespecifications.
.2 Description, operation and maintenance instructions for equipment and partslist. Indicate nameplate information such as make, size, capacity, serialnumber.
.3 Bind each general component of the operation and maintenance books inseparate vinyl hard covered, 3 ring loose leaf binders.
.4 Enclose title sheet, labelled as applicable, with project name, date and list ofcontents.
.5 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel projectspecifications break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected withcelluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.
.6 Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams of manufacturers'literature.
.3 Shop drawing book:
.1 Submit one copy of each final accepted shop drawing issued for the Work onwhich have been recorded changes made during fabrication and installationcaused by unforeseen conditions.
.2 Engineered shop drawings shall include copies of the certificate of insurance,the engineer’s field review reports, and the engineer’s letters of generalconformity that were provided as part of the engineered submittal inaccordance with Section 01 33 00 appended to the pertinent engineeredshop drawing in the shop drawing manual.
.4 Warranty book:
.1 Submit copies of bonds, guarantees, warranties and extended warrantiestogether in one report binder, complete with an indexed summary list ofwarranties and expiration dates. Warranties to be in accordance with Section01 78 36.
.5 Project data book: shall include the following information supplemented byadditional required data specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents:
.1 Maintenance instructions for finished surfaces and materials.
.2 Copy of hardware and paint schedules.
.3 Names, addresses and phone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers, asapplicable.
.4 Additional material used in the Work listed under various sections showingname of manufacturer and source of supply.
.5 Report recording demonstration and instruction provided to Owner foroperation and maintenance of building systems as described below in thissection.
.6 Key construction photos.
.7 Permits and forms:
.1 Workplace Safety & Insurance Board certificate of clearance.
.2 Certificates of approval of the Work by local building department (ifavailable).
.3 Electrical authority certificate of inspection.
.1 Prepare operating instructions in English for posting near equipment andsystems. Posted instructions to be glass covered, framed and mounted.
.2 Posted instructions to consist of simplified, consolidated equipment, control andpower diagrams graphically representing the entire system, including conciseinstructions on how to start and stop systems, what settings and conditions are tobe observed by the operators, and what control adjustments are to be made ormaintained by the operator.
.3 Posted instructions shall include control diagrams with added specific operatinginstructions, controls, interlocks, and the like.
.4 Posted instructions shall include:
.1 HVAC controls for each system;
.2 One line schematic diagrams of water supply;
.3 One line isometric diagrams of sanitary drainage;
.4 One line diagrams of steam distribution, hot and cold water systems,including risers, valves, control devices, etc.
.9 Maintenance materials:
.1 Provide overage, extra stock, and maintenance materials. For required materials,see individual sections of specifications. Deliver to a location and at a timespecified by the Owner, and as follows:
.1 Use unbroken cartons, or if not supplied in cartons, material shall be stronglypackaged.
.2 Clearly mark cartons or packaging as to contents, project name, andSupplier.
.3 If applicable give colour and finish, room number or area where material isused.
.2 Replace incorrect or damaged maintenance materials delivered to Owner,including damage through shipment.
.3 Provide a typed inventory list of maintenance materials prior to SubstantialPerformance of the Work application. List all items, complete with quantities, andstorage locations.
.4 Establish a master list identifying maintenance materials and maintain a log ofwhen materials are turned over to Owner and signing authority for acceptance ofmaterials on behalf of Owner.
1.4 System Demonstration and Project Commissioning
.1 Refer also to requirements of Divisions 15 and 16 with respect to commissioning forcontrol systems,, mechanical / electrical systems.
.2 Perform system demonstration and commissioning work no later than 10 Working Daysprior to submitting request for Consultant’s review to determine if SubstantialPerformance of the Work has been achieved.
.3 Submit required certificates of approval or acceptance from authorities havingjurisdiction.
.4 Meet with other consultants; acoustical, mechanical, electrical, to coordinatedemonstration, instruction, commissioning and completion.
.5 Review condition of equipment such as lighting, elevators and heating system, whichhas been used in the course of the Work to ensure turning over at completion in "as newcondition" with warranties dated and certified from time specified.
.6 When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by Owner, coordinateOwner’s uses, requirements, access, and the like, with Contractor's requirements tocomplete the Work.
.7 Demonstration and instruction:
.1 Demonstrate operation of each system to Owner and Consultant.
.2 Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance ofequipment and systems, using operation and maintenance data provided as thebasis for instructions. Arrange and coordinate instruction of Owner’s staff incare, maintenance and operation of building systems and finishes
.3 Contractor, manufacturer’s representatives, and responsible personnel fromSubcontractors whose work is being demonstrated shall be present at thesedemonstrations.
.4 Instruct Owner’s representative on use of software required for operation andmaintenance of building systems and provide a toll-free telephone number orwebsite address for further assistance to the Owner.
.5 Prepare and insert additional data in the operation and maintenance datamanuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent duringdemonstration or instruction.
.6 Demonstration and instruction report: Submit a written report of suchdemonstration, instruction, and commissioning to the Consultant as part of thecontract closeout submittals described earlier in this section. Report shall includetime and date of each demonstration, instruction, and commissioning activity,complete with a list of persons present.
.8 Correct deficiencies and defects identified during demonstration, instruction, orcommissioning.
.9 Attend 'end-of-work' testing and break-in or start-up demonstration.
1.5 Substantial Performance of the Work
.1 Deficiency review:
.1 Neither Owner nor Consultant will be responsible for preparation or issuance ofextensive lists of deficiencies. Contractor assumes prime responsibility forensuring that items shown and described in the Contract Documents arecomplete. Any reviews to approve the certificate of Substantial Performance ofthe Work will be immediately cancelled if it becomes obvious to the Consultantthat extensive deficiencies are outstanding.
.2 The Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the Work to identify deficienciesand defects, which shall be repaired. When the Contractor considers that theWork is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to theConsultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and applyfor a review of the Work by the Consultant to determine if SubstantialPerformance of the Work has been achieved.
.3 The Contractor’s request described above shall include a statement byContractor that the Work to be reviewed by Consultant for deficiencies is, to thebest of the Contractor’s knowledge, in compliance with Contract Documents,reviewed shop drawings, and samples, and that deficiencies and defectspreviously noted by Consultant have been repaired.
.4 No later than 10 Working Days after the receipt of the Contractor’s requestdescribed above, but contingent upon the prior receipt, by the Consultant, of thecloseout submittals in the manner and form specified in this section, theConsultant and the Contractor will review the Work to identify any defects ordeficiencies. If necessary, the Contractor shall tabulate a list of deficiencies to becorrected prior to Substantial Performance of the Work being certified by theConsultant. During review, the Consultant and the Contractor will decide whichdeficiencies or defects must be rectified before Substantial Performance of theWork can be certified, and which defects are to be treated as warranty items.
.5 Provide a schedule of planned deficiency review having regard to the foregoing.
.2 Certification of Substantial Performance of the Work:
.1 When the Consultant considers that the deficiencies and defects have beencompleted and that it appears that the requirements of the Contract Documentshave been substantially performed, the Consultant shall issue a certificate ofSubstantial Performance of the Work to the Contractor, stating the date ofSubstantial Performance of the Work.
.2 The certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work shall be prepared in formrequired by Construction Lien Act.
.3 Final Inspection for completion of the Contract:
.1 Deficiencies and defects shall be made good before the Contractor submits awritten request for final review of the Work and before the Contract is consideredcomplete.
.2 When Contractor is satisfied that the Work is complete, and after the Contractorhas reviewed the Work to verify its completion in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit a writtenrequest for a final review by the Consultant, who in turn will notify the Owner.
.3 If there are any deficiencies identified as a result of this review, they shall belisted by the Consultant and submitted to the Contractor. This list shall berecognized as the final deficiency list for purposes of acceptance of the Workunder the Contract.
.4 Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon betweenConsultant and the Contractor, unless a specific date is required by Contract,and a further review by the Consultant shall be called for by the Contractorfollowing his own review to take place within 7 days from date of request.
.5 Contractor shall thereafter submit invoice for final payment.
.6 Money shall be withheld for deficiency work and will be released only when alldeficiencies have been completed. No partial payment to be recognized until allwork is completed.
1.6 Warranty Period
.1 Provide on-going review and attendance to building call-back, maintenance and repairproblems during the warranty periods.
.2 At the beginning of the 12th month after Substantial Performance of the Work, theOwner, Contractor and Consultant, along with key Subcontractors as designated, shallcarry out a complete review of building and its systems to determine which deficienciesare to be rectified under the warranty. Contractor shall be responsible for timely writtennotification of Owner, and Consultant prior to such end of warranty period inspection andany delay in such notification shall extend such warranty period until proper notificationis received by Owner, and Consultant.
.1 Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions as amended, and as follows:
.1 Written warranty shall be furnished by individual manufacturer for particularproduct/system/assembly or by Subcontractor for a particularproduct/system/assembly/section of Specifications and specifically endorsed bywarrantor to Owner.
.2 Warranty shall include for proper performance of the portion of the Work asdefined by the scope of the applicable specification section to the extent that thedesign and Contract Documents permit such performance.
.3 Warranty shall be provided by Subcontractor unless warranty is specified to beprovided by product manufacturer.
.4 The Owner shall promptly give the warrantor notice in writing of observed defectsand deficiencies which occur during the warranty period.
.5 Warranty shall commence at date of Substantial Performance of the Work.
.6 Warranty specified shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, otherwarranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers andlimitations on product warranty do not relieve Contractor of obligations underrequirements of the Contract Documents.
.7 Submit warranty on warrantor’s standard form endorsed to Owner which includesthe following information:
.1 Name and address of Project.
.2 Warranty commencement date (date of Substantial Performance of theWork).
.3 Warranty period.
.4 Specific warranty terms as required in applicable portion of ContractDocuments.
.5 Name and title of authorized signing officer and seal of warrantor.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Demolition and removal of selected non-structural portions of building.
.2 Salvage:
.1 Salvaging of designated items for reuse by Owner
.2 Salvage of designated items to be reused or recycled.
.3 Removal of surplus materials from the Place of the Work.
.4 Related mechanical and electrical work and demolition requirements are covered underDivisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28 respectively.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 The work of this section shall be executed by a Subcontractor having a minimum of 5years specialized demolition experience and able to deploy adequate equipment andskilled personnel to complete work expediently in an efficient and orderly manner.
.2 Pre-demolition meeting:
.1 Schedule a pre-demolition meeting following the procedures specified for pre-installation meetings in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2 Review existing conditions at the Place of the Work thoroughly to establish fullextent of items to be removed and items to remain. Commencement ofdemolition work will be considered to be acceptance of existing conditions at thePlace of the Work and removal of such items.
.3 Examine adjacent properties to determine extent of protection required.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Existing conditions documentation:
.1 Document existing conditions of adjoining construction including finish surfacesthat might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations.
.2 Comply with Section 01 32 33.
.3 Submit existing conditions documentation before demolition work begins.
.3 Inventory of items to be salvaged:
.1 Prepare typewritten inventory of items to be salvaged and cross-reference todrawings.
.2 Submit inventory following procedures for submittal of shop drawings inaccordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1 Undertake the Work and effect arrangements required by authorities having jurisdictionfor protection of public and workers.
.2 Post danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways and thoroughfaresgiving access to area of demolition with barricades and hoarding as indicated orrequired.
.3 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the work and present at thePlace of the Work whenever work is in progress.
.4 Demolition of asbestos containing materials can be hazardous to health. Stop the Workand notify the Owner immediately should material resembling spray or trowel-appliedasbestos, which has not already been identified, be encountered in the course ofdemolition work. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from theOwner and Consultant.
.5 Should any suspect PCBs or other hazardous materials be encountered which have notalready been identified, stop the Work in the immediate area which may disturb suspectmaterials. Immediately report any suspect asbestos, PCBs or other hazardous materials,not previously identified, to the Owner and Consultant.
1.6 Protection
.1 Protect work to remain against damage. Repair or replace damaged work at noadditional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
.1 Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
.2 Observe existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determineextent of selective demolition required.
.3 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items tobe removed and salvaged.
.4 When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict withintended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature andextent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Consultant.
.5 Survey of existing conditions: Record existing conditions by use of photographs inaccordance with Section 01 32 33.
3.2 Utility Services and Mechanical / Electrical Systems
.1 Refer to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28 respectively.
.1 Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by newconstruction, and as otherwise indicated. Use methods required to complete the workwithin limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
.1 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoiningconstruction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing orgrinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacentsurfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
.2 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoidmarring existing finished surfaces.
.3 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Atconcealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contentsof hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch andportable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
.4 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
.5 Remove decayed, infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials andpromptly dispose of off-site.
.6 Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so asnot to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
.7 Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
.2 Dispose of demolished materials from Project site except where noted otherwise and inaccordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Remove and transport debris in amanner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
.3 Do not sell demolished material at the Place of the Work.
.4 Clean existing surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to assure properadherence.
3.4 Salvage
.1 Remove and store items indicated or directed for salvage. Remove, handle andtransport such items to storage area designated in the Contract Documents, to an areawithin the Place of the Work designated by Consultant, or to an area away from thePlace of the Work as directed by the Consultant. Perform such work to prevent damageto the items during removal and in storage.
.2 The Owner will review Place of the Work prior to commencement of demolition andinstruct the Contractor the items to be retained for re-use or be turned over to theOwner.
.3 Remove and store indicated items for future use by Owner. Remove, handle andtransport such items to storage area indicated in the Contract Documents or to an areawithin the Place of the Work designated by Consultant. Perform such work carefully andwith diligence to prevent any damage to the items during removal and in storage.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Work of this section includes architectural woodwork including, but not limited to, thefollowing:
.1 Wood baseboards.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications:
.1 Fabricator/installer: firm having a minimum of 3 years experience on work ofsimilar size and quality.
.2 Installer qualifications: engage an installer who has successfully completed 2architectural woodwork projects similar in scope, materials and design to thisProject within the last 5 years.
.2 Single-source manufacturing and Installation responsibility: Engage a qualifiedManufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section,including fabrication, finishing, and installation.
.3 Quality standard:
.1 Work shall be in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition1, 2009 grades follows:
.1 Lumber and Interior Millwork: Custom Grade.
.2 Finishing: Premium Grade.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Verification samples:
.1 Submit 3 sets of 200 mm (8”) long as applicable, of wood baseboards illustratingwood species, grain and finish.
1.5 Coordination
.1 Coordinate with other work to ensure satisfactory and expeditious completion of the workof this section.
.2 Where woodwork is to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimension of otherconstruction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; showrecorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedulewith construction progress to avoid delays in the Work.
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1 Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,spoilage, and deterioration.
.2 Do not deliver woodwork until painting operations have been completed in installationareas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areaswhose environmental conditions meet requirements specified under paragraph 1.7Environmental Requirements.
.3 The woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to makecertain that woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficientlydry so that the architectural woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes inmoisture content.
1.7 Environmental Requirements
.1 Environmental conditions; during storage and installation: Obtain and comply withwoodwork manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions forwoodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until theseconditions have been attained.
.2 Environmental conditions; during service life of woodwork: Obtain and comply withwoodwork manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions forwoodwork. Note that building humidity control is not in operation 24 hours per day or 365days per year and system is intermittent during winter and summer months. As a result,fabrication of wood components should anticipate major changes in humidity levels.
1.8 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Wood Materials
.1 Lumber:
.1 Moisture content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with an average moisturecontent range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relativehumidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisturecontent values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% to 10%.
.2 Solid hardwood for transparent finish:
.1 Species: Select White Maple.
.2 Cut: Plain.
2.2 Fasteners and Adhesives
.1 Fasteners:
.1 Wood screws: FF-S-111D Amendment 1 (1989), type, size, material and finish asrequired for the condition of use.
.2 Nails: FED FF-N-105, type, size material and finish as required for the conditionof use.
.2 Adhesives: Moisture resistant complying with FS MMM-A-125, Type II, or FED MMM-A-188, Type I, II or III; type best suited for the purpose.
.1 Complete fabrication and finishing before shipment to maximum extent possible. Wherenecessary, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
.2 Do fabrication from field measurements with provisions for scribing as required to meetbuilt-in conditions.
.3 Maintain relative humidity and temperature during fabrication, storage and finishingoperations matching that of the areas of installation.
.4 Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and openjoints, or other defects. Accurately fit all joints, corners and mitres.
.5 Prefinish work at the factory, except where specified or indicated otherwise.
2.4 Finishing of Interior Architectural Woodwork
.1 General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this section,regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation.
.2 Preparations for finishing:
.1 Prior to finishing, exposed portions of woodwork shall have handling marks oreffects of exposure to moisture removed with a thorough final sanding oversurfaces of the exposed portions, using appropriate grit sandpaper, and shall becleaned prior to applying sealer or finish.
.2 Concealed surfaces of woodwork that might be exposed to moisture, such asthose adjacent to exterior concrete or masonry walls, shall be back-primed.
.3 Comply with referenced quality standard in Part 1 for sanding, filling countersunkfasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing ofarchitectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
.3 Transparent finish for veneer and solid wood :
.1 Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system, staining, and sheen.
.1 Sheen: Low.
.2 Factory finish with transparent, pigmented, catalyzed lacquer in accordancewith the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 1, 2009, Section 5.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
.1 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areasbefore installing.
.2 Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completionand complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 Installation
.1 Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards,Edition 1, 2009 for same grade specified in Part 1 of this section for type of woodworkinvolved.
.2 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as requiredwith concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm (1/8" in 8’-0”) for plumband level and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
.3 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repairdamaged finish at cuts.
.4 Anchor woodwork to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure toblocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing for a completeinstallation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush withwoodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
.5 Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed atshop or before installation of woodwork.
3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning
.1 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defectsfunctionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.
.2 Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 Protection
.1 Protect architectural woodwork during remainder of construction period to ensure thatwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
.2 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturerand installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time ofSubstantial Performance of the Work.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Interior structural glass partitions and glass door system and necessary hardware andrelated trim for such items.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Retain a Professional Engineer registered in the Place of the Work to design the work ofthis section; to prepare, seal and sign shop drawings; and to perform field review. Shopdrawings shall show both design and installation requirements.
.2 Qualifications of Installers: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installerswith minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with training of Product manufacturers.
.1 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years experience as glazing mechanic.
.2 Typical glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years experience as glazers.
.3 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Structural silicone test reports:
.1 Submit to the Consultant, for record purposes only, the documents from thesealant manufacturer listed hereunder. Materials submitted to the sealantmanufacturer for these tests to be from the same Supplier and manufacturedexactly as the materials used in the Work.
.1 Test reports on adhesion of the silicone to the specified substrates.
.2 Test reports on compatibility of materials to be used adjacent to the structuralsilicone.
.3 Written recommendation for surface preparation, the cure environments andhandling and storage methods for the silicone.
.4 A written statement that shop drawings, design calculations, and ContractDocuments have been reviewed.
.2 Suitability of glass: Submit to the Consultant, for record purposes only, glassmanufacturer's written statement that proposed types of glass that are to besupported by structural silicone are suitable for such application.
.3 Manufacturing procedures: Before commencing manufacture of frames andapplying structural silicone submit for review manufacturing procedures includingthe gunning, tooling, handling and clamping (if necessary) of glass and frames.
.4 Record forms: Submit for review record forms and labels as specified herein forrecording manufactured panels and test samples.
.5 Log book: Maintain a log book at the Place of the Work, for review by Consultantwhen requested, recording adhesion and quality control test results performedduring the application of structural silicone sealant, as well as concurrent weatherconditions.
.6 Testing at the Place of the Work to include:
.1 Tack Free or Skin Over Time.
.2 Cure Through Test.
.3 Adhesion Test on substrates.
.7 Record sealant batches/lots to control Product expiration.
.4 Glass fixing test reports:
.1 Submit test reports from an independent laboratory certifying that the StructuralGlass System proposed for use has been tested. System tested shall be similarin type of materials and design shown on the Consultant's drawings.
.2 Tested specimen shall be equivalent in glass type and panel configuration as thatshown in the Contract Documents. If existing test reports are to be submitted,then those tests shall have been carried out to loads at least equal to or greaterthan those called for in this specification. If test reports are not available, thesystem shall be tested. Costs for testing shall be born by the glass systemmanufacturer.
.5 Shop drawings:
.1 Submit engineered shop drawings.
.2 Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to complete details illustratingconstruction of the various parts of the work of this section, metal and glassthicknesses, methods of joining, details of field connections and anchorage,interfacing with other work, fastening and sealing materials and methods.
.3 Submit catalogue cuts of manufactured items.
.4 Design calculations:
.1 Submit under seal, calculations prepared by a qualified Professional Engineerresponsible for the preparation of the shop drawings that clearly indicate thefollowing:
.1 Design assumptions regarding loadings related to the building code.
.2 Which codes and/or standards calculations are based on.
.3 Materials proposed and their allowable shear and bending stresses.
.4 Analysis for loads and all movements caused by temperature changes.
.5 Analysis to include anchors, glazing members, structural joints, sealantsand glass. Show section property computations for framing members andsubmit full sized drawings.
.6 Samples:
.1 Submit samples for each of the following:
.1 305 mm x 305 mm (12” x 12") sample of glass with acid etched finishincluding sample of finished exposed glass edge.
.2 150 mm x 150 mm (6” x 6") sample of each metal type and finish.
.7 Certifications:
.1 Submit certification that adhesion of sealant to samples of metal and glass isadequate when tested in accordance with ASTM C794-06.
.2 Submit certification that materials in contact with sealant are compatible withsealant after being exposed to 2000 to 4000 micro watt ultra-violet radiation for21 days.
.8 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Operation and maintenance instructions:
.1 Submit operation and maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance ofglass doors and partitions.
1.5 Design Requirements
.1 Design glass to CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89. Thicknesses indicated are minimum thicknessrequired. Increase thicknesses as required to meet design requirements.
.2 Comply with requirements of jurisdictional authorities and the building code. Design toloads in accordance with the building code.
.3 Design system to receive, accommodate and interface with work of other sections asindicated or required.
.4 Design installation to provide:
.1 Adequate provision for thermal movement without thermal fractures.
.2 Adequate provision for live and dead loads, without failure, distortion or fracture.
.3 For differential movement of structural support frame (long term creep anddeflection).
.5 Design connections for work of this section to building structure and to adjacentconstruction to take into account peculiarities as may be found in the Work.
.6 Design glass partitions and doors and their connections to building structure andadjacent construction to ensure no possibility of weakening, loosening or fracturingoccurring due to vibrations from any source.
.7 Design light gauge steel structural members in accordance with CAN/CSA S136-07.
.1 Adequately protect and crate components against damage, dirt, disfigurement andweather.
.2 Exercise care in handling units to prevent damage and scratched surfaces.
.3 Deliver glass to the Place of the Work in properly packed crates for protection andproperly marked for ease of handling.
.4 Protect finishes with strippable coating that will not mar, nor deface finish on removal, ora similar method designed to afford an equivalent amount of protection. Leave protectedcoating intact until damage risk is past or immediately prior to final cleaning.
.5 Stacking should be done to prevent bending pressure or abrasion of finished surfaces.
.6 Mark or flag each pane of glass installed immediately following glass installation. Usetemporary coloured tapes or flags suspended near, but not in contact with glass.
.7 Replace scratched or broken glass damaged due to faulty setting, careless handling orstorage at no additional cost to the Owner. Additionally, glass which, in opinion ofConsultant, is seriously distorted shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.7 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer/Installers
.1 Anderson Courts and Sports Surfaces Inc.
.2 Inkan Ltd.
.3 Playcon The Recreation Company.
.4 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 Structural Glass Partition and Door System
.1 Description:
.1 Glass partition to be supported by perpendicular glass fins anchored to floor.Dimensions of supports to be engineered to height of glass partitions.
.2 Clear silicone shall be used to bond joints. Direct glass-to-glass or glass-to-metalcontact is not permitted.
.2 Materials:
.1 Laminated glass: CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90.
.1 Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply withinterlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. Use materials that have aproven record of no tendency to bubble, discolour, or lose physical andmechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
.2 Glass layers minimum 9 mm (5/16”) thick, overall glass thickness shall be19 mm (3/4").
.3 Interlayer thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply withrequirements and not less than
.1 Not less than 0.76 mm (0.030").
.4 Interlayer colour: Clear.
.5 Glass type: Tempered.
.6 Satin acid etch (treated by liquid acids, such as hydrochloric) on surface No.as selected by Consultant. Provide Etching to be approved by Consultant.
.7 Laminated glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and airor glass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
.8 Tong marks are unacceptable.
.9 Exposed glass edges: bevelled and polished smooth.
.10 Glass thickness: as required to meet design requirements, minimumthickness as indicated or scheduled.
.2 Fittings: Refer to drawings.
.3 Exposed metal brackets, channels, angles, and hardware:
.1 Stainless steel materials; Type 304 unless otherwise indicated:
.1 Stainless steel sheet and plate: ASTM A167-99(2009).
.2 Stainless steel bar and angle: ASTM A276-10.
.3 Finish: Refer to Abbreviation Schedule.
.2 Aluminum:
.1 Extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy to ANSI H35.1-09 with a minimum yieldof 138 MPa (20015 PSI), free from defects impairing appearance,strength and durability. Tracks susceptible to wear shall be extruded fromaluminum 6061-T6 alloy to ANSI H35.1-09.
.2 Finish: Anodized to AAMA 611-98: Clear anodized to AA Designation AA-M12C22A31 where aluminum is exposed.
.1 Medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone sealant; complying with ASTMC920-11, Type S, Grade NS, Application G, Class 25.
.2 Colour: as selected by Consultant from full colour range.
.3 Acceptable products:
.1 Dow Corning ‘999-A’.
.2 Momentive ‘SCS1200’.
.3 Pecora ‘860’.
.4 Tremco ‘Proglaze’.
.7 Structural sealant: Dow Corning 995, colour to later selection by Consultant.
.8 Paint: bituminous, conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89.
.9 Glass retaining member seals: PVC or Neoprene, ASTM C542-05, 70 to 90Durometer A, Teflon coated, compressible, with corner joints under compressionto assure vertical to horizontal neoprene pressure contact.
.10 Door hardware:
.1 Furnish hardware necessary for complete and trouble free operation of doors.
.2 Finish hardware: Refer to Door Schedule.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.3 Fabrication
.1 Fabricate sections to accommodate and interface with work of other sections by meansof rabbets, interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required.
.3 Jointing and intersections of metals shall be accurately cut, fitted to a tolerance of0.076 mm (0.003") in true planes with adequate concealed fastenings.
.4 Perform fitting and assembly of component parts in shop, insofar as practicable. Work ofthis section that cannot be permanently shop assembled shall be fitted, assembled,marked and dismantled to assure proper fitting in field. Identify shop assembledcomponents on shop drawings for location and erection at Place of the Work.
.5 Pre-drill glass panels to accept hardware to templates of hardware manufacturer.
.6 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes.
.7 Polish glass edges prior to tempering.
.8 Door edge clearances:
.1 Between doors and frame at head and jambs: 3 mm (1/8").
.2 At sills with thresholds: 6 mm (1/4").
.3 At sills without thresholds: 13 mm (1/2").
.4 At meeting edges of pairs of doors: 3 mm (1/8").
.1 Make thorough examination of Contract Documents, check anchorage, structuraldeflections, interfacing with work of other sections and other factors influencing designand performance and be fully cognizant of requirements.
.2 Notify Contractor if preparations are required to be made in the work of other sections forproper attachment, securing or executing of the work of this section.
.3 Check structural elements and adjoining framing on which the work of this section isdependent, verify governing dimensions. Confirm conditions satisfactory beforeproceeding.
3.2 Installation
.1 Allow for dimensional tolerances and deviation from true plane permissible in structuralsupport frame. Erect plumb and true, and in correct relationship to the work of othersections.
.2 Install components in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
.3 Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metal, and masonry or concrete withbituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action.
.4 Upon completion of glazing, check units for squareness, alignment and smoothoperation, adjust as required. Clean and polish glass and remove soiling from exposedmetal.
.5 Hardware: Adjust, test and make operational without binding or other interference likelyto affect movement of panels.
3.3 Installation Tolerances
.1 Maximum variations from plumb and level: 3mm (1/8”) deviation in 3000mm (10’-0”).
3.4 Cleaning
.1 At completion of the work of this section, remove labels from glass and clean inner andouter faces of glass and exposed finished metal surfaces. Replace scratched or brokenglass and make good any damaged materials.
.2 Check door units for squareness, alignment and smooth operation. Adjust, test andmake hardware operational without binding or other interference likely to affectmovement of panels.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Supply and off-load to a clean, dry, and secure room at the Place of the Work, which hasbeen designated for storage of finish hardware specified including necessary fasteningdevices.
.2 Supply finish hardware required and not supplied under other Sections.
.3 Check and verify hardware information on door and frame shop drawings, prior tofabrication.
.4 Packaging, labelling, provision of installation instructions, templates, fixings and similaritems, and delivery to the Work site.
.5 Provide qualified staff at the Place of the Work promptly to assist installation tradessubsequent to being requested and to ensure that hardware is being correctly installed.
.6 Upon completion of installation of hardware, hardware Supplier shall arrange andconduct, in company of Consultant and Contractor, inspections to verify that all hardwareis installed and functioning satisfactorily, and where necessary shall recommendadjustments of such items as closer arms, valves, door holders and latch and locksets.Report comments in writing to Consultant and Contractor.
.7 Supply temporary locking cylinders and keys for construction purposes. Locks used forContractor security shall be keyed as required to conform to building operations’ securityrequirements.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent Supplier withminimum 5 years experience in Products, systems and assemblies specified and withapproval of Product manufacturers.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Schedules and samples:
.1 Prepare and submit for review, a finish hardware schedule with technical productdata sheets for use in the Work. List type, selected manufacturer's name andnumber, location, mounting heights and finish of hardware, and complete crossreference to door schedule.
.2 The indication or omission of a hardware component on the hardware scheduledoes not remove the responsibility of this section to ensure that all hardware canbe installed and will function as intended.
.3 Submit samples of complete line of hardware and finishes. Identify samplesindicating hardware item numbers used in the Door Schedule manufacturer’snumbers, names, types, finishes, sizes and indication of door location(s).Approved samples will be retained for comparisons and returned uponcompletion of the Work.
.4 Prepare and submit for review, a keying schedule recognizing Ownerrequirements which shall be determined after award of Contract.
.4 Jigs:
.1 Submit template jigs for each component to be recessed to enable installationtrades to prepare doors to preclude misalignment and improper fit.
.5 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance instructions:
.1 Instruct the Owner’s designated representative in proper care andpreventative maintenance of hardware to assure longevity of operation.
.2 Submit maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of finish hardware.
.3 Submit to building maintenance staff prior to date of Substantial Performance ofthe Work, two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.
1.5 Regulatory Requirements
.1 Comply with codes and requirements of governing authorities, and as specified.
.2 Provide hardware items with characteristics conforming to exit requirements ofgoverning authorities.
1.6 Product Handling
.1 Submit template information drawings, promptly when requested, and submit 3 copies ofinstallation instructions for each item supplied.
.2 Package each item of hardware individually, complete with trim and necessaryfastenings, and accessories, including wrenches, keys, and other appurtenancesrequired to ensure correct installation. Mark each item as to contents and appropriateuse in specified groups.
.3 Items of hardware subject to handling when installed shall be submitted with an easilyremovable covering to protect against scratches, abrasions, coating with dissimilar finishmaterials on adjacent surfaces, and tarnishing.
1.7 Templates
.1 Submit for distribution, 3 copies of templates, template information, installationinstructions and details necessary to enable preparation for, and installation of finishhardware in accordance with Door Hardware Institute recommended procedures. Submittemplates arranged and marked coincident with specified hardware designations.
.2 Submit promptly when requested, the foregoing information in 3-ring plastic hard-covered binders suitably identified.
.3 In lieu of 1.7.1 and 1.7.2, arrange for the issue by each hardware manufacturer, themanufacturer's standard book of template drawings, at the option of door and framemanufacturers.
1.8 Inspection
.1 Inspect the installation of finish hardware on an agreed frequency.
.2 Advise in writing of work being performed that will prejudice the installation or correctoperation of items of hardware.
.3 Ensure items have been installed complete with required trim and accessories, andfastenings are adequately secured and approved. Ensure closer arms, valves, holderdevices, locksets and latchsets are correctly adjusted.
1.9 Coordination
.1 Coordinate work of this section to ensure information and material is promptly provided,to ensure orderly and expeditious progress of the Work, and to comply with schedule forcompletion.
.2 Within 3 weeks of Contract Award, submit confirmed orders to manufacturers/Suppliersto Consultant.
.3 Assist Contractor to organize hardware storeroom and supply qualified staff to correctlycategorize, mark, and arrange each item in groups to enable efficient dispensing inspecified hardware groups for each door to installation trades.
.4 Coordinate the work of this section to ensure supplied hardware can function as requiredand can be installed within the particular details of the door and frame assemblies.Hardware that cannot be installed or will not function as intended will be replaced at nocost to the Owner.
1.10 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36, except as follows:
.1 Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check Contract Documents, verify doorswings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that hardwarewill fit work to be attached.
.2 Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation,and verify to correctness thereof, or advise of required revisions. Check that doors,frames and panels requiring additional support are reinforced.
.3 Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, inparticular closer arms, valves and locksets, to work properly.
3.2 Installation
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Refer also toinstallation requirements indicated, and specified in other sections of specifications.
.2 Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturer's instructions. Use specialtools and jigs as recommended.
.3 Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm (3") from latch edge.
.4 Refer to Section 08 14 00 with respect to factory preparation for hardware for wooddoors. Install wood doors and applicable hardware, including hinges.
.5 Take delivery of finishing hardware and install, except hardware specified as part of workof another section. Check each item as received.
.6 Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions, at heights laterdirected by Consultant. Hardware shall operate freely. Protect installed hardware fromdamage and paint spotting.
.7 Sound seals:
.1 Install seals to continuously seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place withnon-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.
.2 Maintain integrity of seal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt seals asrequired to achieve specified performance.
.8 Pre-drill kickplates and doors prior to installation of kickplates. Apply with water-resistantadhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws.
.9 Set thresholds on two continuous beads of polyurethane caulking fastened with aminimum of 4 countersunk screws.
3.3 Electrified Hardware
.1 Install electronic components, security components such as magnetic locks, sentronichold open devices door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, andother electric devices.
.2 Power wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Divisions 26, 27, and 28including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections andterminations except where otherwise specified. Be responsible for ensuring that wiringwork is done in accordance with the Suppliers wiring diagrams and directions.
.3 Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system. Submita copy of reports to the Consultant.
3.4 Keying
.1 Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding ofconstruction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
.2 Submit Construction Master Keying (CMK) and Grand Master Keying (GMK) uponcompletion of the work of this section.
3.5 Adjustment and Cleaning
.1 Adjust doors to swing freely, smoothly and easily, to remain stationary at any point, toclose evenly and tightly against stops without binding, and to latch positively when doorsare closed with moderate force.
.2 Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, andclosers act positively with the least possible resistance in use. Lubricate hardware ifrequired by Supplier’s instructions.
.3 Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipatedwind and building air pressure, and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable forfunction, location and traffic.
.4 Clean hardware after installation in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Metal support systems for interior gypsum board partitions, interior ceilings, and interiorassemblies as indicated.
1.3 Reference Standards
.1 Applicable requirements of ASTM C754-11 for installation of steel framing.
1.4 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by a Subcontractor with minimum 5years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and withapproval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2 Fire resistance rating: Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings areindicated or required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those ofapplicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.
.3 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
1.5 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section, including additional data as may be required to demonstratecompliance with the Contract Documents.
.3 Test results:
.1 Submit certified test results for each required fire resistance rated assembly forwork of this section.
1.6 Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies
.1 Materials for fire resistance rated construction shall conform to requirements of indicatedfire resistance rated assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 General
.1 For sheet metal Products: Sheet metal thickness indicated herein pertains to the“minimum base steel thickness exclusive of coating”.
.1 Interior non-loadbearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645-11a; roll formed from0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated or as recommendedby gypsum board manufacturer, electro-galvanized steel sheet. Provide service holesstarting at 450 mm (18") from bottom, then 914 mm (36") on centre to top of studs.
.1 Steel studs; at backer plate locations: 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum thickness.
.2 Interior floor and ceiling tracks (runners): to ASTM C645-11a; in widths to suit stud sizes.
.1 Metal thickness: to match studs.
.2 For openings wider than 914 mm (36"), provide 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimumthickness for header.
.3 Runner fasteners:
.1 To concrete and masonry: Use stub nails or power-driven fasteners.
.2 To metal concrete inserts: Use 10 mm (3/8") Type S-12 Pan Head screws.
.3 To suspended ceilings: Use prefinished clips to match ceiling grid, asmanufactured by CGC.
.4 Bracing channels: Minimum 19 mm x 10 mm x 1.087 mm (3/4" x 3/8" x 0.0428") coldrolled galvanized steel.
2.3 Ceiling Support Materials and Systems
.1 General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754-11 unlessotherwise indicated.
.2 Main runners: Steel channels, hot or cold rolled; Z180 (G60) galvanized.
.4 Hanger rods and flats: Mild steel with zinc coating, galvanized for exterior applications.
.1 General: Size devices for 5 times load imposed by completed system asdetermined in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M-10.
.1 Power actuated fastening systems are not permitted.
.2 Screws, clips, bolts, concrete inserts or other devices for ceiling hangers whosesuitability for use intended has been proven through standard constructionpractices or by certified test data.
.3 Hangers: Comply with ASTM C754-11 for maximum ceiling area and loads to besupported.
.4 Kwik-Bolt 3 - HHDCA 1/4 Ceiling Hangers by Hilti.
.5 Fasteners exposed to weather, condensation, and corrosion: Zinc-plated orstainless steel fasteners in applicable product lines specified in precedingparagraphs.
.5 Tie wire: 1.19 mm (0.047”, 18 AWG) minimum zinc coated, soft-annealed wire, to ASTMA641/A641M-09a.
.6 Furring anchorages: 1.62 mm (0.0637”, 16 AWG) galvanized wire ties, manufacturer'sstandard wire type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturerand complying with ASTM C754-11.
.7 Runner (carry) channels: 1.367 mm (0.0538”) thick cold rolled steel, primer painted orzinc coated for interior locations, to ASTM C754-11, with minimum 228 MPa yieldstrength:
.1 38 mm x 12.7 mm (1-1/2" x 1/2") where supported at centres of 914 mm (36")maximum.
.2 38 mm x 19 mm (1-1/2" x 3/4") where supported at centres of 1220 mm (48")maximum.
2.4 Furring
.1 Furring channels: 0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum typical thickness, cold rolled steel,wiped coated, nominal size of 22 mm (7/8") depth x 35 mm (1-3/8") face, hat type withknurled face.
.2 Resilient furring channels: ‘Resilient Channel’ as manufactured by Nicholson Rollformingor Bailey Metal.
.3 Z-furring members: Galvanized steel z-shaped furring members; ASTM A653/A653M-06a, G60, 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum thickness of base metal, of depth indicated,designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets.
.4 Fasteners for furring members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer forsubstrate and application indicated, corrosion resistant finish for exterior buildingenvelope applications, load rating and spacing to support materials carried by assemblywith factor of safety of 3x per fastener manufacturer data sheets.
2.5 Accessories
.1 Backer plates:
.1 Metal backer plates: Steel, galvanized; minimum 150 mm (6") wide x 1.367 mm(0.0538”) minimum x length and width to suit size of items to be attached;fastened to studs for attachment of surface mounted fittings and accessories.
.2 Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment tostuds will not be permitted.
.1 Comply with ASTM C754-11 and manufacturer's instructions, except as modified herein.Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of jointswith furring and other supports as indicated.
.2 Provide and install studs, framing, shimming, and furring to provide proper support forgypsum board to achieve the following installation tolerances:
.1 Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane.
.2 Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from drawings locations.
.3 Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges orends.
.4 Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3.2 mm(1/8") from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
.5 In double stud walls, do not bridge across studs on opposite sides of wall withgypsum board or metal cross bracing.
.3 Give complete cooperation and direction to trades erecting framing and furring overwhich this work is applied. Coordinate finished joint location with framing.
.4 Coordinate installation and cooperate with mechanical and electrical work toaccommodate mechanical electrical items and any other work required to beincorporated into or coordinated with the partitions, ceiling and soffit systems.
.1 Where the presence of suspended ductwork or other mechanical or electricalservices or devices above ceiling framing conflicts with ceiling framingsuspension points from structure above, provide bridging framing belowconflicting work as required to support ceiling framing on specified intervals.
.2 Do not suspend ceiling framing from mechanical or electrical suspensionsystems unless agreement is obtained in writing from engineer for Subcontractorinstalling such framing that additional imposed loads are acceptable; obtainConsultant’s acceptance before proceeding.
.5 Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to preventtransference of structural loads.
.6 Do not bridge building expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.Independently frame both sides of joints with framing of furring members or as indicated.
.7 Size framing systems according to manufacturer’s engineered load tables, to meetallowable deflection without permanent deformation.
.1 Maximum allowable deflection: L/240.
3.2 Blocking
.1 Attach to framing adequate backer plates to support the load of, and to withstand thewithdrawal and shear forces imposed by, items installed upon the work of this section.Such items include, but are not restricted to:
.1 Furring indicated in Contract Documents is schematic. Do not regard as exact orcomplete. Provide all necessary framing and furring to support gypsum board inaccordance with manufacturers' specifications.
.2 Shim furring as required to achieve required installation tolerances.
.3 Leave finished work rigid, secure, square, level, plumb, curved to detailed radius anderected to maintain finish gypsum board line dimensions and contours. Make allowancefor thermal movement.
.4 Thermally separate metal studs from exterior concrete or masonry.
3.4 Suspended and Furred Ceilings
.1 Arrange hangers for suspended gypsum board ceilings to provide support independentof walls, columns, pipes, ducts; erect plumb, and securely anchored to structural frame,or embed in concrete slabs.
.2 Keep lateral braces at hangers back 450 mm (18") minimum unless otherwise noted.
.3 Space hangers at 914 mm (36") on centre maximum along runner channels, and notmore than 150 mm (6") from ends.
.4 Space runner channels at 1220 mm (48") on centre, maximum, and not more than150 mm (6") from boundary walls, interruptions of continuity, and changes in direction.Run channels transversely to structural framing members.
.5 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200 mm (8") and wire each end with2 loops. Avoid clustering or lining up of splices.
.6 Attach to rod hangers by bending hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner, andsecurely wiring in place with saddle tie.
.7 Erect cross furring channels transversely across runner channels at 400 mm (16") oncentre maximum, 305 mm (12") on centre at fire rated assemblies, at not more than150 mm (6") from boundary wall openings, interruptions in ceiling continuity, andchanges in direction.
.8 Secure furring channels to each support with purpose-made slips or wire tie. Splicejoints by lapping channels and tying together.
.9 Level cross furring channels to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).
.10 Install ceiling framing assemblies at interface with suspended acoustical ceilingsspecified in Section 09 51 23, to project minimum of 100 mm (4") above acoustic tilesuspension assemblies unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.
3.5 Wall Furring
.1 Install steel furring for braced walls, free standing walls, walls that are furred out asindicated.
.2 Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on 4 sides,with channels. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.3 Provide bulkheads and boxed-in duct shafts, for beams, columns, pipes and aroundexposed services where indicated. Install 19 mm (3/4") channels at corners and at305 mm (12") on centre.
3.6 Resilient Furring
.1 Erect gypsum board resilient furring maximum 610 mm (24") on centre and not morethan 150 mm (6") from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm (1")gypsum wallboard screw.
.2 Install 150 mm (6") continuous strip of 12.7 mm (1/2") gypsum board along base ofpartitions where resilient furring installed.
.3 Provide resilient furring channel transverse to framing members, or as indicated.
.4 On partitions, install resilient furring with outer leg oriented upward.
3.7 Metal Stud Partition Framing
.1 Provide partition tracks (runners) at floor and underside of structural assembly and asfollows:
.1 Align accurately and lay out according to partition layout.
.2 Secure runners to concrete access flooring and to concrete slabs, as applicable,with screwed or shot fasteners located 50 mm (2") from each end and spaced atmaximum 610 mm (24") on centre.
.3 At partition corners, extend one runner to end of corner and butt other runner toit, allowing necessary clearance for gypsum board thickness. Runners should notbe mitred.
.2 Unless otherwise indicated, place interior studs vertically at centres as follows:
.1 Provide studs at 400 mm (16") on centre unless otherwise indicated orscheduled, and as specially spaced in accordance with details indicated.
.2 Provide studs not more than 50 mm (2") from abutting walls, openings and eachside of corners.
.3 Provide freedom for 19 mm (3/4") deflection under beams, structural slabs andthe like to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs, or install 50 mm (2") legceiling tracks.
.3 Install studs in tracks at floor and ceiling.
.4 Where horizontal runs of service lines are scheduled to be installed, arrange withapplicable trades and install studs simultaneously with services.
.5 At openings in stud walls, erect track at head and sills to accommodate intermediatestuds. At each end of track, cut out flanges, turn up web, and fasten to studs. Installintermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wallstuds. Install double studs at each jamb, and double tracks at head of door openings.
.6 At partitions requiring fire rating, erect in accordance with requirements of listing.
.7 Size studs, connections, and runners to carry loads according to stud manufacturer’sload tables, at 24 kg/m2 (5 lb/ft2) live load to meet maximum allowable deflection limits.Where depth of stud is indicated, size metal thickness to meet allowable deflection limits.
.8 Provide three studs at corner and intermediate intersections of partitions.
.9 Coordinate work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that work isdone simultaneously. Where standard holes are too small for installed services, notchstuds, and splice notched flanges with splice pieces 305 mm (12") longer than notches,each fastened with 2 screws.
.10 Provide metal studding to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).
.11 Coordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. Whenerecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.12 Coordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and specialsupports or anchorage for work specified in other sections.
.13 Unless otherwise indicated, partitions, together with gypsum board facings, shall extendabove ceilings to underside of structure above.
.14 Maintain clearance to avoid transference of structural loads to studs.
.15 Chase walls:
.1 Provide chase walls where indicated, consisting of two parallel steel studpartitions.
.2 Provide cross bracing consisting of metal furring, located at quarter points oneach pair of studs. Attach cross bracing to studs with metal screws. Coordinateconstruction of partitions to suit installation of services.
3.8 Control Joints
.1 Control joints: in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
3.9 Concrete Anchors
.1 Provide anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance withgypsum board manufacturer’s suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tippeddrill bits conforming to ANSI B212.15-1994.
.2 Provide anchors; minimum installation depth, and method of expansion asrecommended by the anchor manufacturer.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Gypsum board; plain.
.2 Gypsum board; fire-rated.
.3 Gypsum board accessories and miscellaneous related materials.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Subcontractor executing the work of this section shall have a minimum of 10 yearscontinuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality indicated andspecified.
.2 Single source responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer,or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.
.3 Fire resistance rating: Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings areindicated or required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those ofapplicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Fire-rated assembly listings:
.1 Submit fire-rated assembly listings for each required fire resistance ratedassembly for work of this section.
1.5 Environmental Requirements
.1 Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards andrecommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions before,during and after application of gypsum boards.
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1 Store materials in protected dry areas. Store gypsum board flat in piles with edgesprotected.
.2 Ensure that finish metal members are not bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.
.3 Deliver Products supplied under the work of this section only to those who areresponsible for installation, to the place they direct, and to meet installation schedules.
.1 Paper faced gypsum core panel solid set core enclosed in paper, 12.7 mm (1/2")or 16 mm (5/8") thick unless otherwise indicated, 1220 mm (48") wide xmaximum practical length, ends square cut, tapered edges, to ASTMC1396/C1396-03a.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc Regular Gypsum Board’.
.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Gypsum Panel, Regular’.
.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Gypsum Board’.
.4 Lafarge ‘Gypboard’.
.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Gypsum Board’.
.2 Fire-rated gypsum board:
.1 Paper faced gypsum core panel with a specially formulated core for use in fire-resistive Type X or Type C designs, to ASTM C1396/C1396-03a.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc X and C’.
.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Firecode and Firecode C’.
.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Fireguard and Fireguard Gypsum Board’.
.4 Lafarge ‘Firecheck C and X’.
.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Fire-Shield and Fire Shield C Gypsum Board’.
2.2 Fasteners
.1 Screws for gypsum board: bugle head, fine thread, self-tapping, Type W or S or S-12point to suit framing type and metal gauge, with corrosion resistant finish to ASTMC1002-04/ASTM C954-10. Screw sizing:
.1 #6 x 25 mm (1") for single thickness board fastening.
.2 #6 x 32 mm (1-1/4") for single thickness 15.9 mm (5/8") board fastening.
.3 #7 x 41 mm (1 5/8") for double thickness board fastening.
.2 Tie wire: 1.6 mm (0.063") diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire.
2.3 Accessories
.1 Accessories: to ASTM C1047-10a unless otherwise indicated, maximum length piecesper location. Flanges shall be free from dirt, grease, or other material that adverselyaffects the bond of joint treatment or decoration.
.2 Casing trim; “L” or “LC” beads: Bailey D200 and 4411, Nicholson Rollforming Metal Trim200-A and 200-B fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm (0.022") base thickness commercial gradesheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTM A653/A653M-06a; perforated flanges.
.3 Corner bead: Bailey D100, Nicholson Rollforming No. 114, fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm(0.022") base thickness commercial grade sheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTMA653/A653M-06a; perforated flanges.
.4 Control joints: No. 093 Zinc Control Joint by CGC Inc. or approved alternate.
2.4 Related Support Assemblies and Backer Plates
.1 Metal support systems and backer plates at interior assemblies: in accordance withSection 09 22 00.
2.5 Joint and Adhesive Materials
.1 Joint compound:
.1 Gypsum board work: asbestos-free. Latex resin base, possessing goodadhesion, mixed with fresh, unadulterated water having no detrimental effect oncompounds, to ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007); type recommended bymanufacturer for application indicated.
.2 Gypsum board to receive tile finish: setting-type powder based joint finishingcompound. ‘Durabond’ by CGC or approved alternate.
.2 Joint reinforcing tape:
.1 Gypsum board: 50 mm x 0.3 mm (2" x 0.01") thick, perforated paper, withchamfered edges.
2.6 Acoustic Wall Assembly Materials
.1 Acoustic sealant; concealed locations: non-skinning butyl sealant, non-hardening,remains soft and tacky, to CGSB 19.21-M87:
.1 Sealant shall not deteriorate (stain or bleed into) painted surfaces.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 DAP ‘Mono Acoustic Sealant’.
.2 Pecora ‘BA98’.
.3 Quiet Solution ‘QuietSeal’.
.4 Tremco ‘Acoustical Sealant’.
.5 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2 Acoustic sealant; exposed locations, acrylic:
.1 Acrylic/latex acoustic sealant, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5 to CGSB 19.21-M87, maximum VOC content 33 g/L per EPA Method 310, paintable.
.2 Sealant shall not deteriorate (stain or bleed into) painted surfaces and bepaintable.
.5 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.3 Acoustic compound: premixed perlite plaster.
.4 Acoustic (sound attenuation) insulation:
.1 Mineral-fibre sound attenuation batts: to CAN/ULC S702-97, Type 1, fire resistantand non-combustible to CAN/ULC-S114-05, high density for sag-free, tight fittinginstallation.
.1 Density: 45 kg/m3 (2.8 lbs/ft3).
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 Roxul 'AFB'.
.2 Fasteners: use mechanical fasteners where required to secure insulation intoposition in accordance with insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
.1 General: Comply with ASTM C840-11, GA-216, GA-600, and manufacturer'sinstructions, except as otherwise indicated. Do not bridge building expansion joints withsupport system. Frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as indicated.
.2 Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged ordamp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not morethan 1.6 mm (1/16") open space between boards. Do not force into place.
.3 Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces(above ceiling, and the like) unless otherwise indicated, except in chase walls which areproperly braced internally.
.4 Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additionalsupport at openings and cut-outs.
.5 Securely attach trim, casings, framing, and accessories.
.6 Apply components of fire-rated assemblies in conformance with indicated designs.
.7 Erect materials to dimensions indicated, plumb, level, straight, and square to adjoiningelements.
.8 Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts.
.9 Install materials with the minimum number of joints. Tightly butt joints, without force, andneatly align them.
.10 Frame openings on every side. Provide clearances with services.
.11 Work shall include bulkheads over doors, frames, screens, and changes in ceiling levels,pipe space and as indicated.
.12 Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to preventtransference of structural loads in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.13 Tolerances:
.1 Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane inexposed surfaces, except at end joint between gypsum board panels.
.2 Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from indicated location.
.3 Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges orends.
.4 Surface flatness shall not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16") within 305 mm (12") straightedge. For non-tapered-edge end joints between boards, measure flatnesstolerance with end of straight end at centreline of joint.
3.2 Accessories
.1 At external corners install corner trim secured to framing at 230 mm (9-1/16") on centreon both flanges with screw fasteners or clinch tool.
.2 Secure casing trim at board edges where exposed to view, where board butts againstother materials with no trim to conceal junction, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces at tops ofpartitions where they stop against continuous ceiling surfaces, and where indicated.
.3 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane.
.4 Use full length pieces.
.5 Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners, free fromrough edges. Secure in accordance with manufacturer's specifications unless otherwiserequired.
.6 Installation tolerances:
.1 Alignment with board panels shall not exceed tolerances specified above.
.2 End joints shall be flush aligned to maximum offset of 0.5 mm (0.020”).
3.3 Board Application - General
.1 Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that internal services havebeen installed, tested, and approved; that conduits, pipes, cables, and outlets areplugged, capped, or covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are inplace.
.2 Extend board into door, window, and other openings, reveals, behind fitments, and otherapplied items and on metal stud partitions to structure above unless indicated otherwise.
.3 Apply board with long dimension perpendicular to supports, unless otherwise indicated.
.4 Locate joints on opposite sides of partitions on different studs, and at least 305 mm (12")from opening jambs.
.5 Install board to minimize joints, and align end joints to be the least objectionable (wherethey are unavoidable), according to the indicated lighting design. Locate joints in ceilingswhere least prominently discerned, and never line them up with opening edges.
.6 Form smooth joints at ends and at field cut edges of board panels.
.7 Fasten board to metal support members by metal gypsum board screws, 9.5 mm(0.374") minimum to, and 12.7 mm (1/2") maximum from, center of joints. Space screws:
.1 At fire rated board as per fire-rated assembly.
.2 At typical board walls at 400 mm (16") on centre at edges and field unlessotherwise required.
.3 At typical board ceilings at 305 mm (12") on centre at edges and field unlessotherwise required.
.8 Offset gypsum board joints 150 mm (6") minimum from corners of openings.
.9 Gypsum panel product joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge ofan opening unless control joints are to be installed at these locations.
3.4 Acoustic Wall Assemblies
.1 Acoustical sealant and plaster:
.1 Apply acoustical sealant to seal gaps in accordance with applicable requirementsof ASTM C919-08.
.2 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly betweengypsum board and adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling assembly of partitions whichcontain sound attenuation insulation, and where noted.
.3 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly at top andbottom of control joints.
.4 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal intersections with sound-isolatingpartitions that are extended to reduce sound flanking paths.
.5 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal joint between penetrations and gypsumboard.
.6 Completely seal objects at wall and gypsum board penetrations (such aselectrical boxes, piping, and fasteners) with heavy coating of premixed perliteplaster.
.7 Apply sealant to clean, dry surfaces.
.2 Sound attenuation insulation:
.1 Install sound attenuation insulation to fill cavity unless otherwise indicated.
.2 Trim insulation to provide close-fit contact to framing assemblies and fill thepartition cavity or acoustic insulation assemblies to thicknesses specified orindicated.
.3 Maintain air space between backs of sound attenuation insulation and back ofopposite partition face layer, as applicable.
.4 Cut insulation to provide close-fit contact around electrical boxes, pipes, andother obstructions and penetrations through and within acoustic assemblies.
.5 Extend acoustic partition assemblies to underside of structure. Incorporateapproved provision to prevent transmittance of structural deflection to partitionassembly.
.6 Staple sound attenuation insulation where required by manufacturer's installationinstructions.
.7 Where studs are not faced with gypsum board on both sides, mechanically fastenwire mesh to non-faced side of stud to retain insulation.
.8 Mechanically attach sound attenuation insulation in wall assemblies where cavityof wall assembly is greater than 150 mm (6").
.9 Secure insulation in such a manner that it will not sag or settle away fromrequired locations.
.3 Sound flanking paths:
.1 Where sound rated partition walls intersect non rated gypsum board partitionwalls, extend sound rated construction to completely close sound flanking pathsthrough non rated construction.
.2 Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersectingpartitions.
3.5 Finishing
.1 Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with GA-214.
.1 Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher levelof finish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.
.2 Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at applied hard surfaces, except remove toolmarks and ridges.
.3 Level 4: Exposed gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level isindicated.
.2 Interior gypsum board:
.1 Prefill:
.1 Use setting-type joint compound. Mix joint compound according tomanufacturer's directions.
.2 Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge.
.3 Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire rated partitions.
.4 Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden.
.5 Joint gaps not greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shall be prefilled with either ready-mix or setting type joint compound; joint gaps greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shallbe prefilled with setting-type joint compound.
.2 Taping (Level 1):
.1 Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints.
.2 Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.
.3 Remove excess compound.
.4 Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.
.3 First coat (Level 2):
.1 Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound.
.2 Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow todry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and overexposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.
.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 1 coat of jointcompound.
.4 Second coat (Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat ofcompound over tape and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge offirst coat.
.1 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 2 separatecoats of joint compound.
.5 Third coat (Level 4):
.1 After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat tojoints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge ofsecond coat.
.2 Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand,to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready forapplication of finish.
.3 Finished joints will be accepted with a camber not greater than 1 mm (1/32")and shall be seamless, plumb, true and flush and with square, neat corners.
.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 3 separatecoats of joint compound.
.3 Joint compound:
.1 Apply finish coat of compound feathering 75 to 100 mm (3” to 4”) beyond tapeedges.
.2 Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 0.79 mm(1/32”).
.4 Trim:
.1 Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fastengypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.
.2 Install metal corner beads at external corners.
.3 Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum base would otherwisebe exposed or semi exposed, and where gypsum base terminates againstdissimilar material.
.4 Erect beads plumb or level, with minimum joints.
.5 Control joints:
.1 Provide control joints set in board facing. Support control joints with studs orfurring channels on both sides of joint.
.2 Provide control joints in required locations.
.1 Review control joint locations with Consultant prior to installation.
.3 Full height door frames shall be considered equivalent to a control joint.
.4 Install control joints where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a constructionjoint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the building structure.
.5 Install control joints where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straightplane exceeding 9100 mm (30 linear feet).
.1 With perimeter relief: Linear dimensions between control joints shall notexceed 15000 mm (50 ft) and total area between control joints shall notexceed 230 m² (2500 ft²).
.2 Without perimeter relief: Linear dimensions between control joints shall notexceed 9100 mm (30 ft) and total area between control joints shall notexceed 84 m² (900 ft²).
.7 Install control joints where ceiling framing members change direction.
.8 Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with centre lines ofmullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements, where accepted byConsultant.
.9 Install control joints straight and true.
.10 Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling heightframes shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. Ifcontrol joints are not used, additional reinforcement is required at corners todistribute concentrated stresses.
.11 Board joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge of an openingunless control joints are to be installed at these locations.
3.6 Fire Separations
.1 Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with assembly listing requirements in order toobtain fire ratings indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Vertical bulkheads in ceiling spaces over fire rated partitions, doors and the like shallhave same fire rating as the partition over which they occur. Such bulkheads shall be ofgypsum board construction unless otherwise indicated.
.3 Use fire rated gypsum wallboard as specified.
.4 Where lighting fixtures, diffusers, and the like are recessed into fire rated ceilings orbulkheads, provide enclosure to maintain required fire rating. Form removable panel togive access to fixture outlet box.
.5 Where fire hose cabinets or other fixtures or equipment are recessed in fire rated wallsor partitions, provide gypsum board enclosure or backing to maintain required fire rating,unless otherwise detailed.
3.7 Special Cleaning
.1 Remove debris and rubbish from wall and ceiling cavities before enclosing with board.
.2 Clean up and remove surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work of thissection upon completion.
.3 Clean off beads, casings, joint compound droppings and the like, leave the work of thissection ready for painting trades.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Hard surface tiling.
.2 Thin-set adhesives for tiling.
.3 Trim accessories.
1.3 Referenced Standards
.1 ANSI - American Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile.
.2 Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (“TTMAC”) Specification Guide09 30 00 Tile Installation Manual TTMAC 2012-2014 Specification Guide 09 30 00, TileInstallation Manual.
1.4 Quality Assurance
.1 Execute work of this section only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant,equipment, and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have beenresponsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of atleast the immediate past 5 years.
.2 Subcontractor shall be a member company in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile andMarble Association of Canada and have been a member for at least the past 5 years.
.3 Tile products shall be from same production run, dye lot, calibre, and batch number. Ifshading variation is evident, notify Consultant prior to installation.
1.5 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Verification samples:
.1 Submit one 300 mm (12") x 300 mm (12") size tile panel complete with groutcolour specified mounted to 19 mm (3/4") plywood backer.
.3 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.2 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for Products proposed for use inthe work of this section.
.4 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance data:
.1 Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in the maintenance manuals.
.1 Execute work of this section while temperature is maintained within safe workingtemperatures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for a period of72 hours before, during and following installation. Avoid concentrated or irregular heatingduring curing period.
.2 Protect work of this section against damage by work of other sections for a minimum of72 hours after application of grouting.
1.7 Sequencing and Scheduling
.1 Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.
1.8 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2– PRODUCTS
2.1 Tile Products
.1 Porcelain tile:
.1 Acceptable Product:
.1 Ceramiche Caesar Tecnolito as distributed by OSI Hard Surfaces.
.1 Size, colour, and finish: Refer to Abbreviation Schedule.
2.2 Adhesive and Mortar Materials
.1 Select from the following thin-set adhesives:
.1 Latex modified Portland cement thin bed mortar gauged:
.1 Interior and exterior grade.
.2 ANSI A118.4-2011 and ANSI A118.11-2011.
.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.
.4 Acceptable Products:
.1 Flextile ‘51’ mixed with Flextile ‘44’.
.2 Laticrete 'Laticrete 4237 Latex Thin Set Liquid' with 'Portland 211Crete Filler Powder'.
.3 Mapei 'KERALASTIC' mixed with 'KERABOND'.
.2 Enriched, modified, Portland cement thin bed mortar, single component, withintegral polymer:
.1 Interior and exterior grade.
.2 ANSI A118.4-2011 and ANSI A118.11-2011.
.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.
.3 Grout sealer: as recommended by grout manufacturer.
2.4 Accessories and Related Materials
.1 Trim accessories:
.1 Edge protection: Provide tile edge trim protection to match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
.1 Ensure compatibility of Products supplied under this section, and which bear contactwith substrate.
.2 Before work of this section commences, examine the areas to be covered and report anyflaw or adverse conditions in writing to the Contractor and the Consultant. Do notproceed with work until surfaces and conditions comply with the requirements indicatedin the manufacturer's instructions and in ANSI A108.5-2011 specification.
.3 Miscalibrated tiles, tiles with chipped corners, tiles with holes, will not be accepted forinstallation.
.4 Inspect tiles for colour variation. Tiles presenting noticeable variations shall be carefullyselected, set aside and used in areas where they fit in the pattern homogeneously.Provide for appropriate lighting equipment in addition to existing lighting in the immediatearea where the installation is being performed so that any shade differences which arenormally very slight can be identified easily.
3.2 Preparation
.1 Roughen surfaces with previously painted glossy finishes by sandpaper or otherabrasive medium, and completely remove finishes which are not compatible withproducts specified under this section.
.2 Completely remove contaminants and deleterious substances and debris which mayprevent, reduce, and affect adhesion or performance or may act as bond breaker.
.3 Prime gypsum, wood or porous concrete with primer, brush or roller applied at fullstrength in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 Mixing
.1 Mix mortars, additives and grouts in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
.2 Rotating blade mechanical mixer: Pour latex additive, start mixer and add sand first,followed by Portland cement. Mix no mortar in same mixer as a dissimilar type of mortarunless the mixer is first thoroughly washed clean.
.3 Pail batch mixing with low revolution drill mixers as follows:
.1 Premix separately prior to adding to the latex additive.
.2 Pour latex additive into clean mixing vessel and add dry materials slowly whilemixing into a homogeneous and smooth consistency.
3.4 Installation
.1 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as indicatedherein.
.3 Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width.
.4 Provide edge protection at tile edges and corners to match existing, using maximumlength pieces.
.5 Using a damp towel, wipe off the back side of tile to remove any dust or other residuethat may be left over from the manufacturing process.
.6 Place as much tile as possible in one operation before setting bed reaches initial set.Clean back and remove bed when it has set before tile is laid.
.7 Prime materials and by methods specified by manufacturer of bond coat.
.8 Beat tiles in thoroughly and sufficiently to cause mortar ribs or notches to come togetherinto a continuous void free bed and allow the mortar to flow up partially into the jointspace to maximum of 1/3 the thickness of the tile.
.9 Obtain 100% mortar coverage with applicable requirements for back buttering of tile inreferenced TTMAC and ANSI A108-2011 series of tile installation standards.
.10 Remove any excess setting material from the joint area so that 2/3 of the depth of the tileis available for grouting.
.11 Remove smudges or smears of setting material from the tile surface with a damp spongeor cloth immediately after final adjustment and beat-in while the mortar is fresh.
.12 Do necessary cutting and drilling of fixtures, fittings, and built-in or penetrating unitswithout marring the tile. Replace all cracked or damaged tile.
.13 Cut tiles to conform to irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along outer edges.Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straightedge.
.14 Install tiles to provide even distribution of shading, colour, and characteristics.
3.5 Trim Accessories Installation.
.1 Coordinate transitions with work of other sections.
.2 Install trims in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
.3 Install in continuous lengths.
.4 Scribe and fit to obstructions.
.5 Cope mitre corners.
3.6 Grouting
.1 Apply grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.1 Allow tile installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature of21°C prior to grouting.
.2 Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris, water or tile spacers and face of tilesare clean.
.3 Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured tileunits that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning.
.4 Install grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1-2011 and ANSIA108.10-2011.
.5 Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints usingdiagonal strokes (45° angle).
.6 Pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Stroke diagonally to remove excess groutand to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints.
.7 Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm. Drag a clean toweldampened with water, or wipe with a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally overthe veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.”
.8 Once excess grout is removed, begin cleaning grout haze before grout is fullycured. Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the dampsponge to dissolve grout film/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over thescrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Rinse towel/sponge frequently and changerinse water at least every 2 m² (200 ft²). Repeat this cleaning sequence again ifgrout haze is still present.
.9 Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth.Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and anylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces anddissolve haze/film.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Acoustical tile ceiling systems.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2 Single source responsibility: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspensionsystem from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality inappearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Productsinstalled as part of the work of this section shall be from same production run.
.3 Quality control to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit sample of each component of ceiling system. Samples shall fullyrepresent materials to be supplied in colour, texture, finish and construction.
.2 Submit samples, load test data and design tables for each type of insert to beused in the Work for hanger supports.
.4 Certificate of compliance:
.1 Submit certificate of compliance stating that the suspension system provided,including materials and installation, comply with the requirements of the ContractDocuments.
.5 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance data:
.1 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for acoustical ceiling systemsfor incorporation into the maintenance manuals.
.1 Design suspension systems for a maximum mid-span deflection not exceeding L/360 inaccordance with ASTM C635/C635M-07 deflection test.
.2 Design suspension system to support safely, and without distortion, the superimposedloads of:
.1 Air supply diffusers and return grilles.
.2 Lighting fixtures.
1.6 Environmental Requirements
.1 Interior temperature of building to range from 15°C to 30°C and relative humidity of notmore than 70% before and during installation. Maintain uniform temperatures for 72hours prior to commencement of the work of this section and maintain temperature untilcompletion of the work of this section.
1.7 Coordination
.1 Cooperate with mechanical and electrical Subcontractors.
.2 Coordinate layout and installation of acoustic ceiling units and suspension systemscomponents with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including lightfixtures, HVAC equipment, partition system, fire suppression system components andother work required to be incorporated in or coordinated with the ceiling system.
1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1 Ship exposed members and mouldings in rigid crates to avoid damage. Bent ordeformed material shall be rejected. Baked enamelled members shall be suitablywrapped and protected against damage.
.2 Deliver acoustical ceiling units to the Place of the Work in original, unopened packagesand store in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage frommoisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
.3 Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature andstabilized moisture content.
.4 Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units.
1.9 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Products by one of the followingmanufacturers:
.4 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 Acoustical Tiles
.1 Lay-in acoustical tiles:
.1 Classification: Type XII, Form 2, Pattern E in accordance with ASTM E1264-08.
.2 Size: 610 mm x 1220 mm x 25 mm.
.3 NRC:0.95
.4 Material and surface finish: Fibreglass with acoustically transparent membraneand factory-applied latex paint surface finish.
.5 Surface texture: Fine.
.6 Edge: Square tegular.
.7 Colour: White.
.8 Flame Spread: Class A Flame Spread 25 or under, to CAN/ULC-S102-03.
.9 Acceptable Products:
.1 Armstrong World Industries ‘Optima Open Plan 3257’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.3 Metal Suspension Systems
.1 Hanger anchorage devices: Screws, clips, bolts, concrete inserts or other devicesapplicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whosesuitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices orby certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load supported except size directpull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads.
.2 Concrete hanger anchors; post installed: Steel eye bolts and nuts to suit ceiling hangerswith capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times that imposed by ceilingconstruction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488/E488M-10, conducted by aqualified independent testing laboratory.
.1 Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor 'TW-1614' or Readi-Tie-Drive 'TD4-112' tie wire anchorby ITW Ramset/Red Head.
.2 Kwik-Bolt II 'HCKB 1/4' tie wire anchor by Hilti Corporation.
.3 Fasteners exposed to weather, condensation, and corrosion: Zinc-plated orstainless steel fasteners in applicable product lines specified in precedingparagraphs.
.3 Hangers and tie wire: Galvanized wire, recommended by manufacturer of suspensionsystem, minimum 2.66 mm (0.1") (12 gauge).
.1 Splices, clips, and perimeter moulding, of manufacturer's standard type to suitthe applicable conditions unless special conditions and access area are shown orspecified.
.5 Narrow suspension system, non fire-rated:
.1 Intermediate duty to ASTM C635/C635M-07, 14 mm (9/16") interlocking teesystem, designed to support acoustical panels in patterns indicated withdeflection of main tees less than L/360, consisting of main tees and cross tees.The system shall provide lock joint intersections of cross and main tees.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 Armstrong World Industries ‘Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee Systems’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.4 Metal Finish
.1 Metal exposed in finished work shall have a pre-coated baked enamel finish in non-yellowing colour. Submit paint formulation of grid system to lighting fixture, speakergrille, sprinkler and diffuser manufacturers to ensure consistency of colour, sheen andtexture of all exposed metal components in the ceiling assemblies.
.2 Colour shall be: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation - General
.1 Install ceiling panels and metal suspension system in accordance with manufacturer'sdirections. Where manufacturer's directions are at variance with Contract Documents,notify Consultant before proceeding with installation.
.2 Do not commence installation until all work above suspended ceiling has beencompleted, inspected and accepted.
3.2 Installation - Suspension System
.1 Install suspension system rigid, secure, square, level and plumb, framed and erected tomaintain dimensions and contours indicated, and in accordance with ASTM C636 /C636M - 08, CISCA installation standards and any other applicable national or localcode requirements. Make allowance for thermal and structural movement.
.2 Attach hangers to structure with inserts and hanger supports. Do not use powderactivated fasteners.
.3 Support hangers for suspended ceiling grid independent of walls, columns, pipes andducts.
.4 Space hangers for ceilings at maximum 1220 mm (48") on centre in both directions.Provide additional hangers as required to comply with manufacturer’s written installationinstructions.
.5 Locate hangers at not more than 150 mm (6") from ends of main tee members.
.6 Install exposed tee members to pattern indicated. Securely attach hangers to main teemembers.
.7 Exposed tees shall be as long as possible to minimize joints. Make joints square, tight,flush and reinforce with splines. Distribute joints to prevent clustering in one area.
.8 Space tee bars to suit ceiling panels and as detailed, and to accommodate lightingfixtures, diffusers and return grilles.
.9 Cooperate in the installation of ceiling systems, making adjustments where required toensure that the lighting fixtures, supply diffusers, exhaust grilles and other built-in itemsproperly fit into ceiling module and finish flush with rest of ceiling.
.10 Restrict creep inside module panels so that in all cases strips are centred on modulelines.
.11 Install edge moulding as detailed where ceiling abuts vertical surfaces. Lap corners, usemaximum lengths to minimize joints. Make joints square, tight and flush.
3.3 Installation - Tiles
.1 Take precautions during installation to ensure tile edges are not chipped or otherwisedamaged.
.2 Minimize field cutting. Rectify cut tile edges of tile to match factory cut edge profile andcolour.
.3 Install acoustical tiles to form horizontal and level ceiling with all parts flush and jointsbutted tightly to hairline appearance.
.4 Distribute variations in colour and texture of panels to obtain a uniform appearance.
3.4 Installation - Tolerances
.1 Allowable tolerances: to ASTM C636 / C636M - 08.
.2 Install suspension systems level to tolerance of 1:1200.
.3 Install edge mouldings level to tolerance of 3 mm in 3660 mm (1/8" in 12'-0").
3.5 Cleaning and Completion
.1 Carefully examine suspended acoustical ceilings on completion and replace uneven ordefective or damaged materials, eliminate all waves, remedy damaged exposed finishedsurfaces and remove soiled or stained areas.
.2 Clean dirty and discoloured surfaces of acoustical units and suspension systemaccording to manufacturer's recommendations.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2 Products installed as part of the work of this section shall be from same production run.
1.3 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit 305 mm (12") long samples of each colour and type of base material.Include outside corner of base.
.4 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance data:
.1 Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in the maintenance manuals.
1.4 Environmental Requirements
.1 Temperature of room and materials shall be at least 18°C and 21°C for 48 hours before,during and 7 days after the installation of resilient accessories.
.2 Applications exposed to intense or direct sunlight, protect Products during theconditioning, installation, and adhesive curing periods, by covering the light source.
.3 Allow coiled wall base to lay flat for at least 24 hours at 18°C prior to installation, andmaintain this temperature during installation.
1.5 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
.1 Resilient base:
.1 Acceptable Product:
.1 TightLock Resilient Wall Base, as manufactured by Johnsonite, 111.1 mm (4-3/8") nominal overall height, in a 6.3 mm (1/4") tapered wedge thickness.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2 Block wall filler: Latex filler, "Planicrete AC" by Mapei Canada Ltd., "43 Thin-Set MortarAdditive and 53 Floor Mix" by Flextile Ltd. or waterproof filler recommended by flooringmanufacturer.
.3 Adhesive:
.1 Porous wall surfaces: as recommended by base manufacturer.
.2 Non-porous wall surfaces (i.e.: metal, epoxy paint, ceramics): as recommendedby base manufacturer.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
.1 Substrate shall be solid, dry, clean, smooth, free of deleterious materials and free ofvoids, gaps, cracks, ridges, or other defects which will preclude adequate adhesion, orwill ghost or telegraph through finished base installation.
.2 Examine walls to ensure that surfaces are protected against entry of water and moisture.
3.2 Preparation
.1 Clean and remove deleterious materials which will preclude adequate adhesion.
.2 Fill gaps, voids, and cracks, and remove ridges, or other defects which will ghost ortelegraph through finished base installation.
.3 Perform compatibility test with primer/adhesive and substrate.
3.3 Installation of Resilient Base
.1 Spread adhesive to ribbed surface (back) of wall base with a 3 mm (1/8") square-notched trowel; allow slight set-up, then bring base into contact with substrate. Ensurefull adhesion of base to substrate. Adhesive should cover 80% of back surface. Leave a6 mm (1/4") uncovered space at the top of the wall base to prevent the adhesive fromoozing onto the wall above the base when installed.
.2 Position wall base on wall surface and roll with hand roller. Always roll back to startingpoint to prevent stretching the wall base.
.3 Set base to ensure installation over finished flooring material is free of gaps.
.4 Install base in longest lengths possible, minimum 2440 mm (8’). Adhere toe of base tosubstrate, and ensure edge of toe is straight.
.5 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.
.6 Joints shall be tightly fitted, straight and vertical, and not less than 610 mm (24") fromcorners.
.7 Provide joints in base over substrate control joints.
.8 Field-made inside corners:
.1 Install wall base and terminate into the corner.
.2 Position another piece of wall base on opposing wall, without adhesive,approximately 25 mm (1") from the installed piece.
.3 Utilizing the dividers, place the hooked end at the top of the installed piece andthe pointer end on the top of the uninstalled piece. Carefully, move the dividersdownward in a straight vertical motion, allowing the hooked end of the dividers tofollow the profile of the installed piece. At the same time, place adequatepressure on the pointer end to transfer and/or scribe the profile onto the surfaceof the uninstalled piece.
.4 Use a utility knife to cut the pattern on the uninstalled wall base, apply adhesive,and position the trimmed section into place.
.9 Field-made outside corners:
.1 Stop application of adhesive to wall base approximately 450 mm (18") from theoutside corner of the wall.
.2 Position the wall base at the corner and pencil line the back of the wall basewhere the bend is desired.
.3 Lay the wall base on the floor with the back up. Utilizing a top-set or pull-typegouge tool, make a shallow notch along the pencil line.
.4 Notch depth should not exceed one-quarter the total thickness of the wall base.
.5 Reposition the wall base corner on the wall. The corner of the wall should fitsnugly into the notched recess on the back of the wall base.
.6 Apply adhesive and roll firmly into place.
3.4 Installation Tolerances
.1 Install straight and level to variation of 3 mm (1/8”) over 3 m (10’-0”).
3.5 Cleaning
.1 Remove adhesive from surfaces as work progresses in manner described bymanufacturer. Remove wet adhesive with a water dampened cloth. If adhesive hasdried, use a cloth dampened with mineral spirits.
.2 Wash surfaces using non-phosphate detergent to remove silicone, wax, dirt and dustusing rotary scrubbing machines fitted with nylon brushes. Wash with neutral milddetergent and water, thoroughly buff dry with smooth wool pad. Do not apply any othercompounds.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Referenced Standards
.1 Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Carpet Installation Standard – 2011.
1.3 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers with:
.1 Minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.3 Single source responsibility: Products installed as part of the work of this section shallbe from same production run.
1.4 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data sheets:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit samples of each type and colour of carpet and edge trim, for acceptanceof colour and construction by Consultant. Obtain acceptance from Consultantprior to ordering material.
.2 Minimum sample sizes:
.1 Broadloom carpet: 150 mm (6") x 150 mm (6").
.2 Edge trim: 150 mm (6") lengths.
.4 Manufacturer’s installation instructions:
.1 Submit carpet and adhesive manufacturer's written installation recommendationsfor each type of substrate required.
.2 Identify trowel notch size and shape, and required adhesive coverage rates foreach specified carpet material for installation of specified materials.
.5 Shop drawings:
.1 Seaming and layout drawings: Submit for review drawings of seam locations, piledirection, and the location and type of accessories and other information anddetails pertaining to the installation of carpet.
.6 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit maintenance data and materials in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.1 Submit maintenance instructions for each type of carpet Product.Maintenance program shall be prepared by manufacturer, with list ofrecommended cleaning companies.
1.5 Environmental Requirements
.1 Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soilingof carpet during remainder of construction period.
.2 Do not begin carpet installation until painting and finishing work are complete andceilings and overhead work have been tested, approved, and completed.
.3 Temperature and humidity: Carpet must be installed when the indoor temperature andsubstrate is between 18-35°C with a maximum relative humidity of 65%. If ambienttemperatures are outside these parameters, the installation must not begin until theHVAC system is operational and these conditions are maintained at least 48 hoursbefore, during and 72 hours after completion.
.4 Concrete floors are to be dry, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.Maximum percentage of moisture acceptable is 1.4kg/93m2 (3 lb/1000 ft2) in a 24 hourperiod, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer’s printed literature.
.1 Testing requirements:
.1 Test for moisture vapour transmission in accordance with ASTM F1869-11.
.2 Test for surface pH.
.3 For each test type: Perform 3 tests for flooring applications less than 186 m2
(2000 square feet) in area, and 1 test per additional 93 m2 (1000 square feet).
.5 Concrete shall be prepared utilizing ASTM F710-11.
.6 In areas that are exposed to intense or direct sunlight, Products shall be protectedduring the conditioning, installation, and adhesive curing periods, by covering the lightsource.
1.6 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 Carpet
.1 (CPT1):
.1 Haphazard by Collins & Aikman complete with ER3 backing.
.2 Colour: Refer to Abbreviation Schedule.
.2 (CPT2):
.1 Haphazard by Collins & Aikman complete with ER3 backing.
.1 Carpet adhesives: in accordance with carpet manufacturer’s written installationinstructions.
.2 Carpet seaming adhesives: in accordance with carpet manufacturer’s writteninstallation instructions.
.2 Transition trim adhesive:
.1 Low VOC adhesive in accordance with transition material manufacturer’s writteninstallation instructions.
2.3 Miscellaneous Materials
.1 Latex crack filler: Compatible with adhesive and recommended by carpet manufacturer.
.2 Transition trim:
.1 Resilient transition trim:
.1 Tapered vinyl type as manufactured by Johnsonite or Finercraft to suit sitecondition for smooth transition.
.2 Colour to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
.1 Perform compatibility test with primer/adhesive and substrate.
.2 Ensure that environmental conditions have been provided as requested and specified.
.3 Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
3.2 General Installation Requirements
.1 Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard - 2011 by applicable installation method.
3.3 Substrate Requirements
.1 Do not commence work in areas where materials emitting moisture are not thoroughlydry, or where illumination is not characteristic of final illumination.
.2 Alkalinity and adhesion testing: Perform tests and proceed with installation only aftersubstrates pass testing. Document tests performed and submit in writing to Consultant.
.3 Grind smooth ridges and high spots in concrete surfaces to be carpeted.
.4 Fill cracks, fissures and depressions in concrete with latex emulsion filler compatible withadhesive.
.5 Surfaces shall be smooth and free from defects that may telegraph through surface ofcarpet.
.6 Completely remove contaminants and deleterious substances and debris which mayprevent, reduce, and affect adhesion or performance or may act as bond breaker.
.1 Comply with CRI – Carpet Installation Standard - 2011 by applicable installationmethod and manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
.2 Pile direction:
.1 Where two or more pieces of the same carpet are adjacent, the pile directionmust be the same unless otherwise specified. Uniform pile direction is notrequired with dissimilar carpet.
.2 Take pile direction into account by maintaining direction of pile throughoutconnected areas. Seams shall be straight, hairline and inconspicuous tovisual inspection from a distance of 1525 mm (5 ft) under normal lightingconditions.
.3 Relaxing/conditioning carpet: Unroll and allow to relax in the installation area fora minimum of 24 hours at a temperature between 18-35°C. Carpet must beadequately protected from soil, dust, moisture and other contaminants.
.4 Provide sealer over areas of substrate which have been patched.
.5 Layout the carpet according to the seaming diagram. Carpet must be cut 75 to100 mm (3 to 4”) longer than the area measurement. Where applicable, allow forpattern repeat. Align all carpet breadths to their proper position and trim seams.
.6 Select the appropriate adhesive and trowel notch configuration recommended bythe carpet, adhesive, manufacturers as applicable.
.7 Spread adhesive uniformly over the substrate areas with an appropriate trowel,leaving ridges of sufficient height to achieve full and complete coverage of thesubstrate and carpet backing, including penetration into the carpet backing’sdeepest recesses.
.8 After sufficient open time, press materials to be adhered into the adhesive androlled with an appropriate roller. Roll the carpet in both directions, but do not overroll. Comply with manufacture’s installation instructions for roller weight.
.9 Allow no traffic over installation until adhesives have fully cured.
.10 Finish and adhere securely along the wall line; with a smooth, neat appearancewhere no wall base materials are indicated; and concealed beneath basematerials where wall base materials are indicated. Base materials shall beinstalled after installation of carpet.
.11 Carpet shall be smooth and taut in every direction over the area of each space.
.12 Extend carpet into recesses and closets and around fixtures and service devices.
.13 Install carpet continuously over underfloor ducts, plumbing, cleanouts and similarfloor access covers. Neatly cut carpet to exact size of access covers.
.14 Installed carpet shall be free from perceptible variance in colour, stains,baldness, tears, fraying, patchwork, waviness, overtension and other defectsdetrimental to good performance and appearance.
.15 Install carpet accurately fitted at perimeter of rooms, cut with precision atcolumns, door frames and at other obstructions. At columns and otherpenetrations, cut carpet with maximum possible coverage.
.16 At control joints in substrate broadloom carpet may be run continuously acrossjoints. Leave 200 mm (8") of carpet over joint uncemented.
.2 Lay carpet to provide minimum seams, in accordance with seaming diagram.Locate seams only where necessary, at shortest width of areas, and in lighttraffic areas where possible. Seaming must be authorized by Consultant and willnot be permitted perpendicular to doorways or other main traffic ways.
.3 Edges that are used for seams must be prepared in strict compliance with carpetmanufacturer written installation instructions.
.4 Trim edges far enough into the material to maintain the structural integrity of thecarpet and to join edges without gaps or overlaps.
.5 Sealing edges: Prior to seaming, both trimmed edges of the carpet sections to bejoined shall be sealed with seam adhesive. Seam adhesive shall be applied in amanner that encapsulates both primary and secondary backings, minimumapplication of 3 mm (1/8-inch) bead. Do not allow seam adhesive into yarn at cut.
.6 Roll entire cemented area to ensure proper adhesion.
.7 Make floor cover plates accessible.
.8 Seams and carpet transitions at door locations shall occur under centre of closeddoors.
.9 Seam 100 mm (4") back from corners at intersection of perpendicular corridors.
.3 Installation; direct glue-down:
.1 Overlap carpet edges at joints and cut double thickness. Cut 2 pieces of carpet tolength, plus trim and lay in place, forming seam by method recommended by thebroadloom carpet manufacturer, and acceptable to Consultant. Snap a chalk lineto mark seam location.
.2 Turn each piece back approximately 914 mm (36") from seam and spreadadhesive uniformly for 610 mm (24") each side of chalk line.
.3 Unroll one piece of carpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles toward seam. Unrollsecond piece toward seam and work cut edge into adhesive to pick up sufficientadhesive to 'butter' seam. Roll out air bubbles in second piece toward seam.
.4 Roll up uncemented portion of first piece toward seam, apply adhesive and unrollcarpet into adhesive. Roll out air bubbles away from seam. Do likewise withsecond piece, but omit adhesive for 610 mm (24") from uncarpeted edge wherenext seam will occur. Cut off excess carpet.
3.5 Installation - Transition Trim
.1 Coordinate transitions with work of other sections and install transition trim to transitionsbetween carpet flooring and adjacent flooring.
.2 Set trim to height as required to cover carpet backing and not protrude above carpetfibres. Review heights with Consultant not later than 5 days prior to installation.
.3 Allow coiled resilient material to lay flat for at least 24 hours at 21°C prior to installation.
.6 Install straight to maximum allowable variation of 1:1000.
.7 Scribe and fit to obstructions.
.8 Fit joints tightly, straight and vertical as applicable and not less than 610 mm (24") fromcorners.
.9 Cope mitre corners.
3.6 Cleaning
.1 After installation is completed, clean and vacuum carpet of dirt, dust and foreignmaterials. Remove spots with suitable spot remover, remove cuttings, vacuum carpetthoroughly using approved commercial type equipment and leave clean. Providenecessary commercial vacuum cleaning equipment.
.2 Cover with protective membrane, lapping joints 100 mm (4") with adhesive tape.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2 Single source responsibility: Obtain system components for each panel system typefrom a single source with resources to provide Products of consistent quality inappearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1.3 Submittals
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product data:
.1 Submit Product data sheets for work of this section, complete with requiredanchors.
.3 Acoustic data:
.1 Submit acoustic data verifying that Products meet specified acoustic designrequirements.
.2 Acoustic data shall include detailed descriptions of both mounting method andtest method used to calculate acoustical performance, complete with referencesto codes and standards used in such calculations.
.3 Acoustic data submitted shall be from a certified acoustic testing agency.
.4 Samples:
.1 Submit minimum 150 mm (6") x 150 mm (6") samples of each component ofpanel system to Consultant for review.
.2 Samples shall fully represent materials to be supplied in colour, texture, finishand construction.
.5 Shop drawings:
.1 Submit shop drawings, indicating panel layout and system components, for eachpanel system.
.2 Include elevations, sections and large scale details, and indicate componentsand methods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings,finishes, and other fabrication information required for the work of this section.Indicate assembly joint lines.
.3 Submit coordination drawings indicating locations of concealed grounds, cutouts,plates, and other required fabrications.
.1 Provide two full size panels of each acoustical wall panel system. Includeexample of joint and edge treatment, finish, and standard of quality.
.2 Install at the Place of the Work to locations as designated by Consultant.
.7 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance data:
.1 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for acoustic wall panelsystems for incorporation into the maintenance manuals.
1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1 Ship panels in rigid crates to avoid damage. Bent or deformed material shall be rejected.
.2 Deliver panels and system components to the Place of the Work in original, unopenedpackages and store in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected againstdamage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
.3 Before installing panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisturecontent. Acclimatization period shall be 24 hours, minimum, longer as recommended bypanel manufacturer.
.4 Handle panels to avoid chipping edges or damaging units.
1.5 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Products by one of the followingmanufacturers:
.1 Decoustics.
.2 Sound Solutions Inc.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 Acoustic Panels
.1 Materials:
.1 Core: Resin edge-hardened 96 kg/m3 (6 lb/ft3) to 112 kg/m3 (7 lb/ft3) fibreglass25.4 mm (1") thick.
.2 Fabric: Refer to Abbreviation Schedule.
.1 Fabric corners are fully tailored (no exposed darting).
.2 Acoustical performance: NRC 0.8 minimum in accordance with ASTM C423-09a.
.1 Fabric must conform to Class A flamespread rating of 25 or under in accordancewith CAN/ULC-S102-03.
.2 Fabrics that do not meet the CAN/ULC-S102-03 test requirements will be flametreated to meet NFPA 701 Small or Large Scale Vertical Burn tests unlessinherently flame retardant.
.6 Acceptable Products:
.1 Decoustics Acoustic Wall Panels AP.
.2 Sound Solutions Avanti Acoustical Wall Panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation - Panels
.1 Do not start installation until wet work is completed and dried out to a degree acceptableto panel manufacturer before installation is commenced. Maintain uniform temperaturesof at least 16°C for 72 hours prior to commencement of the work of this section andmaintain temperature until completion of the work of this section.
.2 Do not commence installation until work of other sections behind panels has beencompleted, inspected and accepted by Consultant.
.3 Install acoustical panels to clean, dry and firm substrates.
.4 Install acoustical panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written installationinstructions.
.5 Review acoustic panel layout with Consultant prior to commencing installation.
.6 Panels shall have no visible fastenings.
.7 Install fabric systems with grain patterns and seams level, plumb and true.
.8 Mounting method:
.1 Direct mounted with concealed slide and engage z-clips and wall clips.
.2 Panels shall be installed aligned without reveals or gaps between butted panels.
3.2 Installation Tolerances
.1 Install panels plumb, level, tight and secured.
.2 Comply with the following maximum tolerances:
.1 Plumb and level: Maximum 3 mm (1/8").
.2 Variation from indicated position: plus/minus 3 mm (1/8").
3.3 Cleaning and Completion
.1 Carefully examine work of this section on completion and replace uneven or defectivematerials, eliminate all waves, remedy damaged exposed finished surfaces and removesoiled or stained areas.
.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.
1.2 Section Includes
.1 Painting of interior paintable surfaces.
1.3 Paintable and Non-Paintable Surfaces
.1 Paint and finish paintable surfaces included in the Work, except where excluded by theContract Documents.
.2 The following surfaces are considered non-paintable, except as otherwise indicated orscheduled:
.1 Material and equipment furnished prime and finish painted.
.2 Stainless steel, weathering steel, copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel,anodized or lacquered or mill finished aluminum, Monel metal.
.3 Concealed surfaces.
.4 Manufactured finish materials.
1.4 Reference Standards
.1 Except where more stringent requirements are specified, the following referencestandard shall govern the work of this section:
.1 Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual (MPIManual), including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and ApprovedProduct List, latest edition, and referenced herein as the MPI Manual, as issuedby the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
1.5 Quality Assurance
.1 Qualifications of applicators:
.1 Applicators shall have minimum of 5 years proven satisfactory paintingexperience of projects of similar size and class subject to Consultant’s approval.
.2 Only qualified journeymen who have a “Tradesman Qualification Certificate ofProficiency” shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices shall work under thedirect supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
.2 Quality standard: Materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirementsof latest edition of Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master PaintersInstitute (MPI) (hereafter referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the localMPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
.3 Painting Subcontractor shall obtain from Contractor written confirmation of specificsurface preparation procedures and primers used for fabricated steel items from thefabricator/Supplier to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coatmaterials to be used before painting any such work.
.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 MPI Manual:
.1 Submit 1 copy of MPI Manual – latest edition, and maintain at site office forreference.
.3 Product data and list of Products:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section as identified in ‘Approved Product List’ section of the MPIPainting Manual. Correlate Products to Schedule furnished by Consultant.
.4 Samples and colours:
.1 Colours: Consultant will furnish paint colour numbers and colour scheduleindicating colour locations.
.2 Samples for initial selection:
.1 Submit manufacturer's colour charts showing full range of colours available,including light and deep dark tones, for each type of finish material indicatedfor colour selection by Consultant.
.2 Consultant shall have complete freedom in choice of colours in compilingcolour schedule and will not necessarily select colours from standard colourcharts of manufacturer of Products specified.
.1 Colour schedule: in accordance with Room Finish Schedule andAbbreviation Schedule.
.3 Submit 3 drawdowns of each selected colour for review by Consultant andresubmit to Consultant as required to obtain final approval. Drawdown to beof specified colour, sheen, and paint formula for applicable surface.
.3 Samples for verification:
.1 Submit 3 samples on 200 mm x 305 mm (8"x 12") material of same type asthat on which coating is to be applied, for Consultant's approval, at least 30days before materials are required.
.2 Identify each sample as to Project, finish, formula, colour name, number,gloss name and number, date and name of Contractor and paintingSubcontractor.
.3 Resubmit as required until colours and gloss value are approved.
.5 Closeout submittals:
.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2 Maintenance materials:
.1 Provide one sealed container, 4 litres (1 gallon) capacity of each paintproduct in each colour used in the Work for Owner’s maintenance use.Containers shall be new, clearly labelled with manufacturer's name, type ofpaint, colour and colour number. Store at Place of the Work where directedby Owner.
.1 Comply with environmental requirements of MPI Manual.
.2 Perform no painting work when ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10°C.
.3 Perform no painting work when relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is lessthan 3°C (5°F) variance between air/surface temperature.
.4 Check moisture content of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronicmoisture meter approved by paint manufacturer, and Consultant, or other approvedmethod. Maximum moisture contents shall be in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations and as follows:
.1 Gypsum board and plaster: Maximum 12%.
1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1 Deliver painting materials in sealed, original labelled containers bearing manufacturer’sname, brand name, type of paint or coating and colour designation, standardcompliance, materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and applicationrequirements.
.2 Store paint Products and materials in original labelled containers in secure (lockable),dry, heated and well ventilated single designated area meeting minimum requirements ofboth paint manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction, and at a minimum ambienttemperature of 7°C.
.3 Protect floor and wall surfaces of storage area. Protect floors with sheets or cleanplywood or metal pans where mixing is being carried out.
1.9 Warranty
.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
.2 Throughout warranty period, painting systems shall remain free from failure due tocauses including: material failure; surface preparation less than that specified; and paintfilm thickness less than that specified, or when not specified, less than that coveragerecommended by manufacturer.
.3 Presence of any of following during the warranty period shall constitute failure: visiblecorrosion; film peeling, blistering, checking, scaling, embrittling or general filmdisintegration; and poor adhesion as determined by tape "peel-off" test procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
.1 Only Products from the following manufacturers and paint lines shall be used in theWork.
.1 Benjamin Moore & Co. Limited. ‘Eco Spec’.
.2 Dulux Paints (a division of Akzonobel) ‘Lifemaster’.
.3 Sherwin-Williams Canada Inc. ‘Harmony’.
.2 Paint and materials shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
.3 Paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or curefree of blemishes or sags.
.4 Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developedratings designated by building code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 Equipment
.1 Painting and coating equipment in accordance with written requirements of MPI Manual.
2.3 Mixing and Tinting
.1 Unless otherwise specified, paints shall be ready-mixed. Re-mix prior to application toensure colour and gloss uniformity.
.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in accordance withmanufacturer’s written instructions.
.3 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to Place of the Work.
.4 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.4 Finish and Colours
.1 Paint finishes shall be as selected by the Consultant. Locations as indicated orscheduled.
.2 Colours: Prior to beginning painting work, Subcontractor will be furnished with copy ofcolour schedule. Colours as selected by Consultant.
2.5 Gloss / Sheen Ratings
.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with thefollowing MPI values:
GlossLevel
Description Units@ 60 degrees
Units@ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 maximum
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 minimum
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85G7 High-Gloss finish > 85
.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted onFinish Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Conditions of Surfaces
.1 Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine surfaces scheduledto be painted.
.2 Check moisture content and pH of surfaces to be painted in accordance with paragraphabove titled Environmental Requirements.
.3 Inspect surfaces to be coated for gouges, marks, nibs, and other defects and properlyprepare patching, filling, smoothing or other surface preparation necessary to ensuresatisfactory finish.
.4 Report in writing any condition adversely affecting work of this section.
.5 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory. Remove dust,grease, rust, scale and extraneous matter, tool and machine marks and insects fromsurfaces which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and acceptable finish.
3.2 Preparation
.1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regardto specific requirements.
3.3 Application
.1 Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until environmental conditions(heating, ventilation, lighting and completion of work of other sections) are acceptable forapplications of Products.
.2 Apply primer and paint in accordance with MPI Manual Premium Grade finishrequirements.
.3 Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning whenenvironmental conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination ormanufacturer’s paint specifications require earlier applications.
.4 Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied atproper consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.5 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
.6 Unless otherwise approved by Consultant, apply a minimum of 4 coats of paint wheredeep or bright colours are used to achieve satisfactory results.
.7 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to removedefects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39”).
.8 Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer’sdirections state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a followingcoat is applied.
.10 Exposed means visible in complete work including interiors of cupboards and closets,tops of doors, trim, and the like, whether in sight line or not, including behind surfacemounted fixtures and heating units.
.11 Consultant shall have right to make changes in colour tone of finishes prior to final coatto obtain desired results without additional cost to Owner.
.12 Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware, registers, radiatorsand covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacentsurfaces in terms of colour, texture and sheen, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.
.1 Finish paint primed mechanical and electrical items with 2 coats of paint. Include for thefollowing list unless otherwise indicated:
.1 Diffusers
.2 Grilles
.2 Paint work to match adjacent walls and ceilings unless directed otherwise.
.3 Air diffusers shall be primed and finished with 2 coats of paint of same colour and sheenas ducts and/or ceiling.
3.5 Field Quality Control / Standard of Acceptance
.1 Painted interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any ofthe following defects are apparent to the Consultant:
.1 Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding orshadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, andforeign materials in paint coatings.
.2 Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
.3 Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributorycause.
.4 Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protectionfrom weather.
.5 Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spraypaint, etc.).
.2 Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evidentunder final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces:
.1 Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewingangles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
.2 Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewingangles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
.3 Visible defects are evident on ceiling and other overhead surfaces when viewedat normal viewing angles.
.4 When final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen,texture, and hiding across full surface area.
.3 Painted surfaces rejected by the Consultant shall be made good at the expense of theSubcontractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areaswithout sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damagedpaint shall be removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.
.1 Promptly as work proceeds and on completion of Work, remove paint where spilled,splashed or spattered during the progress of the Work keep the premises free fromunnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at theconclusion of the work leave the premises clean.
3.7 Interior Paint Systems
.1 System references listed are based on MPI Manual and are Premium Grade, unlessotherwise indicated:
.1 Galvanized and zinc coated metal:
.1 One (1) coat Acrylic Primer, equal to Devoe ‘Devflex 4360’.
.2 Two (2) coats Acrylic Enamel, = equal to Devoe ‘Devflex 4206’, semi-gloss.
.2 Gypsum board:
.1 One (1) coat high hide Primer/Sealer, equal to Dulux X-Pert Interior LatexPrimer/Sealer ‘11000’
.2 Two (2) coats Acrylic Latex, equal to Dulux Lifemaster Series.
.1 Gloss levels:
.1 Vertical surfaces: Satin or eggshell.
.2 Horizontal surfaces: Flat.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION ISSUED FOR TENDER
CROSSEY
ENGINEERING LTD
SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 CEL PROJECT NO.13210 REV.B
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 Mechanical Specifications Table of Contents 15010 Mechanical General Provisions 15013 Mechanical Project Schedule Requirement 15050 Commissioning 15060 Hangers and Supports 15075 Access Doors 15090 Identification MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15170 Motors and Wiring Methods SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 15240 Sound Attenuation 15241 Vibration Isolation MECHANICAL INSULATION 15260 Thermal Insulation for Piping 15270 Thermal Insulation for Ducting FIRE PROTECTION 15300 Fire Protection - General 15330 Sprinkler System PLUMBING 15413 Storm, Sanitary, and Pumped Drainage Piping – Cast Iron, Copper HEAT TRANSFER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15702 Steel & Copper Piping Valves & Fittings - Heating and Cooling 15707 Refrigerant Piping and Accessories 15770 Plate Fin Heating Coils AIR DISTRIBUTION 15801 Ductwork - Low Pressure – Metallic 15811 Flexible Ductwork 15820 Duct Accessories 15825 Dampers - Balancing 15828 Acoustic Lining 15844 Computer Room Units 15855 Filters 15871 Terminal Units 15875 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers SUB CONTRACTORS 15900 Energy Management & Control System 15925 EMCS Control Sequence 15950 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (TAB)
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SCHM-241 Vibration Isolation SCHM-844 Indoor A/C Unit SCHM-844 Outdoor A/C Unit SCHM-871 Constant Volume Boxes SCHM-875 Grilles and Diffusers
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read accordingly.
.2 The General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary Conditions and all Sections of Division 0 and 1 - General Requirements shall be deemed to apply and be a part of this section of the specification as fully as if recited in full herein. They shall be read and fully adhered to by the contractor for Division 15.
.3 Comply with the commissioning requirements in sections 15050 and 01 91 13.
.4 All portions of the Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical shall be submitted by bidders on this Division of the Work.
1.2 DIVISION 0/1 REFERENCE
.1 Division 15 shall also make reference to and follow the requirements listed in Division 0 and 1.
1.3 PREQUALIFIED SUB CONTRACTORS TO DIVISION 15
.1 Where identified, pre-qualified subcontractors have been named for specific sub contracts. When so identified, the bid from the Mechanical Contractor shall include one of the pre-qualified contractors, and the name of the selected Contractor shall be included in the Mechanical Supplementary Tender Form.
.2 Contractors for the trades identified and not included on the pre-qualified list may be named in the Mechanical Supplementary Tender Form as an alternate supplier, with a cost savings. The Owner will decide to accept or reject the proposed alternate. Under no circumstances should the Mechanical Contractor carry any Alternate Price in his base bid.
.3 Carrying an Alternate Contractor or Alternate Supplier in the base bid submitted on the Supplementary Tender Form will result in the bid being disqualified.
.4 Pre-qualified Sub Contractors for this project are:
.1 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide all required test ports and assistance required by the Air and Hydronic Balancing Contractor.
.2 The Air and Hydronic Balancing Contractor shall be one of the following:
.1 DASS Enterprises
.2 John Price Enterprises
.3 Design Test and Balance
.4 VPG
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 Clarke Balancing
.6 Pro Air
.5 Controls
.1 The Control Contractor shall be Johnson Controls.
.2 Mechanical bidders are encouraged to provide alternate control contractors under voluntary alternate in the supplementary tender form and identify the cost difference between the base bid control provider and alternate control contractor.
1.4 INTENT
.1 Bidders for work under this Division shall include for all labor, material, equipment and all other related cost including all applicable taxes and fees to provide the complete mechanical work specified in Division 15 and shown on the mechanical drawings, and all mechanical work noted in the specifications and shown on the drawings for other Divisions of this Contract as being the responsibility of Division 15.
.2 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve the Mechanical Subcontractor of responsibility to complete the specified work. If in any doubt, the Subcontractor shall contact the Consultant for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.
.3 The Division 15 Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the entire mechanical installation noted in the specifications and drawings. Demarcation of the responsibilities among various mechanical sub trades shall be the sole responsibility of the Division 15 Contractor.
1.5 INTERFERENCE
.1 Provide information and cooperate with the Construction Manager/General Contractor for the preparation of interference drawings.
.2 Refer to Division 1 and the requirements outlined in this item.
.3 Interference drawings shall be prepared on AutoCAD 2012. These drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for review on both a hard copy and soft copy.
.4 Interference drawings shall be provided to make clear the work intended or to show how it affects other trades.
.5 Interference drawings shall also be provided for areas where there are potential conflicts in positioning the mechanical and electrical equipment, piping and cable trays/conduits.
.6 Coordinate with all other trades and divisions before interference drawings are prepared. Installed and/or fabricated services shall be modified, replaced, removed and/or relocated to suit the field conditions at no extra cost to the Owner due to the lack of coordination prior to fabrication/installation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.7 For equipment substitutions a complete interference drawing of the area affected by the revision shall be provided by the Division 15 Contractor.
.8 Interference drawings shall be provided showing both plan and sections and shall incorporate all services including ductwork, HVAC piping, plumbing and drainage, electrical conduit over 3" (75mm) and electrical cable trays.
.9 The Division 15 Contractor shall submit dimensioned sleeving drawings showing the location and dimension of sleeves through all floors and structural walls for review by the Mechanical and Structural Consultants.
.10 Dimensioned drawings shall be provided for all roof penetrations for review by the Mechanical and Structural Consultant.
.11 The Division 15 Contractor shall submit a plan layout showing all of the equipment to be provided and the actual weights of the equipment and piping for review as soon as possible after contract award. The drawings shall also show areas where there are concentrated loads due to piping and equipment suspended from the roof or slab above.
.12 Installation of the Division 15 work shall not proceed until final interference drawings have been submitted and reviewed. Contractor shall allow 2 weeks for review of drawings; contractor shall make allowance in the construction schedule for preparation of interference drawings and the review of the drawings.
.13 Should there be interference between the Division 15 and Division 16 work a meeting shall be called within one week of the discovery of the interference to allow prompt remedial action to take place.
1.6 CONTRACT
.1 The mechanical drawings do not show all the Architectural and structural details, and any Specifications information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the building drawings or at the building. Make without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to the runs of drains, pipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the above conditions. The location of equipment may be altered without charge providing the change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material. The Architectural, Structural, and Electrical drawings may show details relevant to the mechanical systems and should be referred to equally with the Mechanical drawings.
.2 Wherever differences occur between plans and riser diagrams or schematics and drawings, the maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on whichever indicates the greater cost.
.3 Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.4 Discrepancies between different drawings, or between drawings and actual field conditions, or between drawings and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Consultant, the maximum conditions shall govern and the work shall be based on whichever involve the greater cost.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 As the work progresses and before installing apparatus, equipment, fixtures and devices which may interfere with the interior treatment and use of the building or with the work of other trades, provide interference drawings and consult with the Consultant for instructions for the exact locations of all drains, pipes, ducts, and equipment. Refer to Division 1 and provide information and interference drawings as may be required by this Section.
.6 Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. All drains, pipes, ducts, etc., particularly those which may interfere with the inside treatment of the building, or conflicting with other trades, shall be installed only after the locations have been approved by the Consultant. Special care shall be taken in the installation of all mechanical services including, but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, which are to be concealed to see that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls, and ceilings. Where such drains, pipes, ducts, etc., have been installed in such a manner as to cause interference, they shall be removed and re-installed in suitable locations without extra cost to the owner.
.7 Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, levels, and dimensions, to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.
.8 In every place where there is space indicated as reserved for future or other equipment, leave such space clear, install blank offs, shut off valves with blind flanges and other work so that the necessary connections can be made without any stoppages to the system. Consult with the consultant whenever necessary for this purpose.
.9 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the specifications and shown on the drawings, provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, including those required by the authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
.10 Install all ceiling mounted components (diffusers, grilles, etc.) in strict accordance with reflected ceiling plans, and instructions from the Consultant.
.11 The mechanical plans show approximate locations for wall mounted devices. Obtain Consultant's approval of mounting heights and locations before commencement of work.
.12 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide a list of the foreman for each trade who will be involved with this project prior to the start of construction. The list is to contain their credentials and a list of previous projects that they have been involved with.
.13 The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating the installation of the mechanical services with the Electrical, Sprinkler and Structural elements within the building. Provide coordination/interference drawings prior to installation of the services in accordance with item 1.5 of this section of the specification and include in the Mechanical bid price the cost of all minor offsets of ductwork, piping, etc to coordinate the installation of the services.
.14 The approximate location of terminal devices such as thermostats, humidistats, sinks, water closets, lavatories, sprinkler heads, grilles and diffusers etc located within the finished space are shown on the mechanical drawings. The dimensioned location for these devices is to be obtained from the Architectural drawings. Where these devices are not dimensioned on the Architectural drawings request the final elevation and location from
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
the Design Group prior to installation. Locate the devices within 1.5 metres of the position shown on the Mechanical Drawings at no cost to the Owner.
1.7 EXAMINE SITE
.1 Examine the site and the local conditions and Conditions affecting the work. Examine carefully the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and all other drawings and the complete specifications to ensure that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of the other Divisions and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, the completion, or the guarantee of the work of this Division. No allowance will be made later for any expenses incurred through the failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing to the Consultant.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S SHOP
.1 Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to complete the work of Division 15.
1.9 CLEANING
.1 Refer to Division 1 and the following.
.2 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of the work all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work for Division 15. Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.3 All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the work.
1.10 TEMPORARY SERVICES
.1 Refer to Division 1 for the temporary mechanical services required for construction, temporary sanitary facilities, and potable water.
1.11 INSTALLATION OF WORK
.1 Be responsible for:
.1 The layout of the work of Division 15, and for any damage caused to the Owner, or other Divisions of the contract by improper location or carrying out of this work.
.2 The prompt installation of the work of Division 15 in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.
.3 The protection of finished and unfinished work and equipment and work of other Divisions from damage due to the carrying out of the work of Division 15.
.4 The condition of all material and equipment supplied under Division 15, and for the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
protection and maintenance of work completed.
.2 Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial performance established in the construction contract. Refer to Division 1 requirements.
.3 Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in connection with the building in of the same.
.4 Provide drawings showing all sleeving and openings required. Notify the Construction Manager of the size and location of recesses, openings and chases before walls, floors, etc., are erected.
.5 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed in as short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule. Ensure that all health, safety and environmental conditions are maintained.
.6 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule. Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Construction Manager within the time limit stipulated.
.7 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.8 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed in strict accordance with those instructions.
1.12 CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND CONNECTIONS
.1 Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the building is to be erected.
.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, fees and service connections for the work of this Division and the inspections required by Authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the building is to be erected.
.3 For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must not be taken as the only code or standard applicable.
.4 When part of equipment does not bear the required UL label, the contractor shall obtain UL approval on site, when that part of the equipment is an electric component, a special approval shall be obtained and the Contractor shall pay the applicable fees.
.5 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms with laws and regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.
1.13 MATERIALS
.1 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
standards of desired quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Materials so specified shall be furnished under this Contract, unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the choice made on the "Supplementary Bid Form-Mechanical".
.2 The use of equivalent, alternate and/or substitute materials and equipment is subject to the following:
.1 Where the use of equivalent, alternate or substitute equipment alters the design or space requirements indicated on the plans, the contractor for Division 15 shall include all items of cost for the revised design and construction, including cost of all the related trades involved.
.2 Acceptance of the proposed equivalents, alternates or substitutions shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant and, if requested by the Consultant, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall submit samples of both the specified and the proposed items for review.
.3 In all cases where the use of equivalents, alternates or substitutions is permitted, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall bear any extra costs of independent testing agencies of evaluating the quality of materials and the equipment to be installed.
.4 Should the Mechanical Contractor change the electrical requirements on mechanical equipments, such as using alternate equipment, including those listed as acceptable alternates, which demand different electrical requirements, all associated costs shall be borne by the Mechanical Contractor.
1.14 EQUIVALENTS AND ALTERNATES
.1 Should the base Mechanical Subcontractor propose to furnish material and equipment other than those specified, he shall apply in writing to the Consultant for approval of equivalents at least fourteen days prior to opening of Bids, submitting with his request for approval complete descriptive and technical data on the item or items he proposes to furnish. Approval for changes in base bid specifications will be considered only upon individual requests of the Subcontractors. No blanket approval for equipment will be given to suppliers, distributors or contractors.
.2 Unless requests for changes in base bid specifications are received and approved prior to the opening of the bids, as defined above, the Subcontractors will be held to furnish specified items under his base bid. After the Contract is awarded changes in specifications will be made only as defined in Article: Material Substitutions (15010 1.13 and 15).
.3 Equipment of the Subcontractors' choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the specifications, in the space provided in the Supplementary Bid Form. Alternate proposals must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the article proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid if the alternate is accepted. Prior approval from the Consultant is not required on items submitted as alternate bids, but the decision on acceptance of the alternate(s) will rest with the Consultant.
.4 Unspecified materials and/or rejected alternates built into the work shall be replaced with
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
specified or accepted materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
.5 Also comply with the requirements identified in Item 1.13 “Materials” above.
1.15 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
.1 After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be approved by the Consultant as specified in Division 1.
1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
.1 Submit to the Consultant detailed dimension shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all mechanical equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications shall be shown on the shop drawings.
.2 Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Allow 10 working days for the review by the mechanical consultant. Should delivery schedule is critical, shop drawing shall be submitted earlier. Submit shop drawing submission schedule for review before submitting any shop drawing; the schedule shall identify tentative submission dates and anticipated approval dates.
.3 Provide 8 copies of shop drawings for review.
.4 Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for reference.
.5 Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification in accordance with Division 1 requirements at the same time as the shop drawing submission.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Refer to Division 1 and the requirements outlined in this section of the specification.
.2 The Consultant will provide two sets of white prints of all drawings related to the work of Division 15, for the purpose of preparing record drawings. As the job progresses, mark up the white prints accurately indicate installed work. On completion of the work, transfer the information onto the second set of white prints to the Consultant for approval. The Division 15 Contractor shall transfer the information onto Autocad 2012 and store the drawings on a CD Rom. Correct the information as directed and hand over two sets of white prints and the CD Rom to the Consultant on completion.
.3 Record, as the job progresses, all approved changes and deviations made to any work shown on the original contract drawings whether by addenda, requested changes, field instructions, and changes due to job conditions.
.4 Record drawings shall be kept up to date and available for review at any time by the Consultant. Progress draws may not be processed if record drawings are not kept up-to-date.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.18 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE
.1 After any part of the work for Division 15 has been completed, the Consultant will make an inspection, and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall be placed in service at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, such connections shall be provided to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.
.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3 No claims for damage will be considered for damage to, or the breaking of any parts of such work which may be used.
1.19 CONSULTANT'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1 During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for verification and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the specification.
1.20 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES
.1 Refer to Section 01 26 00 of the specification for the procedures to be followed and the mark ups for Overhead and Profit that will be accepted for additional work and changes.
1.21 WARRANTY
.1 Refer to Division 1 requirements and this section of the specification.
.2 The Contractor for Division 15 shall provide a warranty for all work and apparatus installed under his contract against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one year after the substantial performance of the work , unless otherwise mentioned in the specifications, and shall make good any and all defects developing during such time without expense to the Owner. Any materials shall be further guaranteed as may be called for in these specifications. Where warranties on equipment extend beyond one (1) year the Contractor for Division 15 shall honor the extended warranty.
1.22 ITEMIZED PRICES
.1 Provide itemized prices for the items listed in the Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical. Show itemized prices as individually broken out prices on the Supplementary Tender Form and DO include them in the overall price.
1.23 SEPARATE PRICES
.1 Provide separate prices for the items listed in the Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical. Show separate prices as individually broken out prices on the Supplementary Tender Form
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 10
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
and DO NOT include them in the overall price.
1.24 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to construction schedule detailed in other parts of the contract, and/or as prepared by the Construction Manager.
.2 All connections to the services serving existing buildings that remain operational shall be coordinated with the Owner a minimum of two weeks prior to any shut down.
1.25 CASH ALLOWANCES
.1 Refer to Section 0210 “Cash Allowances” for details of Cash Allowances.
1.26 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR BONDING
.1 The Mechanical Contractor will carry within the Bid Price the following Bonding:
.1 50% Labour and Material Bond and
.2 50% Performance Bond.
.2 The Mechanical Contractor as part of the Bid Price will “Itemize” the above Bond Costs in his Bid Submission.
1.27 ENERGY CONSUMPTION
.1 The Consultant may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance or energy consumed or demanded.
.2 All equipment installed on the project shall conform to the requirements outlined in ASHRAE 90.1 - 89.
.3 For the required efficiency of all electric motors refer to specification Section 15170.
1.28 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION
.1 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.
.2 Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated bearings.
.3 For all boilers, pumps, air compressors, fans and other rotating equipment installed on the floor or specified in individual sections, provide chamfered edge housekeeping pads a minimum of 4" (100 mm) high and 4" (100 mm) larger than equipment dimensions all around. All air handling units shall be mounted on 6" (150 mm) chamfered edge housekeeping pads a minimum of 4" (100 mm) larger than the equipment dimensions all around. Installation of the housekeeping pads shall be in accordance with the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 11
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
requirements outlined in Division 03 Section 03200 “Concrete Reinforcement” and Section 03300 “Cast in Place Concrete”. Work shall be performed by the trades specializing in this work.
.4 Pipe all drain lines to drains. For glycol systems, pipe drains and relief lines to their respective glycol make up tanks.
.5 Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.
.6 Provide supports such as saddles, platforms, etc for equipment requiring auxiliary supports including but not limited to heat exchangers, hot water tanks, etc.
1.29 MOCKUPS
.1 Provide a mockup of a variable air volume box with reheat coil installation, for Consultant review.
1.30 SLEEVES
.1 Pipe and duct sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry or concrete.
.2 Sleeves of: minimum 22-gauge (0.8 mm) thick galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints at partition walls.
.3 Use cast iron sleeve or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint. PVC sleeve with annular fin is also acceptable:
.1 Through foundation walls.
.2 Where sleeves are specified to extends above finished floor.
.4 Sizes
.1 1/4" (6 mm) clearance all around, between sleeve and pipes or between sleeve and insulation.
.2 Where piping passes below footings, provide minimum clearance of 2" (50 mm) between sleeve and pipe. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as footing.
.5 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry and 4" (100 mm) above floors. Not applicable to concrete floors on grade.
.6 For pipes passing through roofs, use cast iron sleeves with caulking recess and flashing clamp device. Anchor sleeves in roof construction; caulk between sleeve recess and pipe; fasten roof flashing to clamp device; make water-tight durable joint.
.7 Fill voids around pipes.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 12
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 For sleeves and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors, provide "link seal@ clamp manufactured by Thunderline or Innerlynx.
.2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or between pipe (duct) and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic. Seal space at each end of sleeve with waterproof, fire retardant, non-hardening mastic.
.3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.
.4 Fill future-use sleeves with easily removable fire stop filler.
.5 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.
.8 Where pipes and ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, pack space with fire stopping materials as specified in 07840 “Fire Stopping”
.9 Install sleeves following approval of interference drawings.
.10 On typical floors, provide one diameter between adjacent sleeves.
.11 Extend sleeves 6" (150 mm) above floors in mechanical rooms and all areas where waterproofing is required.
.12 All sleeves shall be as detailed on drawings.
.13 All sleeve locations including dimensions shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer for review.
.14 All sleeved or formed openings through the structure must be shown on sleeving drawings which are submitted to all Consultants for review prior to Construction. No holes through the structure will be permitted without written approval of the Architect.
.15 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for showing all sleeve locations required by the Division 15 Sub Contractors on the interference drawings.
.16 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for installing all of the sleeves required for the Division 15 Contract and the Division 15 Sub Contractors.
1.31 ESCUTCHEONS AND PLATES
.1 Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.
.2 Use chrome or nickel plated brass, solid type with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting. All escutcheons and plates in exhibition spaces shall be flat black.
.3 Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 13
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.
.5 Secure to pipe or finished surface but not to insulation.
1.32 TESTS
.1 Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved. Follow construction schedule and arrange for tests.
.2 Inform the Consultant when tests will be conducted. The Consultant will periodically be present for tests. All tests are to be documented test results submitted and included in the maintenance manuals. Refer to attached Appendix A for the format to be utilized for the test reports.
.3 Bear costs including retesting and making good.
.4 Pipe pressure:
.1 Hydraulically test piping systems at 1- 1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum 125 psi (860 kPa), whichever is greater.
.2 Maintain test pressures without loss for 4h unless otherwise specified.
.3 Test natural gas systems to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and as per CGA and Ontario Building Code.
.4 Test drainage, waste and vent piping to code.
.5 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressures.
1.33 PAINTING
.1 Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.
.2 Touch-up paint all damaged equipment with products matching original finish in quality and appearance.
.3 Provide flat black painting behind grilles and diffusers.
.4 Paint the gas line in its entirety where it is exposed outside. In locations within building where the gas line is above t-bar or hard ceilings the gas line shall be banded in accordance with the CGA requirements. In all areas where the gas line is exposed within the building it shall be painted in its entirety.
.5 All paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 14
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.34 ACCESS DOORS
.1 Refer to Division 15 Section 15075 of the specification for access door requirements.
1.35 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.
.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes NPS 2 and under and flanges for pipe sizes over NPS 2.
.3 Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by the Consultant.
.4 Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact.
1.36 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING STAFF
.1 Supply certified personnel to instruct operating staff on operation of mechanical equipment. Supply maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.
.2 Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.
.3 Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.
.4 Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 45 days prior to the completion of the project.
1.37 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Provide minimum of six (6) copies of Mechanical Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following and Division 1 requirements.
.2 Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Engineer's office 60-days prior to the completion of the Contract.
.3 Manuals to be bound in a hard cover neatly labeled: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
.4 The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:
.1 Section I - General.
.2 Section II - Piping and Pump Systems.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 15
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Section III - Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilation.
.4 Section IV - Automatic Controls.
.5 Section V - Sprinkler System.
.6 Section VI - Air and Hydronic Balancing Report
.5 The following information shall be contained within the sections:
.1 SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant, Engineers, Construction Manager, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve. A framed copy of Valve Directory to be hung in Mechanical Room. Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided. Certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers. All major equipment including but not limited to boilers, cooling towers, chillers, air handling units, isolators, silencers, pumps, and humidifiers are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.
.2 SECTION II, III, and IV: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests for pumping system. A copy of Gas Operational Tests for gas fired equipment. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. A copy of all approved Shop Drawings. Copies of warranties.
.3 SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of Control system and the functioning of the system. A copy of all shop drawings and all calibration certificates. Shop drawings shall be the updated record drawings.
.4 SECTION V: A copy of all shop drawings. Copies of all warranties. Maintenance information.
.5 SECTION VI: Provide complete air balance report including pump and fan curves, measured values and floor plans showing location of all traverse readings and grille measurements. Provide copies of all pressure tests completed on the systems.
1.38 FLASHING
.1 Coordinate with requirements for roofing, water-proofing and flashing in Division 7 Section 07620 “Metal Flashing”.
.2 Flash mechanical parts passing through, or built into a roof. Leave flashing as directed by the Roofing Trade to permit Roofing Trade to make a watertight connection.
.3 Provide zinc coated steel flashing in accordance with Section 07620 for pipes and ducts passing through waterproof walls.
.4 Provide zinc coated steel flashing in accordance with Section 07620 for pipes and ducts
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 16
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
passing through waterproof floors.
.5 Co-operate with Division 7 at all times, and do not break any waterproofing seal without consent of the Waterproofing Trade. Provide piping passing through waterproof walls with extra heavy cast iron sleeves with asphalt roofing wrapped around so as to leave a 1" x 2" (25 mm x 50 mm) recessed on both sides of wall. These recesses and the space between pipe and sleeve shall be caulked as specified in Section 07900 Joint Sealants.
.6 Fit counter flashing over flashing or curb, and make watertight.
.7 Detailed dimensioned drawings showing all roof penetrations shall be submitted to the Structural Consultant for review.
1.39 CURBS AND SLEEPERS
.1 Prefabricated curbs for mechanical equipment will be provided by Division 15. Built-up curbs and sleepers will be supplied and installed under work of other sections, except as specified herein and noted on the drawings.
.2 It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Trade to supply detailed requirements for curbs, including their locations, sizes and materials to be used, and loads imposed on the curbs.
.3 Curbs are required for roof mounted equipment, surrounding holes where groups of pipes and/or ducts pass through equipment room floors, and where indicated on the Drawings.
.5 Curbs around holes in equipment room floors shall be concrete or steel, extending at least 6" (150 mm) above finished floor. Make watertight connection between curb and floor.
.6 Fill spaces between curbs and pipes and ducts with glass fibre material. Caulk with fire resistant waterproof compound to make watertight connection.
.7 Sleepers shall be provided for the equipment installed outdoor without a roof curb. Sleepers shall be constructed of pressure treated lumber and shall be covered by 18-gauge steel cladding, primed and painted unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
1.40 CONCRETE
.1 All concrete work required by Division 15 shall be done by this Division in accordance with Sections 03100 “Concrete Formwork”, 03200 “Concrete Reinforcement”and 03300 “Cast in Place Concrete”.
.2 Refer to Item Section 15010 Item 1.27 for requirements for housekeeping pad.
1.41 METALS
.1 Steel construction required solely for the work of Mechanical Subcontractor and not shown on Architectural or Structural Drawings shall be supplied and installed by this
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 17
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
Subcontractor in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 05, Metals, Structural and Miscellaneous.
1.42 CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1 Cutting and patching shall be in accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions and the following:
.1 No openings shall be permitted through the completed structure without the written approval of the Architect. Any openings which are required through the completed structure must be clearly and accurately shown on a copy of the structural drawings. Exact locations, elevations and size of the proposed opening must be identified and submitted to the Architect for review, well in advance of doing the work.
.2 All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to be cut and is covered by the appropriate Divisions of this specification. Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings for passage through structure and all insert sizes and locations. Where this information is not furnished in time, the Subtrade contractor for this Division shall bear the cost of all sleeving, provision for inserts, cutting and patching.
.3 Should any cutting and/or repairing of finished surfaces be required, the Subtrade contractor for this Division shall employ the particular trades engaged on the site for this type of work to do such cutting and/or repairing. Obtain the approval of the Consultant before doing any cutting. In the event that tradesmen required for particular cutting and/or repairing are not already on the site, bring to the site tradesmen to do this work.
.4 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a location and manner as approved by the Consultant in writing.
.5 Prior to cutting any existing walls and floors the Division 15 Contractor shall consult with the Structural Engineer for approval. Where X-rays are requested by the Structural Engineer the Division 15 Contractor shall provide x-rays at no cost to the Owner. All X-raying shall be done during off hours.
1.43 PERFORMANCE TESTS
.1 Refer to Section 15050 for performance test requirements.
1.44 MECHANICAL PROJECT COMPLETION
.1 Refer to Division 1 Section 01770 and Section 01780 and the requirements outlined in this section.
.2 Thirty days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or prepare certification of the following times and submit them to the Owner's representative:
.1 All inspection certificates.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 18
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Warranty certificates as called for under "Warranty".
.3 Record drawings.
.4 Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.5 Test certifications as called for under "Testing". All test certificates to be included in maintenance manuals.
.6 Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these Specifications and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.45 DIVISION 15 / DIVISION 16 COORDINATION
.1 The following is a list of mechanical and electrical responsibilities for the above mentioned project.
.1 All starters, motor control centres, etc., along with input and output power wiring will be by Division 16. This is with the exception of equipment that is shipped to site as a package with a single power feed and includes internal transformers and starters. Refer to individual specification sections to identify equipment that is to be provided with single power feeds.
.2 Package units will have integral starters and only power feeders need be provided. The package unit starters will be by Division 15.
.3 Division 16 to provide all remote disconnect switches with the exception of disconnect switches specified to be provided with the Mechanical Equipment.
.2 All control wiring inclusive of EMCS and 120 V mechanical control wiring, except fire alarm shall be by Division 15.
.3 Voltages for motors 2 HP and larger will be either 208 V or 600 V, 3-phase. All motors that are smaller than ½ HP will be 120V single phase or 208V 1 or 3-phase as coordinated with CEL. Refer to the equipment schedules for power requirements.
.4 All multi-speed motors to be consequent pole.
.5 All motors shall be by Division 15. Refer to Section 15170 for requirements.
.6 No two-speed double winding motors are to be used unless a request is made by the Division 15 Contractor to the Electrical Consultant and the request is approved by the Electrical Consultant.
.7 Where 208 V 3 phase equipment is specified 208 V 1 phase equipment shall not be submitted as an equal. If equipment is not available as 208 V 3 phase the Division 15 Contractor may make a request to the Electrical Consultant to revise the equipment to 208 V 1 phase however, all redesign costs incurred by the Electrical Consultant due to these
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 19
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
revisions shall be paid by the Division 15 Contractor.
.8 Motor Thermistor
.1 Division 15 to provide thermistor protection on motors 20 HP and larger using approved thermistors.
.2 Thermistors shall be provided by Division 15.
.3 Division 16 to provide manual reset devices for motor starters for thermistor interface. (Only for starters provided by Division 16).
.4 Division 16 to wire between the thermistor and the starter.
.9 All fire alarm work shall be done by Division 16. Division 16 will provide all relays for interface to control wiring for fan shutdown etc.
.10 Division 16 to wire EP switches for smoke damper control. Life safety control wiring and relays to interface to general control wiring to be by Division 16.
.11 All relays required for Division 15 will be by Division 15.
.12 Sprinkler and Standpipe
.1 Division 15 to provide all pressure switches, supervisory valves, flow switches, dry pipe alarm valves, etc. for interface to fire alarm system.
.2 All wiring of these items shall be by Division 16.
.13 All electric tracing will be by Division 15 with power connections by Division 16. All electric tracing will be 208V. All electric tracing will be self-limiting type of cable. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide loads of circuits to Division 16.
- END OF SECTION –
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 20
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
APPENDIX A
PIPE TEST REPORT
Project Name Company Performing Test Date Temperature System Being Tested Location (Name of Area and Gridlines)
Pressure Utilized For Test Medium (Water, Air, Nitrogen, other)
Location of Pressure Gauge Date Pressure Was Applied Date Pressure Was Checked Duration of Test Witnessed By (Print) Date Signature Test Form Completed By (Print) Date Signature Results of Test
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENT SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCE
.1 Read and be governed by Definitions, Conditions of the Contract and Amendments or Supplements including Division 0, Division 1, and General Conditions of Contract and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.2 MECHANICAL PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare and maintain an electronic project schedule using as a minimum the Latest Version of MS Project or Prima Vera Contractor.
.2 The Mechanical Contractor to coordinate with the General Contractor and ensure that the software employed by the Div. 15 Contractor will be compatible with the General Contractors scheduling software. If it is required the Div.15 Contractor shall purchase a copy of the scheduling software used by the General Contractor to ensure the information can be integrated to provide an overall project schedule that will be issued by the General Contractor.
.3 The Division 15 Contractor shall maintain and update the mechanical schedule on a bi-weekly basis. The schedule shall be provided to the consultant every time the schedule is updated in a hard copy and well as an electronic copy.
.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall maintain and update the mechanical schedule on a bi weekly basis. The schedule shall be provided to the General Contractor every time the schedule is updated for inclusion in the overall project schedule.
.5 The schedule shall be based upon the Critical Path Method and reflect linkages to one task before and after.
.6 The schedule shall be available two weeks after the instructions have been given by the General Contractor or Project Manager to proceed.
.7 Schedule shall include the following as a minimum:
.1 The Schedule shall provide a one month look ahead.
.2 The Schedule shall reflect resources required to meet each defined task.
.3 The Schedule shall reflect where there is float within it.
.4 The Schedule shall reflect slippage and provide a plan as to how to recover in order to get back on schedule.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MECHANICAL PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENT SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 The Schedule shall reflect as a minimum:
.1 All Mechanical Construction Tasks;
.2 Coordination drawings;
.3 Mechanical Rough-in;
.4 Installation of Ductwork per floor basis;
.5 Installation of HVAC piping per floor basis;
.6 Installation of Plumbing piping per floor basis;
.7 Installation of Controls per floor basis;
.8 Testing;
.9 Commissioning;
.10 Owners training;
.11 Shut down requests and durations:
.12 Power on Dates;
.13 Activation of key systems dates;
.14 Shop drawings;
.15 Any approvals;
.16 Equipment deliveries;
.17 Dates when mock ups will be available and
.18 Reflect time required for project close.
.8 Provide shop drawings submission schedule and identify critical items for approval. The shop drawings schedule shall be submitted within three (3) months from signing the Contract.
1.1.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESERVED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 START UP OF EQUIPMENT
3.1.1 Prior to the start up of equipment the Division 15 Contractor shall arrange to have the Manufacturer of all major equipment including but not limited to boilers, cooling towers, chillers, air handling units, isolators, silencers, pumps, domestic hot water heaters and humidifiers to inspect the installation to ensure their equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.
3.1.2 The Supplier shall submit a written report of their findings.
3.1.3 Upon confirmation that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the Manufacturers Recommendations the equipment may be started.
3.1.4 All equipment shall be started by the Manufacturers representative.
3.2 DIVISION 15 PERFORMANCE TESTS
3.2.1 After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, the Division 15 Contractor shall subject equipment to a series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.
3.2.2 The Division 15 Contractor shall perform all tests necessary to confirm that the equipment is operating in accordance with the specifications.
3.2.3 Where equipment requires adjusting, testing and/or calibration that is beyond the level of expertise of the Division 15 Contractor’s personnel the Division 15 Contractor shall obtain the services of an appropriate Manufacturer’s Field Representative or Independent Testing Firm.
3.2.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall notify the Consultant one week prior to test to allow the Consultant to attend the tests if deemed necessary by the Consultant.
3.2.5 The Division 15 Contractor shall record the daily start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed.
3.2.6 The Division 15 Contractor shall submit a written report indicating all of the performance tests that were completed. The written reports shall be included in the maintenance manuals.
3.2.7 The Division 15 Contractor shall operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence, normal shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and safety controls. Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences. Adjust components to achieve a proper functional relationship among all the components of all the systems.
3.2.8 Upon completion of the performance tests the Division 15 Contractor shall notify the Consultant that the performance testing has been completed. The Consultant shall spot check the operation of the equipment to ensure that it is operating in accordance with the specifications.
3.2.9 The Division 15 Contractor shall work in conjunction with the Air and Hydronic Balancer and the Controls Contractor to provide assistance to the Consultants and Owner’s representatives to carry out spot checks of the facility. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide access to the equipment and manually start and stop equipment as directed by the Consultant. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide all necessary trades to carry out this work.
3.2.10 The Division 15 Contractor shall repeat these functions as many times as deemed necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.
3.2.11 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule, set, align and tension drives.
3.2.12 All additional tests required by local or Provincial requirements that are not mentioned in the specifications shall be performed by the Division 15 Contractor at no additional expense.
3.2.13 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide all instrumentation required to perform the tests.
3.3 CONTROLS CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE TESTING
3.3.1 The Control Contractor shall verify the following:
.1 All sensors have been checked for calibration.
.2 All safety devices have been checked and confirmed to be operational.
.3 All Digital input and output points have been verified.
.4 All control functions have been verified.
.5 All Analog inputs and outputs have been verified.
.6 All valves and dampers have been verified to be operational.
.7 Confirmation that the control system operates correctly under varying loads and conditions
.8 All software such as loop tuning, time of day scheduling, alarm functions and system resets have been confirmed to be operational.
.9 Confirm that all variable frequency drives are functioning correctly.
.10 All motorized dampers shall be verified to be fully operational.
3.3.2 The Controls Contractor shall submit a written report indicating that the Control System is operating in accordance with the specification.
3.3.3 The Controls Contractor shall notify the Consultant one week prior to test to allow the Consultant to attend the tests if deemed necessary by the Consultant.
3.3.4 The Controls Contractor shall record the daily start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed.
3.3.5 Upon completion of the performance tests the Controls Contractor shall notify the Consultant that the performance testing has been completed. The Consultant shall spot check the operation of the equipment to ensure that it is operating in accordance with the specifications.
3.3.6 The Controls Contractor shall make available a Systems Operator to provide access to equipment, start/stop equipment and operate the Energy Management Control System to spot check the Control System Installation. The Controls Contractor shall provide all necessary trades to carry out this work.
3.3.7 The Controls Contractor shall repeat these functions as many times as deemed necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.
3.3.8 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary
3.4 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
3.4.1 At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make the systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Owner. Replace and clean filters, clean out ducts and casings, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers, fill liquid systems and purge air, clean fan wheels and air coils.
3.4.2 Provide water treatment to pipes and report in accordance to Section 15602.
3.4.3 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide ladders, tools and associated equipment to assist the Consultant in carrying out spot checks of the performance tests performed by the Contractor.
3.4.4 The Owner may choose to hire an Independent Commissioning Agent to carry out commissioning at the final inspection. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide ladders, tools and associated equipment to assist the Commissioning Agent as required.
3.4.5 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet under "Warranty".
3.4.6 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all equipment and freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection, having ensured that it has previously been subjected to Performance Tests.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 MSS SP 58 – 1993 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture
.2 MSS SP 69 – 1996 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Applications
.3 MSS SP 89 – 1998 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices
.4 MSS SP 90 – 2000 Guideline for Terminology For Pipe Hangers and Supports.
.5 ASTM B633 Specification for Electrodeposited coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
.6 ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip.
.7 ASTM A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc, Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
.8 ASTM A1011 Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength low Alloy, and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability.
.9 NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit for approval, manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and fabrication.
.3 Submit product data on all hanger and support devices, including shields and attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings and dimension information.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2 Products
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1 Inserts
.1 Inserts shall be in accordance with MSS SP 58.
.2 Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. If necessary, use grid system in Equipment Room.
.3 All inserts shall be provided with a means for attachment to forms.
.2 Poured Concrete
.1 For concrete that has been poured and is a minimum of 4” (100mm) thick and pipes up to 4 NPS, approved type expansion shields and bolts may be used.
.2 All drilling for hangers, rod inserts and work of similar nature shall be completed by Division 15.
.3 Clamps
.1 For pipe sizes 2” (50mm) and smaller utilize malleable iron C clamps, lock nuts and cup point set screws for steel construction.
.2 For pipe sizes larger than 2” (50mm) utilize malleable iron beam clamp with cross bolt for steel construction.
.3 Clamps shall be UL, ULc and FM approved.
.4 Supplementary Supports
.1 Steel construction required solely for the work of the Mechanical Contractor or Sub Trades and not shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings shall be supplied and installed by the Mechanical Contractor or Sub Trade in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 5, Metals and Structural Miscellaneous.
.5 Anchoring
.1 Anchoring of piping and equipment shall be to manufacturers recommendations.
.2 All steam and condensate piping shall be hung in accordance with the requirements outlined in ANSI B31.1-1995. Refer to Specification Sections for Steam and Condensate piping for requirements for stress analysis calculations.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.6 Hangers
.1 Fabricate hangers, riser clamps, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1-1995 and MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, MSS SP 89 and MSS SP 90.
.2 Steel pipe hangers and supports shall have the manufacturers name, part number, and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.
.3 Hangers shall adequately support the piping system. They shall be located near or at changes in piping direction and as close as possible to concentrated loads. They shall provide a means for vertical adjustment after erection to maintain pitch required for proper drainage.
.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall complete weight balance calculations for all piping systems to determine the required supporting force at each hanger location and the pipe weight load at each equipment connection.
.5 The pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being introduced into the connected equipment.
.6 Where piping is subjected to shock loads, such as thrust imposed by the activation of safety valves or the starting and stopping of condenser water systems hanger design shall include the provision of rigid restraints or shock absorbing devices of approved design.
.7 Supports, guides and anchors shall be designed so that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure.
.8 For pipe sizes 2 ½” (65 mm) and less utilize either adjustable clevis hangers or adjustable swivel ring hangers.
.9 For pipe sizes greater than 2 ½” (65 mm) utilize adjustable clevis type hangers.
.10 For all domestic cold water, chilled water and steam and condensate piping the hangers shall be oversized to fit over the outside of the insulation.
.11 Use roller type hangers as required.
.12 Provide spring hangers where required to offset expansion on horizontal runs which follow long vertical risers.
.13 Provide spring hangers where specified in Section 15241.
.14 Provide saddles for all insulated pipes and prefabricated insulation shields with high density insulation with vapour barriers for domestic cold water and chilled water piping.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.7 Hanger Types
.1 Adjustable Swivel Type Hangers
.1 Hanger shall constructed of carbon steel.
.2 Hanger to be UL, ULc and FM approved.
.3 For sprinkler piping applications the swivel hanger shall meet the requirements of the NFPA.
.4 Swivel nut shall provide vertical adjustment once the pipe is in place.
.5 For non insulated copper pipe utilize either copper plated or epoxy coated hangers.
.6 Standard of Acceptance uninsulated steel pipe: Hunt Fig. #20, Myatt, Anvil Fig.69.
.7 Standard of Acceptance uninsulated copper pipe: Hunt Fig #20C or Hunt Fig # 20E, Myatt, Anvil Fig. CT-69.
.8 Standard of Acceptance insulated copper or steel pipe: Hunt Fig # 25H, Myatt, Anvil, Cooper B-Line
.2 Clevis Hangers
.1 Hanger shall be constructed of carbon steel.
.2 Hanger to be UL, ULc and FM approved.
.3 Hanger shall provide vertical adjustment once the pipe is in place. For sizes 5” (125 mm) and larger utilize rod with two nuts. For sizes less than 5” (125 mm) utilize bolt and nut.
.4 For non insulated copper pipe utilize either copper plated or epoxy coated hangers.
.5 For roller hangers provide cast iron roller.
.6 Standard of Acceptance uninsulated steel pipe: Hunt Fig #32, Myatt, Anvil, Cooper B-Line.
.7 Standard of Acceptance uninsulated copper pipe: Hunt Fig 30C or 30E, Myatt, Anvil Fig 65 epoxy coated, Cooper B-Line.
.8 Standard of Acceptance steam piping requiring roller hangers: Hunt Fig #3436, Myatt, Anvil Fig 181, Cooper B-Line.
.9 Standard of Acceptance insulated copper or steel pipe: Hunt Fig 32U,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
Myatt, Anvil Fig 260, Cooper B-Line.
.8 Trapeze Hangers
.1 Hanger shall be tube construction constructed of 12 gauge rolled form ASTM 1011 structural steel Gr. 33 structural steel channel with galvanized finish.
.2 Hanger shall be sized for the total weight of the pipes, concentrated loads, water and insulation supported on the trapeze.
.3 Trapeze assembly shall be supported by a minimum of two rods with washer plates sized for the total weight of the pipes, concentrated loads and fluids within the pipes.
.4 All insulated pipe shall be provided with insulation shields and high density insulation so that the insulation can be supported above the trapeze.
.5 Pipes mounted on trapeze hangers shall be guided by a U bolt every second hanger.
.6 Trapeze hangers shall be sized as follows:
Trapeze Hangers Tubing Size Maximum Load (lbs) based on the following distance between supports (inches) at a
maximum temperature of 250 F. 18” 20” 22” 24” 26” 28” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 3/16” x 4” x 3” 5800 5200 4800 4400 3900 3600 3500 2900 2500 2200 1900 1700 ¼” x 4” x 4” 10200 9100 8300 7500 7000 6500 6100 5100 4300 3800 5300 4800 ¼” x 6” x 4” 12000 11100 10300 9600 8000 6800 6000 5300 4800 ¼ “ x 8” x 4” 20000 18400 17100 16000 13300 11400 10000 8800 8000
.7 Standard of Acceptance: Anvil Fig. 46, Myatt, Hunt, Cooper B-Line.
.8 Riser clamps
.1 Clamp shall be constructed of carbon steel.
.2 Clamp to be UL, ULc and FM approved.
.3 For uninsulated copper pipe utilize copper plated riser clamp.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Hunt Fig #40, 41, 42C, Myatt, Anvil Fig 261, Cooper B-Line.
.9 Roof Mounted Pipe Supports
.1 Base shall be constructed of 100% recycled rubber, UV resistant with 14 gauge galvanized channel (13/16” high).
.2 Dimension shall be 4 13/16” high x 6” wide by 9.6” to 48” long (as required).
.3 Maximum load shall be 1500 lbs/ft.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Standard of Acceptance: C-Port C-Strut Support Series.
.10 Roof Mounted Duct Support
.1 Base shall be constructed of 100% recycled rubber, UV resistant with 14 gauge galvanized channel (13/16” high) and 22” long. Supports shall be galvanized steel 60” high and shall be spaced to accommodate the duct size.
.2 Maximum load shall be 1500 lbs/ft.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: C-Port DSA- Duct Support Series.
2.2 INSULATION SHIELDS (SADDLES)
.1 Insulation shields shall be constructed of carbon steel and shall be galvanized.
.2 Insulation shields shall be utilized in conjunction with high compressive strength inserts.
.3 For pipes sizes NPS 5 and smaller the minimum metal thickness shall be 0.12” (3.2 mm).
.4 For pipes sizes NPS 6 and larger the minimum metal thickness shall be 0.19”, (4.8 mm).
.5 Shields shall 12” (300 mm) in axial length and shall span an arc of approximately 180 degrees.
.6 Shields for pipe sizes NPS 12 and larger shall have a centre rib.
.7 Standard of Acceptance: Hunt, Myatt, Anvil Fig 167, Cooper B- Line.
2.3 CALCIUM SILICATE
.1 Providing Calcium Silicate Insulation at each hanger or trapeze support rather than insulation shields is acceptable.
2.4 ROD SIZING AND SUPPORT SPACING
.1 Govern spacing between pipe rack supports using smallest pipe size.
.2 All hanger rods shall be galvanized or painted with red chromate primer.
.3 Rods shall be threaded at both ends or be provided with a continuous thread. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain or perforated straps shall be allowed.
.4 Use rod diameters and spacing for pipe supports as shown in table with following exceptions:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Support plumbing piping in accordance with more stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or as specified.
.2 Support NPS 1/2 gas pipe every 6 ft (1.8 m).
.3 Support NPS 1/2 copper pipe every 5 ft (1.5 m).
.4 Support flexible joint roll grooved pipe in accordance with table 2 below, but not less than one hanger for each joint.
.5 Support fire protection piping in accordance with NFPA codes.
.6 Support plumbing piping in accordance with the Ontario Building Code, and the following:
.1 Support all vertical soil pipe, vents, waste stacks and rain water leaders at every floor with steel pipe clamps.
Pipe Size NPS Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing:
Steel Copper up to, 3/4 3/8" (10 mm) 7 ft (2.1 m) 6 ft (1.8 m) 1 3/8" (10 mm) 7 ft (2.1 m) 6 ft (1.8 m) 1-1/4 3/8" (10 mm) 7 ft (2.1 m) 6 ft (1.8 m) 1-1/2 3/8" (10 mm) 9 ft (2.7 m) 8 ft (2.4 m) 2 3/8" (10 mm) 10 ft (3 m) 9 ft (2.7 m) 2-1/2 ½" (12 mm) 12 ft (3.6 m) 10 ft (3 m) 3 ½" (12 mm) 12 ft (3.6 m) 10 ft (3 m) 3-1/2 ½" (12 mm) 13 ft (3.9 m) 11 ft (3.3 m) 4 5/8" (16 mm) 14 ft (4.2 m) 12 ft (3.6 m) 5 5/8" (16 mm) 16 ft (4.8 m) 6 7/8" (22 mm) 17 ft (5.1 m) 8 7/8" (22 mm) 19 ft (5.7 m) 10 7/8" (22 mm) 22 ft (6.6 m) 12 7/8" (22 mm) 22 ft (6.6 m) 14 and 16 1” (25mm) 22 ft (6.6 m) 18 1 1/8” (28mm) 22 ft (6.6 m) 20 1 ¼” (32mm) 22 ft (6.6 m) 24 1 ½” (40mm) 22 ft (6.6 m)
.5 Hangers shall be 3 piece minimum standard ie attachment, rod, pipe attachment.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 For cast iron pipe support piping on 5 foot centres ( ) and within 24” (600 mm) of each fitting.
.2 For steel and copper piping provide hangers at concentrated loads and within 24”
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
(600 mm) of each elbow or tee.
.3 Where multiple pipes run parallel at the same elevation trapeze hangers may be utilized. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe size.
.4 Provide inserts for placement in formwork before concrete is poured. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings provide inserts flush with slab surface. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement for inserts carrying pipe over 4” (100mm).
.5 Mild steel wall hooks may be used to support non-expanding piping. Allow 1" (25 mm) minimum clearance for insulated pipe.
.6 Do not support piping, ductwork or equipment from any element other than the building structure.
.7 Where horizontal piping movements are greater than ½” (12mm) and where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is less than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position the hanger pipe and the structural attachments shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. When the hanger rod angularity is greater than 4 degrees from vertical, then structural attachment shall be offset so that at no point will the rod angularity exceed 4 degrees from vertical.
.8 If calculations indicate that the sway will be greater than 4 degrees from the vertical utilize roller hangers.
.9 Adjust hanger rods to equalize load.
.10 Provide hanger within 24" (600 mm) on each side of valve, elbow or tee.
.11 All hangers shall be directly hung from the structure. No hangers shall be installed or supported off other pipes, ducts, equipment, or steel decks.
.12 Where necessary to support piping from floor, use concrete pier base with cast iron pipe rest with floor flange and pipe roll stands.
.13 All hangers and connections to open web steel joists, must be made at the panel joints. It is not structurally acceptable to impose any loads on either the top or bottom chord of the joist, between panel points. The maximum working load that can be suspended from a joist panel point is not to exceed 1.0 kN. Loads must be applied so that they do not cause twisting of the joists.
.14 For all domestic cold water and chilled water piping provide oversized hangers so that the hanger is outside of the insulation. In addition, provide oversized hangers for all piping within the areas designated noise critical.
.15 Hangers shall be installed to maintain a clearance of at least 1” (25mm) from other work.
.16 All vertical piping shall be supported by the horizontal pipe, or a pedestal support or the foundation at the base of the riser and riser clamps at each floor level for cast iron or PVC pipe and every other floor for steel and copper pipe. For floors greater than 12 feet
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15060 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
(3650 mm) provide riser clamps at every floor. Wherever possible locate riser clamps directly below the pipe couplings or shear lugs.
.17 Rigid support spray bracing shall be provided at all changes in direction greater than 45 degrees for pipe sizes 4” (100mm) and greater.
.18 Provide roller hangers for steam and condensate systems as required for expansion and contraction.
.19 All hangers exposed to the Outdoors shall be hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor use.
.20 All hangers exposed in laboratories 3001, 3001A, 3002 and 3002A shall be Type 304 stainless steel with stainless steel hardware.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15075 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACCESS DOORS AND VALVE BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit for approval, manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and fabrication.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Supply access doors to the relevant building trade to provide access in furred ceilings for the following:
.1 Servicing equipment
.2 Access to plumbing cleanouts
.3 Access to shut off valves.
.4 Inspection of life safety equipment.
.5 Service of operating devices
.6 All locations where periodic maintenance is required.
.2 Access door sizes shall be as follows:
.1 Body Entry: 24" x 24" (600 x 600 mm)
.2 For Hand Entry: 18" x 18" (450 x 450 mm)
.3 For Viewing Only: 12” x 12” (300mm x 300mm)
.3 All doors shall open 180 have rounded safety corners
.4 For fire rated ceilings or wall provide a fire rated access door that will match the fire rating of the wall that the access door is installed in. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the drawings and providing fire rated access doors where they are required.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15075 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACCESS DOORS AND VALVE BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 Where body access is possible the access doors shall be provided with a releasing mechanism on both sides of the door.
.6 Refer to Section 08310 of the specification.
2.2 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR DRYWALL APPLICATIONS
.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.
.2 Door shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) recess or 14mm (5/8”) to suit the thickness of the drywall ceiling.
.3 The frame shall be provided with a galvanized steel drywall taping bead on all sides.
.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.
.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.
.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor DW-5015, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.3 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR PLASTER APPLICATIONS
.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.
.2 Door shall be provided with a 14mm (5/8”) recess and shall be lined with self furring galvanized lath.
.3 The frame shall be provided an expansion casing bead with 75 mm (3”) wide galvanized lath, recessed 20mm (3/4”) to receive plaster.
.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.
.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.
.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor AP-5010, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.4 ACCESS DOOR FOR WOOD CEILING APPLICATIONS
.1 Access doors will be provided by another Division; however, Division 15 shall consolidate all access door requirements from all sub-trades and provide drawings identifying the sizes and locations of access doors for Architect’s approval.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15075 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACCESS DOORS AND VALVE BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.5 FLUSH ACCESS DOORS FOR TILED WALL APPLICATIONS
.1 For doors 400mm x 400mm (16” x 16”) and smaller the door shall be 16 gauge with 18 gauge mounting frame.
.2 For doors over 400mm x 400mm (16” x 16”) the door shall be 14 gauge with 16 gauge mounting frame.
.3 Door shall be flush to frame with rounded safety corners.
.4 The frame shall be one piece welded to the mounting frame.
.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.
.6 The latch shall be a stainless steel screwdriver cam latch.
.7 The finish shall be type 304 #4 satin polish stainless steel.
.8 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor UF-5000, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.6 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOOR
.1 Door shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.
.2 Door shall be filled with 50mm ( 2”) thick fire rated insulation.
.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25mm (1”) wide flange and mounting frame to have anchor straps.
.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.
.5 Door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label with 250 degree F temp rise in 30 minutes.
.6 The latch shall be a universal self latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.
.7 The steel finish shall be 5-stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.8 For drywall applications provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.
.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5050, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.7 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOOR WITH INSIDE LATCH RELEASE
.1 Door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.
.2 Door shall be flush to frame with reinforced edges.
.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) wide flange and shall be provided with
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15075 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACCESS DOORS AND VALVE BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
anchor straps.
.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.
.5 The door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label or 2 hour “B” label as required where temperature rise is not a factor.
.6 The latch shall be a universal self latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.
.7 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.8 Door shall be provided with an interior latch release.
.9 For drywall applications provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.
.10 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5060, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.8 VALVE BOX – SURFACE MOUNT
.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.
.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.
.3 The door shall overlap the box, providing a tight and secure fit.
.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, attached to the door.
.5 The hinge shall be a continuous piano hinge.
.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.
.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5-stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 Satin finish.
.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ASVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
2.9 VALVE BOX – RECESSED
.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.
.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.
.3 The door shall be flush to the frame with rounded safety corners.
.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, completely attached to the frame.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15075 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACCESS DOORS AND VALVE BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.
.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.
.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5-stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.
.8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 satin finish.
.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ARVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 On some drawings, access door locations have been indicated for coordination. The drawings do not show all access doors required.
.2 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide a set of drawings showing locations and types of all access doors located in public areas to the Consultant for approval, prior to commencing the installation of any piping or ductwork within these areas.
.3 Access doors shall be turned over to the building trade that is responsible for finishing the wall or ceiling where the access door is required.
.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for providing the access doors required to be installed in ductwork. Refer to Section 15820 for requirements.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15090 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION IDENTIFICATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010.
1.2 EQUIPMENT
.1 Manufacturer's nameplates:
.1 Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with raised or recessed letters.
.2 Provide Underwriters' Laboratories registration plates.
.3 Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.
.4 Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.
.2 System nameplates:
.1 Provide laminated plastic plates with black face and white center of minimum size 3 ½" x
.2 1 ½” x 1/10" (90 x 40 x 2.5 mm) nominal thickness, engraved with 1/4" (6 mm) high lettering. Use 1" (25 mm) lettering for major equipment.
.3 Fasten nameplates securely in conspicuous place. Where nameplates can not be mounted on cool surface, provide standoffs.
.4 Identify equipment type and number (e.g. Pump No. 2) and service or areas or zone of building served e.g. "Level 4 Laboratories AH-03".
.5 All plates shall be pop riveted in place.
.6 Submit list of nameplates for review prior to engraving.
1.3 PIPING
.1 Identify medium in piping with markers showing name and service including temperature, pressure and directional flow arrows in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a.
.2 Manufactured pipe markers and color bands:
.1 All identification shall incorporate direction of flow arrows.
.2 Markers shall be manufactured from semi rigid plastic vinyl, with subsurface
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15090 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION IDENTIFICATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
printing using quality indoor/outdoor vinyl inks and a UV vinyl inhibitor.
.3 For outside diameters up to 6" the markers shall be coiled and wrap completely around the pipe with six rows of wording in alternate directions.
.4 For outside diameters greater than 6" the markers shall be saddle style with two (2) rows of wording and shall be installed utilizing nylon cable ties provided with the marker.
.5 Letter heights shall be as follows: O.D. RANGE
LETTER HEIGHT
3/8" to 5/8"
1/4"
3/4" to 1 1/4"
1/2"
1 1/8" to 2 3/8"
3/4"
2 1/2" to 6
1 1/4"
6" to 10"
1 3/4"
10" to 18"
2 1/2"
Over 18"
3 1/2"
.6 Standard of Acceptance: SMS Coil-Mark, Brady Wrap Around, Seton Setmark
.3 Location:
.1 Locate markers and classifying colors on piping systems so they can be seen from floor or platform.
.2 Piping runs at least once in each room.
.3 Maximum 50 ft (15 m) between identifications in open areas.
.4 Both sides where piping passes through walls, partitions and floors.
.5 At point of entry and leaving, where piping is concealed in pipe chase or other confined space, and at each access opening.
.6 At start and end points of runs and at each piece of equipment.
.7 At major manual and automatic valves immediately upstream of valves.
.8 Identify branch, equipment or area served after valve.
.4 Table: pipe and valve identification.
.5 Coding shall be in accordance with the following schedule with approved plastic bands:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15090 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION IDENTIFICATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.6 Coding shall be in accordance with the following schedule with approved plastic bands:
PIPE MARKER LEGEND LETTERING ON BAND
BAND COLOUR
LETTERING COLOUR
Condensate Condensate Yellow Black
Hot Water Supply Heating Supply Yellow Black
Hot Water Return Heating Return Yellow Black
1.4 DUCTWORK
.1 Use 2" (50 mm) high black stenciled letters, e.g. "Supply AH-1", "Return AH-1", "Sanitary Exhaust EF-1" with directional flow arrow. Lettering must identify the system that the ductwork serves.
.2 Maintain maximum 50 ft (15 m) distance between markings.
.3 Identify ducts each side of dividing walls or partitions and beside each access door.
.4 Stencil over final finish only.
1.5 VALVES AND CONTROLLERS
.1 Provide two-ply engraved laminated plastic tags equal to SMS series LS-1500 color coding.
.2 Provide Consultant with six (6) identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system. Include tag schedule, designating number, service, function, and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.
.3 Install where directed one (1) copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in glazed frame. Provide one (1) copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.
.4 Consecutively number valves in systems.
.5 The Division 15 Contractor shall coordinate the valve numbering system utilized for the new building with the Owner’s current valve numbering system.
1.6 VAV AND REHEAT LOCATIONS
.1 Provide a blue round 3/4" (20 mm) sticker on the T-Bar grid at each location of VAV boxes or fan power boxes above the ceiling.
.2 Provide a red round 3/4" (20 mm) sticker on the T-bar grid at each location of reheat or heating coils above the ceiling.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15090 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION IDENTIFICATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15170 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MOTORS AND WIRING METHODS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 ASHRAE 90.1 - 1989
.2 National Electrical Code
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit for approval, manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and fabrication.
.3 Division 15 shall review the shop drawings for the motor starters submitted by Division 16 to ensure that all field connections are shown, motor horsepowers and voltages are correct and that the motor control schematic reflects all mechanical requirements.
2 Products
2.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS
.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install an acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed.
.3 All motors shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with ULc and CSA requirements.
.4 Motor speed shall be 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified.
.5 All motors shall be "T" frame NMA Standard Design "B" with 104°F (40 °C) ambient, standard drip-proof with a 1.15 service factor, or as otherwise specified.
.6 All motors not connected to variable frequency drives shall have Class "B" insulation.
.7 Variable Frequency Drives
.1 For all variable frequency drive applications the motors shall be rated for variable speed service and be provided with a minimum of Type F insulation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15170 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MOTORS AND WIRING METHODS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Motors shall meet NEMA MG1, Part 31 standards without filtration.
.8 Motors shall be of adequate size to operate associated equipment and drive mechanisms under all conditions of load and service and to bring equipment up to operating speed within 13 seconds without overloading, and be not less than the nameplate HP specified or indicated on the Drawings.
.9 Integral HP motor sizes 1/2HP and above shall be squirrel cage induction motors rated for either 208 volt or 600 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, unless noted otherwise. Refer to the equipment schedules for the voltage required for each piece of equipment.
.10 Fractional HP motors up to but not including 1/2 hp shall be rated 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz and will be capacitor start, induction motors, with adequate thrust capacity when used with direct mounted equipment, and shall be provided with integral overload and overheating protection. Shaded pole starting devices will not be accepted.
.11 Multi-speed motors and associated switching devices shall be circuited to protect the motor at each speed. Motors shall be consequent pole.
.12 All motors, 1 HP and up shall comply with the requirements outlined in ASHRAE 90.1- 99 as tested by IEEE 112B, and be UL and CSA approved.
.13 All starter panels shall be lockable in accordance with the requirements outlined in the Division 16000 Specification and supplied with locks. All panels provided by a single manufacturer shall have a like key.
.14 Motors shall meet the following levels of efficiency:
Motor Size (HP)
Efficiency @ 3600 RPM (%)
Efficiency @ 1800 RPM (%)
Efficiency @ 1200 RPM (%)
Efficiency @ 900 RPM (%)
1.0
75.5
82.5
80.0
74.0
1.5
82.5
84.0
85.5
77.0
2.0
84.0
84.0
86.5
82.5
3.0
85.5
87.5
87.5
84.0
5.0
87.5
87.5
87.5
85.5
For motors HP which are not listed the efficiencies shall be interpolated based on this table. NOTE: The above Table is the latest at time of writing. Contractor to provide motors as per latest revisions to ASHRAE 90.1 - 99 motor efficiency levels.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15170 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION MOTORS AND WIRING METHODS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.15 All motors over 20 Hp shall be provided with thermistors imbedded in the motor. The Contractor for Division 15 shall wire from the motor thermistor to the motor starter. The Thermistors shall be in accordance with Section 16825 of the Division 16 Specification.
.16 The following motor information shall be provided with the shop drawings for each piece of equipment:
.1 Make
.2 Model Number
.3 Enclosure Type
.4 Speed
.5 Nameplate Efficiency
.17 Standard of Acceptance: Baldor, US Motors, Magnetech, Reliance, GE Motors
2.2 WIRING GENERAL
.1 All conduit and wiring shall conform to the requirements of Division 16 including the following:
.1 Except where specified otherwise in Division 16, Division 15 shall provide all control wiring and interlocks that are required by mechanical equipment.
.2 Quality of materials and workmanship shall be strictly in conformance with Division 16.
.3 Division 15 shall review the shop drawings for motor starters submitted by Division 16 to ensure that all field connections are shown, motor horsepowers and voltages are correct and that motor control schematic reflects all mechanical requirements.
3 Execution
NIL
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010.
.2 All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Provide separate shop drawings for each piece of attenuation equipment, complete with product data.
.3 Submit dynamic insertion loss, air generated noise and aerodynamic performance test results shall be supplied.
1.3 PERFORMANCE RATING DATA
.1 Provide performance rating data from an independent laboratory on silencers certified by a professional engineer and supported by test results in accordance with referenced standards as follows:
.1 Silencer: insertion loss in octave bands 63Hz to 8000 Hz, pressure drop, self noise.
.2 All tests are to have been conducted in the same facility.
.3 Noise levels shall be measured according to the duct to room method, ASTM E477 -96 or in-duct intensity method. Dynamic insertion loss, air generated noise and aerodynamic performance test results, both in positive and negative air flow, with pressure drop ratings shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements indicated on the schedules.
.4 The insertion loss of the silencers shall be measured with octave band or one third octave band pink noise.
.5 Contractor shall require the manufacturer to document insertion loss and air flow regenerated noise data. Over extrapolation and data from out-dated equipment are unacceptable.
.6 The manufacturer of prefabricated panels shall submit sound transmission loss measurements in accordance with the latest ASTM Standard E90 and the absorption performance of the panels, windows and operating doors in accordance with the latest ASTM Standard C423 details of joints and fittings.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, all work of this section shall conform to the following Standard Specification requirements:
.1 ANSI S12.2-1995 Criteria for Evaluating Room Noise.
.2 ANSI S12.34-1988 Engineering Method for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources for Essentially Free-Field Conditions over a Reflecting Plane.
.3 ANSI/ARI 880-89P Air Terminals.
.4 ARI Standard 260P Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment.
.5 ARI 890/ASHRAE 70-91 Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies
.6 ARI Standard 885-90 Method for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets
.7 ARI Standard 575-94 Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Levels within Equipment Rooms.
.8 ARI Standard 350-86 Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor Air-Conditioning Equipment.
.9 ASHRAE Standard 68-86 / AMCA Standard 330-86 Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans.
.10 ASTM C423-90 a Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
.12 ASTM E90-90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
.13 ASTM E413-87 Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class (STC).
.14 ASTM E477-96 Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials.
.15 ASTM E795-92 Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.
.16 ASTM E1222-90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Insertion Loss of Pipe Lagging Systems.
.17 ISO 7235-199 Acoustics Measurement procedures for Ducted Silencers Insertion
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
Loss, Flow Noise, and Total Pressure Loss
1.5 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE
.1 It is the intent of this specification that noise levels from HVAC equipment will not exceed the Noise Criteria curves described below. Noise criteria curves establish a one number rating for evaluating the acceptability of a sound pressure spectrum according to the average person’s hearing. Noise criteria curves and their related sound pressure equivalents for each frequency are described in ASHRAE Handbook Systems Volume.
.2 Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM E90, E413, E795 and C423 procedures. Sound Transmission Loss data, STC value, Sound Absorption Coefficients and NRC value shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this section.
.3 These NC levels should be used as a guide in the event of product substitutions and shop drawing modifications. The NC levels shall also serve as a gauge by which the results of workmanship and care of installation will be judged from an acoustical standpoint, since a poor installation can lead to the generation of noise.
2 Products
2.1 SILENCERS
.1 Factory manufactured of prime coated or galvanized steel, compatible with ductwork specified elsewhere and to ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. Material gauges listed below are minimums. Material gauges shall be increased as required for the system pressure and velocity classification. The silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential pressure of 8" w.g.
.2 Rectangular Duct Silencers: Rectangular duct silencers shall have outer casings of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel outer casing and 24 gauge galvanized perforated steel.
.3 Circular Duct Silencers with Media: Circular duct silencers shall have outer casings as listed below and 22 gauge galvanized perforated steel. All casing seams and joints shall be lockformed and sealed or stitch welded and sealed.
Casing Diameter
Casing Gauge
Less than 30" (750mm)
20
30" to 54" (750 mm to 1350 mm)
18
Over 54" (1350mm)
16
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Circular Duct Silencers with No Media: Circular duct silencers shall have outer casings as listed below and 22 gauge galvanized perforated steel. All casing seams and joints shall be lockformed and sealed or stitch welded and sealed:
Casing Diameter
Casing Gauge
Less than 18" (450mm)
22
18" to 30" (450mm to 750mm)
20
30" to 54" (750mm to 1350mm)
18
Over 54" (1350mm)
16
.5 Elbow Duct Silencers shall have outer casings of 18 gauge galvanized steel and 22 gauge galvanized perforated steel. All acoustical splitters shall be internally radiused and aerodynamically designed for efficient turning of the air. Half and full splitters shall be provided as necessary to achieve the scheduled insertion loss. All elbow silencers with a turning cross section dimension greater than 48" (1200mm) shall have at least two half splitters and one full splitter.
.6 All casings shall be lockformed and sealed to provide leakage resistant construction. Air tight construction shall be achieved by utilizing duct sealant compound supplied and installed by the Division 15 Contractor.
.7 All perforated steel shall be adequately stiffened to insure flatness and form. All spot welds shall be painted.
.8 Acoustic Media
.1 Dissipative and Film Lined Silencers
.1 Media shall be of acoustic quality, shot free glass fibre insulation with long resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fibre density and compression shall be as required to insure conformance with laboratory test data. Glass fibre shall be packed with a minimum of 15 percent compression during silencer assembly.
.2 Media shall be bacteria and fungus resistant, resilient such that it will not crumble or break, and conforming to irregular surfaces. Media shall not cause or accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel. Mineral wool not be permitted as substitute for glass fibre.
.2 No Media Silencers
.1 All no media silencers shall not contain absorptive media of any kind. Attenuation shall be achieved with controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Media Protection
.1 The acoustic media for dissipative silencers shall be encapsulated in glass fibre cloth to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation of the glass fiber. All axial cone silencers shall have a glass fibre cloth liner.
.2 The acoustic media for film lined silencers shall be completely wrapped in Tedlar film to help prevent shedding erosion and impregnation of the glass fibre. The wrapped acoustic media shall be separated from the perforated metal by a factory installed 1/2" (12mm) thick acoustically transparent spacer. The spacer shall be flame retardant and erosion resistant. A mesh, screen or corrugated perforated liner will not be acceptable as a substitute for the specified spacer.
.4 Combustion Ratings
.1 For Dissipative Silencers the materials, including the glass fibre shall have a maximum combustion rating as noted below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.
.1 Flamespread Classification 15
.2 Smoke Development Rating: 5
.2 For Film Lined Silencers the materials, including the glass fibre, Tedlar film and acoustical spacer shall have maximum combustion rating as noted below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.
.1 Flamespread Classification 20
.2 Smoke Development Rating: 45
.5 HTL Casings
.1 Where indicated on the silencer schedule silencers shall have high transmission loss (HTL) walls externally applied and completely sealed to the silencer casing by the silencer manufacturer to assure quality controlled transmission loss.
.2 The HTL walls shall consist of media, airspace, mass and outer protective metal skin, as required, to obtain the specified room noise criteria. Standard acoustical panels will not be accepted as HTL walls. Breakout noise calculations for each air handling and fan system shall be provided with the silencer submittal to insure compliance with the room noise criteria. Breakout noise calculations shall be based on the sound power levels of the specified equipment.
.9 Access Doors
.1 Where indicated on the silencer schedule, silencers shall be supplied with access doors to permit fire damper service. Access doors shall be supplied as an integral part of the silencer by the silencer manufacturer. Where HTL walls are also supplied the access doors shall not reduce the effectiveness of the HTL walls.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.10 Generated Noise
.1 Generated noise of all silencers shall not contribute adversely to the NC criteria.
.11 Insertion Noise
.1 The insertion loss of each silencer shall be as shown on the schedule. Unless otherwise specified, the sound power insertion loss of the duct silencers shall be not less than the following values at an air velocity of 1000 fpm in the direction of sound propagation.
.1 1/3 octave band insertion loss in dB at the following frequencies: Silencer Length
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
3 ft. (0.9 m)
4
7
12
5 ft. (1.5 m)
6
10
18
7 ft. (2.1 m)
10
14
24
10 ft (3.0 m)
12
20
34
.12 Pressure Drops
.1 Unless otherwise specified, the pressure drop across the duct silencers shall not exceed the following values: Silencer Length
Pressure Drop (w.g.) for Air Velocity of 1000 fpm (5m/s)
3 ft. (0.9 m)
0.16 in (4 mm) (39.8 Pa)
5 ft. (1.5 m)
0.17 in (4 mm) (42.3 Pa)
7 ft. (2.1 m)
0.20 in (5 mm) (49.8 Pa)
.13 Dimensions
.1 Duct dimensions indicated on drawings are clear inside dimensions. Silencer dimensions shall be larger in both depth and width to match sheet metal dimensions of the ducts.
.14 Self Noise
.1 Maximum allowable self noise for silencer should be less than the following at an air velocity of 1000 fpm in the direction of sound propagation. Face Area
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
1 ft2 (0.10 m2)
38
26
30
2 ft2 (0.19 m2)
41
29
33
4 ft2 (0.37 m2)
44
32
36
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
8 ft2 (0.74 m2) 47 35 39
.15 Performance: as indicated on the Schedule.
.1 Insertion losses are minimum and pressure drops are maximum.
.16 Standard of Acceptance for Sound Attenuators: Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron
2.2 PREFABRICATED PLENUM PANELS
.1 Provide prefabricated plenums for the supply and return plenums as indicated on the drawings. The acoustic plenums are numbered on the drawings with an AP-x designation.
.2 Prefabricated panels shall be 4 inch (100mm) thick sandwich construction, manufactured from 16-gauge galvanized steel outer sheets, 22 gauge steel galvanized and perforated inner sheets with an open area of about 30% (minimum 23%), and at least 16 gauge stiffeners and channels.
.3 The acoustical filler material shall be 4.5 pcf (72 kg/m3) glass/mineral fiber packed under 10% compression. Panels shall be joined together with "H" members which shall be not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel.
.4 Each item constructed shall be self-supporting without the need for additional bracing or structure. The plenum shall be structurally designed to avoid excessive deflection or bowing, and shall be sealed to prevent air leakage when subjected to a differential pressure between inside and outside of 8 inches w.g. (2000 Pa.) Openings for ducts or pipes, connectors, flanges, etc. shall be framed airtight with not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel.
.5 Perforated face of panel shall provide minimum noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 0.95 and entire panel shall provide a minimum sound transmission class (STC) of 40, and minimum sound transmission loss values in the 1/1 octave bands as followed when tested in accordance with ASTM E90-75 or later.
.6 The octave band transmission loss performance of the panels shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
Octave-Band Centre Frequency, Hz. 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 Transmission Loss, in dB 20 21 27 38 48 58
.7 The octave-band sound absorption coefficients of the panels shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
Octave-Band Centre Frequency, Hz. 63 125 250 500 1000 2000
.8 Assembly: Base sections and flashings 0.05" (1.3mm) minimum galvanized steel.
.1 Panel and flashing joints externally sealed with 1/5" (5mm) diameter bead of non-sag, non-hardening sealant. Floor channel to floor connection sealed with 1/8" x
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1/2" (3 x 13mm) monolastic tape.
.2 Roof channels, aprons and corner joiners shall be made of 16 gauge galvanized steel formed to prevent a direct path for sound and/or air leakage. Floor channels shall be made of #18 gauge galvanized steel. Panel joiners shall be made of 20 gauge galvanized steel and shall be roll formed to be greater in strength than standard 16 gauge joiners. Where roll joiners are not utilized, 16 gauge shall be provided. All panel accessories shall be furnished in standard lengths to be field cut to required dimensions. When Ramset can not be used, floor channels shall be prepunched with 9/32" holes spaced on 24" center for attachment by 1/4" round head screws with expansion type inserts. All panel joiners and connectors requiring neoprene seals shall have the neoprene field applied.
.3 Factory-cut and frame openings where the greatest dimension exceeds 12" (300mm) Smaller panel openings to be site located and cut 2" (50mm) larger in diameter, sleeved with 0.03" (0.75mm) minimum galvanized steel.
.4 Fill space between pipe or conduit and sleeve with acoustic media, covered and mastic sealed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.5 Plenum installation shall be capable of withstanding a positive internal static pressure of 5.5 inches.
.6 Plenum installation shall be capable of withstanding a negative internal pressure of 4.5 inches.
.7 Plenum manufacturer shall warrant that when the plenum is installed in a workmanlike manner in strict accordance with these specifications and manufacturers instructions, plenum shall meet the acoustical, thermal and air pressure performance specified.
.8 Plenum components shall be furnished clean, well made and free of any defects which may adversely affect the appearance, serviceability or performance. Manufacturer shall furnish proof of having manufactured similar plenums for at least 5 years prior to this installation.
.9 Where acoustic plenums are shown with an access door on the drawings provide a factory fabricated acoustic access door.
.10 Standard of Acceptance Prefabricated Plenums: VibroAcoustics, Vibron
2.3 NON-HARDENING SEALANT
.1 Non-hardening sealant shall be of the polysulphide type, conforming to all fire regulations and codes. Material shall possess a minimum density of 60 pcf and a minimum hardness of 60 durometer.
2.4 FOAM ROD
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15240 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SOUND ATTENUATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Foam rod shall be of the closed cell polyethylene foam type conforming to all fire regulations and codes, suitable for use as a backing for non-hardening sealant.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install sound attenuation equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Duct dimensions indicated on the drawings are clear inside dimensions of acoustic lining. Silencer dimension shall be 2" (50mm) larger in both width and depth to match ductwork.
.3 Where silencers are installed through a wall, provide a 1" (25mm) clear gap between the silencer and the wall. This gap should then be sealed with packed fibreglass and sealed on both sides of the wall with elastomeric non-hardening sealer.
.4 If any equipment installed under Division 15 fails to meet the noise or vibration requirements specified herein, that equipment shall be corrected or replaced without claim for additional payment, inclusive of all labor and material costs.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15241 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VIBRATION ISOLATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance and product data.
.3 Submit type of isolator, size, height when uncompressed and maximum allowable static deflection weight of all isolated equipment, loads on each isolator and static deflection of each isolator under the specific design load.
.4 Submit marked up plans indicating all locations where pipes are to be isolated in mechanical rooms, crossing acoustic joints and as specified.
1.3 SAMPLES
.1 Provide a sample of each type of isolator to be utilized on the project at the time the shop drawings are submitted.
1.4 VIBRATION ISOLATOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other markings so that after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified thus determining the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided according to the design.
.2 All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and shall be linear over a deflection range of 50 percent above the design deflection.
.3 The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall not be less than 1.0 or greater than 2.0.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The static deflection of isolators shall be given in the equipment schedule and as specified.
.2 Vibration isolator sizes and layout shall be determined by the vibration isolator supplier.
.3 All mechanical equipment not specifically identified in this specification that contains rotating or vibrating elements shall be installed on Type P1 isolators.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15241 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VIBRATION ISOLATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Elastomeric elements that will be exposed to temperatures below freezing shall be fabricated from natural rubber instead of neoprene.
.5 All isolators to be installed outdoors or exposed to weather shall be hot dipped galvanized and shall be furnished with neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down bolts to prevent any metal to metal contact.
.6 Standard of Acceptance (All vibration isolators): Mason, Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron, Amber Booth
.7 Model numbers for Mason isolators are indicated for reference purposes.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1 Type P1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 5/16" (9 mm) minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 50 psi (350 kPa). Mason type W
.2 Type P2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 5/16" (9 mm) minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber; maximum loading 60 psi (415 kPa). Mason type W.
.3 Type P3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 5/16" (9 mm) minimum thick neoprene bonded to 16 gage (1.71 mm) steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers. Mason type WSW.
.4 Type P4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 5/16" (9 mm) minimum thick rubber bonded to 16 gage (1.71 mm) steel plate; 30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers. Mason type WSW
.5 Pads to be selected for 15% strain.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS
.1 Type M1 - color coded; neoprene in shear; laterally stable maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces. All metal surfaces to be covered with neoprene. Mounts shall have leveling bolts rigidly secured to the equipment. Mason type ND.
.2 Pads to be selected for 15% strain.
2.4 ISOLATOR SPRINGS
.1 Design stable springs so that ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times the ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units to be complete with leveling devices.
.2 Cadmium plate for outdoor and internal air handling installations.
.3 Color code springs. The spring diameter shall be not less than 80% of the compressed height of the spring.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15241 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VIBRATION ISOLATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Unless otherwise specified, the minimum static deflection for equipment mounted on grade slabs shall be 1" (25 mm) and the minimum static deflection for equipment mounted above the lowest level shall be 2" (50 mm).
.5 Two isolation pads sandwiching a 16 gage (1.71 mm) steel plate shall be bonded to the isolator base plate.
.6 Unless otherwise specified, isolators need not be bolted to the floor for indoor installations. If the base plates are bolted to the structure, a neoprene vibration isolation washer and sleeve shall be installed under the bolt head between the steel washer and the base plate.
2.5 SPRING MOUNT
.1 Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.
.2 Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 1/4" (6 mm) minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad. Mason Type SLF.
.3 Type M3 - stable open spring: 1/4" (6 mm) minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; internal adjustment; equipment bolting not necessary. Mason Type SLF.
.4 Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 1/4" (6 mm) minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates. Minimum clearance of 1" (25 mm) shall be maintained around restraining boots and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring operation. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation, backed away from contact by at least 1/2" (12 mm); a neoprene washer shall be installed beneath the bolt head/washer used to restrain the isolator. Mason Type SLR.
.5 Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 51 lbs (23 kg) maximum.
2.6 HANGERS
.1 Color coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Swivel arrangement to permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 arc without metal to metal contact.
.2 Unless specified otherwise, the static deflection shall be 3/8" (9 mm), with a strain not exceeding 15%, and spring hangers to have minimum static deflection of 2" (50 mm).
.3 A neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger rod passes through the steel hanger box such that the hanger rod cannot contact the steel hanger. The diameter of the clear hole in the hanger box shall be at least 3/8" (19 mm) larger than the diameter of the hanger rod.
.4 Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear. Mason Type HD
.5 Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer. Mason Type 30
.6 Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element. Mason type 30N
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15241 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VIBRATION ISOLATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.7 RISER GUIDE
.1 For vertical isolated piping, riser guides shall be M-1 type isolators bolted to the vertical edge of a 90 degree steel angle. The angle shall allow the pipe to move axially but shall limit lateral movement to approximately +/- 1" (25 mm).
2.8 INERTIA BASE FORMS
.1 Type B1 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place reinforcing rods running in both directions; provide metal pans integrally welded on sizes up to 8 feet (2400 mm) on smallest dimension, bolted on sizes over 8 feet (2400 mm) on smallest dimension; spring mounted units carried by gusseted height saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housekeeping pads by 2" (50 mm) minimum.
.2 Division 15 Contractor to provide concrete in accordance with Section 15010.
.3 Minimum thickness of isolation base forms to be in accordance with the following schedule:
Motor Size HP Minimum Thickness Inches
3 - 9 6
10 - 24 8
25 - 74 10
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Provide vibration isolation for new equipment as noted in the specification, listed in the schedule and shown on the drawings.
.2 Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and adjust mountings to level equipment.
.3 Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system flexibility.
.4 Ensure that piping and ducting passage through walls and floors do not transmit vibrations. A minimum of 1" (25 mm) clearance shall be allowed around the entire perimeter of the penetration. The clearance shall be packed with fibreglass and sealed with non-hardening mastic on both sides.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15241 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VIBRATION ISOLATION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring mounts or spring hangers with 1" (25 mm) minimum static deflection as follows:
.1 Up to NPS 4: first 3 points of support.
.2 First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated equipment, but not more than 2" (50 mm).
.6 Unless specified otherwise, isolators indoors need not be bolted to the floor. Where isolation is bolted to floor avoid short circuiting of sound pads by using vibration isolation rubber washers.
.7 Provide suitable supports for all equipment which does not have a frame with adequate rigidity.
.8 All steel bases shall clear the sub-bases by at least 2" (50 mm). All bases shall be blocked and shimmed level so that all ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system, at operating level, before the isolation adjustment is made. The clearance shall be checked by the contractor to ensure that no scraps have been left to short circuit the vibration isolators.
.9 There shall be a minimum of 4" (100 mm) clearance between isolated equipment and the walls, ceiling, floors, columns and any other equipment not installed on vibration isolators.
.10 Piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or supported on other equipment, pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. It shall be supported on or suspended from building structure.
.11 Equipment connected to fluid piping shall be erected on isolators or isolated foundations at correct operating heights prior to connection of piping. Equipment should be blocked-up with temporary shims to final operating height. When the system is assembled and fluid is added, the isolators shall be adjusted to allow removal of the shims, and the Contractor shall confirm that the isolators for the fluid-filled pipes, pumps and other elements deflect the specified amounts and no more.
.12 All wiring connections to mechanical equipment on isolators shall be made in a 360-degree loop: minimum conduit length: 3-ft (1 m). Cut any ties used to install this loop prior to adjusting the isolators.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This Section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
.2 Perform Thermal Insulation work in accordance with ASHRAE 90-1 1999 Standards.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1999 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.2 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1999 Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.3 ASTM.A167-92B Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
.4 ASTM C335 Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulations
.5 ASTM C411-82(1992) Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation
.6 CAN/CGSB-51.20M Type 2: Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings
.7 CAN/CGSB-51.12 Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing
.9 CAN/ULC-S102 Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies
.10 CGSB 51-GP-9M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Sleeving for Piping and Round Ducting
.11 CGSB51-GP-11M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers
.12 CGSB51-GP-52M Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation
.13 CGSB51-GP-53M Jacketing Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts
.14 CSA HA Series CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit manufacturer's catalogue of literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations for approval.
.3 Prior to ordering insulation materials, submit a sample board demonstrating the cross section of each type of insulation to be utilized on the project for approval. Submission shall include insulating material, exterior jackets and adhesive for each type of insulation. After review and acceptance, the sample board shall be kept on site for the duration of the project for reference purposes. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be permitted. All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 "CONCEALED" Means: Insulated mechanical services and equipment in trenches, chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.
.2 "EXPOSED" Means: "not concealed" as defined herein. This shall also include but not be limited to areas where the ceiling is not continuous from wall to wall and the gap between the wall and the ceiling is a minimum of 12" (300 mm) “floating ceilings” or as indicated on the drawings, the space above the floating ceiling shall be considered exposed.
.3 “RUNOUTS” Means: Piping to individual terminal units not exceeding 12' (3650 mm).
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1 Comply with all requirements of Local and Provincial Authorities having jurisdiction, the Ontario Building Code and the Underwriters’ Laboratory of Canada (ULC).
.2 When tested, fire retardant type insulation materials, coverings and adhesives with maximum 25 Flame Spread and maximum 50 Smoke Developed ratings, shall be in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102 and NFPA 255-1996. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-96 shall not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at temperature(s) to which exposed in service.
.3 Properly identify insulation materials, coverings and adhesives when required by Federal and/or Provincial Health and Safety WHMIS Legislation.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Engage a licensed Insulation Application Contractor, specializing in, and possessing an established reputation for this type of work.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Insulating material(s) shall be new, undamaged and of the respective type(s) specified for each specific application.
.2 Pipe insulation shall be preformed and furnished in standard lengths with ends cut square, and conforming with the dimensional requirements of ASTM C 585.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 Insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives coatings etc., shall be shipped to the site in factory fabricated containers, with the manufacturer’s stamp or label affixed, indicating the fire hazard ratings of the products, name of the manufacturer and brand.
.2 Retain insulation materials in their original containers, until immediately prior to application. Keep all materials dry during shipping and storage.
.3 Retain adhesives in their original cartons or containers with the manufacturer’s name and catalogue number clearly identified on same. Protect contents against freezing.
.4 Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not install damaged insulation. The Contractor shall remove all damaged insulation from the job site, at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect.
.5 Installed, non-weatherproofed, insulation shall be protected from inclement weather with an approved waterproof sheeting as installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove and replace any wet or damaged insulation, at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect.
1.9 VOC REQUIREMENTS
.1 All adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings used on or inside of building weatherproofing layer shall have a VOC content that is less than the content limits defined in Section 01611 LEED Product Requirements.
2 Products
2.1 P-1 - FORMED FIBROUS GLASS
.1 Application:
.1 Insulation System P-1 for piping, valves, and fittings as follows:
.1 hot water heating (including hot water, glycol, heat recovery and reheat systems) including pot feeder, filter and pot feeder piping, expansion tank fittings and all other associated piping connected to hot water circulating heating system;
.2 domestic hot water, tempered water and recirculating piping;
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 humidification.
.2 Material(s):
.1 Insulate all piping with a preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, complying with ASTM C 547, Class 3 to 850 F. (454 C.), rigid, moulded pipe insulation, non-combustible and conforming with the following:
.1 “k” (KSI) @ 75 F. mean temperature 0.23 max. (0.033 @ 24 C.);
.2 maximum service temperature 850 F.(454 C.);
.3 rated 25/50 per ASTM E 84, UL 723 and NFPA 255;
.4 product must comply with the requirements of ASTM C 795, when used over stainless steel.
.3 Vapour Retardant Jacketing:
.1 White "KRAFT" paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil, with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglass Canada: 850 with ASJ-SSL Jacket, Manson: Alley K with all purpose APT Jacket, Knauf, Johns Manville.
.4 Thickness:
.1 Table 1 - Insulation Thicknesses follows:
.2 Steam Lines: For steam pressures not listed in Table 1, use insulation thickness as specified for the next higher pressure listed.
TABLE 1- HOT SYSTEMS INSULATION THICKNESSES
Service Fluid Design Operating
Temperature Range F
Nominal Pipe Size Insulation Thickness
Runouts Up To 2
1 & Less
1-3/4 To 2
2-1/2 To 4 6 8 & Up
Hot water Heating, and Glycol
Up to 200 F.Up to 93 C.
1.0" 25 mm
1.5" 40mm
1.5" 40mm
1.5" 40mm
1.5" 40mm
1.5" 40mm
Notes :
1. Insulation exposed to exterior shall be doubled of the stipulated thickness in two staggered layers.
2.2 P-2 - FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Insulation System P-2 - Piping, Valves and Fittings - Temperatures Up To 850 F. (454 C.):
.1 domestic cold water;
.2 horizontal and vertical runs of storm piping for 33' (10 m) from roof drain;
.3 where multiple storm drain runouts are shorter than 33' (10 m) connect into a storm main. Insulate entire length of storm main up to 33' (10 m) beyond the last runout;
.4 entire length of horizontal storm piping above hard ceilings;
.5 chilled water supply and return piping;
.6 geothermal supply and return piping (within building)
.7 heat pump water supply and return piping
.8 all heat traced piping
.9 piping for equipment installed in domestic cold water.
.2 Material(s):
.1 Insulate all piping with a preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, complying with ASTM C 547, Class 3 to 850 F.(454 C.), rigid, moulded pipe insulation, non combustible and conforming with the following:
.1 “k”(KSI)@75 F. (24 C.), mean temperature 0.23max. (0.033@24 C.);
.2 maximum service temperature 850 F.(454 C.);
.3 rated 25/50 per ASTM E 84, UL723 and NFPA255;
.4 product must comply with ASTM C795 when used over stainless steel.
.3 Vapour Retardant Jacketing:
.1 White "KRAFT" paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil, with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Fibreglass Canada: 850 with ASJ-SSL Jacket, Manson: Alley K with all purpose APT Jacket, Knauf, Johns Manville
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Thickness:
TABLE 1- COLD SYSTEMS INSULATION THICKNESSES
Service Fluid Design Operating Temperature Range F
Nominal Pipe Size Insulation Thickness
Runouts Up To 2 1 & Less 1-3/4 To
2 2-1/2 To
4 6 8 & Up
N/A
Note: All storm piping in Lecture Theatre 1033 shall be complete with 2” (50mm) insulation complete with 2 layers of wrapping (Barymat 5 B-OB or approved equivalent)
2.3 P-3 - FLEXIBLE FIBROUS GLASS WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application:
.1 Insulation System P-3 Piping and Fittings: underside of roof drain body.
.2 Material(s):
.1 CGSB 51-GP-11M+Amdt-Apr-78, mineral fibre blanket for piping and CGSB 51-GP-52M vapour barrier jacket and facing material.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglass Canada, Manson, Knauf.
.3 Thickness: FLEXIBLE FIBROUS GLASS WITH VAPOUR BARRIER - INSULATION Line Size Nominal
Thickness
All Sizes
1"(25mm)
2.4 P-4 - FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC -40 F. TO 203 F. (-40 C. TO 95 C.)
.1 Application:
.1 Insulation System P-4 - Valves and Fittings - Temperature Range -40 F. to 203 F. (-40 C. to 95 C.) Up:
.1 refrigeration lines
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Material(s):
.1 CAN2-51.40-M80+Amdt-Aug-83, flexible fire retardant elastomeric unicellular sheet and pipe covering.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Armaflex, Johns Manville.
.3 Thickness: FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC -40 F. to 203 F. (-40 C. to 95 C.) - INSULATION Line Size Nominal
Thickness
All refrigerant lines 1-1/2” (40 mm)
2.5 P-5 – EXHAUST PIPES
.1 Application
.1 Diesel exhaust piping and accessories; including flexible connection and muffler.
.2 Materials
.1 preformed, rigid, hydrous calcium silicate pipe and block, asbestos free, complying with ASTM C533, Type 1, to 1200 F. (640 C.);
.2 “k” (ksi) @ 300 F. mean temperature 0.42 max. (0.060 @ 149 C.);
.3 maximum service temperature. 1200 F. (649 C.);
.4 compressive strength of 160 psi at 5% compression;
.5 when used over stainless steel, product must comply with the requirements of ASTM C795, MIL-I-24244 or NRC 1.36;
.6 product shall carry a 0/0 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed rating as tested in accordance with ASTM E84/NFPA 255/UL 723;
.7 product shall be rated as non combustible as tested per ASTM E136.
.8 Standard of Acceptance: Kaylo-10, Manson, Knauf, Johns Manville.
.3 Thickness
.1 All piping: 3” (75mm).
2.6 FASTENINGS
.1 Insulation Systems P-1, P-2 and P-3:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Tape: Colour matching, pressure sensitive, self adhesive vinyl tape. Under 25 for Flame Spread and under 50 for Smoke Developed ratings.
.2 Lap Seal Adhesive: Quick-setting adhesive for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers. 10 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed ratings.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Foster: 85-75 Drion.
.4 Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant coating approved by CFFM and Authorities having jurisdiction prior to application.
.2 Insulation System P-4:
.1 Contact Adhesive: Quick-setting adhesive for seams and joints of flexible unicellular insulation. 5 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed ratings.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong: 520 Adhesive.
.3 Insulation System P-5:
.1 cut and mitred to fit, secured in place with 16 gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12" (300mm) centres;
.2 all joints shall be painted with high temperature insulating cement.
.4 All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
2.7 JACKETS
.1 Canvas:
.1 Apply in exposed areas: compacted firm, ULC listed, heavy plain weave, cotton fabric at 6 oz. per sq. yd (220g/m2) treated with diluted fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.2 On concealed valves and fittings use ULC listed plain weave cotton fabric at 3 oz. per sq. yd(120 g/m2).
.3 Standard of Acceptance: S. Fattal, Thermocanvas, Johns Manville.
.2 Aluminum:
.1 Apply in areas exposed to the outdoors to CSA HA Series-M1980:
.1 crimped or embossed alloy jacketing 0.016" (0.045 mm) 26 gauge thick with longitudinal slip joints and 2" (50mm) end laps with factory attached protective liner on interior surface. Aluminum alloy butt straps with mechanical fasteners;
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 jackets on fitting, 0.016" (0.045mm) thick, die shaped components of alloy with factory attached protective liner on interior surface.
.3 PVC:
.1 Apply in exposed areas on piping with operating temperatures less than 180 F. (80 C.).
.2 Piping: ULC listed PVC moulded type jacketing material, gloss white complying with 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.
.3 Valves and Fittings: ULC listed PVC, gloss white, 1-piece, pre-moulded fittings complying with 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.
.4 PVC Application: strictly in accordance with the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction.
.5 Ultraviolet resistant.
.6 Fastenings: To manufacturers standard(s).
.4 All adhesives and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
3 Execution
3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Apply insulation once required tests are complete and approved by the Consultant. Surfaces shall be clean and dry when insulation is installed and during application of any finish.
.2 Work shall be performed by a qualified Insulation Journeymen.
.3 Apply insulation under ambient temperature conditions in accordance with insulation or adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations.
.4 Insulate roof drain body with 1"(25mm) flexible insulation. Hold in place with 100% coverage of insulating cement.
.5 Apply insulation neatly and tightly in unbroken lengths and with ends of sections firmly and squarely butted or engaged together. Lap canvas or other specified wrapping over all joints and thoroughly cement down with adhesive. Vapour barriers and insulation shall be complete over the full length of pipe or surface, without penetration for hangers, and without interruption at sleeves, pipe and fittings.
.6 Extend insulation through sleeves in walls (except fire walls) or other openings in the building for a continual insulation and vapour barrier of uniform diameter.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 10
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.7 Terminate insulation at each side of the fire walls and pack the space between the wall sleeve and pipe as specified in Section 15010.
.8 Replace removed insulation from existing piping to make tie-in connections with new insulation. Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make/form a neat and firm butt joint between old and new insulation.
.9 Protect insulation on domestic cold water and chilled water lines with insulation shields consisting of high density insulation and sheet steel support. Insulation inserts shall be sized as follows:
INSULATION INSERTS - SIZES
Pipe Size Length
Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
1-1/2" to 2-1/2" (40mm to 65mm) 10" (250mm)
3" to 6" (75mm to 150mm) 12" (300mm)
8" to 10" (200mm to 250mm) 16" (400mm)
12" and up (300mm and up) 22" (550mm)
.10 Apply specified adhesives, mastics and coatings to manufacturer’s recommended minimum coverage per gallon. All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
.11 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
.12 Where piping is indicated to be heat traced, provide oversized insulation to accommodate heat tracing cable.
.13 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION
.1 Preformed Insulation: Sectional insulation up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS 12.
.2 Multi-Layered Insulation: Use staggered butt joint construction.
.3 Vertical Pipe over NPS 3: Use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 15' (4.5 m) centres and at each valve and flange.
.4 At expansion joints in piping, apply insulation over a 16 gauge sleeve fabricated to fit around expansion joint without restricting its movement. Fabricate sleeve(s) so it may be removed to allow for the repacking and lubrication of the expansion joint without damaging adjoining insulation. Extend sleeves a minimum of 3" (75mm) longer than the expansion joint, fit with insulation retaining flanges and with a means of maintaining the position of the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 11
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
sleeve over the expansion joint.
.5 Terminate insulation at each end of unions and flanges on hot lines, and at other points where indicated, with insulation cement, to CGSB 51-GP-6M, trowelled on bevel.
.6 Gouge out insulation for a proper fit where there is interference between the weld bead and the insulation. Bevel away from studs and nuts to permit their removal without damage to insulation, and closely and neatly trim around extending parts of pipe saddles, supports, hangers, and clamp guides and seal with insulating cement.
.7 Insulation is not required on chrome plated piping and fittings.
.8 Surface temperature on the outside of insulation shall not exceed 150 F.(66 C.).
.9 Insulate flanges, valves and fittings with segments of insulation of the same type and thickness as the insulation on the pipe, secured in place with soft annealed galvanized wire. Finish with cement and canvas while the cement is still wet.
3.3 TYPE P-5 INSULATION
.1 Apply Insulation firmly in place with all joints butted tightly and mechanically fastened in place by wiring using 16 gauge stainless steel wire on 12"(300mm) centres.
.2 Stagger all joints.
.3 Apply a jacket of 0.016 aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture barrier over the calcium silicate pipe insulation. Ensure butt joints and longitudinal overlaps are wide enough to provide weather proofing.
.4 The jacket shall be secured with aluminum bands or screws. Aluminum bands of 1/2" (12mm) wide, made of 0.020 alloy T-3003 H-14 shall be used and applied on 12" (300mm) centres. The jacket can also be secured with sheet metal screws 3/8" (10mm) long, aluminum screw installed on 4" (100mm) centres.
.5 For applications in a corrosive environment apply a 0.020 stainless steel jacket in lieu of the aluminum jacket. Secure jacket in place with either 1/2" (12mm) 304L stainless steel bands on 12" (300mm) centres or 3/8" (10mm) stainless steel screws on 4" (100mm) centres
3.4 SIZING
.1 Provide fire retardant coating on canvas jackets.
.2 Fire retardant coating shall be approved by Authorities having jurisdiction and CFFM prior to application.
.3 Priming:
.1 Coat canvas covering exposed in finished spaces with diluted coat of lagging adhesive, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. All adhesives and
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15260 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 12
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
.2 Perform Thermal Insulation work in accordance with ASHRAE 90-1 1999 Standards.
1.2 FIRE RESISTANCE
.1 Comply with NFPA 90A-1999 Standards. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 shall be in accordance with NFPA255-1996 and CAN4-S102.
.2 Material(s) tested in accordance with ASTM C411-82 shall not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at temperature(s) to which exposed in service.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1999 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.2 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1999 Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.3 ASTM A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
.4 ASTM C335 Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulations
.5 ASTM C411 Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation
.6 ASTM E84
.7 CAN/CGSB-51.2M Type 2, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings
.8 CAN/CGSB-51.12 Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing
.10 CAN/ULC-S102 Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies
.11 CGSB 51-GP-9M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Sleeving for Piping and Round Ducting
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.12 CGSB 51-11M Thermal insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers
.13 CGSB 51-GP-52M Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation
.14 CGSB 51-GP-53M Jacketing, Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts
.15 CSA HA Series CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations for approval.
.3 Prior to ordering any insulation materials, prepare a sample board, with a cross section sample of all types of insulation, including exterior jacket, properly identified for the various services and equipment on the project and state types of adhesives used. Submit the sample board to the Consultant for review. After review and acceptance, the sample board shall be kept on site for the duration of the project for reference. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be permitted.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
.1 "CONCEALED" Means: Insulated mechanical services and equipment in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.
.2 "EXPOSED" Means: "not concealed" as defined herein. This shall also include but not be limited to areas where the ceiling is not continuous from wall to wall.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1 Comply with all requirements of Local and Provincial Authorities having jurisdiction, the Ontario Building Code and the Underwriters’ Laboratory of Canada (ULC).
.2 Fire retardant type insulation materials, coverings and adhesives with maximum 25 Flame Spread and maximum 50 Smoke Developed rating when tested shall be in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102 and NFPA 255-1996. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-96 shall not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at temperature(s) to which exposed in service.
.3 Properly identify insulation materials, coverings and adhesives when required by Federal and/or Provincial Health and Safety WHMIS Legislation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Engage a licensed Insulation Application Contractor, specializing in, possessing an established reputation for this type of work.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Insulating material(s) shall be new, undamaged and of the respective type(s) specified for each specific application.
.2 Installed, non-weatherproofed, insulation shall be protected from inclement weather by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove and replace any wet or damaged insulation, at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 Insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, coatings etc., shall be shipped to the site in factory fabricated containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label affixed indicating the fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer and brand.
.2 Retain insulation materials in their original containers, until immediately prior to application. Keep all materials dry during shipping and storage.
.3 Retain adhesives in their original cartons or containers with the manufacturer’s name and catalogue number clearly identified on same. Protect contents against freezing.
.4 Protect the insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not install damaged insulation. The Contractor shall remove all damaged insulation from the job site at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect.
.5 Installed insulation, which has not been weatherproofed, shall be protected from inclement weather by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove all wet or damaged insulation from the job site at no additional cost to the Owner/Architect.
1.10 SAMPLES
.1 For exterior insulation complete a 10 foot sample and have it approved by the Consultant prior to proceeding with the remainder of the installation.
2 Products
2.1 D-2 - MINERAL FIBRE BLANKET WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application:
.1 Apply on indoor round or oval ducting or concealed rectangular ductwork less than 32" (850 mm) wide, either cold or dual temperature, where such ducts would otherwise be insulated as described for D-4 or D-5.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Material(s):
.1 duct wrap insulation shall comply with facing and shall meet ASTM C 533.
.2 “k” @ 75 F. mean temperature 0.27 max. (“k” @ 24 C mean temperature 0.039.) when material compressed 25%; The density of the material shall be a minimum of 1.0 lb/ft3 (16 kg/m3).
.3 maximum service temperature 450 F.(232 C.);
.4 rated at 25/50 per ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 255;
.5 product must comply with requirements of ASTM C 795 when used over stainless steel;
.6 material(s) faced with “FSK” shall have a permeance of 0.02 or less.
.7 material(s) must conform to ASHRAE 90.1;
.8 Fiberglas Flexible Reinforced Foil and Flame Retardant “KRAFT”.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Knauf, Manson, Johns Manville.
2.2 D-4 - FIBROUS GLASS RIGID WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application: Insulation System D-4 for ducting temperature up to 450 F. (232 C.) on cold or dual temperature indoor rectangular ducting as follows:
.1 Material(s):
.1 rigid board insulation shall comply with ASTM C 612, Type 1;
.2 “k” @ 75 F. mean temperature 0.23 max. (0.033 @ 24 C.);
.3 maximum service temperature 450 F. (232 C.);
.4 rated at 25/50 per ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 255;
.5 product must comply with the requirements of ASTM C 795 when being used over stainless steel.
.2 Vapour Retardant Jacketing:
.1 vapour retardant jacketing shall be bleached “KRAFT” paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil or aluminum foil reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and laminated to fire resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and vapour barrier mastic as required;
.2 Fibreglass Reinforced Foil and Fire Retardant “KRAFT” Facing.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Knauf, Manson, Johns Manville.
2.3 D-5 - FIBROUS GLASS RIGID WITH VAPOUR BARRIER
.1 Application: Insulation System D-5 for all exterior ducting temperature up to 450 F. (232 C.) on cold or dual temperature circular ducting of any size; and indoor ducting temperature up to 450 F. (232 C.) on cold or dual temperature circular ducting larger than 32” (800mm) dia as follows:
.1 Material(s):
.1 Preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, complying with ASTM C 547, Class 3 to 850 F. (454 C.), rigid, moulded pipe insulation, non combustible;
.2 k” (KSI) @ 75 F. (24 C.), mean temperature 0.23 max. (0.033 @ 24 C.);
.3 maximum service temperature 850 F. (454 C.);
.4 rated 25/50 per ASTM E 84, UL 723 and NFPA 255;
.5 product must comply with ASTM C 795 when used over stainless steel.
.2 Vapour Retardant Jacketing:
.1 vapour retardant jacketing shall be bleached “KRAFT” paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil or aluminum foil reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and laminated to fire resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples and vapour barrier mastic as required;
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Fibreglass Canada: 850 with ASJ-SSL Jacket, Manson: Alley K with all purpose APT Jacket, Knauf, Johns Manville
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.4 APPLICATIONS FOR D-2, D-4 AND D-5 APPLICATION
EXTENT
THICKNESS
AIR TEMPERATURE RANGE
Supply Air
From indoor split unit discharge to diffuser/grille.
1" (25 mm)
50oF to 149oF 10 C to 65 C
Outside Air Ventilation Supply Throughout Building
From supply fan discharge to diffuser/grille.
1" (25 mm)
50oF to 149oF 10 C to 65 C
Where insulation is installed on ductwork having flanged connections, increase duct insulation as required to provide a 1/2" (12 mm) cover on flanges and duct angles. For duct sizes 20" (500 mm) to 34" (850 mm) utilize either 1-1/2" (40 mm) flexible wrap or 1" (25 mm) rigid board insulation where 1" (25 mm) insulation is called for. For thicknesses greater than 1" utilize rigid board insulation. Return ductwork that is not running through unheated spaces does not require insulation.
2.5 D-6 – SPRAY ON DUCT INSULATION
.1 Application: Insulation System D-6 for underground ducts on cold or dual temperature rectangular ducting as follows:
.1 Material(s):
.1 Spray on insulation with final thermal conductivity as per ASTM-C518 of 0.017 W/mC;
.2 Vapour permeance as per ASTM E-96 of 125 ng/Paxsxsm;
.3 Used as air barrier.
.4 product must comply with the requirements of ASTM C 795 when being used over stainless steel.
.2 Application Thickness: 50mm; by authorized dealers of the manufacturer.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: BASF Walltite.
2.6 FASTENINGS
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Tape: Self adhesive, 4" (100 mm) wide under 25 Flame Spread and under 50 Smoke Developed rating.
.2 Contact Adhesive: Quick-setting, non-flammable fire resistive adhesive to adhere fibrous glass to ducts. 15 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed ratings.
.1 Weld pins 1/8" (4 mm) diameter with 1-1/2” (35 mm) diameter head for installation through the insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation.
.2 Weld Pins: If duct is over 600 mm (24") wide, use on bottom of duct.
.1 Acceptable Products: Duro Dyne: clip-pin.
.3 Weld pins 1/8” (2.0 mm) for installation prior to applying insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation. Nylon retaining clips 1-1/4” (32 mm) square.
.1 Acceptable Products: Duro Dyne: spotter clips or stop clips as required.
.4 All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
2.7 JACKETS
.1 Canvas:
.1 Apply in exposed areas, compacted firm, ULC listed, heavy plain weave cotton fabric at
.2 6 oz./sq. yd. (220 g/m2) treated with diluted fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: S. Fattal, Thermocanvas, Johns Manville.
.2 Outdoors:
.1 Outdoor vapour barrier mastic. Flintguard 110-26 complete with reinforcing
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
glass fabric.
2.8 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK
.1 Where ductwork is indicated to be fire rated on the plans, ductwork shall be provided with a fire rated wrap consisting of 40 mm (1-1/2") thick, non-combustible, flexible fireproof blanket, supplied in roll form. Provide sufficient number of layers to ensure the wrap provides the required fire separation.
.2 Apply wrap directly onto the ductwork in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and ULC listing, Design No. FRD-4 Guide No. 40 U21 “FIRE RESISTANT DUCTS” as tested to ISO Standard 6944 and ULC Guide No. 440E9 per 0 mm clearance to combustibles.
.3 Provide an aluminum foil face to exposed surface.
.4 All hangers, support rods, concrete anchors and firestopping of duct penetrations through fire separations shall be in accordance with ULC listing and manufacturers’ instructions.
.5 Standard of Acceptance: Thermofire Systems, Unifrax FyreWrap, CL4
.6 Standard of Acceptance: EAR Specialty Composites Tufcote Noise Barrier Lag-10, Audioseal Sound Barrier AB10-Lag
3 Execution
3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Apply insulation after required tests are completed and approved by the Engineer. Ensure surfaces are clean and dry when insulation is installed and during application of any finish.
.2 Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring and bevelling insulation if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands.
.3 Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form a smooth surface. Use a vapour retardant cement on cold equipment.
.4 Provide vapour retardant jacket. Seal all vapour retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapour retardant adhesive. Where service access is required bevel and seal ends of insulation.
.5 Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers and other duct penetrations except where prohibited by Code.
.6 Work shall be performed by a qualified Insulation Journeymen.
.7 Apply insulation and coverings at ambient conditions as required by manufacturers of insulations, adhesives and mastics.
.8 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15270 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.9 Replace removed insulation from existing ductwork to make tie-in connections with new insulation. Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make/form a neat and firm butt joint between the old and new insulation.
.10 Secure insulation on exposed rectangular ductwork with welded impaling pins and speed washer type fasteners at 12" (300 mm) on centre. Provide a minimum of two (2) rows of fasteners on each side of the duct.
.11 In addition to the mechanical fasteners, adhere insulation to the duct with fire resistive adhesive applied to the duct in 6" (150 mm) wide strips at 18" (450 mm) centres. Tightly butt all joints and breaks in the insulation and seal with fire resistive mastic and 3" (75 mm) wide scrim foil pressure sensitive tape. Cut off protruding ends of welded pins and cover speed washers with same tape to ensure a smooth application of exterior jacket.
.12 Fasten insulation to rectangular ductwork less than 31" (787 mm) wide and round ductwork with adhesive applied in 6" (150 mm) wide strips at 18" (450 mm) centres. Tightly butt all joints and breaks in the insulation. Seal with fire resistive mastic and 3" (75 mm) wide scrim foil pressure sensitive tape. Use tying cord only to temporarily secure insulation until adhesive has set. Remove prior to application of exterior jacket.
.13 Insulate access doors or removable panels in ductwork as separate units to permit opening or removal without damage to the adjoining insulation.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION – GENERAL SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Do work to the following except where specified otherwise:
.1 Ontario Building Code
.2 The City of Orillia
.3 Ontario Fire Code
.4 National Fire Protection Association Standards:
.1 NFPA 10 portable fire extinguishers.
.2 NFPA 13 installation of sprinkler systems.
.3 NFPA 20 Fire Pumps.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
.1 Provide the following fire protection systems:
.1 Automatic sprinkler systems.
.2 Portable fire extinguishers.
.3 Fire pumps.
1.4 CERTIFICATES
.1 Provide written certificate that components are compatible, and where applicable, certified for intended use by a nationally recognized testing agency.
.2 Provide written certificate that the Fire Protection system installation conforms to the Ontario Building Code, local building codes, NFPA, and mechanical requirements.
.3 All submitted shop drawing hydraulic calculations shall be signed and stamped by a professional engineer.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION – GENERAL SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.5 SCOPE OF WORK
.1 The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a complete sprinkler system from the first isolation valve on the incoming fire main. Division 15 shall be responsible for all piping prior to this take off.
.2 Division 15 and the Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate the location of sprinkler and fire main lines with all other trades prior to the installation of any piping. No extras will be considered for on site conflicts with other trades due to the lack of coordination.
2 Products
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
.1 Steel pipe:
.1 Joined by Welding or Roll Grooved:
.1 Welding methods shall comply with all of the requirements of AWSI D10.9, Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR3.
.2 Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a UL listed and FM approved combination of fittings, gaskets, and grooves. Grooves cut or rolled on pipe shall be dimensionally compatible with the fittings.
.3 Nominal wall thickness for pressures up to 300 psi (2070 kPa) shall be in accordance with following table:
Pipe Size Thickness Up to NPS 5 Schedule 10.
Schedule 40 for dry systems. NPS 6 0.134 in. (3.40 mm) NPS 8 and 10 0.188 in. (4.78 mm)
.2 Joined by Thread Fittings or by Fittings Having Cut Grooves
.1 All threaded pipe and fittings shall have threads cut to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose.
.2 Nominal wall thickness for pressures up to 300 psi (2070 kPa) shall be in accordance with the following table:
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Under NPS 8 Schedule 40 NPS 8 and over Schedule 30
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION – GENERAL SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Fittings: 175 psi (1200 kPa) working pressure.
.1 Cast iron screwed to ANSI B16.4, 150 psi (1000 kPa).
.4 Flange bolts: square or hex head bolts with heavy hex nuts to ASTM A307.
.5 Flange gaskets: 1/16" (1.6 mm) thick plain or cloth inserted red rubber to ANSI B16.20 and ANSI B16.21.
.6 For all dry pipe and preaction systems the minimum pipe thickness shall be Schedule 40. Light wall pipe will not be accepted.
2.2 VALVES
.1 Of one manufacturer for fire protection; UL listed; bearing manufacturer's name trademark and FM identification figure number and pressure rating. Malleable iron handwheels. Unless otherwise specified or indicated design for 175 psi (1200 kPa) working water pressure.
.2 Over NPS 2: rising stems, repackable under pressure. Under NPS 2: rising or non-rising stems.
.3 Valves on fire lines: equip with contacts and devices necessary for operation of supervisory system specified under Section 16000.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS
.1 To NFPA 13 and Section 15060 for sprinkler systems.
2.4 SIGNS
.1 Fabricated from metal with chain suspension; white letters on red background.
2.5 GATE VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and under: bronze to ASTM B61 double disc and screwed ends.
.2 NPS 2 1/2 and over: Underwriters' Laboratories pattern, iron body, bronze mounted, with OS&Y&Y&y double disc or wedge, flanged ends.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION – GENERAL SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and under: bronze to ASTM B61 screwed ends, composition disc replaceable without removing valve from line.
.2 NPS 2 1/2 and over: iron body, bronze mounted, OS&Y&y, flanged ends bolted bonnet and yoke, bronze seat, solid bronze disc, seat and disc replaceable without removing valve from line.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1 Underwriters Laboratories approved, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable liner seat, plain, flanged or grooved ends.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and under: bronze to ASTM B61 for both horizontal and vertical mounting with replaceable composition disc, screwed cap and ends.
.2 NPS 2 1/2 and over: Underwriters' Laboratories pattern, iron body, bronze mounted, regrind-renew bronze disc and seat ring, bolted cap flanged ends. Design for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
3 Execution
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Do not recess, paint or conceal piping accessories or work prior to inspection and approval by authorities having jurisdiction or authorized representative.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install systems in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
.2 Allow for expansion and contraction when installing pipe hangers.
.3 Discharge drains to safe location in interior of building to visible point of free discharge.
.4 Install signs required by local fire protection department.
.5 Secure outdoor signs with stainless steel bolts.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FIRE PROTECTION – GENERAL SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 Subject systems and equipment to operational test.
.2 Upon complete installation of piping and apparatus for sprinkler systems, test joints for tightness and good condition of piping inspected in presence of Consultant. When testing with water, install pressure gauge at highest point of installation. If impossible to test whole installation in single operation, subdivide into several zones and test each zone in manner described.
.3 During tests, stop any leaks and remove and repair any defective part. Perform test over again until satisfactory results are obtained.
.4 Provide hydraulic pump, temporary connections and labor required for tests.
3.4 ADJUSTMENT
.1 Adjust equipment to satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
.1 Assume responsibility for protecting sprinkler heads during painting. Replace damaged and painted components.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
.2 The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a complete sprinkler system. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for all of the work associated with this system from first isolation valve on the sprinkler system.
1.2 PREQUALIFIED CONTRACTORS
.1 The sprinkler system shall be provided by one of the following Contractors. If the Mechanical Contractor would like to include an additional Sprinkler Contractor they shall make that request during the tender period for the project. No additional Sprinkler Contractor’s will be considered after the close of the tender period.
.2 Acceptable Contractors are as follows:
.1 Grinnell;
.2 Paul and Douglas;
.3 Viking;
.4 Vipond;
.5 Classic.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Do work in accordance with the following except where specified otherwise.
.1 Ontario Building Code
.2 Ontario Fire Code
.3 The City of Orillia
.4 NFPA 13
.5 NFPA 20
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010, NFPA 13, working drawings and design requirements.
.2 Provide hydraulic calculations for all zones, most remote location, highest location and all specialty areas including window sprinklers, close spaced sprinklers, and deluge systems. Hydraulic calculations and submissions to be in accordance to NFPA 13 and this specification.
.3 Obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction prior to fabrication and installation of the system. Bear all costs associated with such approval.
1.5 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit samples of following:
.1 Each type of sprinkler head.
.2 Signs.
1.6 ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA
.1 Design system to the following:
.1 NFPA 13
.2 Zoning
.1 Refer to Drawings for system zoning requirements.
.3 Hazard
Space Hazard Mechanical and Electrical Rooms Ordinary Hazard Group 1 Office Areas Light Hazard Teleconference Room Light Hazard
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Pipe size and sprinkler layout:
.1 Pipe size shall be determined using hydraulic design. The hydraulic design shall be for the most extreme case.
.2 Provide sprinkler head layout in strict conformance to Division 15 layout drawings, architectural reflected ceiling plans, and NFPA 13. Where conflict exists, the contractor shall notify the consultants in writing for a decision.
.3 Extra Large Orifice Heads (ELO) shall not be utilized unless they are indicated on the drawings. Drawings that are submitted which do not conform to the layout shown on the Division 15 Drawings and reflected ceiling plan will be rejected without further review.
.4 For light hazard applications the sprinkler system hydraulic design must allow for two hose cabinets operating at 100 usgpm simultaneously in addition to the sprinkler requirements.
.5 Hydraulic design in office areas shall have the capacity to serve a minimum of ten (10) additional heads at the most remote 1,500 sq.ft. area of application and/or to serve office areas with 30% increase in sprinkler heads. The hydraulic design shall be for the most extreme case.
.6 Minimum discharge pressure for any sprinkler head shall be as required by the sprinkler head.
.7 Maximum velocity in sprinkler pipe distribution piping shall be 7.62 m/sec. (25 ft/sec.).
.8 Provide for sprinklers required above and below obstructions such as ductwork and other building interferences.
.5 Provide non-standard temperature rating sprinkler heads in accordance to code, including:
.1 Sprinkler heads in proximity to unit heaters: intermediate classification 225 F (107 C).
.2 Elevator Machine Room: intermediate classification 225 F (107 C).
.3 Skylights: intermediate classification 225 F (107 C).
.6 Water supply:
.1 The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a flow and pressure test of water supply from the nearest hydrant in the vicinity of the project to obtain the basis of design in accordance to NFPA. Flow test shall be conducted during the working week and at peak water flow periods to establish base line.
.2 The Sprinkler Contractor shall allow a minimum safety factor of 10 psi on all
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
hydraulic calculations.
.7 Pipe locations:
.1 Sprinkler lines may have been shown on the drawings. Sprinkler lines are shown for purposes of coordination, indication of available space, and aesthetics. Do not deviate from sprinkler pipe layout shown without prior approval.
1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01830 - Maintenance Materials, Special Tools and Spare Parts.
.2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by NFPA 13, in main sprinkler room. Spare parts to be provided in an organized box designed for that purpose.
1.9 CERTIFICATES
.1 Provide certificate indicating that the sprinkler installation conforms to NFPA requirements and specified sprinkler coverage.
1.10 ALLOWANCE
.1 Include in bid, cost to supply and install 50 additional heads as may be required for ceiling coordination. Cost shall include all labour, and piping, support hangers, etc. for a complete installation.
2 Products
2.1 PIPE, FITTING AND VALVES
.1 Pipe:
.1 As indicated in Section 15300 and NFPA 13. Where Section 15300 is more stringent than NFPA 13 Section 15300 shall be the minimum standard.
.2 For dry pipe systems pipe and fittings shall be a minimum of Schedule 40 and shall be both internally and externally galvanized.
.2 Fittings and joints:
.1 Screwed, soldered, welded, flanged or rolled grooved as indicated in Section 15300 and NFPA 13. Where Section 15300 is more stringent than NFPA 13 Section 15300 shall be the minimum standard.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Valves:
.1 UL or ULC listed for fire protection service.
.2 Bronze to NPS 2, cast iron over NPS 2.
.3 Threaded to NPS 2, flanged or rolled grooved over NPS 2.
.4 For shut off service: OS & Y gate.
.5 Swing check valves.
.6 Ball drip.
.4 Pipe hangers:
.1 UL listed for fire protection as specified in Section 15010 and in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
.1 General: to NFPA 13 and UL listed for fire service.
.2 All heads utilized in light hazard occupancies shall be quick response heads.
.3 Provide head type in accordance to legend and as indicated on the drawings.
.4 Standard head activation temperature shall be 165o F(74 C).
.1 Where indicated on the drawings: Upright: Brass
.2 Side Wall: Chrome, link and lever type with escutcheon.
.3 Elevator Machine Room: Upright brass, intermediate temperature.
.4 Autoclave Room: intermediate temperature.
.5 Where indicated on the drawings: Provide fully concealed sprinkler head.
.6 Where indicated on the drawings: Provide semi recessed sprinkler head.
.7 Sprinkler heads in laboratories: standard head activation temperature of 165o F (74 C).
.5 Provide wire guards on all heads located in:
.1 Elevator machine rooms, storage rooms, mechanical rooms.
.2 Sprinkler heads within 6 ft 6" (2.0 m) of finished floor.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Areas shown on the drawings.
.1 On concealed heads provide custom colour for Architect to select.
.6 On areas where wood ceilings will be provided, concealed sprinkler heads with brushed aluminum covers shall be provided.
.7 For exterior soffits, dry pendant concealed sprinkler heads with brushed aluminum covers shall be provided.
2.3 SIGNS
.1 Signs for control drain and test valves: to NFPA 13.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13.
.2 Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
.3 Testing to be witnessed by or authorities having jurisdiction.
.4 Provide interference drawings as required to coordinate work with other trades. Refer to details on drawings and locate sprinkler lines to avoid interference with lights, ductwork and other equipment in the ceiling space.
.5 Locate sprinkler heads as shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans and at center lines of panels as required to produce orderly and symmetrical patterns with other ceiling-mounted devices and to meet or exceed the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
.6 Provide flow switches where indicated on the drawings.
.7 Provide pressure switch location shown on the drawings to supervise loss of water pressure.
.8 Provide auto control for excess pressure pump and final wiring and connections as required to place in operation.
.9 All sprinkler piping shall be installed so that all parts of each system may be thoroughly drained, preferably at the main drain valve. All trapped heads in excess of five heads shall be provided with drain valves and cast iron plug. Low points where more than twenty heads are trapped shall be provided with an auxiliary drain valve.
.10 Provide sprinkler head guards in mechanical rooms, shafts, elevator machine rooms, storage rooms, and as specified or as shown on the drawings.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15330 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.11 Installation of sprinkler mains in exposed areas shall be in accordance with main locations shown on the mechanical drawings.
.12 Main sprinkler lines have been shown to show routing of pipes in congested areas. Refer to sections for the elevation assigned for the sprinkler piping. Work closely with the Division 15 Contractor to prepare interference drawings.
.13 Provide test and drain connections to meet NFPA 13. Pipe discharge lines as shown on the drawings or to floor drains or service sinks. Do not discharge to the building exterior.
.14 Install sprinkler heads symmetrically in ceiling tiles, unless otherwise directed by the consultant.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS - PHASE ONE SECTION 15413 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SANITARY, STORM & PUMPED DRAINAGE PIPING – CAST IRON, COPPER SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Do the work in accordance with the Ontario Building Code Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.
.2 CSA B70 - 1997 Specifications for Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings and Means of Joining.
.3 CSA B125 - 1998 Specifications for Plumbing Fittings
.4 ASTM B32 - 2000 Specifications for Solder Metal
.7 ASTM B88, ASTM B88M - 1997 Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube
.8 ASTM A74 - 1998 Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
.9 ASTM C564 -1997 Specification for Rubber Gasket for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
2 Products
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
.1 For all above grade vent, non-laboratory drainage sanitary and storm piping, Type DWV to:
.1 ASTM B306 - Specification for copper drainage tube (DWV).
.2 CSA B158 for cast brass fittings.
.3 ANSI B16.29 for wrought copper fittings.
.4 Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32, type 50A - Specification for solder metal.
.5 ASTM B88.
.6 ASTM C564
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS - PHASE ONE SECTION 15413 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SANITARY, STORM & PUMPED DRAINAGE PIPING – CAST IRON, COPPER SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.2 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS
.1 For above grade storm, non-laboratory drainage sanitary and vent piping, minimum NPS 3, to CSA B70, ASTM A74 with heavy bituminous coating.
.2 For above grade storm, sanitary and vent piping 4" (100 mm) size and larger: Cast iron.
.3 For storm, sanitary and vent piping joints.
.1 Mechanical joints.
.1 Neoprene of butyl rubber compression gaskets for all pipe connections.: to ASTM C564-70.
.2 SS clamps.
2.3 PUMPED DRAINAGE
.1 Pumped drains shall be copper tube in vertical section after pump and cast iron pipe in gravity section, as indicated above.
.2 The couplings for pumped drainage shall be as follows:
.1 Brazed Copper connections.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space, and to grade indicated, and to suit installation of related work.
.2 Apply two coats of asphalt paint to pipe laid in, or passing through concrete.
.3 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete complete with Link Seal in accordance with Specification Section 15010.
.4 PVC piping shall not be utilized above grade. PVC piping as specified in Section 15415 is acceptable for below grade piping. The PVC piping shall convert to cast iron prior to the point where it penetrates the floor slab.
.5 Provide venting to plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance with the Ontario Building Code Plumbing Code and local authorities having jurisdiction.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS - PHASE ONE SECTION 15413 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SANITARY, STORM & PUMPED DRAINAGE PIPING – CAST IRON, COPPER SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
3.2 TESTING
.1 The drainage and vent system shall be tested in accordance with the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and tested in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in the presence of each governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.
.2 Perform tests before piping is covered or concealed.
.3 Remove all fittings which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after test.
.4 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.
.1 This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
.2 For the requirements for flushing and cleaning of new piping refer to Section 15602 of the Specification.
.3 For the requirements for hangers and supports refer to Section 15060 of the Specification.
.4 For the requirements for testing of new piping refer to Section 15050 of the Specification.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Perform Piping, Valves and Fittings - Heating and Cooling work in accordance with the following Standards.
.1 ASME B31.1-1995. ASME Code for Pressure Piping
.2 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 (R1992) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
.3 ANSI/ASME B16.3-1999 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
.4 ANSI/ASME B16.5-1996 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
.5 ANSI/ASME B16.9-1993 Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
permitted below the floor for below grade applications. Use approved tube bender for tube bending.
.4 In areas where piping is exposed in clean rooms the pipe shall be Schedule 40 Type 316L stainless steel.
.2 NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
.1 Schedule 40, continuous weld or electric resistance welded black carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B, with bevelled ends.
.2 Schedule 40 seamless or electric resistance welded black carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B with grooved ends conforming to CSA B242-M.
.3 In areas where the pipe is exposed in clean rooms the pipe shall be Schedule 40 Type 316L stainless steel.
2.2 FITTINGS
.1 NPS 2 and Smaller:
.1 Wrought copper solder joint pressure type, with IPS to copper adapters at screwed connections. Solder shall be tin antimony 95:5 to ASTM B32
.2 Class 150 black malleable iron screwed fittings conforming to ASTM A197 and ANSI/ASME B16.3
.3 Class 2000 forged steel socket welding type, conforming to ASTM A105 Grade 2 and ANSI/ASME B16.11.
.4 (reserved)
.2 NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
.1 Schedule 40 seamless carbon steel butt welding fittings conforming to ASTM A234 WPB and ANSI/ASME B16.9.
.2 Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510 or 35018, with grooved ends conforming to CSA B242-M. Standard of Acceptance: Victualic.
.3 (reserved)
2.3 UNIONS
.1 NPS 2 and Smaller:
.1 All brass construction with ground joint and either solder joint or screwed ends as required.
.2 Class 150 black malleable iron construction with brass to iron ground joint and screwed ends, conforming to ASTM A197 and ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
.3 Provide dielectric unions or couplings at all connections between copper tubing and ferrous piping or equipment.
2.4 COUPLINGS
.1 Cast segmented malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510 or 35018, grooved mechanical type, conforming to CSA B242-M, with oval track head bolts and heavy hex nuts conforming to ASTM A183 and synthetic rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM D2000 and suitable service. MAKE
PUMP CONNECTIONS AND CONCEALED PIPING
MECHANICAL ROOMS AND ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS
Victaulic
Fig. 77
Fig. 07 Zero Flex
2.5 FLANGES
.1 Class 150 forged steel slip-on or weldneck raised face type conforming to ASTM A181 Grade 1 and ANSI/ASME B16.5. Remove raised face where flanges connect to Class 125 cast iron valves.
.2 Hinged, 2-piece, shouldered or keyed cast malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510 with elastomeric gasket suitable for service and lock bolt.
2.6 GASKETS AND BOLTS
.1 Gaskets:
.1 1/16" (1.6 mm) Garlock 3200 with SBR binder or equivalent asbestos free material.
.2 Bolts:
.1 Semi finished hex head machine bolts and semi finished hex nuts, both of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A307 Class A.
2.7 PLUGS
.1 NPS 2 and Smaller:
.1 Class 3000 screwed, square head, machined from solid steel or forging to ASTM A105 Grade 2.
2.8 VALVES GENERAL
.1 Provide bronze valves with bodies made of bronze conforming to ASTM B62.
.2 Use gate and globe valves of a design which permits valve to be re-packed under pressure when fully open.
.3 Provide valves with manufacturer’s name or trade mark, figure number and pressure rating cast or stamped on valve body.
.4 Provide globe, angle and check valves with composition discs with manufacturer’s recommended disc for type of service on which it is to be used, unless otherwise specified.
.5 Install balancing valves in piping for balancing purposes where shown on the drawings, details or schematics.
.6 All valves shall have appropriate CRN numbers.
2.9 GATE VALVES
.1 NPS 2-1/2 and Over - Flanged:
.1 Rising Stem:
.1 to MSS SP-70, Class 125 860 kPa, flat faced flange ends, cast-iron body, bronze trim, solid wedge disc.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane: Fig. 465-1/2, Jenkins: Fig. 454J, Toyo: 421A, Kitz: Fig. 72, Grinnell: 6020A.
.2 Gate valves shall be used only where indicated on the drawings. In all other locations use butterfly valves for NPS 2-1/2 and over and ball valves for 2” (50mm) and smaller.
2.10 GLOBE VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and Under - Screwed:
.1 To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc, screw in bonnet.
.2 Lockable handle.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Crane: Fig. 7, Jenkins: Fig. 106BJ, Toyo: 221, Kitz: Fig. 09, Grinnell: 3240.
.2 NPS 2-1/2 and Over - Flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-85, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze mounted, flat faced flange, cast iron body, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, renewable and regrindable bronze seat ring.
.2 Lockable handle.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Crane: Fig. 351, Jenkins: Fig. 2342J, Toyo: 400A,
.2 To MSS SP-67, 200 psig, 1380 kPa WOG water, cast iron body with epoxy coated cast iron or bronze disc (nickel coated discs are not acceptable), 416 stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner, with notched top plate and lever lock handle for valve sizes NPS 4 and smaller, and worm gear operator with hand wheel for valves NPS 6 and larger. For glycol service utilize stainless steel trim. Lugs shall be tapped. Shutoff up to 200 psi (1720 kPa) rating if downstream equipment is removed.
.1 Utilize for all on/off applications with operating pressures 200 psi and less.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Kitz 6121E, Centerline: Fig. L200L-E/G200L-E, Bray, Apollo: 141-143, Dezurik, Keystone.
.3 NPS 2-1/2 and Over - Grooved End Pipe:
.1 Grooved end butterfly valves shall have dual-seal disc providing bubble tight service up to 300 psi. Ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade E EPDM disc coating. Glycol service - EPDM disc coating with stainless steel trim.
.2 Utilize for all on/off applications up to 200 psi operating pressure.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic: Vic-300.
.2 High Performance Butterfly Valves
.1 NPS 2-1/2 and Over - Full Lug Body
.1 High pressure offset seat with eccentric shaft butterfly valves. Valve shall be capable of sealing against full differential pressure in either flow direction.
.2 Utilize valve body classifications as follows:
Class Operating Temp Operating Pressure
psi °C F
150 93 200 200 300 93 200 450
.3 Carbon steel body with stainless steel disc and shaft, teflon seat, lug
pattern. NPS 4 and smaller shall have lever operator. NPS 6 and over shall have gear operator.
.4 Utilize for all modulating control valve applications and systems with operating pressures in excess of 250 psi.
.5 Standard of Acceptance 150 psi: Flowseal: 1LA-121-TTG HOG, Mueller 152DTHMOU, Bray, Dezurik
.6 Standard of Acceptance 300 psi: 300 psi Flowseal: 3LA-121-TTG HOG, Mueller 3020DTHMOU, Bray, Dezurik
2.12 SWING CHECK VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and Under - Screwed:
.1 To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, horizontal swing check, bronze swing disc, screw-in cap, regrindable seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane: Fig. 37, Jenkins: Fig. 4092J, Toyo: 236, Kitz: Fig. 22, Grinnell: 3300.
.2 NPS 2-1/2 and Up - Flanged:
.1 To MSS SP-70, Class 125, 860 kPa, horizontal swing check, cast iron body, flat faced flange, regrindable and renewable bronze seat ring and disc, bolted cap.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane: Fig. 373, Jenkins: Fig. 587J, Toyo: 435A, Kitz: Fig. 78, Grinnell: 6300A.
.3 NPS 2-1/2 and Over - Grooved End Pipe:
.1 To MSS SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, ductile iron body, bronze or stainless steel discs, stainless steel spring, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic
2.13 DOUBLE DOOR WAFER CHECK VALVES
.1 NPS 2 and Under:
.1 To ASTM B62-82a, Class 125, 860 kPa cast iron body, double flapper wafer style, 316 stainless steel disc and shaft and viton seat, stainless steel spring (heavy duty spring in vertical down flow application).
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Duo Chek: G12 HVP-9
.6 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide reducing and expanding couplings as required to match balancing valve size.
.7 Valve shall be selected for 1-2 ft. pressure drop in the fully open position at design flow. Minimum pressure drop at design flow in fully closed position shall be 20' (6100 mm)
2.16 CONTROL VALVE BYPASS
.1 Provide control valve sizes and types as indicated in the following Table - Control Valves Sizes And Types - Bypass: TABLE - CONTROL VALVES SIZES AND TYPES - BYPASS Line Size
Globe Valve Size
Ball Valve Size
3/4" (20 mm)
Not Applicable
3/4" (20 mm)
1" (25 mm)
Not Applicable
3/4" (20 mm)
1-1/4" (32 mm)
1" ( 25 mm)
Not Applicable
1-1/2" (40 mm)
1" (25 mm)
Not Applicable
2" (50 mm)
1-1/2" (40 mm)
Not Applicable
2-1/2" (65 mm)
2" (50 mm)
Not Applicable
3" (75 mm)
2-1/2" (65 mm)
Not Applicable
4" (100 mm)
3" (75 mm)
Not Applicable
3 Execution
3.1 PIPING
.1 Unless otherwise indicated, connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 (reserved)
.3 Install concealed pipes close to the building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping wherever practical.
.4 Slope piping up in the direction of flow.
.5 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change, installed to provide positive drainage or
.6 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings.
.7 Ream pipes clean of scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.
.8 Do not use compression fittings.
3.2 VALVES
.1 Unless otherwise approved, Install valves as shown on drawings with stems upright or horizontal.
.2 Provide ball valves at all branch take-offs NPS 2 and under to isolate each piece of equipment and as indicated. Provide butterfly valves on all branch take-offs to isolate each piece of equipment for NPS 2-1/2 and over and as indicated
.3 Install globe valves where indicated and in by-pass around control valves.
.4 Provide wafer check valves on discharge of pumps in vertical pipes with downward flow and as indicated.
.5 Provide swing check valves as indicated.
.6 Provide balancing valves, as indicated on schematics, plans or details.
.7 Provide a drain valve at the base of all risers.
3.3 BALANCING VALVES
.1 Install balancing valves a minimum of five (5) pipe diameters downstream of any fitting and a minimum of two (2) pipe diameters upstream of any fitting.
.2 Install ports on valve in the horizontal position.
3.4 TESTING
.1 Test system in accordance with Section 15010.
3.5 SPARE PARTS
.1 Furnish the following spare parts: Valve Handles: two (2) of each size.
.1 All valves for this project shall be rising stem unless stated otherwise.
3.9 BRAZING
.1 Flux shall not be allowed to penetrate to the inside of the pipe. Clean the outside of the tube and fittings by washing with hot water in order to remove any residual flux.
.2 During the brazing of the pipe connections, except when performing final connections and emergency repairs, the interior of the pipe shall be maintained with a nitrogen atmosphere. Accomplish this purging the pipe a sufficient number of times to remove all air and oxygen and by maintaining a small purge flow to prevent reentry of air or oxygen.
.3 Erection: Cut all pipe and tubing accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and install without springing or forcing. Protect all pipe and tubing against mechanical injury.
3.10 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PORTS, TEMPERATURE SENSOR, FLOW SWITCHES, METERS AND THERMOMETER AND PRESSURE GAUGE WELLS
.1 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide all differential pressure ports that are required, all temperature sensor, thermometer and pressure gauge wells. Refer to schematic drawings, control sequences and control schematics for locations.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15707 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.2.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2.2 The routing of the refrigerant piping is shown on the drawings with approximate sizing for coordination purposes only.
1.2.3 The Division 15 Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for final designing of the refrigeration piping system as follows;
1. Ensure that, as a minimum, oil is returned to the compressor at the same rate as it is leaving.
2. Design discharge and suction lines to maximum 2°F change in saturation temperature corresponding to the associated pressure drop for the provided refrigerant. Include calculations with the shop drawings.
3. Design liquid lines to maximum 1°F change in saturation temperature corresponding to the associated pressure drop for the provided refrigerant. Include calculations with the shop drawings.
4. Multi-stage compressor and/or multi-compressor machines shall have suction and discharge piping sized adequately to ensure oil return at minimum load conditions. Include calculations with the shop drawings.
5. Design discharge and suction piping to a maximum of 4000fpm velocity. Minimum discharge velocity of 1000 - 1500 fpm for vertical up-flow risers, a double riser can be introduced should the pressure drop in the vertical riser increase the beyond acceptable range. Double risers shall be trapped at the bottom and an inverted trap at the top of the large riser only. Minimum velocity for horizontal discharge lines shall be 500 fpm, and shall be sloped 1/8” in every 1’ (min 1%) in the direction of refrigerant flow. Show refrigerant velocities on the schematic drawing to be submitted with the shop drawing.
6. Design liquid line piping with minimum pressure drop to avoid the formation of flash gas. Velocity in liquid lines should not exceed 300 fpm. Provide a solenoid valve before the evaporator to prevent liquid siphoning into the evaporator during system shut-down. Show refrigerant velocities on the schematic drawing to be submitted with the shop drawing.
7. [For low ambient units w/ receivers]
8. Condensate lines shall be sized generously to allow liquid refrigerant to flow freely from the condenser to the receiver.
1.2.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall submit an isometric drawing showing the refrigerant pipe sizes,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15707 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
lengths, velocities and accompanying calculations. Revision to the pipe sizing from the sizes shown on the drawings shall be at no cost to the Owner.
1.3.6 ANSI/ASME B31.5 – 2001 – Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.
1.3.7 ANSI/ASTM B88 – 2003 – Standard Specification For Seamless Copper Water Tube.
1.3.8 ASTM B280 – 2003 – Standard Specification For Seamless Copper Tube For Air Conditioning And Refrigeration Field Service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBING
2.1.1 Provide processed tubing for refrigeration installation, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed. Do tubing system work in accordance with CSA B52 and ANSI B31.5.
2.1.2 Hard copper tube, type L, to ASTM B88.
2.1.3 Annealed copper tube to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52.
2.2 TRAPS
2.2.1 Service: design pressure 300 psi (2070 kPa) and temperature 250 °F (121°C).
2.2.2 Construction: Wrought copper P-Traps.
2.3 FITTINGS
2.3.1 Service: design pressure 300 psi (2070 kPa) and temperature 250 °F (121°C).
2.3.2 Brazed: wrought copper to ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze to MIL-F-1183E.
2.3.3 Flanged: bronze or brass, Class 150 and Class 300 to ANSI B16.24.
2.3.4 Flare: Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ANSI B16.26.
2.4 JOINTS
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15707 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.4.1 Brazing: Silver solder, 45 Ag-15% Cu or copper-phosphorous, 95 Cu-5%P.
2.4.2 Gaskets: non-metallic to ANSI B16.21.
2.5 INSULATION
2.5.1 Insulate liquid and suction lines in their entirety. The insulation shall be 1-1/2” thick continuous through all pipe supports and fittings to provide a vapour seal. Insulation to be equal to ‘Armaflex’ type insulation and shall be covered with a UV proof insulation wrap where exposed to the outdoors.
2.5.2 REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES
2.5.3 Supply and install all necessary refrigeration accessories in the refrigeration piping, including, but not limited to the following.
1. Vibration absorbers shall be provided to isolate compressor vibration from the discharge and suction piping. Absorbers shall be all bronze bellows construction with braided wire exterior jacket. Clamp the refrigerant piping to a secure surface upstream of the suction absorber(s) and downstream of the discharge absorber(s). All refrigerant lines shall be secured with uni-strut type channel and neoprene sleeved clamps.
2. Liquid line filter drier adequately sized to prevent flash gas and/or excessive pressure drop. Filter drier shall be removable core type for liquid lines 7/8” and larger.
3. Liquid line sight glass shall be full size in liquid lines 2” and smaller and installed as close as practical to the condenser or receiver and preferably in a vertical portion of piping. By-pass sight glasses in liquid lines 2” and smaller will not be accepted. Sight Glasses shall have integral moisture indicator
5. Provide an oil level control system complete with an oil separator located at the outlet of the common discharge header and an oil resevoir. The oil reservoir shall have high and low level sight glass oil level indicators, spring loaded oil differential check valve, manual shut off valves at the inlet and outlet , and a suction filter on the oil return line. Maintain oil reservoir pressure at 20 psig above the suction pressure of the parallel compressors or at recommended pressure as determined by the compressor manufacturer. Each of the parallel compressors shall have externally mounted oil level controls.
6. [10 tons and above or low ambient]
7. Liquid receivers shall be installed close to and below the condenser ideally within 8” to 18” depending on tonnage of the system, have valves on the inlet and outlet, a gage glass, a dip tube and liquid level test cocks. Pipe relief valve to the outdoors. Gage Glass shall be provided with a metal guard to protect the glass, and a ball type check valve behind the upper and lower valves to prevent refrigerant from escaping should the glass break. Receivers installed outside shall be installed inside or below the condensing unit and insulated with UV protected armaflex type insulation.
2.5.4 Standard of Acceptance for Refrigerant Accessories: Standard Refrigeration, Superior Valve,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15707 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
Mueller, Alco and Henry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
3.1.1 Install and test in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI B31.5 - Code for pressure piping Section 5 "refrigerant piping" and CSA Standard B52 "Mechanical Refrigeration Code", latest issue and all local regulations. All labour on system shall be by certified refrigeration mechanics.
3.1.2 Horizontal suction lines shall be sloped toward compressor to insure oil return.
3.1.3 All refrigerant required for re-charging the system shall be new, non-recovered refrigerant, provided by the Division 15 Contractor. Certified recycled refrigerant is acceptable
3.1.4 All field installed refrigeration piping shall be brazed. Dry Nitrogen shall be used to purge the piping prior to and during brazing to avoid oxidization within the refrigeration piping.
3.1.5 Ensure valves and accessories are protected during brazing as to not be damaged by the heat required for brazing. Improperly protected and damaged accessories and valves will be removed and replaced.
3.1.6 95-5 Sil-fos or equal shall be used to braze refrigerant piping. Lead based soft solder will not be accepted.
3.1.7 All field assembled piping shall be leak tested using dry nitrogen at a minimum pressure of 30 psig for a minimum 24 hours prior to evacuation and charging insulating any refrigerant lines and prior to refrigerant line being enclosed by the building construction. Test each joint in the refrigeration piping for leaks using at least one of the following methods;
1. Bubble test
2. Electronic leak detector
3. Halide leak detector
4. Ultrasonic leak detector
5. Repair all leaks and repeat the pressure test until the system holds pressure.
3.1.8 Refrigerant piping shall be purged with dry nitrogen and evacuated prior to connection to pre-evacuated equipment to ensure removal of all moisture and non-condensable gases.
1. The entire refrigeration system, not evacuated by the manufacturer, shall be completely evacuated to 29.92 inches of mercury and left under a vaccum for a minimum 24 hrs prior to charging in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant compressor be used to evacuate the system. The evacuation shall be accomplished by the use of a vacuum pump at an ambient temperature not less than 35°F (1.7°C) to ensure removal of all moisture and
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15707 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
non-condensable gases.
3. After testing, evacuation and charging is completed, the system shall be allowed to operate under normal conditions for a minimum period of 24 hours. At that time, the moisture indicator shall indicate a dry system. If it does not so indicate, the dryer shall be changed and the unit allowed to operate for 24 hours. This procedure shall continue until the moisture indicator indicates a thoroughly dry system.
3.1.9 Liquid charging the system to initially charge the system is acceptable. Only liquid charge the system through the liquid line valve.
3.1.10 Insulate liquid and suction lines in their entirety. The insulation shall be 1-1/2” thick continuous through all pipe supports and fittings to provide a vapour seal. Insulation to be equal to ‘Armaflex’ type insulation and shall be covered with a UV proof insulation wrap where exposed to the outdoors.
3.1.11 Install 3/8" diameter shraeder valves in the refrigeration piping in mechanical room, on the suction, discharge and liquid lines for servicing purposes use.
3.2 TSSA INSPECTION
3.2.1 The Division 15 Contractor shall arrange for and pay for the cost of TSSA inspection.
3.2.2 If a variance is required for the system the Division 15 Contractor shall apply for the variance. The cost of the variance shall be paid for by the Owner.
- END -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15770 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PLATE FIN HEATING COILS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010.
.2 System Description: Plate fin coils designed for air cooling applications, using chilled water or glycol, or air heating applications, using hot water or glycol.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Coil performance shall be certified under ARI Standard 410.
.2 ASTM B88 -1999 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
.3 ASTM B783 - 1999 Specification for Materials for Ferrous Powder Metallurgy (P/M) Structural Parts
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Plate fins shall be wavy with an offset fin design for maximum heat transfer performance, as well as maximum moisture collection capability to prevent blow-off.
.2 Coils shall have the capability to be used in right-hand or left-hand applications.
.3 Each coil shall be selected using a computer selection program approved by ARI Standard 410.
2.2 HEADER
.1 Headers and connection nozzles shall be either steel or non-ferrous material. Cast iron headers are not acceptable when supplied with female pipe threads. Female pipe thread connections are prone to breakage when piping connections are terminated.
.2 Header nozzles shall be either ASTM B88 copper or steel and shall be painted for rust protection. Headers shall be the same material type as nozzle.
.3 Connection nozzles (inlet and outlet) shall be on the same end of the coil.
.4 Male pipe thread connections shall be provided as standard. Victaulic connection shall be an approved equal.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15770 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PLATE FIN HEATING COILS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.3 TUBE SHEETS
.1 Coil shall provide a " (12 mm) mounting flange mechanically attached to the tube sheet, with 5/16" diameter mounting holes center to center for sturdy, accurate installation of the coil.
2.4 HAIRPIN AND COPPER TUBES
.1 Coil shall be manufactured using 180 degree continuous hairpin bends to reduce leak possibilities.
.2 Nipples shall be 1/2" (12mm) OD copper with 0.025" all thickness and shall be machine brazed to the header.
.3 Coils shall be drainable with non-trapping circuits.
.4 The fin pack shall not exceed 14 fins per inch.
.5 Fin shall be wavy using offset petal spacing collars with additional material downstream.
.6 Coil shall be tested to 300 psi and suitable for 150 psi working pressure.
2.5 CASING
.1 Side casings shall be 16 gauge ASTM B783 G60 galvanized steel riveted to the tube sheet. Approved option shall be 16 gauge 304L stainless steel casings. Coils shall have provision for bolting to adjacent ductwork and supporting structure.
.2 Heating coils shall have box flanges for strength and to facilitate stacking.
2.6 PERFORMANCE
.1 Coil sizes and performance shall be as noted in the schedule.
3 Execution
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Install all coils in accordance to manufacturers’ recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide access doors upstream and downstream of all reheat coils.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
.2 This section of the Specification refers to ductwork serving systems with external static pressures up to 4" w.g. (1000 Pa) For systems above 4" w.g (1000 Pa) refer to Section 15806.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Indicate the following:
.1 proprietary joints.
.2 Submit shop drawings indicating construction and installation details for kitchen exhaust ductwork.
1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by the manufacturer or Independent Testing Agency signifying adherence to Codes and Standards.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible - Second Edition 1995
.2 NFPA 90A-1999 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.3 NFPA 90B-1999 Installation of Warm Air Conditioning and Air Conditioning Systems
.4 ASTM A621 & A621M - 1998 Specification for Forming Steel (FS), sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled.
.5 ASTM A653 - 2001 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized or Zinc Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process
.6 ASTM A924 - 1999 General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process
2 Products
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
2.1 SEALING CLASSIFICATION
.1 Sealing classifications shall be in accordance with the Sealing Classifications Table as follows:
TABLE - SEALING CLASSIFICATION Seal Class
Sealing Requirements Applicable Static Pressure Construction Class
Allowable Leakage Rate
A All traverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations.
4" w.g. (1000 Pa)-4" w.g. (-1000 Pa)
1% of total system design at system operating pressure 4" (1000 Pa)
B All transverse joints and longitudinal seams
Up to 3" w.g. (750 Pa)-3" w.g. (-750 Pa) and less
1% of total system design at 3" w.g. (750 Pa)
C All transverse joints only Up to 2" w.g. (500 Pa)-2" w.g. (500 Pa) and less
1.5% of total system design at 2" w.g. (500 Pa)
D Not sealed Up to 1" w.g. (250 Pa)-1" w.g. (-250 Pa) and less
5% of total system design at 1" w.g. (250 Pa)
2.2 PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS
.1 Ductwork material shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA ratings for the following pressure classifications. Pressure classifications shall be in accordance with the Pressure Classifications Table as follows:
TABLE - PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS
Ductwork Operating Pressure
Seal Classification
Ductwork Exposed to the Outdoors All A
Supply Air Ductwork Upstream of VAV Boxes Up to 3" wg (750 Pa)
B
Supply Air Ductwork Downstream of VAV Boxes Up to 1" wg (250 Pa)
C
Return Air Ductwork Up to -1.5" wg (-375 Pa)
C
Exhaust Air Ductwork (excluding Laboratory Exhaust) Up to -1.5" wg (-375 Pa)
C for systems over 750 cfm. D for systems under 750 cfm.
Exhaust and Outside Air Intake Plenums Up to +/- 1" wg (+/- 250 Pa)
B
All Other Ductwork Not Listed Above Up to 0.5" wg (125 Pa)
D
2.3 FITTINGS
.1 Fabrication shall be to SMACNA Standards.
.2 Radiused elbows shall be to standard radius.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.3 Square elbows shall be used over 16" (400 mm) with double thickness vanes. Square elbows shall not be used unless specifically shown on drawings.
.4 Main Supply Duct Branches: Provide branch duct balancing damper.
.5 Sub branch duct with 45 entry and balancing damper on branch.
.6 Transitions:
.1 Diverging: 20 maximum included angle.
.2 Converging: 30 maximum included angle.
.7 Offsets: Radiused elbows as indicated.
.8 Obstruction Deflectors: Maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions.
2.4 GALVANIZED STEEL
.1 G-60 coated galvanized of lockforming grade conforming to ASTM A653 and A924 Standards. Minimum yield strength for steel sheet and reinforcements shall be 30,000 psi (207 kPa).
.2 The sheet metal gauge and requirement for reinforcement shall be in accordance with Tables 1-3-1/2" W.G. Static pressure to Table 1-7 4" W.G. Static pressure of SMACNA.
.3 Fabrication shall be to SMACNA Standards.
.4 Joints: To SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint shall be considered to be a Class C seal.
.5 Standard of Acceptance: Namasco, Ductmate, Exanno, Nexus.
.6 Joint reinforcement shall be in accordance with Tables 1-10 to 1-13 of the SMACNA Standard.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1 Strap hangers shall be of same material as the duct material but shall be to the next sheet metal thickness heavier than the duct.
.2 Hanger configuration shall be to SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger shall be 19” (500 mm).
.3 Hangers: Galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods shall be in accordance with SMACNA and the Table - Hangers And Supports as follows:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
TABLE - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Duct Size(mm) Angle Size (mm) Rod Size(mm)
up to 750 25 x 25 x 3 6
751 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3 10
1501 to 2400 50 x 50 x 5 10
2401 and over 50 x 50 x 6 10
.4 Upper Hanger Attachments:
.1 Concrete: Prior to concrete pour: manufactured concrete inserts.
.1 Standard of Acceptance: Myatt: Fig. 485.
.2 Concrete: after concrete pour:
.1 expanded concrete anchors shall be made of steel. ;
.2 powder actuated fasteners shall not be utilized;
.3 holes for expanding fasteners shall be drilled either by a carbide bit or by the teeth on the fastener itself. Expansion shield shall be “set” by driving it into the hole and expanding it with a conical plug.
.3 Steel Joist: manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer:
.1 clamp or washer shall be mounted to top chord of steel truss only.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: Joist Clamps: Grinnell: Fig. 61 or 86, Hunt.
.4 Steel Beams: Manufactured beam clamps:
.1 Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell: Fig. 60, Hunt.
.5 Round Ductwork: duct shall be supported as follows:
.1 duct dimensions 36" (900 mm) single hangers are acceptable;
.2 duct dimensions over 36" (900 mm) hanger rods shall be provided on both sides of the duct;
.3 minimum hanger sizes shall be in accordance with Table 4-2 of SMACNA.
.6 Loading on trapeze bars shall be in accordance with Table 4-3 of SMACNA.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
2.6 ROUND DUCTWORK
.1 All round ductwork up to 60" (1500 mm) in diameter shall be of Spiro lockseam construction with an intermediate standard rib to provide the rigidity equivalent to SMACNA Standard - Gauge Spiral Duct.
.2 G-60 coated galvanized of lockforming grade conforming to ASTM A635 and A924 standards. Minimum yield strength for steel and reinforcements shall be 30,000 psi. (207 Kpa.) with a thickness not less than for 24 gauge for duct diameters 250 mm. to 425 mm. (10" to 17"), 24 gauge for 450 mm. to 600 mm. (18" to 24"), 22 gauge for 650 mm. to 800 mm. (26" to 30") and 20 gauge for 850 mm. to 1500 mm. (32" to 60") diameters.
.3 For duct diameters less than 9" (225 mm), use 26 gauge spiro duct without ribs.
.4 Fittings:
.1 Elbows 4" to 8" (100 mm to 200 mm), shall be diestamped. Diestamped elbows shall be 2-piece construction with fully welded longitudinal seam.
.2 Elbows 9" to 36" (225 mm to 900 mm) shall be standing seam construction.
.3 Elbows 38" to 60" (950 mm to 1500 mm) shall be standard gore construction with joints riveted and bonded.
.4 Fittings shall be 1-gauge thicker than standard ductwork.
.5 All couplings shall be slipped joint construction with minimum 2" (50 mm) insertion length. Duct sealer shall be applied on male end connectors before insertion and afterwards to cover the entire joint and sheet metal screws. Sheet metal screws shall be installed at a maximum 12" (300 mm) spacing, with a minimum of three (3) screws per joint. In large diameters, flanging gasketted joints are acceptable, in lieu of slip joints.
2.7 STAINLESS STEEL
.1 To ASTM A480-82a, Type 304.
.2 Thickness: SMACNA Standards.
.3 Fabrication: SMACNA Standards
.4 Joints: to SMACNA Standards and shall be continuous weld.
.5 All stainless steel shall be passivated prior to delivery to site.
.6 Provide for the following systems:
.1 Exhaust duct serving showers (as indicated on drawings).
2.8 INTERNALLY LINED ROUND DUCTWORK
.1 Round ductwork indicated to be internally lined utilize spiral round insulated duct with
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
double wall including external pressure tight metal shell, 1" (25 mm) fibreglass insulation and an internal perforated liner.
.2 The external shell and couplings shall comply with the specification for round ductwork.
2.9 FLOW STATIONS
.1 Flow stations shall be supplied by the Division 15900 Contractor and installed by the Division 15 Contractor.
2.10 HIGH TRANSMISSION LOSS DUCTWORK
.1 High transmission loss ductwork shall be a minimum of 10 gauge.
2.11 DUCTWORK CLEANING
.1 Clean all ductwork prior to shipping ductwork to the site for the following systems:
.1 All supply air ductwork serving laboratory.
3 Execution
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA Standards and as indicated.
.2 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers 4" (100 mm) beyond insulated duct.
.3 Support risers in accordance with SMACNA Standards or as indicated.
.4 Provide a drain at the low point of all exhaust and outside air plenums. Pipe drain to funnel floor drain.
3.2 HANGERS
.1 Strap Hangers: Install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2 Angle Hangers: Complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3 Hanger spacing shall be as follows:
.1 Horizontal ducts shall have a support within 27" (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48" (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
.2 Straight runs of duct, the hanger spacing shall be in accordance with the Table - Hanger Spacing as follows:
TABLE - HANGER SPACING
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Duct Size (mm)
Spacing (mm)
up to 1500 3000 1501 and over 2500
3.3 WATERTIGHT DUCT
.1 Provide watertight duct for:
.1 Applications:
.1 Ductwork installed in trenches.
.2 Shower exhaust
.3 Outdoor air intake.
.2 Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. Solder or weld joints of bottom and side sheets. Conform to ASTM Standard B32. Seal all other joints with duct sealer.
3.4 SEALING AND TAPING
.1 Refer to Section 15825.
3.5 LEAKAGE TEST
.1 Test the following systems to ensure that they conform to the leakage requirements specified above. Systems to be tested are as follows:
.1 Ductwork mains as indicated by the Consultant.
.2 If ductwork fails leakage test, reseal ductwork and retest.
.3 Conduct test in accordance with AABC.
.4 Acceptable Procedure(s):
.1 Provide appropriate level of filtration on the intake to the test apparatus prior to starting test procedure.
.2 Connect flexible tubing from the test apparatus to the duct section under test. Select the appropriate orifice plate and start test apparatus at minimum speed. Slowly increase the speed of the blower until the desired static pressure is achieved.
.3 Maintain attained system static pressure for a period of fifteen (15) minutes. From appropriate manometer gauge on test apparatus, read the pressure differential. From the chart supplied with the test apparatus read leakage flow rate for a given pressure differential and orifice size. If the test results meet the allowable flow rate, complete test report and obtain signatures as required.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15801 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCTWORK – LOW PRESSURE METALLIC UP TO 4” W.G. (1000 Pa) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.4 Compare actual leakage with allowable rate. If the test results exceed the allowable rate undertake appropriate remedial action and repeat the test until satisfactory outcome is achieved.
.5 Duct leakage shall not exceed that allowable for ductwork classification when calculated as follows:
Q = Q1 x L1 x F / L2
.1 Where:
.1 Q is allowable leakage in test section in CFM.
.2 Q1 air quantity in CFM of total system.
.3 L1 is Test section length in ft.
.4 L2 is Total system length in ft.
.5 F is System allowable leakage expressed as a decimal for class of ductwork.
.6 When duct leakage tests are being performed on factory cleaned ductwork a HEPA filter shall be installed on the air intake for the pressure testing blower to prevent contamination of the ductwork.
.7 Notify the Consultant a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to conducting leakage tests.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15811 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 - Mechanical, General Provisions.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Comply with requirements of:
.1 ULC S110M Fire Tests for Air Ducts
.2 UL 181-1994 Standards for Safety, Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
.3 NFPA 90A-1999 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.4 NFPA 90B-1999 Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.5 SMACNA - 1995 HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Second Edition
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
1.4 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by the manufacturer or Independent Testing Agency signifying adherence to Codes and Standards.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Factory fabricated.
.2 Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.
.3 Fire retardant type insulation materials, coverings and adhesives with maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 when tested in a accordance with CAN/ULC-S102 and NFPA 255-1996. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-96 shall not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at temperature to which exposed in service. Flexible duct system shall meet OBC requirements for smoke and flame spread for return air plenums. All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15811 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
.1 Temperature range: -40 F. to 250 F. (-40 C. to 120 C.)
.2 Minimum bend radius: 1.5 x diameter.
.3 Vinyl sleeve outer covering.
.4 Maximum working pressure: 12" (3000 Pa).
.5 Class 1 duct material.
3 Execution
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
.1 Install where indicated and in accordance with preferred method of SMACNA and the following:
.1 Connections:
.1 Duct Sizes 300 mm (12") and Under:
.1 Provide a minimum of three (3) #8 sheet metal screws equally spaced to hold the flexible duct.
.2 Duct sizes above 300 mm (12"):
.1 Provide a minimum of five (5) #8 sheet metal screws equally spaced to hold the flexible duct.
.3 Screws shall be located at least 1/2" (12 mm) from the end of the duct.
.4 The collar to which the flexible duct is attached shall be a minimum 2" (50 mm) in length.
.5 Cover entire joint with tape and seal as specified in Section 15801.
.2 Supports:
.1 Support shall be in accordance with SMACNA.
.2 The maximum amount of sag for flexible duct shall not exceed 1/2" (12 mm) per foot. Provide additional supports as required.
.3 Length:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15811 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Maximum length of flexible duct: 3000 mm (10 ft.).
.2 Minimum length of flexible duct connecting to light fixture troffers or ceiling diffusers shall be 72" (1800 mm).
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15820 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCT ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Indicate the following:
.1 Flexible connections.
.2 Sealants and tapes.
.3 Duct access doors.
.4 Instrument test ports.
1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
2 Products
2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1 Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams.
.2 Material: neoprene.
.1 Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at -40°F to plus 194°F(- 40°C to plus 90°C), density of 0.266 lb/ft² (1.3 kg/m²).
2.2 SEALANT AND TAPE
.1 All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
.2 Sealant: fibre reinforced, flame resistant (flame spread 5, smoke developed 0) high velocity duct sealing compound. Temperature range of minus -22°F to 200°F (30 °C to plus 93 °C). Sealant to meet ULS102. System to be rated up to 16" W.C without the need for fibreglass mesh tape.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15820 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCT ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Where system pressures are in excess of 16" W.C. utilize a fibreglass mesh scrim to reinforce the system. Where a gap exists which is larger than 1/4" provide fiberglass mesh scrim over the gap prior to applying the sealant.
.4 Standard of Acceptance: Phoenix #33-526, 3M
2.3 ACCESS DOORS
.1 General.
.1 Non-insulated sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.0236" (0.6 mm) thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.
.2 Insulated sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.0236" (0.6 mm) thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 1" (25 mm) thick rigid glass fibre insulation.
.2 Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber. Provide on all access doors.
.3 Hardware:
.1 Up to 12" x 12" (300mm x 300mm): 2 sash locks.
.2 12" to 18" (301 to 450 mm): 4 sash locks.
.3 20" to 33" (451 to 1000 mm): piano hinge and minimum 2 sash locks.
.4 Doors over 34" (1000 mm): piano hinge and 2 handles operable from both sides.
2.4 INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS
.1 0.063" (1.6 mm) thick steel zinc plated after manufacture.
.2 Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15820 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCT ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Outlets from supply air units.
.3 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.
.4 As indicated.
.2 Length of connection: 6" (150 mm).
.3 Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 3" (75 mm).
.4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
3.2 SEALANTS AND TAPES
.1 Apply sealant in accordance with SMACNA and to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one (1) coat of sealant to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 ACCESS DOORS
.1 Size:
.1 24" x 24" (600 x 600 mm) for person size entry.
.2 18" x 18" (450 x 450 mm) for servicing entry.
.3 12" x 12" (300 x 300 mm) for viewing.
.4 As indicated.
.2 Location:
.1 At fire and smoke dampers.
.2 At control dampers.
.3 Upstream and downstream of all reheat coils.
.4 At devices requiring maintenance.
.5 At locations required by code.
.6 As indicated.
.3 All access doors that a man could fit through shall be provided with handles on both the interior and the exterior of the ductwork.
3.4 INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS
.1 General:
.1 For traverse readings, install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15820 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DUCT ACCESSORIES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 Provide adjacent to all control sensors installed by Division 15900 to allow for confirmation and validation of the readings provided by these sensors. This includes but is not limited to temperature sensors, relative humidity sensors, pressure sensors, and flow stations.
.3 Provide where required by the TAB contractor for testing and balancing.
.4 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15825 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DAMPERS - BALANCING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
2 Products
2.1 SPLITTER DAMPERS
.1 Not to be used.
2.2 SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1 Of same material as duct. V-groove stiffened.
.2 Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 10" (250 mm).
.3 Locking quadrant.
.4 Inside and outside end bearings.
2.3 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS
.1 Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.
.2 Opposed blade: configuration to recommendations of SMACNA.
.3 Maximum blade height: 4" (100 mm).
.4 Bearings: pin in bronze bushings.
.5 Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.
.6 Channel frame complete with angle stop.
2.4 DIVERTING DAMPERS
.1 Adjustable, curved vanes, mounted in supporting frame.
.2 All aluminum construction.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15825 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION DAMPERS - BALANCING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install where indicated on the drawings and identified herein. For ducts concealed behind plaster or drywall ceilings, provide dampers where specifically shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide balancing damper on all branch ducts.
.3 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.4 Provide balancing dampers on all return air ducts connected to air handling units.
.5 The last balancing damper within (Name Space) shall be located at the point where the branch ducts leave the primary acoustic plenums. No balancing dampers shall be installed downstream of this point on the supply and upstream on the return.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15828 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACOUSTIC LINING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 NFPA 90A-1999 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
.2 NFPA 90B-1999 Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.3 ASTM C1071 Type II -2000 Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
.4 ASTM C411-82 (1992) Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation.
.5 ASTM C1104 - 2000 Test Method for Determining Water Vapour Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fibre Insulation
.6 ASTM C916- 1996 Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
.7 ASTM G21 - 1996 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymer Materials to Fungi
.8 ASTM G22 - 1996 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria
.9 ASTM C423-2000 Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
.10 ASTM E795 - 2000 Standard Practice for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.
.11 ASHRAE 62 - 99
.12 CGSB 51.10-92
.13 CGSB 51-GP-11M Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers
.14 CGSB 51.2M Type II, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.
.15 CAN/ULC-S102 Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15828 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACOUSTIC LINING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.16 SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard.
1.3 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS
.1 Meet NFPA 90A and ASTM E-84. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 in accordance with NFPA 255 and ASTM E-84 for all components of insulation system. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and jointing recommendations.
.3 Before ordering any insulation materials, prepare a sample board, with a cross section sample of all types of insulation, including exterior jacket, properly identified for the various services and equipment on the project and state types of adhesives used. Submit the sample board to the Consultant for review and after review and acceptance, the sample board shall be kept on site for the duration of the project for reference. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be allowed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Deliver all materials to the job site and protect the insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not install damaged insulation and remove it from the project
.2 Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, coatings etc. to the site in factory fabricated containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer and brand.
.3 Installed insulation which has not been weatherproofed shall be protected from inclement weather by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. Any wet or damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.
1.6 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE
.1 Acoustical performance shall be established by ASTM C423-90 procedures. Sound absorption coefficients with type “A” mounting per ASTM E795 shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this specification.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15828 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACOUSTIC LINING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
.2 Rated for 250oF (121 C) service temperature and velocities up to 4,000 fpm.
.3 Surface coating shall contain an immobilized, EPA registered, anti microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The coating shall be damage resistant which does not tear or abrade easily. Duct lining shall be capable of being cleaned per NAIMA Duct Cleaning Standards.
.4 The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071 with a noise reduction criteria (NRC) rating of not less than 0.65 for 1" (25 mm) liner as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type “A” mounting in ASTM E 795.
.5 Duct lining adhesive shall conform to ASTM C916 “Specifications for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation”. Fasteners shall comply with SMACNA. All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
.6 Water vapour sorption shall not exceed 3 percent by weight.
.7 Thermal conductivity of the liner shall be no higher than 0.24 Btu/in/hr ft2°F at 75°F (1.36 W/m2°C at 24°C) mean temperature.
.8 Density of insulation shall be a minimum density of 1.5 lb/ft3 (24 kg/m3).
.9 Duct dimensions shown on the drawings are clear inside dimensions. Where acoustically lined, actual duct dimension shall be 2" (50 mm) larger than size shown on the drawing to accommodate 1" (25 mm) acoustic lining.
.10 Weld pins for installation prior to applying insulation. Nylon returning clips to be 1 1/4" (32mm) square. Adhesive pins or pins that penetrate the duct are not acceptable. The mechanical fasteners shall not compress the liner more than 1/8" (3.2 mm) and shall be installed perpendicular to the air stream.
.11 Thickness: 1" (25 mm) or as indicated on the drawings.
.12 Standard of Acceptance: Mason Akousti-Liner, Owens Corning, Knauf, Johns Mansville, CertainTeed Corporation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15828 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ACOUSTIC LINING SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Acoustically line supply ducts downstream of non-lab VAV boxes and where shown on the drawings.
.2 For drawing clarity not all ductwork to be internally lined has been cross-hatched. Where cross-hatching is not continuous, internally insulate all ductwork from fan to furthest point from fan where cross-hatching has been shown.
.3 Install lining in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.4 Fasten to interior sheet metal surfaces with 100% coverage of a fire retardent adhesive and metal pins and washers at 16" (400mm) on centre and within 3" (75mm) from all joints and corners. The black acrylic face shall face the air stream.
.5 All transverse and longitudinal abutting edges of duct lining shall be sealed and lapped 3" (75 mm) with a heavy coat of adhesive, in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. Seal all edges, pin penetrations and joints with adhesive.
.6 Protect leading edges at the fan discharge with sheet metal edging. Protect all other edges with adhesive.
.7 At velocities over 2000 fpm, coat all longitudinal joints with adhesive.
.8 Corner joints shall be overlapped so no gaps are present. Top pieces shall be supported by side pieces.
.9 All internal lining damaged during construction shall be repaired with adhesive.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15844 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VARIABLE REFRIGERANT UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 General Instructions .1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the
requirements outlined in Section 15010.
.2 Refer to Section 15170 for electric motor requirements.
1.2 Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Indicate the following: fan, fan curve, performance data, wiring diagrams, weight, complete refrigerant pipe length and pipe size schematics, sound power levels and electrical requirements.
1.3 Maintenance Data
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
1.4 Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 15010.
1.5 Manufactured Items
.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.
1.6 Performance
.1 Acoustical performance shall be established by AMCA standard 330, ASHRAE Standard 68 or ARI 260P procedures. Sound data shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements indicated on schedules. (Data that is presented in sones or Bels is not acceptable.)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Units General
.1 The specified mechanical system shall be a VRF (variable refrigerant flow) CITYMULTI conditioning system as manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric. The high efficiency modular Y Series Variable Refrigerant System shall consist of variable speed drive scroll compressor air cooled condensing unit. The CITYMULTI Variable Refrigerant System shall be a two pipe configuration capable of providing cooling to the designated zone.
2.2 Startup and Warranty
.1 Warranty is one year for parts and 5 year for compressor provided maintenance is carried out to a proven satisfactory level.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15844 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VARIABLE REFRIGERANT UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.2 The manufacturer shall provide a factory trained service technician to start-up each unit. Manufacturer shall provide instruction to the owners' personnel on proper unit operation and maintenance.
.3 Allow 60 hours for pre-commissioning of the equipment. Manufacturer’s representative shall conduct regular site visits to ensure all piping and wiring requirements are met prior to commissioning the equipment.
.4 The warranty period shall commence on the date of initial start-up and shall continue for a period of one (1) year not to exceed eighteen (18) months from date of shipment.
2.3 Refrigerant Piping
.1 Supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting refrigeration pipework between the outdoor and indoor units.
.2 All pipework to be carried out in refrigerant quality ACR copper tubing and complete with the appropriate headers and joints. All pipework must be suitable for R410A.
.3 Longest possible lengths of copper pipe should be utilized to minimize joints on site.
.4 Appropriate refrigeration installation tools must be utilized. Dry Nitrogen must be utilized at all times in the system during brazing.
.5 All pipework (suction and liquid lines) to be insulated with slip on close cell elastomeric pipe insulation (as manufactured by Armaflex or equal and approved) having a wall thickness of not less than 1-1/2”
.6 After installation of pipework, and prior to sealing of insulation joints and starting of equipment, pipework should be pressure tested. 44 PSIG test for 3 minutes minimum, then 217 PSIG for 3 minimum, then 478 PSIG for 3 minutes minimum, then strength test to 600 PSIG check the system for leaks and deformation, then lower the pressure back to 478 PSIG and pressure test for 24 hours and checked for leaks. Vacuumed/dehydrated to 300 microns, and hold at that vacuum for 12 hours (minimum)
.7 Refrigerant (R410A) charge weight must be calculated, to the actual installed length of pipe work in accordance to Mitsubishi recommendations.
.8 The charging should be carried out with an appropriate charging station.
.9 Pipework to be properly fixed and supported at a minimum of 1.5 meters (5 feet) centers or as specified by local code and where required should be run on galvanized trays. All pipework to be labeled with ID number (condensing units ref.) at 3 meter (9 feet) intervals.
.10 Joints in copper pipe shall be brazed. Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the local code and as per the Canadian copper & brass development association recommendations.
2.4 Indoor Unit (Refer to Equipment Schedules for details)
.1 General
.1 R410A refrigerant
.2 9-7/8" (250mm) high for low ceiling heights
.3 Ducted fan coil supporting multiple con gurations for exible installation
.4 Built-in condensate lift; lifts to 27-9/16" (700mm)
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15844 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VARIABLE REFRIGERANT UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.5 Auto fan mode
.6 Quiet operation from 26 to 45 dB(A)
.2 The units will be manufactured from galvanised steel plate partially insulated with closed cell expanded polyurethane foam.
.3 Air will be discharged by a forward curved centrifugal fan horizontally out of the front of the unit to allow for field supply ductwork and diffusers to distribute the air into the room. Return air will brought in through the rear of the unit to allow for the return air to be either ducted from the room or taken from the ceiling void. A synthetic fibre washable filter and filter casement shall be available as optional parts. Drain lift up pumps shall be available as optional parts. The unit’s fan will be able to produce 1” WC. The unit will have a fresh air connection knock out. The installing contractor will be responsible to provide a return air plenum, filter and filter frame.
2.5 Outdoor Unit (Refer to Equipment Schedules for details)
.1 General
.1 Single-phase outdoor unit with variable refrigerant flow (VRF) zoning technology
.2 Inverter-driven (variable speed) compressor
.3 Total refrigerant piping length of 250' (75 m)
.4 Uses CITY MULTI indoor units and Controls Network
.2 Condensing Unit Cabinet Construction
.1 The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated baked enamel. Units cabinets shall be able to withstand 960 hours of Salt Spray in accordance with JRA9002 (Japanese Refrigeration and Air-conditioning) testing criteria.
.3 Variable Speed Condenser Fan:
.1 The fan motor shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation.
.2 The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
.3 The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow.
.4 The outdoor unit shall be equipped to operate under low ambient conditions. Please include the low ambient kit with wind guards
2.6 Refrigerant
.1 R410A refrigerant shall be used for both indoor and outdoor units.
2.7 Controls
.1 All controls shall be coordinated with the controls contractor. Refer to the specification for the sequence of operation.
.2 VRF control system package to include the BAC-HD150 unit for integration with the existing BAS in the building
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15844 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VARIABLE REFRIGERANT UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.8 Electrical
.1 The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limitations of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
.2 The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 30VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair non-polar shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. The inrush current to the outdoor unit shall not exceed the design full load amp FLA rating for the unit. Alternate systems with solid state or constant speed scroll compressors with significant inrush current characteristic will not be acceptable for this application.
2.9 Capacity
.1 As indicated on the schedule.
2.10 Standard of Acceptance
.1 Standard of Acceptance: Mitsubishi, Daikin, LG
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
.1 Fan Coils
.1 Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated.
.2 Assemble and install all components furnished as per manufacturer’s literature. Provide all wiring as per manufacturer wiring and control diagrams.
.3 Connect all refrigerant piping so equipment and coils are serviceable without having to dismantle excessive lengths of pipe.
.4 Refrigerant pipes shall be ACR copper. All refrigerant piping must be insulated along its full run.
.5 Install the units on isolators in accordance with the vibration isolation schedule.
.6 Contractor shall provide necessary piping for condensate drains complete with deep seal trap.
.7 Provide flexible duct connections for ducted units.
.8 Install outdoor units on a flat surface level within 1/8 inch. Provide intermediate supports as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
.9 For ceiling hung installations, provide a reinforced steel framework to adequately support all unit sections. Suspension bolts must be used for hanging of these type of fan coils
.10 Provide certified wiring schematics to the electrical division for associated equipment and controls.
.11 Provide all necessary control wiring as recommended by the manufacturer.
.12 High/low pressure gas line, liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.
.2
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15844 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VARIABLE REFRIGERANT UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Control Wiring - Installation
.1 The controls contractor shall be responsible for the interconnecting control wiring between the indoor and outdoor units and control wiring between remote controllers, centralized control and relevant components. All control wiring are to be carried out in 2 core 16 AWG shielded cabling with color coding and tagged with ID number at 3 meter intervals as per schematics for ease of identification and maintenance. Control wiring shall not be run next to power wiring. A minimum space of 100mm between both control and power cables shall apply.
.2 The controls contractor is responsible for connecting the VRF control system to existing BAS. This responsibility includes connecting the VRF control system to the BAS panel, which includes all wires, conduits, and accessories as necessary.
.4 VRF System Installation
.1 The fixing of all air conditioning equipment, installation of all refrigerant pipework and full commissioning shall be performed by a specialist refrigerant installer who shall be authorized to install Mitsubishi Electric VRF equipment. The installation of all internal and external units, refrigerant pipework, inter-connecting wiring, commissioning and testing shall be carried out by an approved refrigerant systems installers. Full access shall be afforded to site during the installations stage of the project to allow them to verify that installation methods are fully in accordance with Mitsubishi requirements and that the equipment warranties will not be invalidated.
.5 Condensate Pipework
.1 A condensate line shall be installed to each fan coil unit. This shall be installed and insulated all as per the standard specification. Minimum size of condensate pipes to be 25mm (1 inch) copper or plastic, insulated and pumped or by gravity from each fan coil/cassette, drains to run 1:80 min falls as indicated on drawings.
.6 Electrical Disconnects
.1 Electrical disconnects are not supplied with the equipment, and the electrical contractor will be responsible to provide electrical disconnects for all outdoor units, indoor units and other components requiring disconnects.
.7 Start up and Log Books
.1 Manufacturers certified commissioning technician will perform startup of the system. Full commissioning Logs shall be supplied by the Mitsubishi Electric local distributor. These shall be completed fully and included with the main Installation and Operation Manuals prior to hand over. In addition, copy pages shall be returned to Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada at the following address in order that the installation is logged and warranty honored.
.8 Warranty
.1 Warranty is one year for parts and 5 year for compressor provided maintenance is carried out to a proven satisfactory level.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15855 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FILTERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Do testing of air filters shall be UL approved and shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 52 Methods of "Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter" except where specified otherwise.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA
.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
1.5 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Filters: Suitable for air at 100% RH. Air temperatures up to 350o F.
.2 Final filters are to be minimum MERV 13 (LEED requirement EQc5). Refer to additional requirements listed below.
.3 Efficiency: based on ASHRAE 52-76, atmospheric dust spot efficiency. "Absolute filter" efficiency. Performance rating shall be based on testing performed by an independent testing agency with 0.3 micrometre dioctyl phthalate (DOP) smoke.
.4 Dust holding capacity: Air Filter Institute (AFI) Test.
.5 Provide filter types described herein for air handling units as specified in Section 15840 and as identified in specification and on the drawing.
2.2 DISPOSABLE FILTERS
.1 Components for air handling units and heat recovery / makeup air units
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15855 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FILTERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 A two inch (50mm) 30 percent efficient prefilter
.2 A twelve inch (300 mm) 90 percent final filter.
.2 Components for Split DX Units
.1 A one inch (25mm) 30 percent prefilter.
.3 Components for Supply Fans
.1 A one inch (25mm) 30 percent prefilter.
.4 Filter Performance
.1 30 Percent Efficient Filter (MERV Rating 7)
.1 Medium efficiency disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven, reinforced cotton and polyester fibre media reinforced by a non woven backing. The filter material shall be supported by an expanded metal support grid and enclosing frame. The filter shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories as Class II at entry.
.2 Filter media shall be of non-woven cotton and polyester fibre type.
.3 Filter Performance:
.1 50mm (2") - Initial resistance at 600 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.30" wg dust holding capacity on 600mm x 600mm (24" X 24") greater than 365 grams.
.2 25mm (1") - Initial resistance at 350 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.25" wg.
.3 The media support shall be a welded wire grid with an effective open area of not less than 96%. The welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to eliminate the possibility of media oscillation and media pull away.
.4 Average Atmospheric dust spot efficiency: 19%
.5 Average synthetic dust weight arrestance: 91%.
.6 Standard of Acceptance: American Air Filter AM-Air AM300, PM Wright, Farr, Air Guard, Flanders
.2 90 Percent Efficient Final Filter (MERV Rating 14)
.1 Intermediate efficiency consisting of water-resistant media made from ultra-fine glass fibers. The media shall be pleated and have crimped aluminum separators to maintain uniform spacing between pleats. The pleated media pack shall be inserted into galvanized steel cell sides with a 3/4" (19 mm) galvanized steel on the air entering side. The filters shall have cross wire bracing on the air leaving side.
.2 Filter media shall be 90% glass medium.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15855 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FILTERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Filter Performance:
.1 300mm (12") - Initial resistance at 500 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.68" wg on a 600mm x 600mm (24" X 24") frame. Dust holding capacity shall be greater than 80 grams.
.2 Final resistance to be 1.2".
.3 Average Atmospheric dust spot efficiency: 87%.
.4 Average synthetic dust weight arrestance: 100%.
.5 Standard of Acceptance: American Air Filter Varicel Model SH, Farr, PM Wright, Flanders
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
.2 Prefilter shall be installed on initial start up.
.3 Prior to the start of balancing install new prefilters and final filters.
.4 Replace all pre-filters and final filters at turnover to the owner. Used filters shall be inspected by the Owner. All filters in acceptable condition shall be retained by the Owner.
.5 Provide a spare set of pre and final filters in additional to the set identified in Item 3.1.4 above.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15871 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TERMINAL UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
1.3 TEST REPORTS
.1 Submit published test data in accordance with ISO 3741 made by independent testing agency for O, 492 ft/min, 1180 ft/min (0, 2.5 and 6 m/s) branch velocity or inlet velocity. Sound power level with minimum inlet pressure of 1-1/2"WC (0.375 kPa) in accordance with ISO 3741 for 2nd through 7th octave band. Pressure loss through silencer shall not exceed 60% of inlet velocity pressure maximum. To AMCA 210- 74 standard.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 ADC 1062R4 Equipment Test Code for Air Terminal Boxes (VAV).
1.5 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE
.1 Acoustical performance shall be established by ANSI/ARI 880-89 procedures. Sound power data and NC value with correction factors shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this section. Sone data only is not acceptable.
.2 Low pressure systems of single duct type with variable volume control and housed within sound attenuating box.
.3 Casing: 22 gauge (0.89 mm) minimum thickness galvanized steel insulated with minimum of 3/4" (20 mm) thick thermal and acoustic insulation which complies with UL-181 and NFPA 90A. Any cut sections of fiberglass exposed to the air stream shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant.
.4 The primary air valve damper shall be heavy gauge metal, with peripheral gasket, pivoted in self lubricating bearings. In full closed position, air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalog rating at 3" inlet static pressure, as rated by ARI Standard 880. An opposed blade primary air damper and DDC motor operator shall vary primary air in response to a signal. Damper operation shall be demonstrated to be closed to minimum position before heating is activated. No
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15871 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TERMINAL UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
overlap under any circumstances shall be allowed. Damper shall be located inside unit. Damper connection to operating shaft shall be a positive mechanical connection.
.5 The air flow sensor shall be of cross configuration located at the inlet of the assembly. The sensor shall have twelve total pressure sensing ports and a centre averaging chamber designed to accurately average the flow across the inlet of the assembly. Sensor shall provide accuracy within 5% with a 90o sheet metal elbow directly at the inlet of the assembly. The air flow sensor shall amplify the sensed air flow signal.
.6 Factory preset maximum and minimum air volume setting being field adjustable, and duct collars. Leakage through casing not to exceed 2% of design volume with 3" (750 kPa) upstream and 0" (0 kPa) downstream of regulator while maintaining flow regulation within 5% of setting as rated by ARI Standard 880.
.7 At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm pressure drop for cfm range of box shall not exceed 0.11 in w.g. (27 Pa.).
.8 Sound rating of air distribution assembly including box and attenuator shall not exceed the following:
.1 Radiated: 35 NC.
.2 Discharge: 36 NC. Based on room absorption of 10 db, and an inlet static pressure of 1.5" W.G. (375 Pa.)
.9 Provide minimum 36" (915mm) attenuator for discharge of every box. Attenuator shall have interior lining as previously specified, of 1" (25 mm) for its entire length.
.10 Provide terminal units with air volumes of 900 cfm or more with additional 24" (600mm) silencer section.
.11 In fully closed position, air leakage through damper shall not exceed 2% of catalogued rating at 3 in wg. (750 Pa.).
.12 Schedule: as indicated on the drawings.
.13 All digital controls including motor, transducer, controller, etc. to be supplied by the Control Contractor for factory installation by box manufacturer. The cost of the Installation of the controls shall be carried by the box manufacturer.
.14 Provide a reheat coil sized in accordance with the schedule where indicated on the drawings. Refer to Section 15701.
.15 Provide an access door upstream of heating coil and dampers.
.16 Standard of Acceptance: E.H. Price, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15871 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TERMINAL UNITS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.7 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Support terminal units independently of ductwork.
.3 Provide each VAV, Fan Power Boxes with a length of 4 diameters of straight duct prior to box inlet.
.4 Provide vibration isolation as specified in Section 15241.
End of Section
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15875 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
1.3 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 Submit samples for the following:
1.4 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE
.1 Acoustical performance shall be established by ADC 1062 GRD and ADC/ARI standard 885 procedures. Sound power data and NC value correction factors used shall be supplied that meets or exceeds requirements established later in this section.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 ADC 1062GRD-84 Test Code for Grilles, Registers and Diffusers.
1.6 MANUFACTURED ITEMS
.1 Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be product of one manufacturer for generic type, i.e. grilles and registers by one, diffusers by one, or same.
1.7 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Provide standard product to meet capacity, throw, noise level, throat and outlet velocity.
.2 Where grilles, registers and diffusers penetrate fire walls and fire partitions, provide approved steel sleeve secured to structure in accordance with NFPA 90A-1999 and required fire damper.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15875 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Frames:
.1 Steel: primed cold rolled steel with exposed welded joints and mitred corners.
.2 Aluminum: extruded satin finish with mechanical fasteners and mitred corners.
.3 Provide plaster frames as plaster stops where set into plaster or gypsum board.
.4 Provide concealed fasteners and balancing operators in all finished areas.
.5 Final finish to be selected by Architect from standard manufacturer finishes at shop drawing stage.
.6 Style, frame, and installation details as indicated on the schedule.
.4 Sizes and capacities: as indicated in the schedule.
2.2 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1 1-1/4" (32 mm) border double deflection with airfoil shape horizontal face and vertical rear bars, opposed blade dampers (OBD) where indicated with concealed manual operator, and gaskets.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: E. H. Price, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor.
2.3 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1 1-1/4" (32 mm) border, single deflection, air foil shape, horizontal bar type 35 max turn up, when shown on the schedule opposed blade damper with concealed operator and rubber sealing strips.
.2 Egg crate to be ½" x ½" x 1" (12 x 12 x 25), type as per schedule.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: E. H. Price, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor.
2.4 DIFFUSERS
.1 As indicated on the schedule, Circular, square or perforated type, having adjustable fixed pattern, and volume control dampers with flow straightening devices and blank-off quadrants.
.2 Standard of Acceptance: E. H. Price, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15875 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
2.5 LINEAR GRILLES
.1 Bar core linear grilles with frame as indicated, plaster frame, sealing strip and accessories as indicated.
.2 Floor grilles to be capable of supporting 200 lb (90 kg) point load weight between supports with negligible deflection.
.3 Provide opposed blade damper in maximum 3'0" (1000 mm) lengths. Do not supply OBD in return air linear grilles.
.4 Extruded aluminum linear slot diffuser with adjustable vane controls and accessories as indicated.
.5 Standard of Acceptance: E. H. Price, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
.2 All diffusers and grilles in finished areas to have concealed mounting. In unfinished areas and where grilles or diffusers are to be installed in ductwork. For linear bar grilles and linear slot diffusers site measure for exact fit.
.3 Final locations of diffusers and grilles to be in accordance with details of Architect's reflected ceiling plan.
.4 Install and adjust air registers to provide noiseless and draftless distribution. Primary air balance to be done at duct dampers with final adjustment only at diffusers and grilles.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
1 General
1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
.2 Comply with the commissioning requirements in sections 15050 and 01 91 13.
.3 Comply with the General Requirements of Section 16010 of Division 16.
1.2 PROGESS DRAWS
.1 The Contractor for this project shall include in their bid the cost of implementing the commissioning program and shall include the costs of the commissioning program in their bid.
.2 To ensure that the Contractor completes their responsibilities for the commissioning program a line item equal to 10% of the controls contract shall be put in the Mechanical Progress Draw for this project. This amount is to ensure that the Commissioning program is implemented. The Contractor is responsible for determining their own actual costs for the commissioning program.
.3 The Consultant will release these funds on a monthly basis as the commissioning progresses.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1 Provide a single architecture common database microprocessor based electronic control and monitoring system for air handling equipment, heating / cooling plants, laboratory ventilation and exhaust terminals, terminal equipment and other specified systems employing distributed processing and direct digital control (DDC). The system shall consist of the following:
.1 Web based network control units
.2 Stand Alone DDC Controllers (BACnet/MSTP compliant)
.3 Application Specific Controller (BACnet/MSTP compliant)
.4 Operator Workstation and Printer (A Standard PC with Internet browser)
.5 Application and data server (Based on MS SQL Database and tools)
.2 Provide and install a laboratory airflow control system (LACS) to maintain laboratory airflow, pressurization, temperature and fume hood average face velocity. Room pressurization control shall utilize airflow tracking to vary the volume of supply air into the room and general exhaust air from the room to maintain both minimum ventilation and airflow balance. The room pressurization control system shall also maintain laboratory temperature. The exhaust air volume of laboratory fume hoods shall be controlled by a
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
stand alone fume hood controller that is, seamlessly, incorporated into the room pressurization control system. The system shall include room controllers, fume hood controllers, supply and exhaust air flow control devices, reheat coils and valves, all associated low voltage wiring, and all necessary accessories to implement an integrated system as specified herein. System verification and documentation as specified under the commissioning section shall also be included.
.3 Comply with commissioning requirements noted in the Commissioning Sections in the specification and provide commissioning supports required.
.4 The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC controllers and operator devices.
.5 System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting or control execution.
.6 The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services:
.1 Operator information, alarm management and control functions.
.2 Enterprise-level information and control access.
.3 Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and reporting functions.
.4 Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS function.
.5 Offsite monitoring and management access
.6 Management of Scarce Resources
.7 Monitoring and Reporting for LEED Green Building Certification
.8 Energy management
.9 Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems
.10 Indoor Air Quality monitoring and control
.7 The Building Management System Contractor shall be the branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated Building Management Systems.
.8 As evidence of the contractor’s ability to support the owner’s desire for a Green Building, the contractor shall employ and utilize a LEED accredited Professional (AP).
.9 Standard of Acceptance:
Web based Metasys Extended Architecture based on NAE/FEC Controls is standard of
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
acceptance for this project.
.1 The control contractor shall be Johnson Controls.
.2 Mechanical bidders may propose alternate controls contractor under voluntary alternates in the Supplementary Tender Form. Alternate control contractor if proposed shall fully comply with 15900 and 15925 specification and mechanical drawings. The contractor shall include all costs required to customize manufacturer’s standard equipment to meet the letter and intent of all project speciation. Acceptance of an alternate controls contractor is subject to post tender technical approvals and mock up demonstrations of each typical system on main operator workstation at no extra cost to the buyer. This process should not effect the project schedule or quality.
.10 The system proposed must be in full compliance with the specification as to configuration, function and features. Control subcontractor shall submit a compliance statement with the tender which shall detail areas to noncompliance of the specification.
.11 The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers, application and data server and a web-based operator interface. The Building Automation System (EMCS) manufacturer / contractor shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, and subsystems with open communications capabilities as herein specified.
.12 Provide open communications system. The system shall be an open architecture with the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, system shall be capable of utilizing standard protocols as follows as well as be able to integrate third-party systems via existing vendor protocols. System network shall be Native-BACnet communication according to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004: Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Systems (BACNET). The system shall not be limited to only use open communication protocols, but also be able to integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications via existing vendor protocols and through the latest software standards.
.13 The intent is to either use a standard PC and web browser as an Operator Workstation to communicate with the control system from any where on the Ethernet LAN or over internet without the use of custom software. All information and graphics shall be available on the standard workstations. This allows the user to have a ubiquitous single seat from which to perform daily operation locally or remotely
.14 The operator interface for the system shall be web based. Each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device will be depicted by point and click vector graphics on web pages. All information and graphics shall be accessible from local workstation as well as remote workstations over WAN and internet
.15 The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer shall certify in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
has supervised their installation. In addition, the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their direct supervision.
.16 All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems. If a supplier has to customize to meet the specifications and requirements, then explicit life warranty shall be provided by the manufacturer to support and update the system to latest standard at no extra cost to the buyer/user. All standard systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years. Any customizations shall be mocked up and tested for 21 days before approvals, at no extra cost to buyer.
.17 EMCS manufacturer shall be responsible for all EMCS and control wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and national codes.
.18 This Section of the Specification does not entail all control requirements. For further details, refer to all relevant sections of Specifications. Some control interfacing requirements may be noted on respective sections; provide all necessary relays/contacts, control hardware/software and accessories to accomplish controls described in this Section. Should control devices, interfaces, control cards/panels, relays, hardware, wiring, contacts etc. not be mentioned in respective sections of Specification, it shall imply that those devices shall be provided by Control Contractor.
.19 This project will be eligible for LEED Platinum Certification. Provide associated control hardware, software, programming, commissioning and commissioning support for successful certification without extra cost.
.20 Allow one additional license for the commissioning agent to carry out commissioning work.
.21 Provide written programs and graphics for review 12 weeks before downloading the program to site.
.22 Provide internet access to consultants and commissioning agent to monitor building operation (control or modification of setpoints is not required).
1.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
.1 Building Automation Network
.1 The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products available through normal PC vendor channels.
.2 The EMCS shall network multiple user interface clients, automation engines, system controllers and application-specific controllers. Provide application and data server(s) as required for systems operation.
.3 The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network communication.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.4 The Building Network Control Unit reside on the automation network.
.5 The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices.
.2 Control Network
.1 The Building Network Control Units shall provide supervisory control over the control network and shall support all three (3) of the following communication protocols:
.1 BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9: The BNC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label. The DDC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
.2 LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver (FTT-10a).
.3 The N2 Field Bus.
.3 Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following minimum standards. Information transmission and display times are based upon network, rather than modem, connections. Systems shall be tested using the manufacturer's recommended hardware and software for the operator workstation. (Server and browser, for web-based systems.)
.1 Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 10 seconds.
.2 Graphic Refresh. The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 8 seconds and shall automatically refresh every 15 seconds.
.3 Configuration and Tuning Screens. Any special screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall refresh every 5 seconds.
.4 Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 2 seconds. Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds.
.5 Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 15 seconds.
.6 Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.7 Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency adjustable down to once per second. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
.8 Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network must receive alarms within 5-seconds of each other.
.4 System shall be provided with a Norton Virus Scan Version to protect the EMCS against viruses brought in by third party software.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2 All information required for CaGBC LEED Green Buildings Certification pre-evaluation including applications and equipment impact on individual attainment of points. Where a specific device may assist in qualification for LEED points indicate and summarize contribution.
.3 Contractor shall provide shop drawings or other submittals on all hardware, software, and installation to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been successfully reviewed for conformity with the design intent. Six (6) copies are required. All drawings shall be prepared on a CAD system that produces drawing files that are either compatible with or may be converted to AutoCAD 2004 or higher format.
.4 Provide drawings on magnetic/optical disk. When manufacturer's cutsheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs shall not be accepted as cut sheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Submittals shall be provided within ten (10) weeks of contract award. Submittals shall include:
.1 Direct Digital Control System Hardware:
.1 A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and other relevant technical data.
.2 Manufacturer's description and technical data, such as performance curves, product specification sheets, and installation/maintenance instructions for the items listed below and other relevant items not listed below:
.1 Direct Digital Controller (controller panels)
.2 Transducers/Transmitters
.3 Sensors (including accuracy data)
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.4 Actuators
.5 Valves
.6 Relays/Switches
.7 Control Panels
.8 Power Supply
.9 Batteries
.10 Operator Interface Equipment
.11 Wiring.
.3 Points lists for each digital controller. Include termination numbers, device part numbers, signal type and number of wires required to terminate the device.
.4 Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers. Provide floor plans of all sensor locations and control hardware.
.2 Central System Hardware and Software:
.1 The Contractor shall review and confirm prior to installation that the hardware and software being provided adheres to the most current standards set forth by the Owner’s IT department.
.2 A complete bill of material of equipment used, indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and other relevant technical data.
.3 Manufacturer’s description and technical data, such as product specification sheets and installation/maintenance instructions for the items listed below and other relevant items not listed below if provided under this contract:
.1 Central Processing Unit or Web Server
.2 Monitors
.3 Printers
.4 Keyboard
.5 Power Supply
.6 Battery Backup
.7 Interface Equipment Between CPU / Server and Control Panels
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.8 Operating System Software
.9 Operator Interface Software
.10 Color Graphic Software
.11 Third-Party Software
.4 Schematic diagrams for all control, communication, and power wiring. Provide a schematic drawing of the central system installation. Show all interface wiring to the control system.
.5 Riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and all control panels.
.5 Controlled Systems:
.1 A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics shall have all control points labeled with point names shown or listed. The schematics shall graphically show the location of all control elements in the system. All control points shall be coordinated with equipment suppliers to ensure compatibility.
.2 A schematic wiring diagram for each controlled system. Each schematic shall have all elements labeled. Where a control element is the same as that shown on the control system schematic, it shall be labeled with the same name.
.3 An instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. Each element of the controlled system shall be listed in table format. The table shall show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.
.4 A complete description of the operation of the control system, including sequences of operation. The description shall include and reference a schematic diagram of the controlled system. The description shall also include a list of all I/O points and software points as required. This list shall indicate which points are alarmed and/or trended. Each schematic shall reference a control sequence.
.5 A schedule for all typical control systems to specifically identify the uniqueness of each individual system.
.6 Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed but are the responsibility of the Contractor.
.7 A description of the proposed process along with all report formats and checklists to be used in the "Control System Demonstration and Acceptance." Refer to Item 3.3 below.
.8 A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each type of controller and operator interface included in the submittal.
1.6 SCHEDULES:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 Within one month of contract award, provide a schedule of the work indicating the following:
.1 Intended sequence of work items.
.2 Start dates of individual work items.
.3 Duration of individual work items.
.4 Planned delivery dates for major material and equipment and expected lead times.
.5 Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations.
.2 Provide monthly written status reports indicating work completed, revisions to expected delivery dates, etc. An updated project schedule shall be included.
1.7 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK OUT & TESTING DOCUMENTS:
.1 Contractor to submit six (6) copies of all system check out and testing documents for approval. Submittal to include testing procedures, check out sheets for devices, programming and graphics, and a proposed schedule that includes dependencies on other trades work.
1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
.1 All project-developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner. These include, but are not limited to:
.1 Project graphic images
.2 Record drawings
.3 Project database
.4 Project-specific application programming code
.5 All documentation
1.9 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Comply with requirements of Mechanical General Requirements Section 15010 and Electrical General Provisions Section 16010.
.2 Supply, install and commission a centralized automated computer based Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) to meet functional performance requirements of system as herein specified. The EMCS shall integrate multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management and trend data collection.
.3 Include all computer hardware and software, operator input/output communication devices,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 10
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
standalone digital system controllers, communication interface to digital system controllers and field sensors and control devices required to meet specified performance.
.4 Include all wiring, conduit, piping, installation, materials, supervision and labor including calibration, commissioning software programming and data base generation, and additional work necessary to provide a complete and fully operating system to the approval of Owner's representative. Provide a modem to allow access from a remote site.
.5 Two 120V/1ph power supply feeds will be provided by Division 16 on each floor. Control Contractor shall provide subsequent wiring and conduit for power supply of all control devices and panels. Should additional power feeds be required, Control Contractor shall make arrangement with Division 16 at no extra cost to Owner.
.6 Wiring methods shall be as follows:
Location Type of Wiring Outdoor Waterproof EMT Conduit Exposed in Electrical/Mechanical Rooms EMT Conduit Exposed in Areas outside Mechanical/ Electrical Rooms Embedded in Concrete in Conduit Drops in Walls EMT Conduit Above Accessible Ceilings FT6 Plenum Rated Cable Above Hard Ceilings EMT Conduit
1.10 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS & APPROVALS
.1 All materials and equipment shall be standard components regularly manufactured by Supplier and guaranteed to be available as regular inventory as replacement parts for a minimum period of ten (10) years.
.2 All electrical and electronic equipment shall be UL and / or NEC approved where such approvals are required by regulatory authorities.
.3 All input/output devices shall be ASCII (American Standard for Communication and Information Interchange) coded with standard EIA (Electronic Industry Association) interface.
.4 Digital controllers shall have capability for accommodating inputs and outputs meeting ISA (Instrument Society of America) standards.
.5 Automation System to modem interfacing shall conform to EIA RS232C standards. Vendor supplied phone line modems shall be of a type as approved by the Owner.
1.11 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
.1 After installation, submit data relevant to point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, software routines and associated parameters, and other pertinent information for operating system and data base shall be forwarded to Owner's authorized representative.
.2 Prior to on line operation, a complete demonstration and readout of computer real time
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 11
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
responsibilities of surveillance and command shall be performed in the presence of Owner's authorized representative.
.3 Make adjustments to each device and component to ensure that operations are performed correctly and that all analog values are displayed to accuracy specified. All alarms, start/stop and status conditions shall be checked to ensure proper operation.
.4 Upon successful completion of online operation, Owner's authorized representative shall be requested in writing to inspect and approve satisfactory operation of the EMCS.
.5 Complete all outstanding deficiencies as determined by Owner's representative in his inspection report, after which a resubmission of formal acceptance shall be made. This procedure shall be repeated if necessary until acceptable performance has been established.
1.12 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION
.1 The contractor shall provide a course outline and training materials for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. Training shall be conducted via instructor led sessions, computer-based training, or web-based training. The Consultant may modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials to meet the needs of the owner. Review and approval by the engineer shall be completed at least three weeks prior to the first class.
.2 Provide a minimum of 40-hours of training for the Owner’s staff on programming, trouble shooting, servicing and operation of the complete control system. The allocated time will be used at the Owner’s discretion to train approximately six (6) staff members.
.3 Provide a minimum of six (6) copies of a comprehensive Users Manual which describes in complete detail the application and on-line programming features of the system.
.4 Training shall include an explanation of the drawings, operations and maintenance manuals, a walk through of the site to locate control components, an explanation of the DDC controller and ASC operation/function, and an explanation of the adjustment, calibration, and replacement procedures.
.5 Provide a minimum of one (1) training session prior to installing the work station on site to familiarize the Owner with the system operation.
1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1 Upon completion of installation, submit six (6) copies of record (as-built) documents in 8 ½” x 11” (215 mm x 280 mm) hard cover looseleaf binder. Binders shall not be overfilled. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and shall include:
.1 Enclose title sheet complete with project name, data, and list of contents.
.2 Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of magnetic media drawing files shall also be provided, in a format compatible with or convertible to AutoCAD 2004 or higher. (.DWG, .DXF,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 12
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
VSD, etc.)
.3 Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of all reports and checklists, along with all trend logs, used to meet the requirements of the "Control System Demonstration and Acceptance." Refer to Item 3.3 below.
.4 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. This shall include as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to the information required for submittals, the O&M manual shall include printed, electronic, or on-line help documentation of the following:
.1 Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of contractors installing equipment and the control systems and service representatives of each.
.2 Operators Manual with procedures for operating the control systems, including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables. Either printed or electronic documentation (help files or training materials) are acceptable.
.3 One set of Programming Manuals with a description of the programming language (including syntax), statement descriptions (including algorithms and calculations used), point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor.
.4 Engineering, Installation, and Maintenance Manual(s) that explain how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventive maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
.5 A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language, including the set points, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies of the actual programs may be used for this purpose, if the control logic, set points, tuning parameters, and other objects can be viewed through the supplied programming tools. One set of magnetic/optical media containing files of the software and database also shall be provided.
.6 One set of magnetic/optical media containing files of all color graphic screens created for the project, if not included in the magnetic/optical media containing the software and database.
.7 A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
.8 Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third-party hardware provided, including computer equipment and sensors.
.9 Complete original issue diskettes for all software provided, including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 13
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.10 Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.
.11 Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components, including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and task descriptions.
.12 A complete list of all BACnet objects (soft copy) including their ID’s so that future expansion with other BACnet compliant vendors is possible.
.13 All information required for USGBC LEED Green Buildings Certification pre-evaluation including applications and equipment impact on individual attainment of points. Where a specific device may assist in qualification for LEED points indicate and summarize contribution.
1.14 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
.1 Identify each piece of equipment with nameplate identifying equipment and functions with letter and number designation.
.2 Nameplates shall be minimum size, 3" x 1" x 1/4" (75 x 25 x 3.2 mm) thick lamicoated plastic with black face and white center and ½" (6.4 mm) high engraved lettering. Nameplates shall be mechanically secured and listed in Operating and Maintenance Data Book. All nameplates shall be pop riveted.
1.15 WARRANTY
.1 Warrant all work as follows:
.1 Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of 12 months after final completion and Owner receives beneficial use of the system. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the owner. The contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24-hours during normal business hours.
.2 All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the owner has received beneficial use due to an early system start-up. If the work specified is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract, then each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.
.3 At the end of the final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Consultant, the Consultant shall issue a report indicating that the Control System's Operation has been spot checked and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of acceptance shall be the start of warranty.
.4 At the end of the warranty period, the contractor will upgrade the owner to the latest EMCS software available at no cost to the owner.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 14
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
2 Products
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All products used in this project installation shall be new and currently under manufacture and shall be the version currently being sold by the manufacturer for use in new installations. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the owner's representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
.1 All control products provided for this project shall comprise BACnet/IP at building network level and BACnet/MSTP at field level. Operator workstation communication shall be over IEEE 802.3 LAN/WAN and web services. All controllers at building, equipment and application, zone sensor levels shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet. Building level controllers shall have additional communication ports for LON and N2 bus integration.
.2 All controllers shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface device. This connection shall support memory downloads and other operations needed for commissioning and troubleshooting.
.3 Communication services over the internal network shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internal network architecture as follows:
.1 Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the network will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, control algorithms, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the internal network.
.2 All inputs, outputs, and other control parameters used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers shall be readable by any other controller on the internal network. All links required to execute the control strategies described in Section 15925 shall be programmed and tested by the contractor. An operator with appropriate password privileges shall be able to edit these links by either typing in a standard object address or using a simple point and click interface.
.3 The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily via the internal network. An operator change to the master time clock shall be automatically broadcast to all controllers on the internal network.
.4 The internal network shall have the following minimum capacity for future expansion:
.1 Each building controller on the network backbone shall have capacity for 100 control nodes on each field communication trunk. Do not exceed 200 control nodes on each building controller.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 15
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.2 The network backbone shall have capacity for 50 routers or building controller/routers.
.3 The system shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.
2.3 OPERATION CONTROL-MONITORING SYSTEM, TOOL AND DATA SERVER
.1 Furnish herewith specified system hardware, software, tools and user software. Also include turnkey application and data server as shown on the system drawings for long term data storage and archiving. There shall be no single point of failure. Failure of server shall not effect operator workstation or other systems. Any standard browser connected to the building level LAN shall be able to access all information in the system. The server shall reside on the same high-speed network as the building controllers.
.2 Communication among the building network control units providing web services and all field controller controllers the network shall use the BTL listed BACnet functions and protocol. Communication between network control units forming the network backbone shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as specified in Annex J of the ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004 BACnet Specification. Communication at field and sensor level shall be ASHRAE BACnet/MSTP. All the devices used shall be BTL listed.
.3 Hardware. Each operator workstation or data server shall consist of the following:
.1 Hardware Base. Furnish industry standard hardware that meets or exceeds the DDC System manufacturers recommended specifications and which can meet the response times required by paragraph 1.3 of this section. The hard disk shall be capable of storing all system software, a one year archive of trend data based upon the trend points in Section 15925, and a system database at least twice the size of the database required when the system is accepted. Large systems may use multiple computers to store the required data, provided all computers and network connections are supplied and configured by the Contractor.
.4 User Interface
.1 Dedicated Web Based User Interface
.1 Where indicated on plans the Controls Contractor shall provide and install a personal computer for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions, including scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the BMS Network Automation Engines to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.
.2 Dedicated User Interface Architecture – The architecture of the computer shall be implemented to conform to industry standards, so that it can accommodate applications provided by the BMS Contractor and by other third party applications suppliers, including but not limited to Microsoft Office Applications. Specifically it must be implemented to conform to the following interface standards.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 16
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface functions
.2 Microsoft Office Professional for creation, modification and maintenance of reports, sequences other necessary building management functions
.3 Microsoft Outlook or other e-mail program for supplemental alarm functionality and communication of system events, and reports
.4 Required network operating system for exchange of data and network functions such as printing of reports, trends and specific system summaries
.5 PC Hardware – The personal computer(s) shall be configured as follows:
.9 Hard Drive – 80 GB free hard drive space minimum
.10 Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW or network backup software provided by IT department
.11 CD ROM Drive – 32X performance
.12 Ports – (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2) USB ports
.13 Keyboard – 101 Keyboard and 2 Button Mouse
.14 CRT configuration – 1-2 CRTs as follows:
Each Display – 19” Flat Panel Monitor 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum, unit shall be Energy Star qualified. 16 bit or higher color resolution Display card with multiple monitor support
.15 LAN communications – Ethernet communications board; 3Comm or equal
.3 Operating System Software
.1 Windows XP Professional
.2 Where primary user interface is not provided via browser, provide complete operator workstation software package, including any hardware or software keys. Include the original installation disks
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 17
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
and licenses for all included software, device drivers, and peripherals.
.3 Provide software registration cards to the Owner for all included software.
.4 Reports printer:
.1 Printer shall be Energy Star qualified
.2 Printer Make – Hewlett Packard DeskJet
.3 Print Speed – 600 DPI Black, 300 DPI Color
.4 Buffer – 64 K Input Print Buffer
.5 Color Printing – Include Color Kit
.2 Distributed Web Based User Interface
.1 All features and functions of the dedicated user interface previously defined in this document shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or virtual private network (WAN/VPN) to the automation network and conforming to the following specifications.
.2 The software shall run on the Microsoft Internet Explorer (6.0 or higher) browser supporting the following functions:
.1 Configuration
.2 Commissioning
.3 Data Archiving
.4 Monitoring
.5 Commanding
.6 System Diagnostics
.3 Minimum hardware requirements:
.1 1 GB RAM
.2 2.0 GHz Clock Speed Pentium 4 Microprocessor
.3 100.0 GB Hard Drive.
.4 1 Keyboard with 83 keys (minimum).
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 18
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.5 SVGA 1024x768 resolution display with 64K colors and 16 bit color depth
.6 Mouse or other pointing device
.3 User Interface Application Components
.1 Operator Interface
.1 An integrated browser based client application shall be used as the user operator interface program.
.2 The System shall employ an event-driven rather than a device polling methodology to dynamically capture and present new data to the user.
.3 All Inputs, Outputs, Setpoints, and all other parameters as defined within Part 3, shown on the design drawings, or required as part of the system software, shall be displayed for operator viewing and modification from the operator interface software.
.4 The user interface software shall provide help menus and instructions for each operation and/or application.
.5 The system shall support customization of the UI configuration and a home page display for each operator.
.6 The system shall support user preferences in the following screen presentations:
Alarm, Trend, Display, Applications
.7 All controller software operating parameters shall be displayed for the operator to view/modify from the user interface. These include: setpoints, alarm limits, time delays, PID tuning constants, run-times, point statistics, schedules, and so forth.
.8 The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
.1 User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution
.2 Monitoring and reporting
.3 Alarm, non-normal, and return to normal condition annunciation
.4 Selective operator override and other control actions
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 19
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.5 Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting
.6 BMS internal performance supervision and diagnostics
.7 On-line access to user HELP menus
.8 On-line access to current BMS as-built records and documentation
.9 Means for the controlled re-programming, re-configuration of BMS operation and for the manipulation of BMS database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual BMS applications
.9 The system shall support a list of application programs configured by the users that are called up by the following means:
.1 The Tools Menu
.2 Hyperlinks within the graphics displays
.3 Key sequences
.10 The operation of the control system shall be independent of the user interface, which shall be used for operator communications only. Systems that rely on an operator workstation to provide supervisory control over controller execution of the sequences of operations or system communications shall not be acceptable.
.2 Navigation Trees
.1 The system will have the capability to display multiple navigation trees that will aid the operator in navigating throughout all systems and points connected. At minimum provide a tree that identifies all systems on the networks.
.2 Provide the ability for the operator to add custom trees. The operator will be able to define any logical grouping of systems or points and arrange them on the tree in any order. It shall be possible to nest groups within other groups. Provide at minimum 5 levels of nesting.
.3 The navigation trees shall be “dockable” to other displays in the user interface such as graphics. This means that the trees will appear as part of the display, but can be detached and then minimized to the Windows task bar or closed altogether. A simple keystroke will reattach the navigation to the primary display of the user interface.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 20
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.3 Alarms
.1 Alarms shall be routed directly from Network Automation Engines to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the user interface shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions:
.1 Log date and time of alarm occurrence.
.2 Generate a “Pop-Up” window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received.
.3 Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm.
.4 Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp.
.5 Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alphanumeric pager. This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems that use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are not acceptable.
.6 Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm.
.2 The BMS shall annunciate diagnostic alarms indicating system failures and non-normal operating conditions.
.3 The BMS shall allow a minimum of 4 categories of alarm sounds customizable through user defined wav.files.
.4 The BMS shall annunciate application alarms at minimum, as required by Part 3.
.4 Reports and Summaries
.1 Reports and Summaries shall be generated and directed to the user interface displays, with subsequent assignment to printers, or disk. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports:
All points in the BMS
All points in each BMS application
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 21
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
All points in a specific controller
All points in a user-defined group of points
All points currently in alarm
All points locked out
All BMS schedules
All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the like.
.2 Summaries and Reports shall be accessible via standard UI functions and not dependent upon custom programming or user defined HTML pages.
.3 Selection of a single menu item, tool bar item, or tool bar button shall print any displayed report or summary on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.
.4 The system shall allow for the creation of custom reports and queries via a standard web services XML interface and commercial off-the-shelf software such as Microsoft Access, Microsoft Excel, or Crystal Reports.
.5 Reports required for LEED Green Building Certification will be provided as part of this contract
.5 Schedules
.1 A graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of building operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be provided:
Weekly schedules
Exception Schedules
Monthly calendars
.2 Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific time use schedule.
.3 It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule including references to calendars
.4 Monthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 22
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the exception schedules.
.5 Changes to schedules made from the User Interface shall directly modify the Network Automation Engine schedule database.
.6 Schedules and Calendars shall comply with ASHRAE SP135/2003 BACnet Standard.
.7 Schedules shall be optimized for energy efficiency in conjunction with LEED Green Building certification strategy.
.8 Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall print any displayed schedule on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.
.6 Password
.1 Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to user interface control, display, and database manipulation capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.
.2 Each user shall have the following: a user name (accept 24 characters minimum), a password (accept 12 characters minimum), and access levels.
.3 The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will.
.4 When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual characters for display on the monitor.
.5 A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported individually or in any combination as follows:
Level 1 = View Data
Level 2 = Command
Level 3 = Operator Overrides
Level 4 = Database Modification
Level 5 = Database Configuration
Level 6 = All privileges, including Password Add/Modify
.6 A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 23
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.7 Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.
.8 Operators will be trained in LEED Green Building energy management and sustainability concepts prior to receiving access to Operator Override or Database Modification levels.
.9 The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms.
.7 Screen Manager
.1 The User Interface shall be provided with screen management capabilities that allow the user to activate, close, and simultaneously manipulate a minimum of 4 active display windows plus a network or user defined navigation tree.
.8 Dynamic Color Graphics
.1 The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User Interface. Browser or Workstation applications that rely only upon HTML pages shall not be acceptable.
.2 The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime function. The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics documents (graphic definition files) to be generated and executed. The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time data that is acquired, derived, or entered.
.3 Graphics runtime functions – A maximum of 16 graphic applications shall be able to execute at any one time on a user interface or workstation with 4 visible to the user. Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions:
All graphics shall be fully scalable
The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio.
Multiple fonts shall be supported.
Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 24
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate if the status of the object attribute.
.4 Operation from graphics – It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment by using drop-down windows accessible via the pointing device
.5 Graphic editing tool – A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of performing/defining all animations, and defining all runtime binding.
The graphic editing tool shall in general provide for the creation and positioning of point objects by dragging from tool bars or drop-downs and positioning where required.
In addition, the graphic editing tool shall be able to add additional content to any graphic by importing backgrounds in the SVG, BMP or JPG file formats.
.6 Aliasing – Many graphic displays representing part of a building and various building components are exact duplicates, with the exception that the various variables are bound to different field values. Consequently, it shall be possible to bind the value of a graphic display to aliases, as opposed to the physical field tags.
.9 Historical trending and data collection
.1 Each Automation Engine shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital inputs and outputs, as follows:
Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Three methods of collection shall be allowed:
Defined time interval
Upon a change of value
Each Automation Engine shall have the capability to store multiple samples for each physical point and software variable based upon available memory, including an individual sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with different collection parameters.
Trend data required for LEED Green Building certification will be configured in conjunction with applicable plans for energy reduction.
.2 Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the engine and uploaded to a dedicated trend database or exported in a
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 25
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
selectable data format via a provided data export utility. Uploads to a dedicated database shall occur based upon one of the following: user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers are full. Exports shall be as requested by the user or on a time scheduled basis.
.3 The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the collection of historical data. Data can be stored in either Microsoft Access or SQL database format.
.10 Trend data viewing and analysis
.1 Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points.
.2 It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name.
.3 The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to include multiple trends
.4 Displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style.
.5 Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom capability.
.6 Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of the data being displayed.
.7 Trend studies shall be capable of calculating and displaying calculated variables including highest value, lowest value and time based accumulation.
.8 The Display shall support the user’s ability to change colors, sample sizes, and types of markers.
.11 Database Management
.1 Where a separate SQL database is utilized for information storage the System shall provide a Database Manager that separates the database monitoring and managing functions by supporting two separate windows.
.2 Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication including the ability to access data for use outside of the Building Automation application.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 26
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.3 The database managing function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:
Backup
Purge
Restore
.4 The Database Manager shall support four tabs:
Statistics – shall display Database Server information and Trend, Alarm (Event), and Audit information on the Metasys Databases.
Maintenance – shall provide an easy method of purging records from the Metasys Server trend, alarm (event), and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup prior to purging, selecting the database, and allowing for the retention of a selected number of day’s data.
Backup – Shall provide the means to create a database backup file and select a storage location.
Restore – shall provide a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring the user to log into an Expert Mode in order to view the Restore screen.
.5 The Status Bar shall appear at the bottom of all Metasys Database Manager Tabs and shall provide information on the current database activity. The following icons shall be provided:
Ready
Purging Record from a database
Action Failed
Refreshing Statistics
Restoring database
Shrinking a database
Backing up a database
Resetting internet information Services
Starting the Metasys Device Manager
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 27
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Shutting down the Metasys Device Manager
Action successful
.6 The Database Manager monitoring functions shall be accessed through the Monitoring Settings window and shall continuously read database information once the user has logged in.
.7 The System shall provide user notification via taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.
.8 The Monitoring Settings window shall have the following sections:
General – Shall allow the user to set and review scan intervals and start times.
Email – Shall allow the user to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be delivered when a Warning or Alarm is generated.
Warning – shall allow the user to define the Warning limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message.
Alarm – shall allow the user to define the Alarm limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message.
Database login – Shall protect the system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a Read Access and a Write Access for each of the Trend, Alarm (Event) and Audit databases as well as an Expert Mode required to restore a database.
.9 The Monitoring Settings Taskbar shall provide the following informational icons:
Normal – Indicates by color and size that all databases are within their limits.
Warning - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Warning limit.
Alarm - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Alarm limit.
.10 The System shall provide user notification via Taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.
.12 Demand Limiting and Load Rolling
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 28
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 The System shall provide a Demand Limiting and Load Rolling program for the purpose of limiting peak energy usage and reducing overall energy consumption.
.2 The system shall be configured to support LEED Green Building certification plans.
.3 The System shall support both Sliding Window and Fixed Window methods of predicting demand.
.4 The System shall support three levels of sensitivity in the Sliding Window demand calculations for fine tuning the system.
Low Setting – Sheds loads later and over the shortest amount of time. Maximizes the time the equipment is on.
Medium Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Low Setting. Increases the time the equipment is on and decreases the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target over the Low Setting.
High Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Medium Setting. Minimizes the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target.
.5 The System shall have both a Shed Mode and a Monitor Only Mode of operation.
When the Shed Mode is engaged, the System shall actively control the Demand.
When the Monitor Mode is engaged, the System will simulate the shedding action but will not take any action.
.6 The Demand Limiting program shall monitor the energy consumption rate and compare it to a user defined Tariff Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined strategy.
.7 The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.
.8 The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the maximum allowed average power during the current interval.
.9 The System shall support a Maximum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall restore the load before the Maximum Shed time has expired.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 29
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.10 The System shall support a Minimum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall not restore the load sooner than the Minimum Shed Time has expired.
.11 The System shall support a Minimum Release Time for each load as determined by the user. The System shall not shed the load until it has been off for the Minimum Release time.
.12 The System shall support three user defined options if the meter goes unreliable.
Shedding – The currently shed loads will be released as their Maximum shed Times expire.
Maintain the Current Shed Rate – The System will use the Demand Limiting shed rate that was present when the meter went unreliable.
Use Unreliable Meter Shed Rate – the system will control to a user defined Unreliable Shed Rate target.
.13 The Load Rolling program shall sum the loads currently shed and compare it to a user defined Load Rolling Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined Load Priority.
.14 The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.
.15 The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the amount of power by which the demand must be reduced.
.16 The System shall provide the user with a Load Tab that displays all of the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling parameters for any selected load.
.17 The System shall provide the user with a Load Summary that displays all of the loads associated with the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling programs. Status Icons for each load shall indicate:
Load is Offline
Load is Disabled
Load is Shed
Load is Locked
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 30
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Load is in Comfort Override
.18 The Load Summary shall include a Load Summary Runtime view listing the following load conditions:
Load Priority
Shed Strategy
Load Rating
Present Value
Ineligibility Status
Active Timer
Time Remaining
Last Shed Time
.4 Portable Operator Terminal
.1 For systems that do not provide full access to systems configuration and definition via the Browser Based user interface the BMS Contractor shall provide a portable operator terminal for programming purposes. The terminal shall be configured as follows:
a. Personal Laptop Computer Manufacturer – Dell, Compaq or HP
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 31
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
l. Complete operator workstation software package, including any hardware or software.
m. Original printed manuals for all software and peripherals.
n. Original installation disks or CD for all software, device drivers, and peripherals
o. Software registration cards for all included software shall be provided to the Owner.
p. Carrying case
q. Spare battery.
r. External power supply/battery charger
.2 Proprietary Portable Terminal
.1 Manufacturers providing proprietary portable terminals shall submit technical data sheets for the terminal and all associated software and hardware.
.2 The proprietary terminal shall meet the same operator interface software requirements as specified above.
.3 Software
.1 Portable operator terminals shall support all controllers within the system on a direct-connect communications basis.
.2 When used to access First or Second Tier controllers, the portable operator terminal shall utilize the standard operator workstation software, as previously defined.
.3 When used to access Application Specific Controllers, the portable operator terminal shall utilize either the standard operator workstation software, as previously defined, or controller-specific utility software.
.5 Ready Access Portal User Interface
.1 BMS Contractor shall provide and install all computer hardware and software required for the purpose of configuration and consolidation of information and programs required for the delivery of a Task Focused, Web Based Portal to the EMCS. This Ready Access Portal shall provide a natural, complementary extension to the site management user interface previously described.
.2 Ready Access Portal Architecture – The architecture of the system shall
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 32
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
be implemented to conform to industry standards, so that it can accommodate the required applications provided by the EMCS Contractor as well as communicate information to and from the EMCS system Site Director.
.3 User Interface Application Components
.1 The ready access portal shall provide an intuitive user interface to key EMCS functions and tasks via web browser.
.2 Plug-ins or special software shall not be required for access to alarm, summary, schedule and trend data.
.3 The information shall be accessible on both personal computer and handheld device platforms as follows:
Personal computers – Internet Explorer Version 7.0 recommended
Handheld devices – Internet Explorer for Window Mobile Version 5.0 or 6.0 recommended. UI is optimized for devices with a 240 x 320 pixel screen size (QVGA). Other devices may display the UI but full functionality is not guaranteed.
.4 Operator Interface
.1 Password access shall be as described previously for management portal UI
.2 Once logged in, the System shall display a pre-selected screen tailored to the task requirements of the individual user.
.3 The User Interface shall utilize an intuitive navigation and display method designed for operators who access the system for casual information and control or on an infrequent basis. It shall feature three basic components.
Radio buttons for selection of the type of information to be displayed including Alerts, Summary, Schedules and Diagnostics
Navigation tree for selection of the specific data to be displayed on screen for the selected type. The navigation tree may be hidden and expanded by the operator to optimize the display of information
A display window that provides the selected information by type in a pre-configured tabular format
.4 The user interface software shall provide help menus and
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 33
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
instructions for each operation and/or application.
.5 The system shall provide support for up to 100 concurrent users from an unlimited universe individuals with defined password access to the system
.6 The system shall provide Secure Sockets Level (SSL) support. This allows the ready access portal to communicate across a network in a way designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, and message forgery. It provides endpoint authentication and communications privacy over the network using cryptography
.7 The system shall have the capability to display multiple navigation trees that correspond to the user views configured in the management portal UI.
.8 The alert summary of the remote access portal shall, at the minimum, provide the following information:
Alert (Alarm) type
Date and time of alert occurrence
Priority (color coded to level)
Item name.
Item value (if applicable)
Message
Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm
.9 A standard summary on the remote access portal shall, at the minimum, provide the following information:
Point type graphic icon
Item name
Item value
Item status
Access to the Change Value window (if applicable) for the purpose of setting, holding or releasing an item value
.10 The schedule detail summary of the remote access portal shall, at the minimum, provide the following information
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 34
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Scheduled occurrences including time and value
Scheduled overrides including start time, end time and value
A list of all scheduled items including name and attribute, value, status and priority
Access to the Add Temporary Override window for the purpose of adding a temporary override to the schedule
.11 The diagnostic (trend) summary of the remote access portal as viewed on a personal computing device shall provide the following information:
Item name
Item status
Trend name
Trend status
Full path name
Access to trend detail summary including trended value, time and date arranged in a user selectable format of 1 hour, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours
.5 System Tools
.1 System Configuration Tool (SCT)
.1 The Configuration Tool shall be a software package enabling a computer platform to be used as a stand-alone engineering configuration tool for a Network Automation or Control Unit.
.2 The configuration tool shall provide an archive database for the configuration and application data.
.3 The configuration tool shall have the same look-and-feel at the User Interface (UI) regardless of whether the configuration is being done online or offline.
.4 The configuration tool shall include the following features:
.1 Basic system navigation tree for connected networks
.2 Integration of Metasys N1, LonWorks, and BACnet enabled devices
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 35
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.3 Customized user navigation trees
.4 Point naming operating parameter setting
.5 Graphic diagram configuration
.6 Alarm and event message routing
.7 Graphical logic connector tool for custom programming
.8 Downloading, uploading, and archiving databases
.5 The configuration tool shall have the capability to automatically discover field devices on connected buses and networks. Automatic discovery shall be available for the following field devices:
.1 BACnet Devices
.2 LonWorks devices
.3 N2 Bus devices
.4 Metasys N1 networks
.6 The configuration tool shall be capable of programming the Field Equipment Controllers.
.1 The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the Field Equipment Controllers.
.2 The configuration tool shall allow the FECs to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications.
.3 The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be used for configuration.
.7 The configuration tool shall be capable of programming the field devices.
.1 The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the field devices.
.2 The configuration tool shall allow the field devices to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications.
.3 The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be used for configuration
.8 A wireless access point shall allow a wireless enabled portable PC to make a temporary Ethernet connection to the automation network.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 36
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 The wireless connection shall allow the PC to access configuration tool through the web browser using the User Interface (UI).
.2 The wireless use of configuration tool shall be the same as a wired connection in every respect.
.3 The wireless connection shall use the Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
.2 Wireless MS/TP Converter (BTCVT)
.1 The converter shall provide a temporary wireless connection between the SA or FC Bus and a wireless enabled portable PC.
.2 The converter shall support downloading and troubleshooting FEC and field devices from the PC over the wireless connection.
.3 The converter shall employ Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
.4 The converter shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor-Actuator (SA) or the Field Controller (FC) Bus.
.5 The converter shall operate over a minimum of thirty three (33) feet within a building.
.6 The converter shall have LED indicators to provide information regarding the following conditions:
Power - On/Off
Fault – Fault/No Fault
SA/FC Bus – Bus Activity/ No Bus Activity
Blue – Bluetooth Communication Established/ Bluetooth Communication Not Established
.7 The SWCVT shall comply with FCC Part 15.247 regulations for low-power unlicensed transmitters.
.3 Handheld VAV Balancing Sensor (ATV7003)
.1 The sensor shall be a light weight portable device of dimensions not more than 3.2 x 3.2 x 1.0 inches.
.2 The sensor shall be capable of displaying data and setting balancing parameters for VAV control applications.
.3 The sensor shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor-
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 37
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Actuator (SA) or the Field Controller (FC) Bus.
.4 The sensor shall be a menu driven device that shall modify itself automatically depending upon what type of application resides in the controller.
.5 The sensor shall contain a dial and two buttons to navigate through the menu and to set balancing parameters.
.6 The sensor shall provide an adjustable time-out parameter that will return the controller to normal operation if the balancing operation is aborted or abandoned.
.7 The sensor shall include the following
5 foot retractable cable
Laminated user guide
Nylon caring case
.4 The sensor shall be Underwriters Laboratory UL 916 listed and CSA certified C22.2 N. 205, CFR47.
2.4 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
.1 Furnish application software for building and energy management, as described in this document. All software applications shall reside and operate in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall be done through the operator workstation/browser interface or at other engineering workstations.
.2 System Security
.1 User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. The number of user names shall be unlimited.
.2 Passwords shall restrict the user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. The system supervisor shall also have the ability to vary the functions accessible to each user depending on the equipment or geographic location, and to restrict an operator to only viewing and/or editing certain areas or pieces of equipment.
.3 User Log On/Log Off attempts shall be recorded.
.4 The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off if there is a period of no activity following the last keystroke. The delay time between the last keystroke and automatic logoff shall be user-definable.
.3 Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Scheduling options shall include the following:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 38
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week for each piece of equipment. Each of these schedules shall include up to five start/stop pairs. (10 events)
.2 Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule has executed, it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week.
.3 Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 24 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.
.4 Part and Full Occupancy Schedules: Provide the capability for the operator to define part and full occupancy schedules for each time of day schedule for each piece of equipment. For example where specified the unit shall be able to be started and stopped at the EMCS with the outside air damper at a minimum setting for part occupied and a higher setting for full occupied.
.4 System Coordination. Provide a standard application for the proper coordination of equipment. This application shall provide the operator with a method of grouping together equipment based on function and location. This group may then be used for scheduling and other applications.
.5 Binary Alarms. Each binary input and binary value object shall be capable of generating an alarm based on an operator-specified state. Provide the capability to enable or disable this alarm. The system shall be delivered with alarms enabled as listed in the Sequence of Operations in Section 15925.
.6 Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall be capable of generating an alarm based on an operator-specified high and low alarm limit. . Provide the capability to enable or disable this alarm. The system shall be delivered with alarms enabled as listed in the Sequence of Operations in Section 15925.
.7 Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to configure the actions the system will take when an alarm is received.
.8 Remote Communication. The system shall have the ability to automatically contact an operator workstation or server when a critical alarm is received, using either a network connection or, if no network connection is available, a dial out connection over a modem.
.9 Demand Limiting.
.1 The system shall be capable of monitoring power consumption from signals generated by a pulse generator (provided by others) mounted at the building power meter or from a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building feeder lines.
.2 If the power consumption exceeds operator definable levels, the system shall be capable of automatically adjusting setpoints, de-energizing low priority equipment,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 39
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
and taking other pre-programmed actions as described in the Sequence of Controls to reduce demand. As the demand drops below the operator defined levels, action will be taken to restore loads in a predetermined manner.
.3 The system will be set up with three (3) stages of demand limiting that are manually activated by the system operator. Activation will be through a graphical button on the demand limiting screen. Manual limiting is to be used when there is no interface to electrical metering to allow the operator to manually load shed the building to conserve energy.
.10 Maintenance Management. The system shall be able to monitor equipment status and generate maintenance alarms based upon user-designated run-time, starts, or performance limits. The system shall be configured to deliver maintenance alarms based upon the Sequences of Operation in Section 15925.
.11 Sequencing. Provide application software based upon the sequences of operation specified to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and pumps.
.12 PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-windup shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable.
.13 Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be user-selectable.
.14 Energy Calculations.
.1 Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g., kW) or flow rates (e.g., L/s [gpm]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.
.2 Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding window average (e.g., rolling average). The algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be user specified (e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes).
.3 Provide an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window average. A digital input signal will define the start of the window period (e.g., signal from utility meter) to synchronize the fixed-window average with that used by the utility.
.4 Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.
.15 On/Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point. The algorithm shall be direct-acting or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.
.16 Run-Time Totalization. Provide software that can totalize run-times for any binary input or object. A high runtime alarm shall be assigned, if required, by the operator. The system shall be delivered with run time totalization and alarms configured as specified in the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 40
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Sequence of Operations in Section 15925.
2.5 CRITICAL ALARM DIAL OUT
.1 When a critical alarm is generated by the EMCS the Energy Management System shall initiate an automatic dial out to annunciate the alarm. Alarms designated as critical shall be provided by the Owner during the shop drawing stage of this project.
2.6 OPERATORS WORKSTATION INTEL PENTIUM IV 2.8 GHZ PROCESSOR OR BETTER
.1 The Contractor shall review and confirm prior to installation that the hardware and software being provided adheres to the most current standards set forth by the Owner’s IT department.
.2 Provide hardware and software for the operator workstation, application and data server, and portable workstation for programming and maintenance as applicable. Meet and exceed minimum specifications while insuring latest standards are adhered to at the time of delivery. all the specified
.3 The main workstation shall be provided in the main mechanical room in the basement. The owner would provide additional workstation computers for access from Internet or LAN; this contractor should provide all necessary finished software and communication at no additional cost to owner.
.4 A telephone/internet line will be provided by the Owner to the location where the main control panel is located for this facility.
2.7 BUILDING CONTROLLERS
.1 Provide Building Network Control (BNC) as required to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 Article on "System Performance." Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements:
.1 Network Automation and Control Unit)
.1 The Network Automation Unit shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory controller. The BNC shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Automation Engines.
.2 Automation network – The BNC shall reside on the automation network and shall support a subnet of system controllers.
.3 User Interface – Each BNC shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 41
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the BNC. Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.
.2 The BNC shall support up a minimum of four (4) concurrent users.
.3 The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data through one BNC.
.4 Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up shall also have total system access through one BNC.
.5 Systems that require the user to address more than one BNC to access all system information are not acceptable.
.6 The BNC shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The graphics capability shall be imbedded in the BNC.
.7 Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.
.8 The web based UI shall support the following functions using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer:
Configuration
Commissioning
Data Archiving
Monitoring
Commanding
System Diagnostics
.9 Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable.
.10 The BNC shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems.
.4 Processor – The BNC shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The BNC shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. BNC size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 42
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
requirements of this Specification.
.5 Memory – Each BNC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level devices.
.6 Hardware Real Time Clock – The BNC shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-time clock.
.7 The BNC shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:
.4 FC Bus A – Normal Communications/No Field Communications
.5 FC Bus B – Normal Communications/No Field Communications
.6 Peer Communication – Data Traffic between BNC Devices
.7 Run – BNC Running/BNC in Startup/BNC Shutting Down/Software Not Running
.8 Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery Not Installed
.9 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC
.10 Fault – General Fault
.11 Modem RX – BNC Modem Receiving Data
.12 Modem TX – BNC Modem Transmitting Data
.8 Communications Ports – The BNC shall provide the following ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable operator’s terminals.
.1 Two (2) USB port
.2 Two (2) URS-232 serial data communication port
.3 Two (2) RS-485 port
.4 One (1) Ethernet port
.9 Diagnostics – The BNC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 43
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network Automation Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.
.10 Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The BNC shall continue to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.
.1 During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash memory.
.2 Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence.
.11 Certification – The BNC shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
.12 Controller network – The BNC shall support the following communication protocols on the controller network:
.1 The BNC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
.2 he BNC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
.3 The BNC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
.4 A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the BNC.
.5 The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
.6 The BNC shall support a minimum of 100 control devices.
.7 The BNC shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.
.8 All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified.
.9 The BNC shall support a minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control devices.
.10 The BNC shall support the Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 44
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.11 The BNC shall support a minimum of 100 N2 control devices.
.12 The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.
.13 The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the BNC is the master.
.14 The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for polling frequency.
.15 The Bus shall be optically isolated from the BNC.
.16 The Bus shall support the Metasys Integrator System.
2.8 FIELD EQUIPMENT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
.1 General. Provide Advanced Application Controllers (AAC) and Application Specific Controllers (ASC) as required to achieve the performance specified in item 1.3 "System Architecture." Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements.
.1 The Field Equipment Controller shall be a fully user-programmable, digital controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol.
.1 The FEC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
.1 The FEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
.2 The FEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
.3 A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the FEC.
.4 The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
.2 The FEC shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational sequences. Suppliers using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals.
.3 Controllers shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only shall not be acceptable.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 45
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.4 The FEC shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.5 The FEC shall include a removable base to allow pre-wiring without the controller.
.6 The FEC shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:
.1 Power On
.2 Power Off
.3 Download or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operation
.4 No Faults
.5 Device Fault
.6 Field Controller Bus - Normal Data Transmission
.7 Field Controller Bus - No Data Transmission
.8 Field Controller Bus - No Communication
.9 Sensor-Actuator Bus - Normal Data Transmission
.10 Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Data Transmission
.11 Sensor-Actuator Bus - No Communication
.12 The FEC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points.
.7 The FEC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:
.1 Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:
Analog Input, Voltage Mode
Analog Input, Current Mode
Analog Input, Resistive Mode
Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode
Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode
Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 46
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
following:
Dry Contact Maintained Mode
Pulse Counter Mode
Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following
Analog Output, Voltage Mode
Analog Output, current Mode
Binary Outputs - shall output the following:
24 VAC Triac
Configurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:
Analog Output, Voltage Mode
Binary Output Mode
.8 The FEC shall have the ability to reside on a Field Controller Bus (FC bus).
.1 The FC Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
.2 The FC Bus shall support communications between the FECs and the BNC.
.3 The FC Bus shall also support Input/Output Module (IOM) communications with the FEC and with the BNC.
.4 The FC Bus shall support a minimum of 100 IOMs and FECs in any combination.
.5 The FC Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 15,000 Ft. between the FEC and the furthest connected device.
.9 The FEC shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and actuators over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus).
.1 The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard Protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
.2 The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices per trunk.
.3 The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 47
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
between the FEC and the furthest connected device.
.10 The FEC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the FC Bus or the SA Bus.
.11 The FEC shall support, but not be limited to, the following:
.1 Hot water, chilled water/central plant applications
.2 Built-up air handling units for special applications
.3 Terminal units
.4 Special programs as required for systems control
.12 The FEC shall support a Local Controller Display (DIS1710) either as an integral part of the FEC or as a remote device communicating over the SA Bus.
.1 The Display shall use a BACnet Standard SSPC-135, clause 9 Master-Slave/Token-Passing protocol.
.2 The Display shall allow the user to view monitored points without logging into the system.
.3 The Display shall allow the user to view and change setpoints, modes of operation, and parameters.
.4 The Display shall provide password protection with user adjustable password timeout.
.5 The Display shall be menu driven with separate paths for:
.6 Input/Output
.7 Parameter/Setpoint
.8 Overrides
.9 The Display shall use easy-to-read English text messages.
.10 The Display shall allow the user to select the points to be shown and in what order.
.11 The Display shall support a back lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable contrast and brightens and automatic backlight brightening during user interaction.
.12 The display shall be a minimum of 4 lines and a minimum of 20
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 48
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
characters per line
.13 The Display shall have a keypad with no more than 6 keys.
.14 The Display shall be panel mountable.
2.9 APPLICATION SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT, ZONE, VAV CONTROLLERS-SENSORS
.1 The VAV Modular Assembly shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressure-independent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct applications.
.2 The VMA shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
.1 The VMA shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
.2 A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the VMA.
.3 The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
.3 The VAV Modular Assembly shall communicate over the FC Bus using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
.4 The VAV Modular Assembly shall have internal electrical isolation for AC power, DC inputs, and MS/TP communications. An externally mounted isolation transformer shall not be acceptable.
.5 The VAV Modular Assembly shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure transducer and damper actuator. All components shall be connected and mounted as a single assembly that can be removed as one piece.
.6 The VAV Modular Assembly shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.7 The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of stroking 90 degrees in 30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed commissioning and troubleshooting tasks.
.8 The controller shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral dead-ended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance-free and shall not require air filters.
.9 Each controller shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects.
.10 The controller shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space temperature control loops.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 49
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.11 Each controller shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve control and controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning reduces commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-tuning loops to compensate for seasonal or other load changes.
.12 The controller shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA configuration files, both locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller parameters.
.13 Control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA non-volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent operation in the event of communication failure.
.14 The controller firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus to minimize costs of feature enhancements.
.15 The controller shall provide fail-soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by automatically reverting to a pressure-dependent control mode.
.16 The controller shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic recalculation of box flow pickup gain (“K” factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to the box minimum and maximum airflow setpoints.
.17 Controller performance shall be self-documenting via on-board diagnostics. These diagnostics shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each control loop’s sample interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and document system performance. The VMA shall calculate exponentially weighted moving averages (EWMA) for each of the following. These metrics shall be available to the end user for efficient management of the VAV terminals.
Absolute temperature loop error
Signed temperature loop error
Absolute airflow loop error
Signed airflow loop error
Average damper actuator duty cycle
.18 The controller shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones. The error conditions shall consist of:
Unreliable space temperature sensor
Unreliable differential pressure sensor
Starved box
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 50
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Actuator stall
Insufficient cooling
Insufficient heating
The controller shall provide a flow test function to view damper position vs. flow in a graphical format. The information would alert the user to check damper position. The VMA would also provide a method to calculate actuator duty cycle as an indicator of damper actuator runtime.
.19 The controller shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow Based on the percent of outdoor air in the primary air stream.
.20 The controller shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the airflow in the heating sequence.
.21 Inputs:
.1 Analog inputs with user defined ranges shall monitor the following analog signals, without the addition of equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet:
0-10 VDC Sensors
1000ohm RTDs
NTC Thermistors
.2 Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate false signals resulting from input “bouncing.”
.3 For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and output circuits.
.4 Provide side loop application for humidity control.
.22 Outputs
.1 Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
0-10 VDC
.2 Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC.
.3 For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power,
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 51
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
communications, and other output circuits.
.23 Application Configuration
.1 The VAV Modular Assembly shall be configured with a software tool that provides a simple Question/Answer format for developing applications and downloading.
.24 Sensor Support
.1 The VAV Modular Assembly shall communicate over the Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) with a Network Sensor.
.2 The VMA shall support an LCD display room sensor.
.3 The VMA shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog input requirements.
.4 The VMA shall support humidity sensors defined by the AI side loop.
.25 Network Sensors (NS-XXX-700X)
.1 The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as required by the systems sequence of operations:
.1 Zone Temperature
.2 Zone Humidity
.3 Zone Setpoint
.4 Discharge Air Temperature
.2 The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
.3 The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
.1 The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors (B-SS).
.2 A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NS.
.3 The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.
.4 The Network Zone Sensors shall include the following items:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 52
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity and Setpoint
.2 An LED to indicate the status of the Override feature
.3 A button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit and Celsius
.4 A button to initiate a timed override command
.5 Available in either surface mount or wall mount
.6 Available with either screw terminals or phone jack
.5 The Network Discharge Air Sensors shall include the following:
.1 4 inch or 8 inch duct insertion probe
.2 10 foot pigtail lead
.3 Dip Switches for programmable address selection
.4 Ability to provide an averaging temperature from multiple locations
.5 Ability to provide a selectable temperature from multiple locations
.26 Many-To-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensor System (WRS-XTX-0000)
.1 The Many-To-One System Receiver (WRS Receiver) shall receive wireless Radio Frequency (RF) signals containing temperature data from multiple Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (WRS Sensors).
.1 The WRS Receiver shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The WRS Receiver shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The WRS Receiver shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The WRS Receiver shall be FCC compliant to CFR Part 15 subpart B Class A.
.5 The WRS Receiver shall operate as a bidirectional transceiver with the sensors to confirm and synchronize data transmission.
.6 The WRS Receiver shall be capable of communication with WRS Sensors up to a distance of 200 Feet.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 53
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.7 The WRS Receiver shall be assembled in a plenum rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.8 The WRS Receiver shall have LED indicators to provide information regarding the following conditions:
Power On/Off
Ethernet – Receiver Activity/No Activity
Wireless Normal Mode – Transmission from sensors/No Transmission
Wireless Rapid Transmit Mode – No transmission/ weak signal/Adequate signal/Excellent signal
Ethernet Connection – No connection/10Mbps connection/100Mbps connection
Network Activity – No Network Activity/Half-Duplex Communication/Full-Duplex Communication
.2 The WRS Sensors shall sense and report room temperatures to the WRS Receiver.
.1 The WRS Sensors shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The WRS Sensors shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The WRS Sensors shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The WRS sensors shall be FCC compliant to CFR Pt. 15 subpart B Class A.
.5 The WRS sensors shall be available with:
Warmer/Cooler Set Point Adjustment
No Set Point Adjustment
Set Point Adjustment Scale – 55 to 85º F.
.6 The WRS sensors shall be assembled in NEMA 1 plastic housings.
.27 ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System
.1 The ZFR1800 Series System shall employ ZigBee technology to create a
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 54
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
wireless mesh network to provide wireless connectivity for Metasys BACnet devices at multiple system levels. This includes communications from FEC and VMA field controllers to sensors and from engines to these field controllers. Wireless devices shall co-exist on the same network with hardwired devices. Hardwired controllers shall be capable of retrofit to wireless devices with no special software.
.2 The ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator shall provide a wireless interface between supported field controllers and an BNC35/45/55 or NCE25 supervisory controller via the BACnet MS/TP field bus. Each wireless mesh network shall be provided with a ZFR1810 Coordinator for initiation and formation of the network
.1 The ZFR Coordinator shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The ZFR Coordinator shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The ZFR Coordinator shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The ZFR Coordinator shall be FCC compliant to CFR Part 15 subpart B Class A.
.5 The ZFR Coordinator shall operate as a bidirectional transceiver with the sensors and routers to confirm and synchronize data transmission.
.6 The ZFR Coordinator shall be capable of communication with sensors and routers up to a maximum distance of 250 Feet (line of sight).
.7 The ZFR Coordinator shall be assembled in a plenum rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.8 The ZFR Coordinator shall have LED indicators to provide diagnostic information required for efficient operation and commissioning.
.28 The ZFR1811Wireless Field Bus Router shall be used with any model Field Equipment Controller (FEC) or VMA1600 series VAV Modular Assembly to provide a wireless interface to supervisory engines, via the ZFR1810 Coordinator, and associated WRZ Wireless Mesh Room Temperature Sensors. .
.1 The ZFR1811 Router shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The ZFR1811 Router shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The ZFR1811 Router shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 55
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The ZFR1811 Router shall be FCC compliant to CFR Part 15 subpart B Class A.
.5 The ZFR1811 Router shall operate as a bidirectional transceiver with other mesh network devices to ensure network integrity.
.6 The ZFR1811 Router shall be capable of communication with other mesh network devices at a maximum distance of 250 feet (line of sight).
.7 The ZFR1811 Router shall be assembled in a plenum rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.8 The ZFR1811 Router shall provide LED indication for use in commissioning and troubleshooting.
.29 The WRZ-TT Series Wireless Room Temperature Sensors shall sense and transmit room temperatures, room set point, room occupancy, and notification of low battery condition to an associated ZFR1811 Router.
.1 The WRZ Sensors shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The WRZ Sensors shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The WRZ Sensors shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The WRZ sensors shall operate on power provided by two standard, recyclable, off-the-shelf AA batteries using alkaline technology.
.5 The WRZ sensors shall be FCC compliant to CFR Pt. 15 subpart B Class A.
.6 The WRZ sensors shall be available with
Warmer/Cooler Set Point Adjustment
No Set Point Adjustment
Set Point Adjustment Scale – 55 to 85º F.
.7 The WRZ sensors shall be assembled in NEMA 1 plastic housings.
.30 One-to-One Wireless Room Temperature Sensor System (WRZ)
.1 The One-To-One Wireless Receiver (WRS Receiver) shall receive wireless Radio Frequency (RF) signals containing temperature data from multiple Wireless Room Temperature Sensors (WRZ Sensors) and
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 56
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
communicate this information to either FEC or VMA controllers via the Sensor/Actuator (SA) Bus.
.1 The WRZ Receiver shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.2 The WRZ Receiver shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.3 The WRZ Receiver shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.4 The WRZ Receiver shall be FCC compliant to CFR Part 15 subpart B Class A.
.5 The WRZ Receiver shall operate as a bidirectional transceiver with the sensors to confirm and synchronize data transmission.
.6 The WRZ Receiver shall be capable of communication with from one to five WRZ Sensors up to a distance of 200 Feet.
.7 The WRZ Receiver shall be assembled in a plenum rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.
.8 The WRZ Receiver shall have LED indicators to provide information regarding the following conditions:
Power
SA Bus – Receiver Activity/No Activity
Wireless RF – Transmission from sensors/No Transmission
Wireless Rapid Transmit Mode – No transmission/ weak signal/Adequate signal/Excellent signal
.2 The WRZ Sensors shall sense and report room temperatures to the WRZ Receiver.
.3 The WRZ Sensors shall use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.
.4 The WRZ Sensors shall operate on the 2.4 GHZ ISM Band.
.5 The WRZ Sensors shall meet the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.
.6 The WRZ sensors shall be FCC compliant to CFR Part 15 subpart B Class A.
.7 The WRZ sensors shall be available with
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 57
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
Warmer/Cooler Set Point Adjustment
No Set Point Adjustment
Set Point Adjustment Scale – 55 to 85º F.
.8 The WRZ sensors shall be assembled in NEMA 1 plastic housings.
2.10 SMART ACTUATORS
.1 General: Provide Smart Actuators (SA) as required to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 Article on "System Performance." Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements.
.1 Each SA shall be capable of limited stand-alone operation and shall provide default control functions if network communications are lost.
.2 Each SA will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control its controlled device(s).
.3 The controller shall comply with all required aspects of the BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA) device profile as outlined in Annex L of the current ASHRAE/ANSI BACnet Standard.
.2 Communication.
.1 The controller shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. Each network of controllers shall be connected to one building controller.
.2 Each controller shall have a connection for a laptop computer or a portable operator's tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature sensor port where applicable.
.3 Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
.1 Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).
.2 Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).
.4 Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
.5 Memory. The smart actuator controller shall use nonvolatile memory to maintain all BIOS and application programming (if any) in the event of a power loss. Dynamic control parameters (setpoint, commanded position, etc.) shall be automatically downloaded following a power loss.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 58
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.6 Immunity to power and noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
2.11 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
.1 Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through building controllers, advanced application controllers, application specific controllers, or smart actuators
.2 All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, to another point, or to ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller.
.3 Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.
.4 Pulse accumulation input objects. This type of object shall conform to all the requirements of binary input objects and also accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.
.5 Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals (thermistor or RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with - and field configurable to - commonly available sensing devices.
.6 Binary outputs shall provide for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on building controllers shall have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.
.7 Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on building controllers shall have status lights and a two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4% of range per year.
.8 Tri-State Outputs. Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs) for control of three point floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three-point floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, zone dampers, radiation, etc.).
.9 Input/Output points may be of a universal type, i.e., controller input or output may be designated (in software) as either a binary or analog type point with appropriate properties. Application specific controllers are exempted from this requirement.
.10 System Object Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/ output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 59
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions software revisions in order to expand the System.
2.12 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
.1 Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.
.1 DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand a 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.
.1 Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.
.2 Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA approved.
.2 Power line filtering.
.1 Transient voltage and surge suppression shall be provided at all workstations and controllers either internally or as an external component to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
.1 RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3 V
.2 Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact
.3 Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500 V signal, 1 kV power
.4 Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max)
.5 Isolation shall be provided at all of the main panel's AC input terminals to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
.1 IEEE Standard 587-1980
.2 UL 864 Supply Line Transients
.3 Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
2.13 CONTROL PANELS
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 60
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.1 Provide control panels as required for the Energy Management Control System.
.2 All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed construction with (hinged door) key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels.
.3 All outdoor panels to be NEMA 4X construction.
.4 Interconnections between internal and face mounted devices shall be pre-wired with colour coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/ interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.
.5 Provide ON/OFF power switch with over current protection for control power sources to each local panel.
.6 Panels to be labelled in accordance with section 3.13.
.7 Provide 120 VAC outlet within the cabinet.
2.14 THERMOSTATS
.1 LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS
.1 Line voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated, open contact type, or bellows- actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listed for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C to 30°C (55°F to 85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
.2 Provide base and contacts rated for the load being switched.
.3 Standard of Acceptance: White Rodgers, Honeywell, Viconics, Johnson Controls, Siemens
.2 LOW LIMIT AIRSIDE THERMOSTATS
.1 Low-limit thermostats shall be UL listed and CSA approved, vapour pressure type, with an element of 6 m (20 ft) minimum length.
.2 Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any 30 cm (1 ft) section.
.3 Low limit thermostat shall be provided on all air handling units with water and glycol coils directly connected to outside air. Provide one (1) thermostat for every 5 m2 (54 ft2) of duct area.
.4 Low limit thermostats shall be hardwired to shut down the supply fan, open the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 61
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
heating valve 100% and close all outside air dampers. Only hardwired interlocks will be accepted to protect the unit in both hand and auto operation.
.5 The low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
.6 Device shall have adjustable setpoint.
.7 Thermostat to be set to trip at 2° C (35° F).
.8 Standard of Acceptance: Siemens, Johnson Controls
.3 HIGH LIMIT AIRSIDE THERMOSTATS
.1 High limit thermostats shall be UL listed, liquid filled, rigid bulb type.
.2 High temperature limits shall be provided as indicated in the Sequence of Operation in Section 15925.
.3 High limit shall be hardwired to shut down the associated fan.
.4 Device shall be manual reset only.
.5 Device shall have adjustable setpoint. Thermostat to be set to trip at 55° C (131° F).
.6 Standard of Acceptance: Siemens, Johnson Controls, Automated Logic
2.15 START/STOP MOTOR CONTROL RELAYS
.1 Relays shall be field interchangeable to either momentary or maintained latching switching action as required by the application.
.2 Relays shall be plug in interchangeable, mounted on a circuit board with field wiring connecting to screw terminals or a mass termination assembly.
.3 Contact ratings shall be 10 amperes at 220V AC.
2.16 CONTROL VALVES
.1 Control valves for the chilled water, glycol and hot water systems shall be as follows:
.2 General
.1 All characteristics of control valves shall be suitable for the required operation. Operators are to be 24 VAC, receiving 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA proportional control signals.
.2 Control valves to be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but shall not exceed 5 psi (34.5 kPa).
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 62
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.3 Provide 2 way or 3 way valves as indicated on the drawings, sequence of operation and schematics.
.3 Service
Service Type Spring Return
Reheat Coils (non-fume hood) Full Port Ball Valves No
.4 Default Setup
Type Signal to Close Fail Position 2 way no spring return 2 Volts or 4 mA Fail in last position on loss of power
2 way spring return 2 Volts or 4 mA Fail open for heating applications and fail closed for cooling applications.
.5 Globe Style
.1 Valve Body
.1 Valves ½" to 2" (12 mm to 50 mm) shall be bronze body, NPT screw type, and shall be rated for ANSI Class 250 working pressure. The operating temperature range shall be 20 F to 250 F (-7 C to 120 C).
.2 Valves 2 ½" and larger shall be cast iron body, flanged type, and shall be rated for ANSI Class 125 working pressure. The operating temperature range shall be 32 F to 250 F (-7 C to 120 C).
.3 Seats shall be single seat, metal to metal.
.4 Modulating butterfly valves to comply with the requirements for high performance butterfly valves as described in Section 15702 of the specification.
.5 Providing combined butterfly valves rather than a 3-way control valves is acceptable.
.6 Flow type for two way control valves shall be equal percentage. Flow type for three way control valves or combined butterfly valves shall be linear.
.7 All valves shall have stainless steel stems to ASTM A582 Type 303 and EPDM O ring packing.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 63
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.8 Manufacturer shall provide an unconditional two year warranty from the date of installation.
.9 Close off rating shall be class IV (0.1% of CV).
.10 Maximum differential pressure for Modulating Service shall be as follows: Differential Pressure
Type
Up to 25 psi (173 kPa)
Bronze
Up to 50 psi (345 kPa)
Stainless Steel
.11 Minimum close off pressures shall be as follows: Size
Close Off Pressure psi (kPa)
½" (12 mm)
250 (1724)
3/4" (20 mm)
186 (1282)
1" (25 mm)
121 (834)
1-1/4" (32 mm)
75 (517)
1 ½" (40 mm)
48 (331)
2" (50 mm)
30 (207)
2 ½" (65 mm)
97 (668)
3" (75 mm)
63 (434)
4" (100 mm)
39 (268)
5" (125 mm)
25 (172)
6" (150 mm)
17 (117)
.12 Standard of Acceptance: Belimo, Johnson Controls, Automated Logic, Honeywell, Siemens.
.2 Valve Actuator - Globe Style
.1 The actuator shall be UL listed.
.2 The actuator shall be maintenance free with reversible motor complete with visual indication of valve position and manual adjustment in the power off position.
.3 Actuators shall be direct coupled to the valve.
.4 Actuators shall be installed in accordance with Valve Manufacturers specifications.
.5 The valve actuator shall be capable of providing the minimum torque required for proper valve close off for the required application.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 64
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.6 The actuator shall be proportional. All proportional valves shall be positive positioning, and respond to a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal with a load resistor. Proportional units shall have a position feedback signal corresponding to the actual valve position which can be wired back to the control system.
.7 When power is applied to the actuator the actuator shall initialize. This initialization shall determine the stroke length and enable the actuator to set the minimum and maximum limits of the supplied control signal, thereby utilizing the entire control signal range. Feedback, running time and other parameters shall be automatically adjusted to the effective stroke.
.8 Motor stall protection shall be provided.
.9 Valve actuator shall have an unconditional two year warranty.
.10 Standard of Acceptance: Belimo, Johnson Controls, Honeywell, Automated Logic, Siemens
.6 Full Port Ball Valves ½" to 2" (12 mm to 50 mm)
.1 Valve Body
.1 Forged brass body with nickel plating, NPT screw type. The operating temperature shall be 0 to 212 F (-18 C to 100 C).
.2 The valves shall have an ISO type 4 bolt flange for mounting actuator in any orientation parallel or perpendicular to the pipe. A non metallic thermal isolation adapter shall separate flange from actuator with high temperature materials rated for continual use at greater than the application temperature. Valve assemblies without thermal isolation as described above are not acceptable.
.3 The isolation adaptor shall also provide stable direct coupled mechanical connection between the valve body and actuator and prevent lateral or rotational forces from affecting the stem and its packing O rings.
.4 All control ball valves shall be furnished with stainless steel ball and stem and fiberglass reinforced Teflon seats and seals. The valves shall have a blow out proof stem design. Each valve shall be tested by the Valve Manufacturer.
.5 Two way valves shall be equal percentage. All control ball valves shall have a flow characterized disc in the inlet of the valve to provide this equal percentage flow response. The minimum CV of the valves shall be 2.1. This is to ensure that the characterizing disc is a V shape rather than pin holes.
.6 Three way valves shall be mixing valves. The A port shall be equal
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 65
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
percentage, B port shall have a modified linear bypass which shall yield 70% of the flow of the A port to give constant AB flow. The minimum CV of the valves shall 2.1. This is to ensure that the characterizing disc is a V shape rather than pin holes.
.7 Characterized disc shall be held securely by a keyed ring.
.8 The stem packing shall consist of two O rings designed for on/off service or modulating service and requiring no maintenance.
.9 Valve pressure rating shall be 600 psi (½" to 1-1/4") and 400 psi (1 ½" to 2")
.10 Close off pressure shall be 200 psi.
.11 Manufacturer shall provide a 2-year unconditional warranty from the date of installation.
.12 Standard of Acceptance: Belimo or Control Manufacturers ball valve provided that they have a ball valve with characterized disc.
.2 Valve Actuator - Ball Valve
.1 The actuator shall be UL listed under standard 873 and CSA Class 4813.02.
.2 Actuators shall be direct coupled to the valve with a single screw.
.3 Actuators shall be applied according to the manufacturers specifications.
.4 The valve actuator shall be capable of providing the minimum torque required for proper valve close off for the required application.
.5 Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry or microprocessor overload protection incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator.
.6 The actuator shall be proportional. All proportional valves shall be positive positioning, and respond to a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal with a load resistor. Proportional units shall have a position feedback signal corresponding to the actual valve position which can be wired back to the control system.
.7 All control valves shall have a visual position indicator and an attached 3 foot cable for easy installation to a junction box.
.8 Manufacturer shall provide an unconditional two year warranty from the date of installation.
.9 Standard of Acceptance: Belimo or Control Manufactures Control valve
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 66
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
provided they have a valve with a characterization disc.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Installation shall include computer programming, drawings, supervision, adjusting, validating and checkout, cable, and field wiring and conduit necessary for complete operational system including generation of color graphics.
.2 Supply and install all low or high voltage wiring from electrical panels/outlets to central hardware and remote field processing units and all other equipment (provided or supplied only by controls contractor) requiring power. .
.3 Supply and install all wiring necessary for system operation including tie-ins from system control relays into motor starting circuits. Wiring and conduit shall be installed in neat and workmanlike manner, concealed where possible, and meet standards of Division 16.
.4 Supply and install sash sensors, control equipment for laboratory airflow control system, operator display panels on fume hoods and all other accessories for laboratory ventilation system.
.5 Sensors which are shown wall mounted shall have wiring concealed in wall construction.
.6 Sensors with manual adjustment shall be mounted 4 ft (1200 mm) from floor to center unless shown otherwise.
.7 Duct mounted devices shall be mounted on panels with bases plumb and level. Duct panels shall be dampened to eliminate detrimental vibration.
.8 Operators shall be mounted on shop fabricated brackets built to transmit torque or forces to ductwork panels or supports which can absorb these forces without distortion or fatigue.
.9 Local control panels shall be mounted in accessible convenient wall locations as shown on the drawings.
.10 Where sensors are specified to be in outside air, they shall be installed so as not to be affected by exhaust air or reverse warm air flow through air supply units.
.11 Outside air sensors shall be installed in the locations shown on the drawings.
.12 Safety control loops such as low temperature detectors shall be hard wired into the associated system magnetic starter. The primary function shall not be performed by software in this case.
.13 Cooperate with the air balance technicians during balancing of the system.
.14 Where electrical power is required, Control Contractor shall obtain power from nearest panel and provide control transformer, wiring and conduit to complete installation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 67
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.15 Provide startup service for the laboratory airflow control system. Startup shall include:-
.1 Determine when the HVAC equipment and physical space is ready for operational testing.
.2 Set up fume hood face velocity controls and verify face velocity and air flow measurement accuracy.
.3 Verify VAV room supply system performance.
.4 Verify VAV room exhaust system performance.
.5 Verify room airflow tracking performance.
.6 All steps of system startup shall be formally recorded when performed and provided to the owner as part of the as built documentation.
3.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings for review prior to installation and in accordance with Section 15010.
3.3 TRAINING
.1 Provide training for a designated staff of owner's representatives. Training shall be provided via self-paced training (Web-based, or Computer-Based Training), classroom training, or a combination of training methods.
.2 The training shall enable the students to do the following:
.1 Day-to-day Operators:
.1 Proficiently operate the system
.2 Understand control system architecture and configuration
.3 Understand DDC system components
.4 Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines (algorithms)
.5 Operate the workstation and peripherals
.6 Log on and off of the system
.7 Access graphics, point reports, and logs
.8 Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules
.9 Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observation of the
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 68
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
system graphics, trend graphs, and other system tools.
.10 Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual
.11 Understand the job layout and location of control components
.12 Access data from the DDC controllers
.13 Operate portable operator's terminals
.2 Advanced Operators:
.1 Create and change system graphics
.2 Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions
.3 Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend graphs
.4 Configure and run reports
.5 Add, remove, and modify system's physical points
.6 Create, modify, and delete programming
.7 Add operator interface stations
.8 Add a new control module to the system
.9 Download OS and custom applications programming to a control module
.10 Configure and calibrate I/O points
.3 System Managers/Administrators:
.1 Maintain software and prepare backups
.2 Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software
.3 Add new users and understand password security procedures
.3 These objectives will be divided into three logical groupings. Participants may attend one or more of these, depending on level of knowledge required.
.1 Day-to-day Operators: parts 1.1-1.13
.2 Advanced Operators: parts 1.1-1.23 & 2.1-2.10
.3 System Managers/Administrators: parts 1.1-1.13, 2.1-2.10 and 3.1-3.3
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15900 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 69
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 08090
.4 Provide course outline and materials in accordance with the Part 1 "Submittals" of this specification. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy of training material per student.
.5 The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.
.6 Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the installed hardware.
3.4 COORDINATION WITH THE TAB CONTRACTOR AND THE COMMISSIONING AGENT
.1 The contractor shall furnish to the Test and Balance Contractor a single set of all tools necessary to interface to the control system for test and balance purposes.
.2 The contractor shall provide training to the Test and Balance Contractor in the use of these tools. This training will be planned for a minimum of 4 hours.
.3 In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the test and balance process, until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.
.4 The tools used during the test and balance process by the Test and Balance Contractor will be returned in good working condition at the completion of the testing and balancing.
.5 The contractor shall provide on site labour to support all commissioning activities on site.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15925 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
.2 To be read in conjunction with Section 15900 of the specification.
.3 Comply with the commissioning requirements in sections 15050 and 01 91 13.
.4 Submit shop drawings for control sequence before commencement of work on site.
.5 Comply with the General Requirements of Section 16010 of Division 16.
.6 All setpoints and schedules shall be verified with the Owner.
.7 Set up all trending programs according to the Owner’s preference.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Refer to Section 15900 of the Specification.
.2 This Section of the Specification does not entail all control requirements. For further details, refer to all relevant sections of Specifications. Some control interfacing requirements may be noted on respective sections; provide all necessary relays/contacts, control hardware/software and accessories to accomplish controls described in this Section. Should control devices, interfaces, control cards/panels, relays, hardware, wiring, contacts etc. not be mentioned in respective sections of Specification, it shall imply that those devices shall be provided by Control Contractor.
.3 Allow one adjustment in programming for each system during commissioning at no extra cost.
3 Execution
3.1 CONTROL OF THE CONSTANT AIR VOLUME BOX AND REHEAT COIL
.1 General
.1 There is one constant volume box that serves the new Teleconference Room which provides the control for the outside air serving the space.
.2 Supply CAV controls to CAV box manufacturer for factory mounting. The box manufacturer shall include factory mounting charges.
.2 Integration with Other Mechanical Systems
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15925 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 The CAV box runs in conjunction with HRU-01.
.3 Scheduling
.1 Occupied and unoccupied modes are determined by type of day schedules and/or occupancy sensors; when occupancy sensor detects no movement for minimum 15 min. the space shall be considered unoccupied.
.2 Occupancy sensors shall be provided by Division 16 as part of the light switches and connected to EMCS by Division 15.
.4 Start up
.1 During the occupied mode a run request is sent to HRU-01 and the CAV box is enabled to provide airflow at setpoint.
.5 Heating Mode
.1 In heating mode, the controller shall sequence the heating valve on the reheat coil as follows:
.1 The controller shall enable the heating valve on the reheat coil only when the compressor on CD-01 is off (i.e. cooling is not required in order to avoid simultaneous cooling and heating).
.2 The controller shall modulate the heating valve on the reheat coil to meet space temperature at setpoint under heating mode. Cooling control is through local thermostat in the room.
.3 When heating mode is enabled (i.e. reheat coil is active and cooling is off) and heating demand diminishes, reheat coil valve shall be modulated closed first. DX cooling shall not be enabled until heating coil valve is 100% closed.
.4 EMCS shall coordinate setpoints for reheat coil and DX unit such that heating setpoint is 2 degree F below cooling setpoint.
.6 Cooling mode
.1 Cooling mode is controlled independently by AC-01. Please refer to the control sequence below.
.7 Space temperature sensor
.1 The space temperature wall mount sensor shall incorporate a tamper resistant door and plug in jack for installation of hand held service module or laptop computer.
.2 Set up controls for 72 oF (adjustable) heating setpoints.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15925 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 The temperature sensor in the new Teleconference Room shall be provided with temperature sensor without local temperature control.
.4 The temperature sensors in the new Teleconference Room areas shall be provided with night setback override.
.8 Operator interface
.1 The operator shall be able to adjust the following setpoints at the EMCS.
.1 Maximum supply o/a CFM setpoints
.2 Minimum supply o/a CFM setpoints
.3 Space Temperature Setpoint (for heating only)
.9 System graphics
.1 The system graphic shall show the all analogue and digital inputs/outputs identified on the control schematics or noted in the contract document.
.2 Monitor reheat coil valve position.
.10 System shut down
.1 The system shall be shut down once HRU-01 serving the box is off.
.2 The box dampers shall go to their fully open position for re-calibration.
.3 Space temperature control shall be disabled.
.11 Alarms
.1 HVAC General
.1 The space temperature drops below 15°C (60°F) (10 minute delay).
.2 The space temperature rises above 28°C (82°F) (10 minute delay).
.3 The space humidity level rises above 70% (5 minutes delay).
.12 Trends
.1 The EMCS shall store the following continuous trends:
.1 Actual space temperature and air flow.
.2 Space temperature and air flow setpoint.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15925 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.3 Fresh air quantity.
.13 System graphics
.1 The system graphic will show the following:
.1 Air flows of outdoor air
.2 Space temperature.
.3 Damper positions.
.4 Reheat coil valve position.
.5 Occupancy sensors status.
3.2 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT A/C UNIT
.1 General
.1 This system consists of one room air-conditioning units serving the new Teleconference Room on the second floor. The unit will be complete with integral temperature control. Interface for EMCS shall include:-
.1 Enable/ Disable by EMCS (to interface with control of reheat coil)
.2 Reset room temperature setpoint
.3 General alarm monitoring
.4 Unit on/off status
.5 Compressor run signal (outdoor unit)
.2 Monitoring
.1 Room temperatures and humidity.
.2 Equipment status - system on/off and compressor status (compressor status for control of reheat coil)
.3 General alarm status.
.3 System graphics
.1 The system graphic shall show the all analogue and digital inputs/outputs identified on the control schematics or noted in the contract document.
3.3 ADJUSTMENTS SERVICE & WARRANTY
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15925 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Adjust and set thermostats, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, damper operators, relays and other components to proper settings to give required performance. Cooperate with other sections during testing and balancing of each mechanical system to ensure each total system operates to approval.
.2 Control system shown and specified herein shall be warranted free from defects in materials and workmanship and shall be serviced without charge (except for damage from lack of maintenance of other causes) for one year after date of start of lien period. If, within this period, any equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced or repaired without charge.
.3 Allow one programming adjustment for each system with no extra charge.
3.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings for review prior to installation and in accordance with Section 15010.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1 General
1.1 GENERAL
.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.
.2 Comply with the commissioning requirements in sections 15050 and 01 91 13.
.3 The acceptable TAB contractors are as follows. The Division 15 Contractor shall select one of the following contractors to perform the work. The Division 15 Contractor shall indicate the TAB Contractor that they intend to use on the supplementary Tender Form:
.1 DASS Enterprises
.2 John Price Enterprises
.3 VPG
.4 Clarke Balancing
.5 Design Test and Balance.
.4 TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems, including equipment, to perform in accordance with Contract Documents.
.5 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer.
.6 Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.
1.2 SITE INSPECTIONS AND SUBSEQUENT MEETINGS:
.1 Schedule once a month, site visits to correspond with the weekly site meeting. After each site visit submit a written report to the Construction Manager and Mechanical Consultant. Site visits shall commence at the start of the air distribution work and be spread over the construction period up to the start of the balance of the work. If work requiring correction is discovered during an inspection, be sure that the required correction work is clearly indicated in the report. In addition to site meetings and inspections specified above, attend, when requested by the Consultant, at the TAB Contractor’s expense any other meetings where the TAB Contractor’s presence is required.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.3 DIVISION 15000 ASSISTANCE
.1 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide the TAB Contractor all of the assistance which is required to complete the TAB Contractor’s work. This shall include but not be limited to:
.1 Provision of all required shop drawings and fan and pump curves.
.2 Provision of all required test ports.
.3 All assistance required to balance variable speed systems in accordance with the design documents.
1.4 SYSTEMS TO BE TESTED
.1 TAB to apply to following systems, equipment and related controls:
.1 Air handling.
.2 Hydronic heating.
.3 Split Units
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
.1 Do TAB of complete mechanical systems over entire operating range in accordance with most stringent conditions of selected standard:
.1 AABC (Associated Air Balance Council).
.2 ASHRAE (American Society of Heating Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers).
.3 NABC (National Air Balance Council).
.4 SMACNA (Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association).
.5 Specifications herein or elsewhere in contract documents.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
.1 Testing and balancing personnel shall be experienced in balancing of mechanical systems.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Prior to commencing work, shop drawings shall be submitted showing equipment, proof of calibration, testing methods to be used with each different style of diffuser and measuring point, and forms and diagrams to be used for the air and hydronic balance.
1.8 FINAL BALANCING
.1 Start final TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:
.1 Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, light fixtures and other construction affecting TAB.
.2 Application of sealing, caulking and weather-stripping.
.3 Normal operation of mechanical systems affecting TAB.
1.9 RELATIVE PRESSURE BALANCING:
.1 The TAB contractor shall ensure that each room (noted with relative pressure required) shall have the noted pressures. The final balanced condition of each area, zone and room as shown and indicated in the project drawings shall include testing and adjusting of pressure conditions and dynamic balancing of air flow to achieve the specified and indicated values.
.2 TAB contractor shall adjust the system(s) as required to maintain room pressurization. The TAB contractor shall install, where required, new sheaves and belts to facilitate these adjustments to place the operating position of the fan in an efficient operating position.
.3 TAB Contractor shall adjust the outside air, return air and exhaust air dampers to provide the correct amount of outside air to maintain system pressurization.
1.10 ACCURACY:
.1 Do TAB to within plus or minus 10% of design values at the diffusers and 5% at the air handling units.
.2 Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 10 % of actual values at the diffusers and 5% at the air handling unit.
.3 Instrument calibration: In accordance with referenced standard, within three (3) months of commencement of TAB.
.4 Provide proof of calibration to Consultant.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
1.11 REPORT:
.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using design drawing units.
.2 Reports shall be indexed as follows:
.1 Air Systems
.1 Summary
.2 Procedure
.3 Instrumentation
.4 Drawings
.5 Equipment/Component Summary
.6 Fan data sheets
.7 Fan curves
.8 Air handling unit profile data
.9 Traverse data and schedule
.10 Outlets data summary and schematic (per system)
.11 Diagnostics
.12 Room Pressurization
.13 Fume hood
.2 Hydronic Systems
.1 Summary
.2 Procedure
.3 Instrumentation
.4 Drawings
.5 Equipment/Component Summary
.6 Pump data sheets
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.7 Pump curves
.8 Pump profile data
.9 Balancing valve summary and schematic (per system)
.10 Coils (heating and cooling) per system.
.11 Diagnostics
.3 Produce "as-built" full system schematics and floor plans identifying the location where all measurements were taken and the resulting flows that were obtained. Use as-built drawings for reference.
.4 Submit two (2) copies of preliminary TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.
.5 Submit six (6) copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant.
.6 Obtain the shop drawing for each fan system. Mark the actual operating point on the fan curve for each fan. Include the fan curves for each fan in the balancing report.
.7 Obtain the shop drawing for each pump system. On the pump curve for each pump mark the actual operating point on the curve. Include the pump curves with superimposed power draw, rpm and impeller size.
1.12 VERIFICATION:
.1 Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30 % of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of the Consultant.
.2 A measured flow deviation of more than 10 percent between the verification reading and the reported data shall be considered a failure of the verification procedure.
.3 A failure of more than 10-percent of the selected verification readings shall result in the rejection of the report as unacceptable.
.4 Should the report be rejected, the TAB Contractor shall rebalance all systems, submit new certified reports and make a reinspection at no additional cost to the Owner.
.5 Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.
1.13 SETTINGS
.1 Lock and permanently mark settings as required by reference standard.
1.14 TAB COMPLETION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by Consultant.
.2 Confirm that all flow stations are providing accurate measurements as described below.
1.15 AIR MOVING
.1 General
.1 Measurements as required by Systems referenced standards.
.2 Due to the extent of the hard ceilings some areas will be required to be prebalanced prior to the installation of the drywall ceilings. Refer to Item 3.2 for requirements.
.3 Provide face velocity test and smoke test for fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110.
.2 Measurements:
.1 Air velocity.
.2 Static pressure.
.3 Velocity pressure.
.4 Temperature:
.1 Wet bulb.
.2 Dry bulb.
.5 Cross sectional area.
.6 RPM.
.7 Electrical power:
.1 Voltage
.2 Current draw.
.3 Location of Equipment Measurements:
.1 Inlet and outlet of each:
.1 Fan.
.2 Coil.
.3 Filter.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 Damper.
.5 Flow Station
.6 Other auxiliary equipment.
.4 Location of System Measurements at:
.1 Main ducts.
.2 Main branch ducts.
.3 Sub-branch ducts.
.4 Each supply, exhaust and return air inlet and outlet.
.5 Other auxiliary equipment.
.6 All areas served by system.
.7 Before and after the silencers.
1.16 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1 General
.1 Measurements as required by referenced standards, including, but not limited to, following:
.2 Measurements:
.1 Flow.
.2 Pressure.
.3 Temperature.
.4 Specific gravity.
.5 RPM.
.6 Electrical power:
.1 Voltage.
.2 Current draw.
.3 Location of equipment measurements:
.1 Inlet and outlet of each:
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 8
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.1 Coil
.2 Pump
.3 Heat Exchanger
.4 Heating and Cooling System.
.1 Flow and set point at each circuit balancing valve.
.2 Pump
.3 Balancing valves.
.4 Control valves.
.5 Balancing Pumps
.1 For constant volume systems the TAB Contractor shall open the main balancing valves in the system and measure the flow for each pump system with the system running at its maximum capacity. The TAB Contractor shall submit a preliminary report indicating the operating point for each pump and the revised impeller size (if required) to make the pump operate at its peak efficiency without the requirement for closing the circuit balancing valves.
.2 The Pump Manufacturer will include for the cost of the impeller trim. The TAB Contractor shall confirm the pump is providing the specified flow once the impeller trim has been completed.
.3 For variable volume systems an impeller trim is not required. The TAB Contractor shall adjust the variable frequency drive to provide the correct flow to the system. The TAB Contractor shall identify the speed that the variable frequency drive is set at to achieve this flow rate on the balancing report.
2 Products
NIL
3 Execution
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Balancing shall be carried out by an independent qualified balancing company. Balancing company must be one of the approved balancing companies.
.2 Replace sheaves as required to balance systems to the indicated air volumes. Sheaves shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner by the Division 15 Contractor.
.3 Division 15 Contractor to provide all required parts, belts and adjustments for all systems as deemed necessary to complete the required balancing.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 9
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide the required assistance to the TAB Contractor as deemed necessary by the Consultant.
.5 The TAB contractor shall visit the site in accordance with Item 1.3 above.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY ORILLIA CAMPUS SECTION 15950 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 10
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD. PROJECT NO. 13210
.6 The TAB Contractor shall confirm that the flow stations provided in the supply, return and exhaust air ductwork are measuring accurate readings. The variable speed drive shall be adjusted to allow for measurements at 50%, 75% and 100% flow. The flow displayed by the flow stations shall be confirmed to be accurate. Provide in the balancing report the results of the three point calibration.
3.2 PREBALANCING
.1 For the following areas the air balancing contractor shall preset the balancing dampers prior to the installation of the drywall ceilings by either running the air handling unit at 100 % outside air (if unit is available) or providing a portable fan to provide supply air at the required static pressure.
.2 Once the system has been prebalanced the balancing dampers that will be located above the drywall ceilings shall be securely locked in place.
.3 System air flows shall be confirmed once the space has been completed.
.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for arranging for and paying for any installation costs for the temporary power to run the air handling unit or the portable fan.
- END OF SECTION -
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY LIST OF SCHEDULES PAGE 1 ORILLIA CAMPUS TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION
CEL Project No. 07229
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES SCHM-241 Vibration Isolation SCHM-844 Indoor A/C Unit SCHM-844 Outdoor A/C Unit SCHM-871 Constant Volume Boxes SCHM-875 Grilles and Diffusers
Pag
e 1
of 1
Lake
head
Uni
vers
ity
Vibr
atio
n Is
olat
ion
SCH
M24
1-IS
01
Oril
lia C
ampu
s
Page
1
Tele
pres
ence
Fac
ility
Add
ition
Sy
stem
Ty
pe
Thic
knes
s m
m
Def
lect
ion
mm
M
anuf
actu
rer
Mod
el N
o.
Rem
arks
In
door
Spl
it U
nit
H3
25
Mas
on
30N
Rem
arks
:
1.
Isol
ator
to b
e lo
cate
d at
man
ufac
ture
rs re
com
men
ded
pick
up
poin
t
Cro
ssey
Eng
inee
ring
Ltd.
CEL
Pro
ject
No.
1321
0
Lake
head
Uni
vers
ity
Split
Uni
t - In
door
Uni
t SC
HM
844-
AC01
O
rillia
Cam
pus
Pa
ge 1
Te
lepr
esen
ce F
acili
ty A
dditi
on
Tag
No.
Lo
catio
n Se
rved
C
apac
ity
Tons
C
FM
ESP
in
WC
Fa
n H
P V/
Ph
MC
A
Coo
ling
MB
H
(Tot
al/S
ens.
)
Elec
tric
R
ehea
t kW
Hum
idifi
er
Cap
acity
(lb
/hr)
M
ake
Mod
el #
AC
-01
Tele
conf
eren
ce
Roo
m 2
020
4.5
1500
0.
6 0.
33
208/
1 3.
33
44.0
/ 39
.0
- -
Mits
ubis
hi E
lect
ric
PEFY
-P5
4NM
AU-E
2
N
otes
: 1.
R
oom
tem
pera
ture
sha
ll be
mai
ntai
ned
at 7
2.5°
F 2.
U
nit t
o ha
ve d
ucte
d su
pply
, sid
e di
scha
rge.
3.
U
nits
to b
e pr
ovid
ed w
ith re
mot
e co
nden
sing
uni
t ins
talle
d on
roof
. S
ee s
ched
ule
for d
etai
ls.
4.
Uni
ts to
be
supp
lied
with
R-4
10a
refri
gera
nt.
5.
Uni
ts to
be
com
plet
e w
ith in
tegr
al s
tarte
r. 6.
U
nits
to b
e pr
ovid
ed w
ith re
mot
e w
all m
ount
ed th
erm
osta
t. 7.
U
nits
to h
ave
indo
or u
nit t
o ou
tdoo
r uni
t com
mun
icat
ion.
8.
U
nit t
o in
clud
e B
AC-H
D15
0 fo
r int
egra
tion
with
the
exis
ting
BAS
in th
e bu
ildin
g 9.
P
rovid
e op
tiona
l con
dens
ate
pum
p as
inte
grat
ed w
ith th
e in
door
uni
t 10
. P
rovid
e fil
ter a
nd fi
lter b
ox a
s re
quire
d. F
or fi
lter i
nfor
mat
ion,
ple
ase
refe
r to
mec
hani
cal s
peci
ficat
ions
158
55
CE
L P
roje
ct N
o. 1
32
10
Lakeh
ead
Un
ivers
ity
Sp
lit
Un
it -
Ou
tdo
or
Un
it
SC
HM
844-C
D01
Ori
llia
Cam
pu
s
P
ag
e 1
Tele
pre
sen
ce F
acilit
y A
dd
itio
n
Tag
No
. L
ocati
on
Serv
ed
C
ap
acit
y
To
ns
No
. o
f C
ircu
its
No
. o
f C
ap
acit
y
Co
ntr
ol
V/P
h
MC
A
Make
M
od
el N
o.
Op
era
tin
g
Weig
ht
Lb
. R
em
ark
s
CD
-01
Tele
confe
rence
Room
2020
4
1
- 208/1
26
Mitsubis
hi
Ele
ctr
ic
PU
MY
-P
48N
HM
U (
L)
287
No
tes:
1.
Units to o
pera
te to the f
ollo
win
g o
uts
ide tem
pera
ture
s; 1
15°F
and -
40°F
(lo
w a
mbie
nt opera
tion r
equired).
2.
Pro
vid
e w
ind g
uard
s W
S-P
48-S
ET
3.
Pro
vid
e w
ind b
locker
WS
-P48-R
EA
R
4.
Pro
vid
e w
ind b
locker
WS
-P48-S
IDE
5.
Com
ple
te w
ith inte
gra
l sta
rter.
6.
Condenser
units to b
e p
laced o
n the r
oof.
Refe
r to
roof
pla
n.
7.
Condenser
units to b
e c
om
ple
te w
ith B
ig F
oot F
ix-it fo
otings m
odel # 6
00
8.
Units to b
e s
upplie
d w
ith R
-410a
refr
igera
nt.
9.
Pro
vid
e r
efr
igera
nt tr
aps e
very
25 f
eet rise.
10.
Unit to inclu
de B
AC
-HD
150 f
or
inte
gra
tion w
ith the e
xis
ting B
AS
in the b
uild
ing
CEL
Pro
ject
No.
080
90
Lake
head
Uni
vers
ity
Con
stan
t Vol
ume
Box
es
SCH
M87
1-VA
V01
Oril
lia C
ampu
s
Pa
ge 1
Te
lepr
esen
ce F
acili
ty A
dditi
on
Sym
bol
HR
U #
O
utsi
de A
ir Se
ctio
n
R
ehea
t Coi
l M
anuf
actu
rer
Mod
el N
o.
Rem
arks
Airf
low
CFM
Th
roat
D
ia.
Airf
low
M
BH
Fl
ow (g
pm)
VAV-
101
HR
U-0
1 43
5 10
435
9.4
0.9
E.H
. PR
ICE
SEV
Not
es:
1.
VAV
DD
C c
ontro
ls s
hall
be p
rovid
ed b
y th
e C
ontro
ls C
ontra
ctor
for i
nsta
llatio
n by
the
VAV
box
man
ufac
ture
r. 2.
R
ehea
t coi
l to
be s
ized
bas
ed o
n EW
T/LW
T =
120°
F/10
0°F.
3.
P
ropo
sed
rehe
at c
oil s
ize
to b
e 26
”x14
” 4.
S
ee d
raw
ings
for r
equi
red
acce
ss c
onfig
urat
ion.
Pag
e 1
of 1
Lake
head
Uni
vers
ity
Gril
les
and
Diff
user
s
SCH
M97
5-G
RL0
1 O
rillia
Cam
pus
Page
1
Tele
pres
ence
Fac
ility
Add
ition
Type
B
orde
r Fa
sten
ing
Dam
per
Fini
sh
Col
our
Si
ze
Spec
ialty
Ite
ms
Mod
el N
o.
EH P
rice
B1
Supp
ly A
ir
Squa
re C
one
Diff
user
-
- T-
bar
N
o D
ryw
all
Y
es
whi
te
24"
x 24
" -
SC
D
E
Ret
urn/
Exh
aust
Si
ngle
Def
lect
ion
Gril
le
C
Con
ceal
ed
- -
As in
dica
ted
on
draw
ings
-
60
Rem
arks
: 1.
Q
uant
ities
as
show
n on
dra
win
gs
Cro
ssey
Eng
inee
ring
Ltd.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION ISSUED FOR TENDER
CROSSEY ENGINEERING LTD
SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 CEL PROJECT NO.13210 REV.B
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS SECTION 16000 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
SECTION # SECTION NAME 16000 Electrical Specifications Table of Contents 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16011 Occupancy Requirements 16012 Facilities Shut-Down Requirements 16013 Electrical Project Schedule Requirement 16020 Operating Maintenance 16104 Nameplates 16109 Wiring Methods 16111 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Fittings 16116 Wireway and Auxiliary Gutters 16122 Wires and Cables Up To 1000V 16130 Nonmetallic Rectangular Floor Box 16131 Splitters, Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes 16132 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes 16141 Wiring Devices 16151 Wire and Box Connectors Up to 1000V 16191 Fastenings and Supports 16740 Telephone and Data Communications System 16741 Voice and Data Communication Raceway System Appendix “A” Information Cut Sheet of Underfloor System
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Read and be governed by Definitions, Conditions of the Contract and Amendments or Supplements including Division 0, Division 1, and Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and General Conditions of Contract and Supplementary General Conditions.
.2 Agreement “Between Owner and Contractor” (This is a Lakehead University document) meet all requirements within that document.
.3 This Section 16010 is an integral part of the sections of Division 16 Electrical Specification and project Scope of Work.
1.2 INTENT
.1 Include all labour, equipment and incidentals to provide the complete electrical work specified in the Electrical Specification and shown on the electrical drawings and or scope of work as defined within the contract documents.
.2 The term Electrical Contractor may be used on the drawings and within the specification. Read this as to mean Division 16.
1.3 ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
.1 The first issue that is of key importance to Lakehead University is “Safety” the electrical contractor will submit for review to the Owner their Company’s Safety Policies, Safety Program, Safety Manual and “lock-out” procedures.
.2 The Electrical Scope of Work is defined within the electrical specification and the electrical drawings which form a portion of the Contract Documents. The Electrical Contractor must review entire set of Contract Documents as work that is required to be completed by the Electrical Contractor can be reflected thru out the Contract Documents. Failure to review the Contract Documents will not alleviate the Electrical Contractor from the responsibility of completing the work at no additional cost to the Owner.
.3 The Electrical Contractor will provide the required power, lighting and systems for the project. The electrical contractor is responsible for all communications and security wiring and devices as shown on the drawings and in the specifications. If the electrical contractor does not meet the qualifications for communications and security, the electrical contractor must sub out the work to a qualified contractor as outlined in the specifications.
.4 The Electrical Contractor will provide all power wiring and control wiring as noted within the contract documents for the Mechanical equipment and other systems.
.5 The Electrical Contractor will provide the required life safety work as reflected within the documents.
.6 Attention is directed to 01 57 26 – Indoor Air Quality Management which is hereby made part of this Section of the Specifications.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.4 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR BONDING
.1 The Electrical Contractor will carry within the Bid Price the following Bonding:
.1 50% Labour and Material Bond and
.2 50% Performance Bond.
.2 The Electrical Contractor as part of the Bid Price will “Itemize” the above Bond Costs in his Bid Submission.
1.5 LETTER OF AWARD AND/OR LETTER OF INTENT
.1 Upon receipt of Letter of Award and or Intent, the Electrical Contractor shall issue all purchase orders for the entire project within Twenty four (24) hours. The Lakehead University Project Manager shall be copied on all purchase orders.
1.6 LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SITE REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Electrical Contractor or any Sub-contractors and the work force assigned to this site will attend the required site safety training. The Electrical Contractor’s work force on an individual basis will be required to have a paper copy of the following documentation that will be submitted and retained by the Lakehead University Safety Training Team:
.1 WHIMIS;
.2 Fall Arrest Training;
.3 Mechanical Lift Training;
.4 Special Tools Training and
.5 Other Documentation as requested by the Lakehead University.
1.7 ASSIGNED WORK AND CASH ALLOWANCES
.1 Refer to Division 1 for Cash Allowances.
.2 Refer to Division 1 for Assigned Work.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.8 PHASING / STAGING CONCEPT
.1 The overall electrical phasing must be in concert and support the Project Phasing plan, Mechanical and Structural requirements and associated criteria.
.2 Refer to Phasing and Scheduling of the Work and related drawings that are part of the general divisions of the project, and meet all requirements as reflected in the specification. As well refer to the electrical phasing drawings that form part of the contract documents.
.3 The project has many phases that must occur in order to permit the installation of various services to support the Project Scope. This may be supported by major modifications and re-feeding of the existing electrical distribution to in conjunction with the planned scope.
.4 The Electrical Contractor will provide all required temporary lighting, exit lighting, emergency lighting and power as required to support the temporary exiting during construction.
.5 The Electrical Contractor will follow and meet all requirements as noted within the contract documents with respect to construction access to the site and area of work.
.6 Coordination with the Owner will be required for work necessary to be conducted outside of normal working hours. The request from the Electrical Contractor must be submitted to the Owner in writing ten working days in advance of the date the work is being requested to be executed.
.7 With respect to scheduling meet all requirements of the Prime Contractor Project Schedule and the requirements of Section 16013.
.8 It is imperative that the Electrical Contractor fully understands the detail of the Prime Consultant’s phasing plan, the existing systems operation and interconnections and the installation and implementation of the new power distribution and communications systems to support this project.
.9 All shut down’s and system interruptions must be coordinated thru the Prime Contractor to the Owner’s Project Manager and the Consultant Team.
.10 Carry all associated costs in the Bid Price with respect to phasing and phased turn overs of the various Stages / Phases.
1.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE
.1 After any part of the work of this contract has been completed, the Lakehead University and Consultant will make an inspection. Carry out performance tests of such parts under the direction of the Consultant. If deficiencies are found, rectify them immediately to the satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies are rectified, place the work in service at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, provide such connections to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 Temporary or trial usage of any electrical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3 No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of such work which may be used.
1.10 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to construction schedule detailed in other parts of the Contract Documents.
.2 Contain all work being performed within the physical area of work which is underway during any particular period of time. Keep the amount of disruption in the existing or associated facility to a minimum.
.3 Should the work within a particular area cause any electrical apparatus in another area to cease to function properly, modify and reconnect this apparatus which has ceased to function properly.
.4 Refer to Specification Section 16013 - Electrical Project Schedule Requirements and meet all requirements.
1.11 FACILITY COMMISSIONING – ELECTRICAL
.1 The Electrical Contractor and Electrical Vendors for Lakehead University are obliged to comply with the supporting commissioning documentation. The Electrical Contractor to provide all required manpower, testing, equipment, documentation and staff training in order to meet the requirements of Lakehead University.
1.12 FINISHING HARDWARE AND SECURITY COORDINATION
.1 Refer to Division 8 - Finishing Hardware and comply with all requirements as covered with in this specifications section and other referenced sections of the specification.
.2 The Electrical Contractor to coordinate with the Hardware Vendor to ensure that all electrical requirements for power, wiring, interconnection to the fire alarm and security systems are provided.
.3 Meet all requirements as specified with the specification and reflected on the drawings and details for the Security and Hardware System.
.4 The Electrical Contractor shall provide all wiring for “Door Hold Open Devices” and “Electric Hold Open Devices”.
.5 The Electrical Contractor shall provide a conduit from the door operator down into the door frame location as coordinated with the Security and Hardware Vendors / Contractor.
.6 The Hardware Vendor / Contractor will supply and installed the required terminal strips in the main door junction box provided by the Electrical Contractor.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.7 The Electrical Contractor will provide all 120 volt power connections. The control transformers complete with housing to transform from 120 volt down to 12 / 24 volts shall be supplied by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor will need to install the control transformers and terminate 120 volt wiring.
.8 In many cases back boxes required to be installed in door frames shall be provided already mounted in the door frame when it arrives on site. The Electrical Contractor must carefully review the door frame schedule and provide all other boxes that are not provided with the door frame.
.9 The Electrical Contractor will provide all conduits down to all boxes that are provided with the door frames as well as the connectors.
.10 Pre-wired security doors will be provided with a cable and conduit up the door frame with a conduit stubbed 6” above the door frame. The electrical contractor is responsible for providing a conduit from the top of the door fame, to the security junction box and for terminating the wiring on the door controller in the security junction box.
.11 For doors with door operators, the electrical contractor is responsible for the following:
.1 110 volt electrical service to operator header.
.2 Single gang box, 1 pair 18 guage low voltage wiring and any necessary conduit, junction boxes c/w pull strings or wiremold for each push plate by Division 16.
.3 Wiring and electrical equipment required to interface with door operator/controls and other electrical control/monitoring systems either existing or new.
.4 Contacts from smoke/fire system.
.12 For doors with door operators and security, the security contractor is responsible for the following:
.1 Access Control Systems, card readers, programmable logic, wiring from card reader to operator, signals and wiring from remote locations to door operator.
.2 Access Control provisions and coordination.
.3 Disconnecting and/or reconnecting of alarm contacts.
.13 Supply, installation, wiring and termination of electrified door hardware by others.
.14 The supply, Installation and termination of Power Supplies for automatic door operators is by others.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 6
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.13 THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR’S WHOLESALER/VENDOR/SUB-CONTRACTOR BIDDING PROCESS
.1 The Electrical Contractor will provide to his selected Whole Saler’s, Vendors and Sub-contractors the following information in order that they can provide a complete price to the Electrical Contractor prior to his Bid Price being submitted at time of Bid Close for this Project.
.2 The following information shall be provided:
.1 The appropriate specification sections and reference specifications sections:
.1 For example to obtain a price for the Main Power Switchboard the appropriate specification section must be issued as well as the reference specification sections such as Metering, fuses, circuit breakers and Protections and Coordination specifications sections etc. shall be provided.
.2 In concert with this example the required drawings must be issued such as the distribution diagrams and the required drawings that reflect the estimated fault levels etc.
.2 This approach shall be used for all aspects of this project. This will ensure that at time of shop drawing review, comments that are provided via the consultants review will be taken in context. The consultant should not be told by a vendor etc., that they were not given the required drawings or additional specification sections that were required to provide a complete price at time of submission to the Electrical Contractor.
1.14 EQUIPMENT SHIPPED TO SITE
.1 All equipment shipped to site in sections shall be reassembled.
.2 This to include the provision of all interconnecting power and control wiring, assembly of the various sections of equipment and components.
.3 Testing and commissioning of the equipment in order to provide a complete and operational system or piece of equipment as specified by the manufacturer.
.4 The Electric Contractor shall be responsible for all shipping and receiving of all electrical equipment and materials in order to complete this project and coordinate on site with security and Project Manager as required. The Lakehead University shipping and receiving is not be used.
1.15 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
.1 Meet all requirements dealing with Special Construction requirements from the Architect’s Specification.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 7
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.16 TEMPORARY SERVICES
.1 Refer to Division 1 for temporary Services and meet all requirements.
.2 Do not use the permanent service of the existing building for temporary power for construction unless specific written approval is obtained from the Consultant and coordinated with the owner.
.3 Portable power supplies shall be utilized for items that cause electrical spikes such as electrical welding equipment.
.4 Refer to Section 015000 for requirements of Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.17 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
.1 Wherever differences occur between plans and riser diagrams or schematics, and between specifications and drawings, the maximum conditions shall govern.
.2 Make field verifications of dimensions on plans since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.3 Bring discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between plans and specifications promptly to the attention of the Consultant for clarification.
.4 As the work progresses and before installing apparatus, equipment, fixtures and devices which may interfere with the interior treatment and use of the building, obtain from the Consultant detailed drawings or instructions for the exact location of all electrical raceways, equipment, fixtures and wiring devices.
.5 Install all conduits, wireways, etc., to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. Install conduits, wireways, etc., particularly those which may interfere with the inside treatment of the building, or conflicting with other trades, only after the locations have been fully coordinated with other trades. Take special care in the installation of conduits, wireways, etc., which are to be concealed to see that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls and ceilings. Where such conduits, wireways, etc., have been installed in such a manner as to cause interference, remove and reinstall in suitable locations without extra cost. Do not remove or damage any structural firestopping. Leave space to permit the firestopping to be inspected and/or repaired.
.6 Before commencing work, check and verify with the Consultant all grade and invert elevations, levels, dimensions etc. to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.
.7 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the specifications and shown on the drawings, provide all other items that are required by the authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
.8 Install all ceiling mounted components (luminaires, speakers, etc.) in strict accordance with reflected ceiling plans.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 8
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.18 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE
.1 Provide job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to complete the work of this Contract and as directed by the Consultant.
.2 The Electrical Contractor’s office should as a minimum have the following capabilities:
.1 Phone, fax, email, High speed internet connection, router with a spare port and patch cable in order that the consultant can access the internet to deal with project related issues, copier and printer.
1.19 CLEANING
.1 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the site and premises all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work for this contract. Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.2 Vacuum all equipment thoroughly at the time of final acceptance of the work. Clean plastic components and exposed components of luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
1.20 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 and Section 16010 and the Architectural Specification.
.2 All electrical shop drawings submitted shall be annotated with a priority of review to ensure that the most critical shop drawings are reviewed first.
.3 The Electrical Contractor must submit the Short Circuit, System Coordination and Arc Flash Study prior to any of the distribution equipment, generation, motor control centres, or transfer switch etc shop drawings being submitted for review. This study is to be submitted to the Electrical Consultant within one month after the Letter of Intent has been issued.
.4 Distribution equipment, generation, motor control centres, transfer switches and the remaining distribution shop drawings shall be submitted two weeks after the Short Circuit System Coordination and Arc Flash Studies have been reviewed and found to meet the requirements of and by the Electrical Consultant.
.5 The Electrical Contractor must submit all shop drawings for lighting and systems submitted to the Electrical Consultant for review one month after the Letter of Intent has been received.
1.21 CONSULTANT'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1 During construction, the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for verification and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the Contract Documents.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 9
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.22 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES
.1 No additional money over and above the Contract Price will be paid for extra work unless a written order, signed by the Consultant for such work is given.
.2 When changes or additional work are required, the Consultant will issue a notice of contemplated change, together with revised plans if necessary, listing the additions, deletions or alterations required.
.3 The Electrical Contractor must provide detailed and complete breakdown of labour and material involved, with separate unit prices for each item of labour and material. The CCO Price submission shall include all burdens (the burdens are to be defined at the beginning of the project). Should there be an impact due to the pending CCO the Electrical Contractor must note this at the time the price for the CCO is submitted. The impact must be defined at this time in terms of extra time required to complete the work if necessary, any productivity, disruption or delay impact etc. All pricing is to be immediately prepared and submitted to the General Contractor/Construction Manager by the Electrical Contractor within ten (10) days of receiving the CCO.
.4 When and if the price is approved, a change order will be issued and then, and only then, may the work listed be carried out. Promptness in submitting is essential.
1.23 MATERIALS
.1 Refer to Division 1 and 2 for Instructions To Bidders.
.2 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish the standards of desired quality, style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Furnish materials so specified under this Contract unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more designations are listed, the Contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the choice made on appendix 'C' of the Bid Form, "Equipment and Material List".
.3 Where the use of equivalent, alternate or substitute equipment alters the design or space requirements indicated on the plans, the Contractor for this contract shall include all items of cost for the revised design and construction, including the cost of all the other trades involved.
.4 Acceptance of the proposed equivalents, alternates or substitutions shall be subject to the review by the Consultant, and if requested, the Electrical Contractor shall submit for inspection, samples of both the specified and the proposed alternate items.
.5 In all cases where the use of equivalents, alternates or substitutions is permitted, the Electrical Contractor shall bear any extra costs of evaluating the quality of materials and the equipment to be installed.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 10
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.24 EQUIVALENTS AND ALTERNATES
.1 Should the Electrical Contractor propose to furnish material and equipment other than those specified, he shall apply in writing to the Consultant for approval of equivalents at least ten working days prior to the closing of Bids, submitting with his request for approval, complete descriptive and technical data on the item or items he proposes to furnish. Approval for changes in the base bid specifications will be considered only upon the individual requests of the Electrical Contractor. No blanket approval for equipment will be given to suppliers, distributors or contractors.
.2 Unless requests for changes in base bid specifications are received and approved prior to the opening of the bids, as defined above, the Electrical Contractor will be held to furnish all specified items under his base bid. After the Contract is awarded, changes in specifications will be made only as defined in the Article dealing with Material Substitution.
.3 For the equipment to be supplied by the Electrical Contractor, choices may be offered as alternates to the items named in the specifications, either in the space provided in the Bid Form. Alternate proposals must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the article proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid if the alternate is accepted. Prior review by the Consultant is not required on items submitted as alternate bids, but the decision on acceptance of the alternate(s) will rest with the Consultant.
.4 Replace unspecified materials and/or rejected equivalents and alternates built into the work with specified or accepted materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.25 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
.1 After award of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be considered by the Consultant and Lakehead University subject to the following:
.1 The specified material cannot be delivered to the job in time to complete the work in proper sequence to work of other trades, due to conditions beyond the control of the Electrical Contractor.
.2 Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by documentary proof of equality, difference in price and delivery, if any, in the form of certified quotations from suppliers of both specified and proposed equipment.
.3 In case of difference in price, the Owner shall receive all benefit of the difference in cost involved in any substitution and the Contract altered by change order to credit the Owner with any savings so obtained.
.4 Materials and equipment substituted or offered as alternatives shall have spare parts and servicing available and shall fit into the space allocation shown on the drawings.
.5 If any material or equipment being considered for substitution involves additional design, architectural or engineering fees or other costs in checking whether or not the substitute material or equipment is suitable for the project, such fees or costs shall be paid for by the Electrical Contractor.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 11
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.26 INSTALLATION OF WORK
.1 Be responsible for:
.1 The layout of the work of this contract, and for any damage caused to site or existing building, or other Contracts by improper location or carrying out of this work.
.2 The prompt installation of the work of this contract in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.
.3 Conduits for any power or systems can be installed within the concrete slabs or concrete walls for this project.
.4 It is acceptable that conduits may be run under the slab on grade only.
.5 All conduit work shall be surface mounted within the ceiling space or run within walls and columns that are furred out. It is acceptable to drop conduits down within partition walls.
.6 The protection of finished and unfinished work and equipment and work of other Contracts from damage due to the carrying out of the work of this Contract.
.7 The condition of all material and equipment supplied under this contract, and for the protection and maintenance of work completed.
.8 Confer with other trades engaged on the work and arrange the work so that it will be carried out in the best interest of all concerned, bearing in mind the building construction and finish required.
.9 Furnish items to be "built-in" in ample time and give any necessary information and assistance in connection with the building-in of the same.
.10 Notify the Consultant of the size and location of recesses, openings and chases before walls, etc. are erected.
.11 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed in as short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.
.12 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule. Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Consultant within the time limit stipulated.
.13 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.14 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their use shall be used in strict accordance with those instructions.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 12
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.15 Plug and cap all conduits until they are ready for pulling wires and making connections. Cover and protect all fixtures and equipment against dirt, water, chemicals or mechanical injury. Re-touch, or when directed by the Consultant, refinish or replace any equipment or materials damaged in shipment or during construction prior to final acceptance.
1.27 MANUFACTURERS' AND CSA LABELS
.1 Visible and legible after equipment is installed.
1.28 PROTECTION
.1 Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety.
.2 Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS", or with appropriate voltage in English.
.3 Arrange for installation of temporary doors for rooms containing electrical distribution equipment. Keep these doors locked except when under direct supervision of electrician.
1.29 CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION
.1 All work shall meet or exceed the latest requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code and its Supplement, local inspection bulletins and all authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Arrange for inspection of all work and pay all fees in this regard. On completion of the work, deliver the final unconditional certificate of approval of the Electrical Inspection Authority to the Consultant.
.3 It is hereby agreed that all requirements meet CSA requirements and a complete installation in accordance with these requirements will be provided at the Bid Price.
.4 Keep a permanent record of each inspection made by the Electrical Inspection Department showing the date, inspector's name, scope of the inspection and statement of special decisions or permissions granted. Make these records available to the Consultant at any time, and turn them over to him after completion of the work.
1.30 SAMPLES
.1 Refer to Division 1 and Section 16505 and submit samples of electrical equipment, colours of equipment, etc., for review by the Consultant as specified. Remove samples from the site upon completion of the Consultant's review.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 13
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.31 RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 The Consultant will provide at a cost of $2,000.00 to the Electrical Contractor one set of CAD computer disks based on latest AutoCAD Version, and one set of white prints of all drawings relating to the work of this contract, for the purpose of preparing record drawings. As the job progresses, mark up the white prints to accurately indicate installed work, i.e. location and elevations, etc. On completion of the work, the contractor shall transfer the information neatly onto the computer disks based on latest AutoCAD Version, and submit the disks and one set of prints for approval. Correct the disks as directed by the Consultant and hand these over to the Consultant, together with a set of white prints, on completion. Complete all computer schedules as deemed necessary by the Owner. The version and type of software must be coordinated with the Owner.
.2 Record, as the job progresses, all approved changes and deviations made to any work shown on the original contract drawings whether by addenda, requested changes, job instructions, and changes due to job conditions.
.3 Indicate on the drawings all buried services both new and existing and their elevations, all conduits and pull boxes, junction boxes, empty conduits, concealed main and sub-feeder conduits and any other equipment not clearly in view, with exact dimensions for future reference. Tie dimensions by measurement to existing topographical features, and include changes in directions as well as at least three points on straight runs of conduits, etc.
.4 The Addresses for the addressable Fire Alarm System devices shall be reflected on the Record drawings.
.5 Record drawings shall be kept up to date and be available for checking at any time by Lakehead University and the Consultants. Progress draws will not be reviewed unless the record drawing set is up to date.
.6 The Electrical Contractor shall provide to Lakehead University a hard copy and an electronic copy in latest AutoCAD Version of their Project Field Working drawings as well as a Coloured copy the Project Field Electrical Working and the Project Record Drawings.
1.32 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS
.1 Provide information and cooperate with the General Contractor and Division 15 contractor for the preparation of interference drawings. General Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the preparation of drawings for both The Electrical and Mechanical Contractor(s) on site.
.2 Interference drawings shall be prepared. Interference drawings shall be submitted to the General Contractor and Prime Consultant for review on both a hard copy and compact discs where necessary.
.3 Interference drawings shall be provided to make clear the work intended or to show how it affects other trades.
.4 Equipment dimensions shall be based on dimensions noted on reviewed shop drawing.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 14
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 All other areas where further coordination is deemed to be necessary on site by the Consultant.
.6 All components shown on the interference drawings shall be shown in scale.
.7 For equipment substitutions a complete interference set of drawings of the area affected by the revision shall be provided by the Division 15 and 16 Contractors.
.8 Interference drawings shall be provided showing both plan and sections and shall incorporate all services including ductwork, HVAC piping, plumbing and drainage, electrical conduits over 2" (50 mm), electrical cable trays and light fixtures.
.9 Dimensioned drawings shall be provided for all roof penetrations for review by the Structural Consultant.
.10 Installation of the Division 16 work shall not proceed until final interference drawings have been submitted to the General Contractor and Prime Consultant for review. Both shall coordinate and advise to proceed.
1.33 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELLING
.1 Clearly identify all conduit systems carrying feeder cables by stencilling the voltage of the system, feeder and circuit identification and any other wording that may be required at regular intervals on the conduits, on all splicing and pull boxes, on both sides of sleeves and at each floor on vertical risers. The actual wording and size of the letters, and spacing of each inscription shall meet the requirements of the Electrical Inspector. The paint used shall be durable and resistant to chipping.
.2 Identify all electrical equipment in accordance with Lakehead University requirements. As well, equipment must meet all requirements of Section 16104: Nameplates.
.3 In pull boxes, junction boxes and at terminations, feeders shall be identified by plastic plates indicating system voltage and circuit designations, and individual conductors shall be identified with coloured tape or covering to show phase, neutral or ground connection. The plates shall be 25 mm in diameter and have letter stamped 15 mm high, and the colour coding shall be Phase A - red, Phase B - black, Phase C - blue, Neutral - white, and Ground - green.
.4 The outer covering of branch circuit wiring shall be colour coded throughout all 600, 347, 208 V and 120 V systems: Phase A - red, Phase B - black, Phase C - blue, Neutral - White, and Ground - green. Phase shall be A, B and C left to right and top to bottom.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 15
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 Paint the interior, exterior and coverplate of all boxes (outlet, junction etc.) with a durable paint of a colour which identifies the system function. The applicable colours are as follows:
Colour Light & Power - 120/208V Blue Light & Power - 347/600V Yellow Fire Alarm Red Voice/Telephone Green Data Cyan Security Orange Emergency Power -120/208V Emergency Power -347/600V
Pink/Blue Pink/Yellow
- Indicate all circuit numbers on box cover plates.
.1 Provide engraved lamacoid name plates with the circuit number indicated on it for all receptacle and light switches. Located circuit number name plate above the receptacle and light switch coverplate.
.6 All emergency luminaires to have a custom clear label with black lettering applied to the luminaire housing that is visible stating "Do Not Remove Lamps - Emergency Powered Luminaire".
1.34 WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered for branch circuits or coloured for feeder runs. Plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.
.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3 Colour code: to CSA C22.1-1982.
1.35 FINISHES
.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by removal of rust and scale, cleaning application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.
.2 Paint indoor normal powered electrical equipment and distribution enclosures light grey to EEMAC 2Y-1-1958.
.3 Paint equipment serving the emergency power system with two coats of International Orange paint Sherwin William #F65E37.
.4 Paint equipment serving the UPS distribution system shall be finished in two coats of PPG # PCT57215 (Royal Blue).
.5 Panelboards mounted in the corridors shall be painted on the exterior to match the wall finish. In this case, interior of panels shall be as above.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 16
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.6 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratch or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.
.7 Clean, prime and paint exposed hangers, racks, fastenings to prevent rusting.
1.36 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1 The mounting height of equipment is measured from the finished floor to the centerline of the equipment unless specified or otherwise indicated.
.2 If the mounting height of any equipment is not indicated, verify the mounting height before proceeding with the installation.
.3 Refer to the Architect’s drawings and specs for mounting heights and final locations.
.4 Install electrical equipment at the following mounting heights unless otherwise indicated.
.1 Local switches: 1200 mm
.2 Wall receptacles:
.1 General: 450 mm
.2 Above top of counters or splash back: 950 mm AFF
.3 In Mechanical rooms: 1200 mm
.3 Telephone outlets: 450 mm
.4 Wall mounted telephone outlets: 1200 mm
.5 Fire alarm stations: 1200 mm
.6 Fire alarm horns, strobes and combination horn/strobes: 2000 mm and not in ceiling where possible and not in suspended ceiling tiles.
.7 Fire alarm bells: 2100 mm and not in ceiling where possible and not in suspended ceiling tiles.
.8 Fire Alarm System end of line resistors as per code requirements. EOL resistor to be grouped in service spaces.
.9 Television outlets: 450 mm unless otherwise noted on Architectural or Electrical drawings.
.10 Wall mounted speakers: 2100 mm
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 17
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.11 Individual starters:
.1 1500 mm to the top
.2 Where multiple starters are mounted together, align the tops of all the starters or trims with the highest starter determining the height.
.12 Splitters: 100 mm below the lowest equipment connected to the splitter.
.13 All device mounting heights and orientation shall be coordinated and confirmed by the Architect prior to installation.
1.37 ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND JUNCTION BOXES
.1 Clear access of a minimum of 1 meter must be provided for all electrical equipment and junction boxes.
.2 All junction boxes must be within 24 inches of an access panel or access luminaire and be easily accessed. The Owner will have final say on this matter.
.3 All electrical boxes that have free sides IE no conduits entering or leaving a side shall be kept clear in order to permit installation of conduits at a later date. Hence free sides of all electrical boxes shall be clear of other conduits and services.
1.38 NEMA RATING
.1 All electrical equipment provided for this project shall be NEMA Rated only. IEC Rated equipment is not acceptable and will not be accepted.
1.39 CONDUIT ENTERING OR LEAVING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1 All conduits entering or leaving electrical equipment shall be provided with sealing gaskets between the conduit connector and the metal surface of the electrical equipment IE a Drip Hood.
1.40 LOCK OFF TABS
.1 Provide lock off tabs on all panel boards for circuits that serve:
.1 Emergency lighting;
.2 Exit lighting;
.3 Fire alarm equipment and
.4 Security equipment.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 18
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.41 FIRESTOPPING
.1 Where cables, sleeves, conduits, cable tray or flextray pass through floors and fire rated walls pack space between wiring and sleeve or opening and seal with 3M fire stopping system that is appropriate. The fire stopping installation must meet one of the approved details as required to meet the assembly of the rated partition or wall etc.Contact the 3M representative to ensure that the installation meet 3M requirements.
.2 Care must be taken to keep integrity of all assemblies. Provide at the end of the project a letter from 3M indicating that the installation meets all requirements.
.3 Meet all requirements of the Ontario Building Code (Latest Edition) and fire proofing requirements as specified within the Contract Documents.
1.42 BASES SUPPORTS
.1 Where conduit and equipment is located on walls or slabs which will not permit the support of equipment, provide suitable supports to the building structure. Supports shall be constructed of steel members or of steel pipe and fittings designed to safely support the equipment.
.2 All equipment bases shall be set on pads of kinetic precompressed fibreglass or vibration isolators sized to suit the equipment which they ought to support.
1.43 INSERTS, SLEEVES AND CURBS
.1 Provide all inserts, sleeves and curbs required for the work of this contract.
.2 Use only factory made threaded or toggle type inserts as required for support and anchors, properly sized for the load to be carried. Place inserts only in portions of the main structure and not in any finishing material.
.3 Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where approved by the Consultant and only for loads of 50 kg or less.
.4 Do not use powder activated tools unless with written permission of the Consultant.
.5 Supply and locate all inserts, holes, anchor bolts and sleeves in time when walls, floors and roof are erected.
.6 Size sleeves to provide 25 mm clearance all round.
.7 Use the following sleeving materials:
.1 Through all interior walls use Schedule 40 steel pipes, machine cut, flush with finished structure. Check room finish schedules.
.2 Through all exterior walls above grade use Schedule 40 steel pipes, machine cut, flush with finished structure inside and to suit flashing on outside.
.3 Through all exterior walls below grade and all other waterproof walls use wrought iron pipes. Check flashing details for further information.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 19
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.4 Through all waterproof floors, through Washrooms, Janitors closets, Boiler rooms, Mechanical rooms, Kitchen and through roofs use wrought iron sleeves, machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm above finished floor upwards and cut flush with underside of floor.
.5 Approved type plastic sleeves, conduit sleeves or 18-gauge galvanized steel sleeves may be used as an alternative for schedule 40 steel sleeves in interior areas.
.6 Extra heavy weight cast iron sleeves or transite sleeves may be used as an alternative for wrought iron sleeves.
.7 Provide 100 mm high, 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs with 20 mm chamfered edges around all sleeves passing through waterproof floors except where furred in.
.8 Sleeves are not required in walls and dry area floors, where conduit is installed ahead of wall construction.
.9 Pack all sleeves between the conduit or cable passing through the sleeve and the sleeve and all spare sleeves with loose fibreglass insulation. Seal the annular space both sides as follows:
.1 For all horizontal sleeves in exposed areas, use a seal of equal or better fire rating than the wall to be sealed.
.2 For all horizontal concealed sleeves through fire walls and through walls separating areas of different air pressure, use a permanently resilient silicone base or equal sealing compound.
.3 For all vertical sleeves through Roofs, Washrooms, Janitor closets, Equipment rooms, use permanently resilient silicone base or equal compound, non- flammable and waterproof. Ensure that the seal is compatible with floor and ceiling finishes. Check the room finish schedules for further information.
.4 The Electrical Contractor to provide sleeving diagrams/drawings to the structural consultant for review and approval prior to any work commencing.
1.44 CONDUIT INSTALLATION IN SLABS, WALLS AND FLOORS
.1 Refer to structural specification and meet all requirements in relation to conduit penetrations through walls and slabs.
.2 Cast in slab conduits shall be used only for branch wirings. Feeder conduits shall be surface mounted.
.3 Submit shop drawings of proposed conduits in-slab for review by structural and electrical.
.4 It is acceptable that conduits may be run under the slab on grade only.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 20
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 Feeder conduits shall be surface mounted within the ceiling space or run within walls and columns that have been furred out.
.6 Only conduit shall be provided in all walls. BX shall only be permitted for a drop to a lighting fixture only.
1.45 FLASHING
.1 Coordinate with requirements for roofing, waterproofing and flashing with the Roofing Contractor.
.2 Flash electrical parts passing through or built into a roof, an outside wall or a waterproof floor.
.3 Provide 8-pound sheet lead flashing for cast iron or wrought iron sleeves passing through roof.
.4 Flashing shall suit roof angle and shall extend minimum 450 mm on all sides. Leave flashing as directed by the Contractor for him to build into roofing, rendering a watertight connection.
.5 Provide counter flashing on stacks, ducts and pipes passing through roof to fit over flashing or curb.
.6 Provide sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashing as directed.
.7 Pay special attention to the waterproofing conditions of basements and walls and floors that may exist. Cooperate at all times with the Waterproofing and Concrete contractors and do not cut or destroy any waterproofing seal without the consent of same. Provide sleeves passing through waterproof walls with asphalt roofing felt wrapped around so as to leave a 25 mm x 50 mm recess on both sides of the wall. Seal recesses and the space between conduit and sleeve.
.8 Provide a seal between cables and cable sleeves after installation is complete. Seal all spare sleeves.
1.46 CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1 The Electrical Contractor shall employ the particular trades to do all required cutting and patching and repairing of surfaces for his work.
.2 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a location and manner as directed by the Consultant or the Structural Consultant.
.3 All holes and surfaces shall be repaired with the type of material removed by the tradesmen expert in the type of repair required.
.4 Provide fire barriers around all components in holes which penetrate fire separations. The fire barrier medium provided shall make the fire separation equal to or better than the one which was cut away. All materials shall be CSA approved and UL listed.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 21
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 All floor sawcutting and drilling required for electrical services are to be performed within hours approved by the Lakehead University. Prior written notice of 48-hours must be given to the Lakehead University.
.6 Criteria for Cutting Holes for New Electrical Services.
.1 Cut holes through slabs only. No holes to be cut through beams.
.2 Holes to be cut are 150 mm diameter or smaller only. Larger holes, if required, have to be approved by the structural engineer.
.3 Keep at least 100 mm clear from all beam faces.
.4 Space at least 3 hole diameters on center.
.5 For holes that are required closer than 25% of slab span from the supporting beam face, use cover meter above the slab to clear slab top bars.
.6 For holes that are required within 50% of slab span, use cover meter underside of slab to clear slab bottom bars.
.7 Submit sleeving drawings indicating all holes and their locations for structural engineer's review.
1.47 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
.1 Install concealed electrical equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on "Record" drawings.
.2 Provide other Trades with panels, doors or the frame therefore, complete with all pertinent information for installation. Supply to Trade in whose work they occur to install them. Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building material grids where applicable.
.3 Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of access doors in coordination with other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Consultant for review.
.4 Size access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of structure and architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide minimum 610 mm x 460 mm size doors.
.5 Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 22
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.6 Access doors shall be Le Hage, SMS, Pedlar or Acudor with 14 U.S. gauge steel door panel, rust resistant concealed hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver operated lock. Frame shall be suitable for wall installation and shall have integral keys for plaster walls. Doors in tile wall shall be stainless steel and ceilings shall be suitable for plaster covering with only the frame joint showing. All other doors shall be prime painted steel. Minimum size of doors shall be 12" x 18" (300 mm x 450 mm). Wherever possible 24" x 24" (600 mm x 600 mm) doors shall be used.
.7 Lay-in type tiles, properly marked, may serve as access panels. Marking of ceiling tiles must be coordinated with the Owner.
.8 Panels in glazed tile walls shall be 12 gauge, 304 alloy stainless steel, No.4 finish, with recessed frame secured with stainless steel counter-sunk flush head screws.
.9 Panels in plaster surfaces shall have dish-shaped door and welded metal lath, ready to take plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
.10 Other access doors shall be welded 12 gauge steel, flush type with concealed hinges, lock and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat. Obtain approval of non- standard door construction details.
1.48 PAINTING AND STENCILLING
.1 All hangers, channels, conduits, etc. shall be delivered to the site galvanized after fabrication and all metal cut and finishes damaged on the job shall be painted to match.
.2 All equipment and materials, panels, luminaires, etc., shall be stored in a dry, secure, clean and covered location, necessary to preserve factory finish.
.3 Where equipment and material is designated unfinished, all exposed metal work, with the exception of chromed locks and hardware, shall be left with a suitable prime coat finish.
.4 Painting of equipment and material requiring a finished coat after installation will be carried out under Section 09900. This does not apply to the making good of damaged factory finishes which shall be done by the Electrical Contractor.
1.49 NUMBER AND LOCATION OF OUTLETS
.1 Provide outlets for light, power and systems of the number and in the locations shown on the drawings. Locate all outlets accurately with respect to building lines and in centering outlets due allowance shall be made for overhead pipes, ducts, equipment and for variations in wall or ceiling finishes, window trim, panelling, etc. When necessary, make adjustments to ensure that all outlets are properly centered.
.2 Install local lighting switches installed on the strike side of the door as finally set and accept responsibility for determining this before outlet boxes are installed.
.3 The location of any outlet may be changed without extra cost or credit providing that the new location is within 3 metres of that originally shown on the drawings and that instructions for the change are issued before installation of the outlet.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 23
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.4 Do not mount outlet boxes in walls and partitions back-to-back and provide a minimum of 150 mm between boxes. Provide acoustic insulating medium in conduits which join boxes on opposite sides of same wall or partition.
1.50 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
.1 Lighting and power panels are specified as sequence bussed and all branch circuit wiring for these panels shall be such that, where a common neutral is used for two or three circuits these circuits shall be fed from adjacent breakers so that single-pole breakers may be replaced with two or three pole breakers should this be so required in the future. All circuits shall be balanced. Minimum neutral size shall be No. #10 AWG. Each branch conduit shall be provided with a separate #12 AWG ground wire minimum.
.1 All lighting circuits that are dimmed shall be provided with its own No. 10 AWG neutral conductor.
.2 The following shall be used with respect to branch circuit wire sizing for voltage drop from the circuits associated panel board:
.1 #12 AWG to be used from 0 to 80 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.2 #10 AWG to be used from 80 to 130 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.3 #8 AWG to be used from 130 to 220 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.3 The Electrical Contractor shall up size feeder and branch circuit wiring and associated conduit as required to meet the requirements of the code with respect to acceptable voltage drop.
.4 A maximum of a 3% voltage drop is acceptable on all branch circuits from power and lighting panelboards.
.5 A maximum of a 2% voltage drop is acceptable on all feeders.
.6 With respect to item 4 and 5 above a maximum voltage drop from point of incoming electrical service to the end point of a branch circuit shall not exceed a maximum of 5% as per the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
1.51 VOLTAGE RATINGS
.1 Provide operating voltages in accordance with Standard CAN3-C235-83.
.2 Motors, electrical heating, control and distribution devices and equipment must operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within the normal operating limits established by the above standard. Equipment must operate in the extreme operating conditions established in the above standard without damage to any equipment.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 24
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.52 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
.1 Wire connectors shall be of an approved type.
.1 Pre-insulated spring type, consisting of coil of steel wire, hard steel shell and flexible polyvinyl insulation with long skirt extended beyond the bell end of the spring.
.2 Tinned, copper compression type installed using the manufacturer's recommended tools and dies, and with positive locking insulating cap.
.2 Use compression type tinned copper terminals for all conductor terminations except where bolted type terminals are supplied with equipment, such terminals to be of copper tinned overall.
1.53 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT WIRING
.1 Provide power wiring connection and, fittings external to all motors, machines, starters, control panels, etc., supplied under this and all other contracts except as noted herein.
.2 Power wiring will include but not be limited to all raceways, conduits, lugs, fittings, disconnect switches, auxiliary devices for 3-phase 600 V, and 3-phase 208V motors, 1-phase 208V, and 1-phase 120V motors. All wiring to be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
.3 The equipment of the Mechanical contract shall generally have all control wiring provided by that contract in accordance with the methods and materials specified under the Electrical Specification. Exceptions to this include equipment provided by this contract which must interface into the Mechanical contract control circuit. This contract shall wire devices into the Mechanical contract control circuit and co-operate with Mechanical Contractor regarding testing, locations, etc. Examples of this interface include Fire Alarm Systems interconnection, dimming switching system inter-connection, security system interconnection, etc.
.4 Where control devices are line voltage, receive these devices from the Contractor providing that system, install all power wiring to the devices and install the devices.
.5 The use of "lock off stop" devices will not be permitted. Provide disconnect switches for all motors that are 9 m or greater away from the motor starter or if the distance is less, provide disconnect switches for the motors where the motor starter is not visible.
.6 Control wiring includes the wiring of all control devices that are connected into control circuits of motor starters and into motor power feeders. Wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturers wiring diagrams and instructions. This includes computer equipment, overhead doors, dock levellers, security systems, etc.
.7 Refer to and meet the requirements the mechanical and electrical coordination responsibilities.
.8 Refer to Section 16811, 16820 and 16825 and meet all requirements.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 25
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.54 GUARANTEE
.1 In accordance with Article GC27 of the General Conditions of the Contract, provide a one year unconditional guarantee on all labour and material from the date of acceptance of the project under this contract, except where warranties on certain items extend beyond one (1) year. In this case, the extended warranty shall be honoured.
1.55 CASH FLOW CHART
.1 Provide a cash flow chart in bar graph form which clearly reflects the monthly progress draws during the duration of this project. This to be submitted two (2) weeks after Award of Contract.
1.56 CONTRACTORS DISCLOSURE
.1 The Contractor shall disclose any legal action pending which may affect his performance on this project, or dispute with any supplier specified in this specification. This information must be disclosed prior to bidding on this project.
1.57 STAFF TRAINING
.1 Each electrical system of the complex will be demonstrated to the Owner's Representatives as many times as required until the Owner is satisfied that they clearly understand the system operation. As well, provide video tape training programs all power and communications systems.
.1 Fire alarm.
.2 Switching, dimming and lighting control.
.3 Lighting Systems including fixtures, ballast and lamps.
.4 Power distribution equipment to include all panels and distribution centres for both normal and emergency power.
.5 Provide an overview of the complete normal and emergency power distribution system.
.6 Data and Voice communication systems.
.7 Security.
.8 Specialties.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16010 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISION SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 26
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1.58 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CO-ORDINATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
.1 The following is a list of Mechanical and Electrical Contractor responsibilities for the above mentioned project.
.1 All starters, motor control centres, etc., along with input and output power wiring will be by the Electrical Contractor. This is with the exception of package units.
.2 Mechanical Equipment Package units will have integral starters (provided by the Mechanical Contractor) and only power feeders and fire alarm interface will be provided by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on the drawings.
.3 The Electrical Contractor to provide all remote disconnect switches.
.4 All control wiring (including BAS), except fire alarm, shall be by the Mechanical Contractor. This also includes Mechanical 120 volt control wiring.
.5 Voltages for motors ½ HP and larger will be 600V 3-phase. Anything smaller will be 120V single phase or 208V 1 or 3-phase.
.6 All multi-speed motors to be consequent pole.
.7 All motors shall be by the Mechanical Contractor.
.8 The Electrical Contractor shall provide manual reset devices for motor starters for thermistor interface. (Only for starters those are provided by the Electrical Contractor).
.9 All fire alarm work to be completed by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor will provide all relays for interface to control wiring for fan shutdown and fan start up for air handling units used as part of the smoke control system(s), etc.
.10 Mechanical Contractor to provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor for all of their microprocessor based equipment, i.e., BAS, etc.
.11 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the Electrical Contractor with locations where power circuits are required for mechanical control systems i.e., BAS panels, etc.
.12 Should the Mechanical Contractor change or modify motor sizes from what is reflected on the Bid Documents during any stage of this project, they will be responsible to cover all associated electrical costs. Such as revised motor starter and feeds etc.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16011 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL; FULL AND PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OF AREAS.
.1 The following are the Occupancy requirements for full and partial occupancy of areas.
.2 Partial occupancy and occupancy will be provided as requirement for turn over of each phase or partial phase of work that has been completed and areas as required by the Owner in order to maintain function of the building and there operations. Warranties will be as per the signed contract.
.3 The requirements below shall be completed two weeks prior to the scheduled turn over date and all required documentation shall be submitted to the Owner and the Consultant for review and comments. At a minimum the above must be submitted two week prior to the scheduled turn-over date.
.4 Provide a copy of the ESA Hydro Completion and Final Clearance Certificate.
.5 Provide a letter confirming that fire proofing has been installed in area(s) that are to be occupied.
.6 Distribution Equipment labelling has been completed.
.7 Provide a letter confirming that the Labelling of Emergency Power Light Fixtures has been completed.
.8 Submission of the Project Field Working and Record Drawings for the area(s) to be occupied has been completed and they have been reviewed and accepted.
.9 Recording and provision of Fire Alarm System address for the fire alarm system are shown on the Record Drawings.
.10 Panel schedules are typed and installed within the panels.
.11 Provide a letter confirming that the Emergency lighting has been tested and the light levels that are present meet Building Code Requirements.
.12 Exit lighting system has been tested and meets Building Code Requirements.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16011 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION ELECTRICAL OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.13 Lighting test reports for Emergency Lighting Battery Packs (Areas covered by Battery Units) have been submitted and meet Building Code Requirements.
.14 Provide a completed Fire alarm verification report with no deficiencies. Should the Fire Alarm Vendor have recommendations regarding the system that do not affect the verification document this is to be submitted for review by means of a separate letter.
.15 Conduct Audibility Test’s for the fire alarm system and provide separate letter that audibility requirements have been met as per the Building Code Requirements.
.16 Provide a letter confirming that the Fire Alarm System has be connected to a CSA monitoring station as per Code Requirements.
.17 Provide a letter confirming that interface of fire alarm system to any Dimming system has been completed and tested and is operating as per design and code requirements.
.18 Provide a letter confirming interface of fire alarm system to Security system completed and tested and is operating as per design and code requirements.
.19 Provide a letter confirming interface of the fire alarm system to Mechanical equipment has been completed and tested and is operating as per the design and code requirements.
1.2 COMMISSIONING
.1 Performance testing of equipment by the electrical contractor ensuring a working system and the requirement and Manufactures recommendations has been completed and there are no deficiencies.
1.3 GENERAL
.1 Temporary exit signage has been installed and is operating as required to support the phase of work being turned over.
.2 Provide a letter confirming that the Owner has received any spare part such as fuses etc.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCE
.1 Read and be governed by Definitions, Conditions of the Contract and Amendments or Supplements including Division 0, Division 1, and Agreement between Lakehead University and the Contractor, and General Conditions of Contract and Supplementary General Conditions.
.2 Refer to and meet all requirements of Lakehead University Contractors Package.
1.2 FACILITIES SHUT DOWN REQUIREMENTS.
.1 In order that construction work can be carried out in a timely and orderly manner. The following are the Faculties Shut Down Requirements procedures for this project. The attached forms shall be used by the Electrical Contractor for this project with respect to requesting shut downs of the Normal and Emergency Power Distribution Systems, as well as requesting that Fire Alarm System Zones or Portions of the Fire Alarm System are to be By-Passed.
.2 The completed Request Form(s) shall be submitted to the University and a copy to the General Contractor Fifteen (15) working days in advance of the requested shut down date or fire alarm zone by-pass. The Owner will respond by completing their portion of the request form and return it back to the Electrical Contractor; Five (5) days prior to the contractors requested shut down date or fire alarm system work. Owner shall also provide a copy of the completed request form(s) to the General Contractor.
.3 If work is required to be conducted within a Confined Space meet all requirements of the latest Ministry of Labour standards and guidelines. The Electrical Contractor is to submit a copy of their Confined Space Work Procedures to the Owner and the Consultant for review.
.4 The Electrical Contractor is to submit a copy of their Lockout Procedures to the Owner and the Consultant for review. Lockout Procedures must include all requirements of the latest Ministry of Labour standards and guidelines.
.5 Require of this project is that the Electrical Contractor will provide lockout tags that have a picture of the individual and their name who’s lock has been installed.
.6 Temporary wiring that must be provided in order to meet the needs of electrical shut downs must meet all requires of the latest Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
.7 All shutdowns are to be scheduled after hours on weekends.
.8 The Electrical Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule for power shut downs that reflect as a minimum: Time Description of
Work to be Completed
Resources required to complete the work
Coordination with other trades and the Owner
Remarks
Time shall be broken down into 15 minute intervals
Provide a detailed description of the actives to be completed during the time interval
Provide a detailed list of resources required to completed the work
Provide detail of items and issues that need to be coordinated in order to complete the work
Provide additional comments as required
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY FIRE PANEL SHUT DOWN / BY-PASS REQUEST FORM
Date of Request: Time of Request: Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown: Person Requesting Shutdown: Signature: Request: Reason:
Date Request Received: Date Reviewed - Accepted/Denied: Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed: From Date: Hrs To Date: Hrs Taking Zone/Area Out of Service Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service: Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition Room/Area: back in service at hrs by: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Physical Plant Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored: Name of Physical Plant : Physical Plant Advised By: Signature Work Completed: Date: Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY SECURITY SYSTEM SHUT DOWN / BY-PASS REQUEST FORM
Date of Request: Time of Request: Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown: Person Requesting Shutdown: Signature: Request: Reason:
Date Request Received: Date Reviewed – Accepted/Denied: Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed: From Date: Hrs To Date: Hrs Taking Zone/Area Out of Service Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service: Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition Room/Area: back in service at hrs by: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Physical Plant Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored: Name of Physical Plant: Physical Plant Advised By: Signature Work Completed: Date: Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY DATA/VOICE SYSTEM SHUT DOWN / BY-PASS REQUEST FORM
Date of Request: Time of Request: Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown: Person Requesting Shutdown: Signature: Request: Reason:
Date Request Received: Date Reviewed: - Accepted/Denied Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed: From Date: Hrs To Date: Hrs Taking Zone/Area Out of Service Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service: Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition Room/Area: back in service at hrs by: (Physical Plant Operations Employee)
Physical Plant Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored: Name of Physical Plant: Physical Plant Advised By: Signature Work Completed: Date: Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM SHUT DOWN / BY-PASS REQUEST FORM
Date of Request: Time of Request: Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown: Person Requesting Shutdown: Signature: Request: Reason: Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed: From Date: Hrs To Date: Hrs
Date Request Received: Date Reviewed: - Accepted/Denied Taking Zone/Area Out of Service Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service: Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition Room/Area: back in service at hrs by: (Physical Plant Operations Staff)
Protection Services Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored: Name of Physical Plant: Physical Plant Advised By: Signature Work Completed: Date: Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 6
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY REQUEST FOR SHUTDOWN OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
REQUESTED BY: DATE: TIME (Electrical Contractor)
CONTACT PERSON: (Electrical Contractor)
PHONE # : PAGER #: AREA AFFECTED: (By Electrical Contractor)
WORK PROCEDURE AND RISKS: (By Electrical Contractor)
DURATION OF SHUTDOWN
APPROVALS: PHYSICAL PLANT OPERATIONS REPRESENTATIVE DATE
UNIVERSITY’S PROJECT MANAGER DATE
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16012 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 7
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AFFECTED
List equipment Names:
SIGNATURE WORK COMPLETED DATE:
Note: 1. The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner. 2. Meet the requirements of providing a detailed schedule as covered in Item 1.2.7. of this
specification section.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Prime Contractor shall prepare and maintain an electronic project schedule using as a minimum the Latest Version of MS Project. The schedule shall integrate all of their Sub-contractors and Vendors.
.2 The Prime Contractor shall coordinate with the Project Manager and ensure that the software employed by the Sub-contractor will be compatible with the Prime Contractors scheduling software. If it is required the Sub-Contractors will purchase a copy of the scheduling software used by the Prime Contractor to ensure the information can be integrated into the overall project schedule.
.3 The Prime Contractor will maintain and update schedule on a bi weekly / weekly basis as per the contract requirements. The schedule shall be provided to the consultant and Project Manager every time the schedule is updated in a hard copy and well as an electronic copy. Copies of the Schedule shall be provided as a minimum at every site meeting.
.4 The Sub-contractors will maintain and update the schedule on a bi weekly or weekly basis as per the contract requirements. The schedule shall be provided to the Prime Contractor every time the schedule is updated for inclusion in the overall project schedule.
.5 The schedule shall be based upon the Critical Path Method and reflect linkages to one task before and after.
.6 The schedule shall be available two weeks after the instructions have been given by the Consultant or Project Manager to proceed with the project.
.7 Schedule shall include the following as a minimum:
.1 The Schedule shall provide a one month detailed look ahead.
.2 The Schedule shall reflect resources required to meet each defined task.
.3 The Schedule shall reflect where there is float within it.
.4 The Schedule shall reflect slippage and provide a plan as how to recover in order to get back on schedule.
.5 The Schedule shall reflect as a minimum the following:
.1 All Construction Service Requirements;
.2 Demolition Requirements;
.3 Site Services;
.4 Project Phasing / Staging / Turnovers;
.5 Time required for areas to be turned over to the Owner;
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.6 Field Working Drawings Preparation;
.7 Mechanical and Electrical Rough-in;
.8 Installation of Major Services;
.9 Installation of Branch Services;
.10 Installation of Equipment Owner and with in the contract;
.11 Installation of each system;
.12 Installation control systems;
.13 Key dates and timing for interface with other contractors and vendors.
.14 Testing Dates;
.15 Facilities Management System (FSM);
.16 Building Management System (BMS);
.17 Instrumentation testing dates and associated requirements;
.18 Inspections Dates;
.19 Commissioning Dates and Durations;
.20 Validation Dates and Durations;
.21 Owners Staff Training;
.22 Shut down requests and durations:
.23 Major Service On Dates;
.24 Activation of key systems dates;
.25 Services such as Power switch over dates etc;
.26 Shop drawings submissions;
.27 Any approvals required;
.28 Equipment deliveries;
.29 Dates when mock ups will be available and
.30 Time required for project close.
.8 The Prime Contractor and his Sub-contractors / Vendors at each project meeting will provide a detailed two week look ahead schedule this shall be separate from the schedule noted in the above items of this document. The two week look ahead schedule shall
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
provide as a minimum the following information:
.1 The area or areas that will be worked in;
.2 The activities in detail to be completed in the noted areas of work;
.3 The manpower that will be allocated to complete the work;
.4 Confirmation that the required equipment; material and resources are on site in order to complete the work.
.5 That the required coordination has occurred with other Trades / Vendors / Sub-contractors or other Stand Alone Projects in order to complete the planned work.
.6 Confirmation that all work will be conducted in normal hours of operation or approval has been received to work off hours.
.7 Requests for any required shut downs have been reviewed and approved.
.8 There are no outstanding issues that will affect the completion of the planned work.
.9 The Electrical Contractor shall also prepare in a detailed equipment status report this shall be based upon the creation of an Excel Spreadsheet. As a minimum the spreadsheet shall provide the following.
.10 Equipment Tag / Name
.11 Status Installed or not installed
.12 Required infrastructure in place
.13 Primary protection device installed
.14 Line side wiring provided
.15 Line side wiring terminated
.16 Secondary side wiring provided
.17 Secondary side wiring terminated
.18 Secondary protection device in stalled
.19 List required interfaced and status of interfacing
.20 List of required tests to be completed and status of tests.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16013 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.21 Planned testing dates
.22 List of commissioning required and status of commissioning
.23 Planned commissioning dates
.24 List of training required
.25 Planned training date
.26 Planned in service date
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16020 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OPERATING MAINTENANCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Provide operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of this section and Division 1.
.2 Submit the number of manuals as indicated.
.3 Provide the services of electricians, manufacturers’ representatives and technicians required to provide information which is necessary for the manuals. Note that a substantial completion certificate will not be issued until such a time as the manuals have been submitted in their final accepted form.
.4 Operating and maintenance data shall be submitted to the Consultant for review. A list of comments will be generated and returned to the Contractor as necessary. This process will continue until the manuals are acceptable to the Consultant.
.5 The manuals shall be set up by the specification section. Provide all information appropriate for each section.
.1 Inspection Certificates;
.2 Letter of Guarantee;
.3 List of Suppliers & Contacts;
.4 Lighting Systems including fixtures, ballasts, lamps;
.5 Switching and Dimming Systems;
.6 Wiring Devices;
.7 Fire Alarm Systems;
.8 Communication Systems;
.9 Specialties.
1.2 DATA FOR OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Only data associated with actually installed systems should be included in Operating and Maintenance manuals.
.2 Include in operations and maintenance data:
.1 Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of installation.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16020 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OPERATING MAINTENANCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded views, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising or sales literature is not acceptable.
.3 Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves.
.4 Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance manuals.
.5 Copy of reviewed shop drawings.
.6 Copies of all certificates including: a) Hydro final certificate, b) Life safety systems verification certificate and test and commissioning reports.
1.3 GENERAL TESTS
.1 Conduct tests of the following systems:
.1 All circuits, including power, data, control and communications circuits.
.2 Lighting and associated controls.
.3 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment.
.4 All systems.
.2 Give sufficient prior notice to the Consultant of the proposed time of the tests so that he can be represented at the tests if he so decides. Submit all test reports in triplicate to the Consultant for his review and records.
.3 Submit test results with all operation and maintenance data.
.4 Test all systems in accordance with details in appropriate sections.
.5 Testing methods and test results shall be in accordance with CSA, the Electrical Code and regulations of the supply authority, other authorities having jurisdiction and in accordance with other sections of these Specifications.
.6 Remove and replace with new materials all conductors that are found to be shorted or grounded.
.7 With the systems completely connected and lamped, the following tests shall be made:
.1 Control and Switching - test all circuits for the correct operation of devices, switches and controls.
.2 Polarity Tests - test all circuits for the correct operation of devices, switches and controls.
.3 Voltage Tests - make a voltage test at the last outlet of each circuit. The maximum drop in potential permitted will be 3% on 120V, 208V and 600V branch
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16020 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OPERATING MAINTENANCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
circuits, 2% on 208V and 600V feeder circuits and 2% on feeder circuits serving Motor Control Centres. Correct any deficiency in this regard.
.4 Phase Balance - measure the load on each phase at each switchboard, splitter, distribution panel, lighting panel and power panel and report the results in writing to the Consultant. Re-arrange phase connections as necessary to balance the load on each phase as instructed by the Consultant, with the re-arrangement being restricted to the exchanging of connections at the distribution points mentioned in this paragraph. After making any such changes, update the record drawings and as-built drawings to show the modified connections.
.5 Supply Voltage - measure the line voltage of each phase at the load terminals of the main breakers and report the results in writing to the Consultant. This test shall be carried out with the majority of electrical equipment in use.
.6 Motor Loading - measure the line current of each phase of each motor with the motor operating under load and report the results in writing to the Consultant. Upon indication of any imbalance or overload, thoroughly examine the electrical connections and rectify any defective parts or wiring. If electrical connections are correct, overloads due to defects in the driven machines shall be reported in writing to the Consultant.
.7 General Operations - energize and put into operation each and every electrical circuit and item. Make repairs, alterations, replacements, tests and adjustments necessary for a complete and satisfactory operating electrical system.
.8 Test all systems and obtain written confirmation from the manufacturer of each system that all components have been installed correctly and that the system is functioning properly. Present separate certification for all systems: fire alarm, power distribution, IPC units, etc., to the Consultant.
.9 Provide labour, instruments, apparatus and pay all expenses required for the tests. The Consultant reserves the right to demand proof of the accuracy of all instruments used.
.10 When the tests are performed, the Consultant may require that equipment, outlets, devices, etc., be opened and/or removed from their housings and/or outlet boxes in order that the interior of the equipment and wiring terminations and connections may be examined. Provide all labour and tools for this purpose.
.11 The testing of motors shall be coordinated with the trades providing the equipment driven by the motors so that they are carried out at the time the driven equipment is put on test. In addition to the tests called for in motor loading above, provide labour and instruments to take and record all motor load readings required to supplement the tests on the driven equipment through various load sequences, as required by the trades involved.
.1 Complete the following Electrical Testing:
.1 Measure contact resistance for each phase with a micro-ohmmeter and compare these values to adjacent poles and similar breakers.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16020 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OPERATING MAINTENANCE SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 Measure insulation resistance at the appropriate test value, each pole to ground, between phases and across open contacts of each phase with a DC test potential.
.3 Verify proper operation including spring charge motor, closing operation, shunt trip and ground fault operation.
.4 Verify operation by control switch and protective relays.
.5 Test the trip unit by secondary current injection, if applicable.
1.4 CARE, OPERATION, START-UP, AND TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
.1 Instruct operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of equipment.
.2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service representative to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components.
.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16104 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION NAMEPLATES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Comply with the requirements of Electrical General Provisions Section 16010.
.2 Operations Maintenance Section 16020.
.3 Voice and Data Communication System Section 16740.
2 Products
2.1 NAMEPLATES
.1 Construct all nameplates from laminated plastic having a black core with a white top lamination such that engraving through the top lamination will reveal black lettering on a white background.
.2 Construct all warning and emergency power nameplates from laminated plastic having a white core with a red top lamination such that engraving through the top lamination will reveal red lettering on a white background.
2.2 SIZES
.1 Provide nameplates of the sizes indicated. Where a size is not given, provide a standard size nameplate of sufficient size to contain the text indicated.
.2 Where a numerical size is indicated, provide a nameplate of a size as indicated in the table below. Provide lettering of the height indicated below unless another size is indicated.
Size Width (mm)
Height (mm)
First Line Lettering Height (mm)
Following Lines Lettering Height (mm)
1 50 25 13 -
1A 50 25 7.5 7.5
2 75 50 13 10
3 75 50 10 7.5
4 100 50 25 10
5 125 75 13 10
6 200 100 25 10
.3 Provide lettering of the height indicated. Where no height is indicated, provide lettering 10 mm high for the first line and 7.5 mm high for all following lines.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16104 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION NAMEPLATES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2.3
2.4 WARNING NAMEPLATES
.1 Type "A", width = 100 mm , height = 100 mm (Text height in millimetres in brackets).
DISCONNECT ALL POWER .............................................................. (10)
SOURCES BEFORE SERVICING ....................................................... (10)
THIS EQUIPMENT ............................................................................... (10)
Execution
2.5 INSTALLATION
.1 Coordinate final nameplate design, colour and nomenclature with the Lakehead University services prior to ordering of nameplates.
.2 Install nameplates on the front of the equipment on a prominent flat surface. Attach the nameplates with non-rusting screws.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16109 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING METHODS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010.
.2 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Fittings: Section 16111.
.3 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: Section 16116.
.4 Wires and Cables Up to 1000V: Section 16122.
.5 Splitters, Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes and Cabinets: Section 16131.
.6 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: Section 16132.
.7 Wire and Box Connectors Up to 1000V: Section 16151.
.8 Telephone and Data Communications Raceway System: Section 16741.
.9 Security Raceway System: Section 16742
.10 Audio Visual Raceway System: Section 16743
2 Products
NIL
3 Execution
3.1 120/208V DISTRIBUTION AND 120/208V LIGHTING
.1 Wire in conduit for all feeders and feeds to mechanical equipment.
.2 Wire in conduit for power branch circuits.
.3 Wire and conduit shall be provided for all services for this project.
.4 Wire in conduit for lighting circuits. Final drops to luminaires may be made with Type AC90 cable or wire in conduit. No runs of type AC90 cable shall exceed 3 meters in length. AC90 where used shall be provided with an integral insulated ground wire.
.5 Wire in conduit for dimming systems.
.6 Provide separate minimum No. 12 AWG insulated green ground wire in all conduit runs.
.7 Provide a separate No. 10 AWG neutral wire for all circuits.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16109 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING METHODS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
3.2 600/347V LIGHTING
.1 Wire in conduit for all feeders and feeds to mechanical equipment.
.2 Wire in conduit for power branch circuits.
.3 Wire in conduit for lighting circuits. Final drops to luminaries may be made with Type AC90 cable or wire in conduit. No runs of Type AC90 cable shall exceed 3-meters in length.
.4 Provide separate minimum No. 12 AWG green insulated ground wire in all conduit and runs.
.5 Provide a separate No. 10 AWG neutral wire for all lighting circuits.
3.3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
.1 Wire in conduit with approved fire rating per authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Wiring as per selected CHUBB Edwards requirements.
.3 Flexible connections to supervised valves, pressure switches, flow switches, smoke dampers, etc.
3.4 TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
.1 Provide blank coverplates on existing outlets as noted on drawings and provide conduit, boxes and wiring for all new outlets.
.2 Refer to Specification Section 16741 and meet all requirements.
.3 Provide pull cord in conduit system.
3.5 MOTOR AND CONTROL WIRING
.1 Wire in conduit. This requirement applies to Mechanical Contractor and the Electrical Contractor. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Coordination section in Sections 16010, 16811, 16820 and Section 16825.
3.6 1TRANSFORMERS AND MOTORS
.1 Provide flexible conduit (sealtight) connections on line and load side of all transformers and motors wiring.
3.7 1.3 BX CABLING
.1 BX shall only be used for final drops to light fixtures only and the drop shall not exceed 3 meters.
.2 BX is not to be permitted for any other use on this project.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16111 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010
.2 Wiring Methods: Section 16109
1.2 LOCATION OF CONDUIT
.1 The drawings do not show all conduits. Those shown are in diagrammatic form only. Conduits are to be provided to create complete raceway systems.
.2 Conduits for branch circuit wiring shall be installed within slabs, concrete walls or columns. Feeder circuits shall be surface mounted.
1.3 NUMBER AND SIZES OF CONDUITS
.1 Conduits to be provided shall be as indicated on documents and/or as required to suit requirements of systems installed.
2 Products
2.1 CONDUITS
.1 Rigid, Schedule 40, galvanized steel threaded conduit of the size as indicated and required to CSA C22.2 No. 45.1-07.
.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2 No.83-M1985 (R2008).
.3 Rigid schedule 40 PVC conduit of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2 No.211.2-06.
.4 Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2 No.56-04.
.5 Electrical non-metallic tubing, flexible and flexible liquid-tite included, of the sizes indicated and required to C.S.A. C22.2 No.227.1-06, No.227.2.1-04 and No.227.3-05.
.6 Do not use conduits smaller than 3/4" unless specifically detailed in these documents.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16111 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1 One hole malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized straps to secure surface mounted conduits. Thomas & Betts series 1275 for rigid, threaded conduit and Thomas & Betts Series 4176 for EMT complete with properly sized pan head screw.
.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel members.
.3 Provide 12 gauge galvanized steel “U” channel type supports for two or more conduits on minimum 1500 mm centres. Use suitable conduit clamps in channel.
.4 Provide 6 mm dia. threaded rods to support the suspended channels.
2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1 Fittings manufactured for use with the conduit specified with the same coating as conduit.
.2 Provide insulated bushings on all rigid, threaded conduits.
.3 Provide insulated steel set screw connectors and couplings for all EMT conduits 2" and smaller, Thomas & Betts series.
.4 Provide nylon insulated concrete tight steel set screw connectors and couplings for EMT conduits 2" and smaller installed in cast-in-place concrete. Thomas & Betts 5031 and 5030 Series.
.5 Provide nylon insulated steel set screw couplings and connectors for all EMT conduits 2-1/2" and larger, Thomas & Betts.
.6 Provide double locknuts and a nylon insulated bushing for schedule 40 conduit connections to sheet steel boxes and enclosures.
.7 Cast Fitting shall not be used on this project.
2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1 Weatherproof expansion fittings with an integral bonding assembly suitable for a 100 mm linear expansion.
.2 Watertight expansion fittings with an integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and a 20 mm deflection in all directions.
2.5 FISH CORD
.1 Provide fish cords to be minimum 3 mm polypropylene in all feeder and branch conduit runs.
.2 Provide fish cords to be minimum 3 mm polypropylene in all systems conduit runs.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16111 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install all conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and to cause minimum interference in the spaces through which they pass.
.2 Conduits for branch circuit wiring shall be installed with in slabs, columns or concrete walls.
.3 Conceal all conduits except in unfinished areas unless otherwise indicated.
.4 Do not surface mount conduits on building exterior surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
.5 Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.6 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 3/4" dia.
.7 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.8 Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.9 Run 2-2" spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these conduits in 12" x 12” junction boxes at top of wall above panel. Box to be selected to suit finish required.
.10 Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section.
.11 Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.12 Use rigid, threaded Schedule 40, galvanized steel threaded conduit where specified .
.13 Use rigid PVC conduit underground for duct bank or otherwise shown within the confines of all applicable codes.
.14 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) in general areas except in cast concrete and below 2.4 m above finished floor where not subject to mechanical injury.
.15 Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors and transformers, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures without a prewired outlet box, connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures and work in movable metal partitions.
.16 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors, transformers etc.
.17 Use flexible conduit (seal tight) connects on line and load side of all transformers.
.18 Box offsets must be provided where conduits terminate at a junction box or piece of electrical equipment or distribution.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16111 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 PAGE 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
3.2 PVC CONDUITS
.1 PVC conduits may be bent in the field using approved electrical heating devices or by using the appropriate bends. Damaged or improper bends shall be replaced. All joints shall be made using an approved coupling with solvent welds. Clean all joints with solvent cleaner prior to applying the solvent. Liberally apply the solvent to the conduit fitting, force the conduit into the fitting and rotate the conduit 45 degrees within the flange to form a tight bond. Allow proper curing time.
.2 All scorched PVC conduit shall be removed.
3.3 SURFACE CONDUITS
.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2 Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance.
.3 Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.
.5 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as permitted.
.6 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with a minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.
3.4 CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls and partition.
3.5 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1 Slope conduits to provide drainage.
.2 Waterproof joints (PVC excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
.3 All PVC conduits shall be installed under the slab on grade.
.4 All paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather proofing system must have VOC contents less than the limits listed in Section 01 60 13 LEED® Product Requirements, Paragraph 2.06A.
3.6 EXTERIOR
.1 Run conduit to exterior equipment as detailed.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16122 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 NIL
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.
1.3 STANDARDS
.1 TECK 90 cables to CSA Standard C22.2 No.131-M89.
.2 Thermostat Insulated Wires and Cables to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 38-M1986.
.3 Armoured Cable to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 51-M89.
.4 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 75- M1983(R1992).
.5 All cables installed in areas requiring fire rating shall conform to test FT-4.
.6 All cables installed in spaces designated as a return air plenum shall conform to test FT 6 or be installed in continuous conduit system.
.7 No “Aluminium” Wiring, Buswork or “Nual” Wiring shall be used on this project without specific written permission of both the Owner and the Electrical Consultant.
2 Products
2.1 BUILDING WIRES
.1 Conductors:
.1 Copper conductors, of the size as indicated, having a minimum conductivity of 98 percent.
.2 Stranded copper conductors shall be provided for all wires sizes for this project.
.3 The minimum wiring size that shall be permitted for this project is No. 12 AWG.
.4 Conductors shall be minimum No. 12 AWG, size conductor for maximum 2% voltage drop to the furthest outlet on a fully loaded branch circuit.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16122 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 The following shall be used with respect to branch circuit wire sizing for voltage drop from the circuits associated panel board.
.1 #12 AWG to be used from 0 to 80 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.2 #10 AWG to be used from 80 to 130 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.3 #8 AWG to be used from 130 to 220 ft, maximum length of branch circuit run from panel board.
.3 The Electrical Contractor shall up-size feeder and branch circuit wiring and associated conduit as required to meet the requirements of the code with respect to acceptable voltage drop.
.4 Insulation: RW90 is specified for use throughout. RW90 cable shall have thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated at a minimum of 600 V.
.5 Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Canada Wire and Cable Limited ;
.2 Pirelli;
.3 Phillips Cables Limited.
2.2 TYPE TECK 90 CABLE
.1 Conductors:
.1 Copper conductors shall be of the sizes indicated, having a minimum conductivity of 98 percent.
.2 Each cable shall have a grounding conductor.
.2 Insulation:
.1 Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated at a minimum of 1000V, Type RW 90.
.3 Inner jacket: Polyvinyl chloride inner jacket.
.4 Armour: Interlocking aluminum armour.
.5 Overall jacket: Thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride LFS/LGE overall jacket for fire protection and low acid gas evolution, meeting the requirements of the Vertical Tray Fire Test to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 0.3-92 with a maximum flow travel of 1200 mm. (Conform to FT4).
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16122 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.6 Fastenings:
.1 One hole malleable iron straps to secure surface mounted cables.
.2 12-gauge galvanized steel channel type supports for two or more cables at 1500 mm centres.
.3 1/4" diameter threaded rods to support the suspended channels.
.7 Connectors:
.1 Watertight TECK connectors, T & B Series 10464 and 10470.
.8 Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Canada Wire and Cable Limited;
.2 Pirelli;
.3 Phillips Cables Limited.
2.3 ARMOURED CABLES
.1 AC90 Cable:
.1 Conductors: Copper conductors, of the sizes as indicated, having a minimum conductivity of 98%.
.2 Insulation: Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated at a minimum of 600 V.
.3 Armour: Interlocking armour fabricated from aluminum strip.
.4 Shall be provided with an integral insulated ground wire.
2.4 CONTROL CABLES
.1 300 V control cable: Stranded annealed copper conductors sized as indicated, with TWH thermoplastic insulation with a shielding of 100% coverage of aluminum polyester tape and drain wire over each group and over all conductors and an overall jacket of PVC.
.2 Control cables shall also conform to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 239-M91.
.3 Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Alcatel;
.2 Pirelli;
.3 Belden;
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16122 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.4 Shawflex Inc.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install grounding, grounded and neutral conductors without any fuses, switches or breakers of any kind unless otherwise indicated.
.2 Ground the grounded or neutral conductor at the source of supply as indicated and isolate the grounded or neutral conductor at all other locations.
.3 Do not use any grounded or neutral conductors as a grounding conductor.
.4 Do not use any grounding conductor as a grounded or neutral conductor.
.5 Do not splice any wiring in any raceway. Make splices only at junction boxes.
.6 Provide sufficient slack at the connection points of conductors to permit proper connections to be made.
.7 Do not install any conductors in any raceway until the raceway is complete and cleared of all obstructions.
.8 Install all conductors in any one conduit at the same time taking care not to twist the conductors.
.9 Use wire pulling lubricants that will not shorten the life of the insulation.
.10 Do not install any wires or cables at temperatures above or below those which will cause damage to the wires or cables.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1 Install wiring as follows:
.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16111.
.2 In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with Section 16116.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TECK 90 1000 V
.1 Install cables as indicated.
.2 Group cables wherever possible on channels.
.3 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLE
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16122 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.1 Group cables wherever possible.
.2 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.
.3 Shall only be permitted for the final connection to light fixtures and the length of the drop shall not exceed 3 meters. BX shall not be permitted for any other use on this project.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL INSULATED CABLE
.1 Install cable exposed, as indicated securely supported by stainless steel straps. Strap cable every 4 feet along the length of the cable with stainless steel straps
.2 Make cable terminations by using factory-made kits.
.3 At cable terminations use thermoplastic sleeving over bare conductors.
.4 Where cables are embedded in cast concrete or masonry, provide a sleeve for the entry or exit of cables.
.5 Do not splice the cables.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16131 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Electrical General Provisions Section 16010.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Section 16010.
1.3 STANDARDS
.1 Junction and Pull Boxes as per C.S.A. C22.2 No.40-M1989.
.2 Splitters as per CSA Standard C22.2 No. 76-M92.
2 Products
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Provide weatherproof and watertight splitters, junction and pull boxes and cabinets as indicated on the drawings.
2.2 SPLITTERS
.1 Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position.
.2 Mains, branch lugs, and connection bars to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3 At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in all splitters.
2.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1 Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.
.2 Covers with 25 mm minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.
2.4 CABINETS
.1 Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting.
.2 Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, 2 keys, containing 19 mm G1S fir plywood backboard (fire rated as described in Section 16103) for flush mounting in finished areas and surface mounting in service and mechanical spaces.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16131 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
3 Execution
3.1 JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2 Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2000 mm above finished floor.
.3 Install terminal block as required in Type T cabinets.
.4 Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull boxes.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16104.
.2 Install Size 3 identification labels indicating system name and voltage and phase.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16132 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 NIL
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2 Provide samples of all floor boxes for Consultant's review.
1.3 STANDARDS
.1 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings to C.S.A. C22.2 No.18-92.
.2 Rigid PVC Boxes and Fittings to C.S.A. C22.2 No.85-M89.
2 Products
2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1 Size all boxes in accordance with the Electrical Code.
.2 All sheet steel boxes shall have pre-punched 19 mm knockouts.
.3 Do not use boxes with cable clamps.
.4 Boxes shall be minimum size 75 mm x 50 mm x 50 mm deep. Provide 100 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices. Add extension and plaster rings as required.
.5 Provide 100 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for luminaire outlets.
.6 Provide multi-gang boxes for power and switching devices, do not gang tel/data system boxes unless detailed specifically.
.7 Provide blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices as described in Section 16141.
2.2 SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1 Provide single and multigang electro-galvanized steel flush device boxes as required for flush installation.
2.3 MASONRY BOXES
.1 Provide single and multigang electro-galvanized steel masonry boxes as required for devices flush mounted in concrete block walls.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16132 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2.4 CONCRETE BOXES
.1 Provide electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required. Boxes to be installed in concrete shall be approved for this purpose.
2.5 CONDUIT BOXES
.1 Provide cast FS or FD aluminum boxes with factory- threaded hubs and mounting feet for the surface wiring of switches and receptacles as required.
2.6 PVC BOXES
.1 All PVC boxes to have approved ground straps and shall be compatible with PVC conduit used.
2.7 FITTINGS - GENERAL
.1 Provide bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2 Provide knock-out fillers to close unused knock-outs.
.3 Provide conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 1-1/4" and pull boxes for larger conduits.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Support all boxes independently of the connecting conduits. All boxes to be hung independently of ducts, pipes, etc.
.2 Fill boxes with sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent the entry of foreign material during construction.
.3 For flush installations, mount the outlet boxes flush with the finished walls using plaster rings to permit the wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.
.4 Provide the correct size of openings in the boxes for the conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not permitted.
.5 When using PVC conduit, use approved boxes.
.6 Prior to pouring concrete secure flush floor boxes to reinforcing steel, adjust level and to correct height, install cement cover securely. After pour make final adjustments.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16141 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING DEVICES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 NIL
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.
2 Products
2.1 SWITCHES
.1 Provide specification grade, line voltage light switches of the rocker type with the yoke insulated from the silent operating mechanism. Provide large and well recessed binding screws, suitable for #10 AWG wire, for easy wiring and with the operating mechanism totally enclosed in a strong phenolic colour coded (with respect to current rating) housing. Provide silver alloy contacts and use urea or melamine for those housing parts subject to carbon tracking.
.2 Provide 20A, 120-277 V switches as indicated below (decorator type).
.1 Single pole: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. 2621-W (White);
.1 single pole Pass & Seymour Cat. No. 2625-W (white).
.4 Provide 20A 125V. Interval time switch white in colour.
.1 Single Pole: 0 - 15 minute timer without hold feature - Tork Electro Mechanical Cat No. A515MHW (decorator style).
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16141 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING DEVICES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2.2 RECEPTACLES SPECIFICATION GRADE
.1 Provide duplex receptacles, CSA configuration 5-15R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, (decorator type) with the following features:
.1 White urea moulded housing for standard convenience receptacles. Red urea moulded housing for receptacles on emergency circuits.
.2 Suitable for #10 AWG wire for back or side wiring.
.3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles.
.4 Eight back wired entrances and four side wired binding screws.
.5 Double wipe contacts and riveted, grounding contacts.
.6 Suitable for #10 AWG wire for back or side wiring.
.7 Pass & Seymour (decorator type) Cat Series No. 26252-W - (white) and 26252-RED (red) for emergency power receptacle circuits, Black for UPS power circuits and Grey for Computer power receptacle circuits.
.2 Provide duplex receptacles, CSA configuration 5-20R, 125 V, 20 A, U ground, (decorator type) with the following features:
.1 White urea moulded housing for standard convenience receptacles. Red urea moulded housing for receptacles on emergency circuits.
.2 Suitable for #10 AWG wire for back or side wiring.
.3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles.
.4 Eight back wired entrances and four (4) side wired binding screws.
.5 Double wipe contacts and riveted, grounding contacts.
.6 Suitable for #10 AWG wire for back or side wiring.
.7 Pass & Seymour Cat. Series No. 26352-W - (white) and 26352-RED (red) for emergency power receptacle circuits and Black for UPS power circuits and Grey for Computer power receptacle circuits.
.3 Provide ground fault circuit interrupting duplex receptacles (decorator type), CSA configuration 5-15R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground with the following features.
.1 White urea moulded housing.
.2 Double wipe contacts and riveted grounding contacts.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16141 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING DEVICES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2.3 COVER PLATES
.1 Provide cover plates for all wiring devices and communications outlets.
.2 Provide vertically brushed stainless steel, cover plates 1 mm thick for wiring devices and communications outlets in public areas. Cover plates are to have 45 degree plane at the edges.
.3 Provide white cover plates for wiring devices and communications outlets in private offices.
.4 Provide sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Switches:
.1 Install single throw switches with the handle in the "UP" position when the switch is closed.
.2 Install switches in ganged outlet boxes when more than one switch is required in one (1) location.
.3 Mount toggle switches with the long dimension vertically at the height specified in Section 16010 unless otherwise indicated.
.2 Receptacles:
.1 Install receptacles in ganged outlet boxes when more than one receptacle is required in one location.
.2 Mount receptacles with the long dimension vertically at the height specified in Section 16010 unless otherwise indicated.
.3 Where a split receptacle has one portion switched, mount the long dimension vertically and switch the upper portion.
.4 Install devices in millwork as required. Coordinate installation with millwork supplier.
.5 Install devices in modular furniture as required and coordinate with modular furniture vendor
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16141 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRING DEVICES SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.3 Cover plates:
.1 Protect the stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until the painting and other work is finished.
.2 Install suitable common stainless steel cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.
.3 Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.
.4 Provide engraved lamacoid name plates with the circuit number indicated on it for all receptacles and light switches. Locate circuit number name plate above the receptacle and light switch coverplate.
3.2 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Provide wiring devices and cover plates of one manufacturer.
.2 Pass & Seymour and Harvey Hubbell Canada Inc. catalogue numbers are shown and indicate the quality of the wiring devices and cover plates required. Equivalent wiring devices and cover plates of one (1) manufacturer are acceptable.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16151 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS UP TO 1000V SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 NIL
2 Products
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Provide pressure type wire connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors as required.
.2 Provide fixture type splicing connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors #10 AWG or less.
.3 Provide bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2-1961 to consist of:
.1 A connector body and a stud clamp for stranded copper conductors.
.2 A clamp for stranded copper conductors
.3 Stud clamp bolts as required.
.4 Bolts for the copper conductors.
.5 Sized for the conductors as indicated.
.4 Provide clamps or connectors for the armoured cable, flexible conduit, as required.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Remove the insulation carefully from the ends of the conductors and:
.1 Apply a coat of zinc joint compound on the aluminum conductors prior to the installation of the connectors.
.2 Install the mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten the screws with an appropriate compression tool recommended by the manufacturer. The installation must meet the secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65-1956 (R1965).
.3 Install the bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2-1961.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16191 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010.
2 Product
2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS
.1 U-shaped, steel channel, accurately cold rolled formed from 12 gauge, low carbon steel with finished dimensions of 40 mm x 40 mm, inturned clamping ridges and a continuous slot along one side for the insection of slotted nuts. Hot dip galvanize the channel after fabrication with a zinc weight of 1.5 oz/ft sq.
.2 Nuts with 2 serrated grooves to engage the clamping ridges of the channel, a spring to hold the nut in place during installation and threaded with Unified and American course threads. Case harden and electrogalvanize after fabrication.
.3 Electrogalvanized bolts, threaded rod, flat and lockwashers as required.
.4 Angle, U, Z and special fittings, brackets, bases, clamps, hangers, couplings and other fittings as required and galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
.5 Provide channel and fittings of one manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Unistrut of Canada Ltd.;
.2 Or equal
2.2 CONCRETE ANCHORS
.1 Drilled expansion anchors for anchors set in concrete block or poured concrete after the concrete has set. Size the insert and number of anchors so that the maximum load per anchor does not exceed 25% of the manufacturer's published maximum loading.
.2 Provide concrete anchors of one manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Hilti Canada Ltd.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16191 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.3 U-channel concrete inserts shall be 12 gauge steel 40 mm square with insert anchors 35 mm long and 100 mm on centre. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1 Unistrut.
.2 Or equal
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Secure equipment to masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchor.
.2 Secure equipment and concrete inserts to poured concrete with expansion anchors.
.3 Secure equipment to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.
.4 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to the basic channel members.
.5 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to the building construction or support system using straps.
.1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 2" and smaller.
.2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 2".
.3 Beam clamps to secure the conduit to the exposed steel work.
.6 Suspended support systems.
.1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm diameter threaded rods and spring clips.
.2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm diameter threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to the building construction is impractical.
.7 Use channels at a maximum 3m centres for surface mounting of two or more conduits.
.8 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support the conduit and cable runs.
.9 Provide adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.
.10 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16191 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.11 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with the permission of other trade and the approval of general contractor.
.12 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.13 When installing fastenings and supports to surfaces with vapour barriers confer with responsible subcontractors and refer to details in the documents. If details are not available bring this to the attention of the Consultant.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
1.1 REFERENCES AND RELATED WORK
.1 Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010.
.2 Nameplates: Section 16104.
.3 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Fittings: Section 16111.
.4 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes: Section 16132.
.5 Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 “SCS” shall mean Structured Cabling System. The SCS is defined as all required equipment and materials including (but not limited to) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC 11801 compliant copper station cable (Category 6, Augmented Category 6, etc.), patch cables, stations and station connectors, termination blocks, patch panels, racks/enclosures (such as EIA standard equipment racks, enclosures, and vertical and horizontal cable management hardware), pathway/raceway materials (such as conduit, sleeves, D-rings, surface raceway, ladder rack, cable tray, etc.), and other incidental and miscellaneous equipment and materials as required for a fully operational, tested, certified, and warranted system, compliant with all applicable codes and standards.
.2 “TMGB” shall mean Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar. There is typically one TMGB per building, located in the main telecommunications room. This busbar is directly bonded to the electrical service ground.
.3 “TGB” shall mean Telecommunications Grounding Busbar. There is typically one TGB per telecommunications room. The TGB is connected both to the TMGB and to building structural steel or other permanent metallic systems.
.4 “TBB” shall mean Telecommunications Bonding Backbone. The TBB is a conductor used to connect TMGBs to TGBs.
.5 “UTP” shall mean Unshielded Twisted Pair cable.
1.3 GENERAL SCOPE
.1 The contractor shall be responsible for installing, testing, and certifying the Structured Cabling System (SCS) for the area included in the scope of this project. The new SCS shall consist of 4-pair copper for the horizontal. It will also consist of Category 6 horizontal cabling and patch panel installation as indicated on drawings. All horizontal cabling will be terminated at the work area and the Telecommunications Room (TR). All backbone cabling will be terminated at the Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and the Equipment Room. (ER)
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 2
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 The contractor shall supply and install a SCS based upon a physical star topology. This cabling infrastructure solution shall encompass, and not be limited to, all telecommunication outlets, cable terminating hardware, equipment cabinets/racks and selected connectivity devices as defined on the drawings.
.3 The Structured Telecommunications Cabling System will consist of:
.1 Category 6 4-pair horizontal cabling (Data).
.4 The contractor shall obtain the SCS Manufacturer extended product, performance, application, and labor warranties that shall warrant all passive components used in the SCS. Additionally, these warranties shall cover components not manufactured by the SCS Manufacturers, but approved by the SCS Manufacturers for use in the SCS (i.e. “Approved Alternative Products”). The SCS Manufacturer warranties shall warrant:
.1 That the products will be free from manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship.
.2 That the cabling products of the installed system shall exceed the specification of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and exceed ISO/IEC 11801 standards.
.3 That the installation shall exceed the specification of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and exceed ISO/IEC 11801 standards.
.5 That the system shall be application independent and shall support both current and future applications that use the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC 11801 component and link/channel specifications for cabling.
1.4 CERTIFICATION
.1 The contractor must currently be registered as a certified system installer for the acceptable cabling manufacturer. The contractor’s technicians must be fully trained by the manufacturer to install their respective system.
.2 The Contractor must provide documentation demonstrating that they employ a minimum of one Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certified by and in current good standing with BICSI. The document shall declare that the RCDD is a direct full time employee of the Contractor and that the Contractor will continue to employ a minimum of one RCDD throughout the duration of the project.
.3 The Contractor’s installation supervisor must be BICSI certified and Registered as an ITS Technician. A minimum of 50% of the installation forces must be installers who have completed certified training from BICSI for ITS Installer 1, ITS Installer 2, and ITS Technician.
.4 All communication products are to be by a single manufacturer unless otherwise stated in this document.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 3
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 The acceptable manufacturers for this installation are listed below.
.6 The contractor selected for this project must provide a Manufacturer’s Certification Number within two (2) weeks of the awarding of the contract.
1.5 WARRANTY
.1 The contractor shall be able to provide the Manufacturer’s Warranty and System Performance Guarantee, from the date of substantial completion, for the entire communications cabling system.
.2 The SCS Manufacturer Warranties shall be provided by the selected SCS Manufacturers and shall be:
.1 25 years against defects in material and workmanship
.2 lifetime application assurance program.
.3 The contractor shall be required to respond to warranty claims within a minimum of 24 hours.
1.6 LABOR
.1 The contractor shall only provide tradespersons who are fully trained, qualified, certified and experienced on the installation, termination and testing of the SCS.
.2 Third party certification will not be permitted unless the certifying contractor performs the termination and testing for all cabling. If third party certification is necessary, the contractor shall get the consent of the Project Manager prior to submitting their bid response.
.3 The contractor shall make any changes or alterations required by the authorized inspector of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
.4 The contractor shall receive consent from the Project Manager before changing the Project Manager and/or Project Supervisor during the project.
.5 The contractor shall not sub-contract any work without consent from the Project Manager.
1.7 CUT-OVER SUPPORT
.1 The contractor shall include two (2) technicians for a total of eight (8) hours or one (1) technician for a total of sixteen (16) hours to be onsite during the commissioning weekend. For pricing purposes, assume one cutover weekend for each phase. Overtime premiums should be included if required.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 4
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
2 Pathways For Communications Systems
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The contractor shall not use any mechanical or electrical fittings to support the telecommunications cabling. All telecommunications cabling shall be independently supported.
.2 The contractor shall independently support the cables above all ceiling tiles and in a manner where the cables do not interfere with the removal of the ceiling tiles. A minimum of 75 mm 3” (in) of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles shall be maintained.
.3 The Project Manager must approve all deviations from the contract documents and drawings in relation to cable routing, outlet and equipment locations.
2.2 PRODUCT
.1 Erico Cable Support Hangers
.1 Open top cable supports shall be used where ceiling plenum dictates.
Description Erico Part#
Wall Mount CAT32
Ceiling Mount CAT32AFAB3
Drop Wire & Threaded Rod Clip CAT324Z34
Screw-On Beam Clamps CAT32BC200B
Hammer On Beam Clamps CAT32 24/58/912
Purlin Clips CAT32AF14/VF14
.2 Firestopping
.1 The contractor shall provide all Fire Separations & Firewalls with firestop and smoke seals that form tight barriers to retard the passage of flame and smoke. These seals shall maintain the same fire resistance rating as the adjacent floors, walls or other fire separation assemblies.
.2 Materials shall have a minimum hour fire rating as the barrier it is installed in.
.3 Firestop Systems shall follow the criteria set by ULC Standard CAN4-S115 for fire stopping requirements.
.4 The contractor shall be responsible to restore the integrity of any established fire barrier that the cabling contractor disturbs in any way, by any means.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 5
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 The contractor shall be responsible to firestop all sleeves that cross through a fire barrier, cable tray, innerduct, cable bundles, conduit; including sleeves that are empty, partially empty or filled with cabling, regardless if those sleeves were or were not found firestopped. The installed seals shall provide and maintain the fire resistance rating of the adjacent floor, wall or other fire separation assembly. The Contractor shall provide non-permanent Client approved intumescent fire stopping.
.6 Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be approved by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in the province where the work is to be performed. A drawing showing the proposed firestop system, stamped/embossed by the PE shall be provided to the Owner’s Technical Representative prior to installing the firestop system(s).
.7 Product must meet or exceed the above-mentioned specifications.
2.3 EXECUTION
.1 The contractor shall run all cable support hangers and innerduct parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2 The contractor shall maintain the following minimum clearances from electrical and heat sources when routing copper cables.
Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or non-metallic pathway.
127 mm (5”(in))
305 mm (12”(in))
610 mm (24”(in))
Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.
64 mm (2.5”(in))
152 mm (6”(in))
305 mm (12”(in))
Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit (or equivalent shielding) in proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.
--- 76 mm (3”(in))
152 mm (6”(in))
Motors 1.2 m (4’-0”) Transformers 1.2 m (4’-0”) Conduit and cables used for electrical distribution less than 1kV
0.3 m (1’-0”)
Conduit and cables used for electrical distribution greater than 1kV
1.0 m (3’-0”)
Fluorescent Luminaires 300 mm (12”) Pipes (gas, oil, water, etc.) 120 mm (5”) HVAC (equipment, ducts, etc.) 150 mm (6”)
.3 Cable support hangers must not be drilled into post-tensioned beams under any circumstances.
.4 The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the best time to install the supports with the Project Manager. After hours work may be required for this portion of the work.
.5 Supports shall be sized to accommodate the number of cables in each run. Other
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 6
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
hardware such as hammer on clamps, screw on clamps and angled hanger brackets to support the backbone and/or horizontal cabling shall be included.
.6 Supply and install supports, hanger supports and any other miscellaneous hardware required to support telecommunications cabling where conduit/ladder tray has not been provided. Supports are to be used every 4’ (ft) 1.2 m.
.7 Typical horizontal cabling pathway will consist of a minimum 1” conduit from workstation outlet, stubbed into ceiling space. From there, cable tray will be installed back to the telecommunications room. Contractor will need to provide cable support hangers to support telecommunications cabling between exiting conduit to entering the cabletray.
.8 The Cable Support Hanger System shall be completely independently supported from the structural ceiling or walls (concrete slab/deck) and shall not be supported in any way by the suspended ceiling.
.9 In the Cable Support Hanger System, each individual run or pathway shall not contain more than fifty (50) UTP horizontal cables. Where these situations arise, provide and additional hanger pathway to divide the cable bundle.
.10 Install firestopping product as per manufacturer’s specifications and as per local building code requirements.
3 Identification For Communications Systems
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Adhesive cable labels to meet the legibility, defacement, and adhesion requirements specified in UL 969 (Ref. D-16). In addition, the labels shall meet the general exposure requirements in UL 969 for indoor use.
.2 Self-laminating vinyl construction cable labels with a white printing area and a clear tail that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around a cable. The clear area should be of sufficient length to wrap around the cable at least one and one-half times.
.3 ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 for colour codes shall be followed. Labels are to be mechanically printed using a laser printer. Hand written labels will not acceptable.
3.2 PRODUCTS
.1 PanAcea – LS7 hand-Held Printer. Part# LS7
.2 Easy-mark labeling software. Part# PROG-EMCD.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 7
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
3.3 EXECUTION
.1 Cable identification labels should appear at the following locations with the numbers indicated on the cable schedule and drawings:
.1 102 mm 4”(in) from each end of the cable – after termination.
.2 Front of patch panels.
.3 Front of IDC termination blocks.
.4 Front of workstation/communications outlet faceplates.
.5 Each end of each Telecommunications Conduit.
.2 Provide 25% additional labels to be left in each telecommunications room on site for future growth.
.1 Data Horizontal Cables:
BXXAZZZDYTT
Placeholder Denotes BXX Building Identifier AZZZ Room Number D Data Y Patch Panel Number TT Location on Patch Panel
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 8
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 Backbone cabling shall be labeled with near and far end identifiers as well as a unique cable number.
X-MMM-C
Placeholder Denotes X Near End Building MMM Unique cable identifier C Far End Building
E.g., H-012-G is (H) originating (near end) building, (012) unique cable number and (G) is the terminating (far end) building.
4 Testing & Record Documentation
4.1 GENERAL
N/A
4.2 PRODUCT
N/A.
4.3 EXECUTION
.1 Installation
.1 Permanent link testing of all horizontal Category 6 4-pair UTP copper cables are to be completed in accordance with the follow test criteria:
Basic Link grounds NEXT ELFEXT continuity correct polarity PSNEXT PSELFEXT shorts length ACR Return Loss opens attenuation PSACR resistance Wire Map Insertion Loss Delay Skew Propagation
Delay
.2 Upon completion of testing by the contractor, the Project Manager may choose to witness up to 10% of the cables being tested.
.2 Documentation
.1 The contractor is required to submit test results in native tester format or a format which can be read with a text reader (i.e. “.txt” extension). Paper results shall not be submitted for projects with 100 or more horizontal cable drops and/or fibre cables.
.2 The contractor is required to provide the software required to view the results.
.3 The report should be divided into sections by Telecommunications Room.
.4 The report should indicate for each cable when it was tested successfully, the result, and the length.
.5 The contractor shall sign off on the entire test report prior to submitting to the Project Manager.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 9
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.6 The test result documentation is to be submitted to the Project Manager for review no later than ten (10) working days following the completion of the installation.
.7 The contractor must provide a manufacturer’s Letter of Certification within two weeks following the completion of the job.
.3 Record Drawings
.1 The contractor is required to maintain one (1) set of correct and accurate record drawings on-site at all times. These drawings are to be made available to Crossey Engineering Ltd. for review during the project.
.2 The contractor is required to provide record drawings of the telecommunication cabling installation in relation to the drawings provided in this specification.
.3 The record drawings shall be updated electronically and include, but are not limited to;
Horizontal cable numbers on the floor plans Horizontal Cable Routing on the floor plans Changes on the floor plans Cabinet/Rack Elevation drawings Backboard Elevation Drawing
.4 The contractor shall provide one (1) soft copy in AutoCAD 2010 and one (1) plotted copy for review prior to complete close-out documentation submission.
.5 After approval, the contractor shall submit one (1) plotted copy of the drawings for;
.1 Crossey Engineering Ltd.;
.2 Client.
5 Termination Blocks, Patch Panels & Connectors
5.1 GENERAL
.1 Termination Equipment
.1 All patch panels/mounts shall be fully loaded with the appropriate connectors.
.2 Blank labelling strips are required for connectors that are not in use.
.3 Patch panel/IDC block quantities shall accommodate the number of terminated cables.
.4 Material and equipment shall be new, and conform to grade, quality and standards specified.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 10
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 Backboard layout will be as per manufacturer’s recommendations unless expressly written otherwise by the Project Manager.
.6 All copper products such as patch panels and jacks shall conform to T568A standard pin-out termination sequence.
5.2 PRODUCT
.1 IDC Termination Blocks & Accessories
.1 BELDEN/CDT GIGABIX 24 port rack mount termination kit, BELDEN/CDT part #: AX103114.
.2 Gigaflex PS6+ Module – Data
.1 BELDEN/CDT Gigaflex PS6+ module, Blue
.2 BELDEN/CDT part #: AX101326.
.3 Outlets shall be suitable for installation in faceplates at work station locations, surface raceway, or surface mount boxes.
.3 Wall Mount Faceplate
.1 Frames shall be 4 Frames which will accommodate RJ45 Style, RJ12, ST Compatible or SC jacks. BELDEN/CDT part # AX101435
.2 Use recessed blanks for all unused ports. Blanks to match Frame colour.
.3 Faceplate color and type (decora/non-decora) shall match electrical. Visible mounting screws to match the finish of their faceplate. The contractor shall provide all telecommunications workstation frames.
.4 Some locations on the floor plans may indicate wall mount jacks at 47” A.F.F. The contractor shall provide a wall mount faceplate suitable for wall mounting a telephone set in these locations.
.4 Furniture Faceplate
.1 Furniture Frames shall accommodate a minimum of 4 ports, Type RJ45 Style, RJ12, ST Compatible or SC jacks.
.2 Use recessed blanks for all unused ports. Blanks to match Frame colour.
.3 Contractor shall verify furniture manufacturer prior to ordering.
.4 Provide a ½ spacer/adapter, if required, to ensure faceplate can be properly installed on systems furniture maintaining proper bend radius.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 11
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.5 Copper Horizontal Cabling
5.3 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall ensure ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B installation practices are followed. Install horizontal cables in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications ensuring that proper installation techniques are adhered to.
.2 The Contractor shall terminate all pairs of cable. Terminate all spare cables at the Telecommunication Room end.
.3 The Contractor shall run all horizontal cables parallel to building grid lines with no splices.
.4 Provide 30cm (1’) of slack at the workstation end of the cable to permit future outlet relocation. Neatly coil slack in ceiling space or on the side of the cable tray.
.5 Provide 3m (10’) of slack at the Telecommunications Room end of the cable to permit future relocation. Neatly coil the cable in the cable tray or in the ceiling space.
.6 Inform the Project Manager immediately of any horizontal cable runs exceeding 90 m 295’(ft). Minimum horizontal cable run (if required) shall not be less than that specified in manufacturer’s specifications.
.7 When terminating copper cables remove cable jacket only enough to perform termination and untwist pairs a maximum length as per manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
.8 Crossey Engineering Ltd. shall determine the quality of workmanship during installation. Cables that have not been properly installed will be reinstalled by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contract.
.9 Maintain a minimum of four (4) times cable diameter as a bend radius if no bend radius is specified.
5.4 PRODUCT
.1 IBDN GigaFlex 2413 - DATA
.1 BELDEN/ IBDN GigaFlex 2413 plenum, Blue
.2 BELDEN/CDT Ordering #: 24567915
5.5 EXECUTION
.1 All horizontal cables shall be bundled on the Telecommunications Racks using Panduit Velcro straps. Separate. Bundles shall be tie-wrapped on in Telecommunications rooms, at a maximum of 203 mm 8” (in) separation and shall be no larger than 2” in diameter to eliminate any excessive stress on the cable jackets.
.2 Cable ties are to be installed so that not cable bundle exerts excess pressure on the cable at any point that may result in the compression or deformation of the cable jacket and internal pair/conductor geometry.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 12
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.3 The use of water based pulling lubricants is strictly prohibited. Utilize only wax based pulling lubricant if lubricant is required.
.4 All exposed cabling at the workstation between wall/floor-input point locations and systems furniture is to be wrapped with black split loom tubing, size and length as required to suit.
.5 Contractor will be required to route/install telecommunications cabling in systems furniture, lab casework furniture & mill work as denoted on floor plans.
.6 Avoid scraping, denting or otherwise damaging cables before, during or after installation.
.7 Provide blank filler plates for all unused modular jack positions on faceplates.
.8 Provide Category 6 cables for data & voice to each outlet indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall refer to the legends on the drawing to determine the number of cables to each outlet location.
.9 At the workstation end, terminate each Category 6 cable on an appropriately colored Category 6 Module, located in the specified style faceplate. At the telecommunications room end, terminate all horizontal cables on GIGABIX 48 port Termination kits in respective termination fields.
.10 Terminate test and label each cable in accordance to the parameters stated in this specification document.
.11 At Telecommunications Room end, Lakehead to provide one (1) Category 6 pigtail cable for each Category 6 data cable installed. Provide GIGABIX 48 port Termination kits for all pigtail terminations. Contractor shall be responsible for cross connecting all data cabling. A patching schedule shall be provided to the contractor prior to installation.
.12 At workstation end, provide one (1) 10’ (ft) 3m Category 6 patch cord for each Category 6 cable installed.
.13 The contractor shall be responsible for cross connecting all new voice horizontal cabling. A patching schedule shall be provided to the contractor prior to installation.
6 Patch Cords, Station Cords & Cross Connect Wire
6.1 GENERAL
.1 All copper patch cords shall conform to T568A standard pin-out termination sequence.
6.2 PRODUCT
.1 GigaFlex PS6+ Modular Cord
.1 BELDEN/CDT GigaFlex PS6+ modular cord, Blue 10’(ft) 3.0m
.2 BELDEN/CDT Ordering #: AX350040
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 13
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
.2 GigaFlex PS6+ Pigtail Assembly
.1 BELDEN/CDT GigaFlex PS6+ pigtail assembly, open one end, Grey length to suit
.2 BELDEN/CDT Ordering #: AX35016x, where x=0,15 ft./ x=1, 25 ft./, x=2, 35 ft./ x=3, 50 ft.
.1 Refer to Section 9 Horizontal Cabling and drawings for quantities and installation details.
7 Codes & Standards
.1 The equipment, material and installation shall conform to the latest version of the applicable Codes, Standards (including technical service bulletins and addenda) and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (11th ed.)
BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Manual
(4th ed) CSA C22.1 Canadian Electric Code Part 1 Ontario Hydro
Electrical Safety Code ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard For Telecommunications
Pathways And Spaces ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard For The Telecommunications
Infrastructure Of Commercial Buildings TSB-155 Additional Guidelines for 4-PAIR 100 Category 6
Cabling for 10GBASE-T Applications
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 14
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
CSA T527 Commercial Building Grounding And Bonding Requirements For Telecommunications
125µm Cladding Diameter Class 1a Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide fibers.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492BAAA Detail Specifications For Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted
Singlemode Optical Waveguide Fibers Used In Communication Systems.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492AAAB
Detailed Specification For 50µm Core Diameter / 125µm Cladding Diameter Class 1a Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide fibers
ANSI/EIA/TIA-472CAAA Detailed Specifications For All Dielectric (Construction 1)
Fibre optic Communications Cable For Indoor Plenum Use, Containing Class 1a, 62.5µm Core Diameter / 125µm Cladding Diameter Fiber optic(s).
ANSI/EIA/TIA-472DAAA Detailed Specifications For All Dielectric Fiber optic
Communications Cable For Outdoor Plant Use, Containing Class 1, 62.5µm Core Diameter / 250µm Cladding Diameter Fiber optic(s).
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16740 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 15
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455 Test Procedures For Fiber optics, Cables And Transistors. ANSI/EIA/TIA-598 Color Coding Of Fiber optic Cables. ANSI/EIA/TIA-604-3 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard J-STD-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications. ANSI Z136.2 American Standards For The Safe Operation of Fiber
optic Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diode And LED Sources.
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS Section 16741 TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
.1 Provide a complete telephone/data communications raceway system consisting of outlet boxes, conduits, junction boxes, wiring, etc. required to make a complete and continuous system.
.2 The systems shall be provided to the requirements of the Lakehead University I.T. Department, interconnect company, data communications company and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
.3 Voice and Data system is to have wire installed complete with all components, testing and certification as per Section 16740.
2 Products
2.1 MATERIAL
.1 Conduits: In accordance with Section 16111 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings.
.2 Communications Conductors: In accordance with Section 16740.
.3 Junction boxes and cabinets: In accordance with Section 16131 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes.
.4 Outlet boxes, conduit boxes and fittings: In accordance with Section 16132 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes.
3 Execution
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install the raceway system, including all wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute a complete system. Co-ordinate with other services. Cabletrays will be installed with constant elevation.
.2 Conduits shall not have more than 2-90 deg. or equivalent bends in each run, with the bending radii not less than 10 times the interior conduit dia.
.3 All material, raceways, etc. shall be to the size and number shown and shall also suit the Lakehead University I.T. Dept. requirements.
END OF SECTION
LAKEHEAD UNIVERSITY THUNDER BAY CAMPUS APPENDIX “A” TELEPRESENCE FACILITY ADDITION INFORMATION CUTSHEET OF UNDERFLOOR SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 13, 2013 Page 1
Crossey Engineering Ltd. Project No. 13210
1 General
.1 Attached on the following pages is an Information Cut Sheet of Underfloor System.
.2 Contact Underfloor System supplier for all details and requirements to install the product as intended on the contract drawings.
.3 The cutsheet for reference is only to help understand the requirements for the project and does not show all devices, components etc, and is intended to provide insight into the complexity and intricacies of the approved method of installation for the Undercarpet cabling product.
.4 Consult the manufacturer for specific installation method and site demonstration.
Undercarpet Cabling ProductsUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
I www.te.com/EnterpriseNetworks +1-800-553-0938 Fax: 1-717-986-7406 2/13 315716AE
TE Connectivity Enterprise NetworksWarranty
PowEr DisTribUTioN ProDUCT CovEragE*TE Connectivity warrants that all Undercarpet cabling system products within this catalog will be delivered free from defects in material and workmanship. TE Connectivity will repair or replace the product when*:
UNDErCarPET PowEr CabliNg sysTEm warraNTy:90-day for the Undercarpet power components, providing they are installed per the applicable instruction sheet and the overall system is installed in accordance with the TE AMP NETCONNECT Undercarpet Cabling Planning and Installation Manual.
UNDErCarPET CommUNiCaTioNs CabliNg sysTEm warraNTy:25-years system performance provided the Undercarpet communications cabling system is installed by a TE Connectivity authorized Network Design & Installation (ND&I) contractor or a 25-year component warranty if installed by a TE AMP NETCONNECT registered contractor.
who’s CovErEDUnlike most systems suppliers, TE provides warranty coverage directly to the end user. Many suppliers provide coverage to the installers, who then provide coverage to the customer. But with TE warranties, there are no middlemen. The warranties are between you and TE Connectivity.
For more information, please visit: www.te.com/aboutus/pdf/tc.pdf Or call: 1-800-553-0938 Outside the U.S., please contact your local TE product sales office.
People & Products to answer the Cabling Challenge.
Network communications infrastructure implementations are complicated regardless of the business you're in. You need the right resources, products and services to achieve the high performance, flexible environment your business and end users demand. At TE Connectivity, we offer custom network infrastructure cabling products and solutions that can help you now and for years to come. Our in-depth technical expertise combined with our more than 70 years in the industry has made us the leading provider of premise cabling solutions. TE has one of the most diverse and complete product sets for a wide range of network needs including power, data, voice, video, IP and more.
More than just the technology you need, TE helps ensure the solutions are effectively and efficiently installed by working with our distributors and customers in a hands-on design process. You get the solutions you need when and where you need them and have them installed through our network of certified installation contractors.
Optimize your network performance, increase productivity and benefit from a more immediate return on your infrastructure investment with TE Enterprise Networks solutions that are engineered smarter, faster and better.
*Some conditions may apply. Contact TE customer service for more information at 800-553-0938.
II www.te.com/EnterpriseNetworks +1-800-553-0938 Fax: 1-717-986-7406 2/13 315716AE
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
The AMP NETCONNECT undercarpet cabling system is a low profile, flexible system that makes even the most complex cabling job in office, retail, or gaming environments simple, economical and beautifully invisible. The cabling to provide power, voice and data services to your equipment can be handled with ease - from desk lights to network connections. And it’s interchangeable! If changes are required after the initial installation, don’t worry about the cabling. You can change it to fit your new requirements just about as easily as you move the furniture or retail display fixtures.
Take up a few sections of carpet squares, change the routing of the undercarpet cables and relocate the floor fittings. Presto! You’re back in business. With this system, all your power, voice and data networks can be routed virtually anywhere under the carpet without the restrictions encountered with under-floor ducts, walls, partitions and power/data poles.
Facts
• Ideal for retail, gaming or office applications
• Economical alternative to power poles or trenching
• Eliminates the need to disturb or access adjacent stores in shopping locations to gain access to pull cables
• Provides better control of quality and work schedule
• UL Listed and CSA Certified
• Approved for use per NEC Article 324 and CEC Article 12-800
• Power available in 3 and 5 circuit design
• Isolated ground circuit cable and components available
• Category 5e and 6 cable to support voice/data applications
• Designed for use with carpet squares for accessibility to make system changes easy as requirements change
• Pre-packaged kits available for “store-in-a-box” concept
• Components design provides simple termination from undercarpet cable to round wire
• Suitable for use in slab-ongrade, first floor areas
• Use in open lobby, customer reception, or other areas wheretraditional cabling methods
Undercarpet Cabling system, layout and Planning manual
• Everything you need to know to make your installation a success
• Example layouts, usage diagrams, interconnection instructions and more
• Get a free, downloadable copy today by visiting: http://www.te.com/power
Description Part Number
Undercarpet Cabling system, layout and Planning manual 409-5566
Undercarpet Cabling installation video 1773443-5
1
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
• Used with both 3 and 5-conductor undercarpet power cable
• Required for slab-on-grade installations
• Recommended for all installations
• Provides smooth, even surface for installation
Top shield
• Made of stainless steel
• Used with both 3 and 5-conductor undercarpet power cable
• Fully grounded component covering the entire system
• Protects the cable against penetration hazards
• Bonding clips are required to join two pieces of top shield together; bonding clips are sold separately (see page 4)
Undercarpet Power Cable
• Available in 3 and 5-conductor versions
• Undercarpet cable with isolated ground is for use with sensitive computer equipment
• UL Listed, File Number: E73212
• CSA Certified, File Number: LR7189
• Flat conductor cable (Type FCC) permitted per Article 324 of the 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) and Rule 12-800 of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
ps01
Rectangle
ps01
Rectangle
ps01
Polygon
3
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
*NOTE: Top shield bonding clips (553534) are required for turns, taps and splices.†NOTE: Stainless steel bonding clips (554178) can be used to replace lost DCR clips or for bonding top shield to transition boxes
Power Cable installation Tools and accessories
• Taps allow additional undercarpet power runs to be added to undercarpet power circuits (connects two sections of undercarpet power cable)
• Splices allow two sections of undercarpet power cable to be joined to extend lengths of undercarpet power cable
• Taps and splices require the following components:
– Tap or splice (one per undercarpet power cable conductor)
– Hand tool
– Insulator kit
– Top shield
– Top shield bonding clip (minimum of two per tap or splice)
– Hold down tape
• Tap/splice hand tool crimps taps and splices securely to undercarpet power cable
• DCR removal requires floor fitting patch kit
• Floor fitting patch kit includes: – Insulator kit – Top shield – Top shield bonding clip – Hold down tape
• Spray adhesive is used to help seal the installation against residual moisture
• Hold down tape is used to install cable and top shield
• For more information on the use of these products see instruction sheets 409-5566 or 408-3150
5
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
Universal Communications Transition wiring block 5e and 6 A 2111682-1
Communications Transition boxes and Covers
• Holds transition block used to transition from round cable to undercarpet communications cable
• Communications transition block must be ordered separately
• Transition boxes and covers must be ordered separately
• Power transition boxes may be used in place of communications transition boxes if desired; see part numbers 1375045 and 1375034 (Note: covers are not interchangeable)
Communications Transition blocks
• Transition blocks meet or exceed all TIA/ISO requirements for Enhanced Category 5 (Cat5e)/Class D or Category 6/Class E channel performance
• Transitions up to six (6) 4-pair cables
• 110Connect blocks may be terminated using standard 110-style punch-down tools (AMP NETCONNECT part number 1375308-1)
Description Figure Part Numbers
Pro impact Tool with Extended-life blade A 1375308-1
Punch-down tools
• Impact tool includes blade and can be used with all 110-style terminations including 110Connect, 610XC, and SL Series modular jacks
A
A
BA
Description Tia/Eia Category Figure
Part Numbers
100 ft [30.48 m] 250 ft [76.2 m]
Undercarpet Communications Cable, UTP, 4-Pair5e A 1499119-5 1499119-1
6 B 1499539-5 1499539-1
Undercarpet Communications Cable
• Available on reels of 250 ft [76.2 m] and 100 ft [30.48 m]
• Exceeds TIA/EIA and ISO specifications for Categories specified
• Exceeds all requirements for Gigabit Ethernet
• Independently verified by Intertek ETL SEMKO testing services
• UL Listed; UL Type CMUC
• CSA Certified; CSA Type CMH
• Lead-free jacketing
ps01
Rectangle
ps01
Rectangle
ps01
Rectangle
6
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
• Replicates the design of the DCR kits• Mounts to floor with double sided tape (supplied), screws or studs (customer supplied)• Cable entry from sides or bottom• Can also accommodate up to four ACO (AMP Communications Outlet) single port
installation kits (purchased separately)• Accepts up to four SL Series modular jacks, or SL Series multimedia jacks or inserts• Accepts up to two SVGA (or similar sized connector) connectors (ordered separately)
Description Jack Color Figure Eia/Tia Category Part Numbers
modular Jack bracket – A – 1499543-1
sl series modular Jack bracket Kits Black BCat 5e 558054-1
Cat 6 1933377-1
modular Jack Kits and accessories
• Modular jack kits include black colored jack• Bracket mounts to floor fitting with double sided tape (supplied)• Bracket accepts SL Series modular and multimedia jacks and inserts• Modular jacks meet or exceed TIA and ISO component performance requirements• Modular jacks feature universal wiring labels to permit
wiring to either T568A or T568B patterns• For more SL Series modular jacks see Enterprise Networks Product Catalog #313948AE• For SL Series termination Tooling see catalog #313948AE
B
A
B
A
Description Figure Part Numbers
low Profile Communications Floor Fittings
2-PortBlack A 554206-1
Gray 554206-3
4-PortBlack B 555287-1
Gray 555287-3
low Profile Communications Floor Fittings
• Modular jack kits are available separately, see below• Matches the design of the DCR kits• Accepts SL Series modular jacks or SL
Series Multimedia Jacks & Inserts• 2-port accepts up to two modular jacks• 4-port accepts up to four modular jacks
Description Part Numbers
Notching Tool for Undercarpet Communications Cable 1725698-1
Communications Cable Notching Tool
• For notching undercarpet communications cable to allow smooth turns in cable runs
ps01
Rectangle
7
Undercarpet CablingUndercarpet Power, Voice and Data Distribution
• Provides services for power and communications (4 ports of communications and 2 duplex power receptacles)
• Kits do not include carpet tiles
• Reduces cost of installation, no core drilling required
• Yields a more aesthetically pleasing and cleaner installation than power poles
• More flexible than any other method of service distribution
• No tripping over extension cords, unsightly “speed bumps” or duct taped cables
• Provides one circuit of power to two duplex receptacles in a compact, durable floor mounted outlet
• Provides four ports of any combination of voice or data on Category 5e or Category 6 cable to RJ45 modular jacks in a compact, durable floor mounted outlet
• Transition boxes can be easily retrofitted in place of existing power and communications wall outlets
Description Tia/Eia Category Figure Part Number
Undercarpet Conference room KitCategory 5e A 1479050-1
Category 6 B 1933466-1
Kit Contents Component* 1479050-1 1933466-1
Category 5e Undercarpet Communications Cable 1499119-1 100 ft -
Category 6 Undercarpet Communications Cable 1499539-1 - 100 ft
3-Conductor, 12 awg, standard ground, Undercarpet Power Cable 3-553079-3 50 ft 50 ft
TE Connectivity, TE connectivity (logo), Tyco Electronics, and TE (logo) are trademarks of the TE Connectivity Ltd. family of companies and its licensors. While TE Connectivity has made every reasonable effort to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document, TE Connectivity does not guarantee that it is error-free, nor does TE Connectivity make any other representation, warranty or guarantee that the information is accurate, correct, reliable or current. TE Connectivity reserves the right to make any adjustments to the information contained herein at any time without notice. TE Connectivity expressly disclaims all implied warranties regarding the information contained herein, including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The dimensions in this document are for reference purposes only and are subject to change without notice. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Consult TE Connectivity for the latest dimensions and design specifications.
Instruction SheetAMP NETCONNECT* UndercarpetPower Cabling System 3-Conductor 408--3129
LOC B
1 of 4E2009 Tyco Electronics Corporation, Harrisburg, PAAll International Rights ReservedTE logo and Tyco Electronics are trademarks.*Trademark. Other products, logos, and company names used are the property of their respective owners.
TOOLING ASSISTANCE CENTER 1--800--722--1111PRODUCT INFORMATION 1--800--522--6752
This controlled document is subject to change.For latest revision and Regional Customer Service,visit our website at www.tycoelectronics.com
20 OCT 09 Rev DDirect Connecting Receptacle (DCR) Kits
Cover
Duplex ReceptacleAssembly
MountingPlate
Top Shield BondingClip (Qty: 4)
Single DuplexDCR Kit
Dual DuplexDCR Kit
Combination DCR Kit(Duplex Receptacle
and Blank)
AttachingHardware
PART NUMBERD
20 A15 A
(Canadian Version)
DESCRIPTION
553947--[ ] 554128--[ ] Single Duplex
554192--[ ] 554321--[ ] Dual Duplex
554142--[ ] 554319--[ ] Combination(Duplex Receptacle and Blank)
D Dash Number Indicates Color: --1 is Black, --3 is Gray
Figure 1
All dimensions on this document are in metricunits [with U.S. customary units in brackets].Figures are not drawn to scale.
AMP NETCONNECT logo is a trademark of Tyco Electronics.
1. INTRODUCTIONThis instruction sheet covers installation and removalof the DCR kits shown in Figure 1. The DCR kitsaccept 3--conductor undercarpet cable size 10 or 12AWG. The blank side of the combination DCR kitaccepts Modular Jack Kits 558054--1 (Category 5e)and 1933377--1 (Category 6) available separately.Modular Jack Bracket Assembly 1499543--1 (used tomount the jack to the mounting plate) is also availableseparately.
Undercarpet Hold--Down Tape 553481--1 is availabefor securing the cable to the floor.
Reasons for reissue of this instruction sheet areprovided in Section 5, REVISION SUMMARY.
To obtain information on AMP NETCONNECTproducts, call PRODUCT INFORMATION at thenumber at the bottom of this page, or visit theAMP NETCONNECT website atwww.ampnetconnect.com.
2. DESCRIPTIONEach DCR kit consists of one or two mounting plates,one or two duplex receptacle assemblies, a cover,four top shield bonding clips, and attaching hardware.
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, disconnect theelectrical power before beginning work on anycircuit.
3.1. Single or Dual Duplex DCR Kit1. Center the mounting plate on a chalk line usingthe center indicator marks. Use the mounting plateas a template to mark the mounting hole locations.Prepare the surface (drill holes for the customer--supplied mounting hardware and vacuum debris).See Figure 2.
2. Lay the 3--conductor undercarpet power cable,bottom vinyl shield first, onto the floor.For slab--on--grade installation, install FloorPreparation 554123--[ ] according to 408--3154prior to laying the cable.
To avoid damage from from moisture, chemicalreaction, or abrasion, the floor preparation mustbe installed prior to laying the cable forslab--on--grade installation.
Check to make sure that the four top shieldbonding clips are on the mounting plate.Top Shield Bonding Clip 554178--1 (50 per box)is also available separately.
NOTE
i
DANGER
CAUTION
!
NOTE
i
408- 3129Undercarpet Power Cabling System 3-Conductor DCR Kits
Rev D2 of 4 Tyco Electronics Corporation
Figure 2
Center IndicatorMarks
Chalk Line
3. Slide the mounting plate between the bottomvinyl shield and the cable. Secure the mountingplate to the floor using the mounting hardware. SeeFigure 3.
4. Cut the top vinyl shield at the center of themounting plate.
Figure 3
CableTop VinylShield
Bottom VinylShield
Top Vinyl Shield Cut inCenter of Mounting Plate
Top Shield BondingClips Installed
Customer--SuppliedMounting Hardware (Ref)
5. For feed--through application:
a. Lay the top shield over the top vinyl shield,mark it at the cut line indicators (on mountingplate), then cut the top shield. Slide the topshield under top shield bonding clips. SeeFigure 4.
b. Fold the top vinyl shield back over the topshield, and tape it in place. See Figure 4.
c. Tape the top shield to the floor.
d. Remove the label from the bottom of theduplex receptacle assembly.
e. Observe the polarity and align the receptacleassembly over the mounting plate so that thebosses on the bottom of the receptacle
assembly will enter the blank holes in themounting plate. See Figure 5.
6. For dead--end application:
a. Cut the cable square about 6.4 mm [.25 in.]from the end of the mounting plate. SeeFigure 5.
Figure 4
Top ShieldTaped to Floor
Top Vinyl Shield FoldedBack and Taped
Top Shield UnderTop Shield Bonding Clips
Top Shield Cut LineIndicator (4 Places)
Figure 5
Boss of ReceptacleAssembly Enters BlankHole in Mounting Plate White
Green
Cut Cable6.4 mm [.25 in.]
Dead--End Application
Top VinylShield
Bottom VinylShield
Feed--Through Application
Outer Screw(2 Places)
White
Green
Slot
408- 3129Undercarpet Power Cabling System 3-Conductor DCR Kits
3 of 4Rev D Tyco Electronics Corporation
b. Slide the bottom vinyl shield under themounting plate and fold the top vinyl shieldback. Observe polarity and insert the end of thecable into the slot in the bottom of thereceptacle assembly.
c. Install the top shield and receptacle assemblyonto the mounting plate as described in Step 5.As an option, run the cable 25.4 mm [1 in.] pastthe receptacle assembly and insulate the endusing Insulator 556411--1 (available separately)or electrical tape.
7. Thread, but do not tighten, the two outer screwsof the receptacle assembly shown in Figure 5.
8. Open the receptacle assembly cover to exposethe center screw. Place the screwdriver on thescrew and manually tap it. See Figure 6. Tightenthe center screw, close the cover, then tighten theouter screws. Tighten screws to a torque of2.26 Nm [20 in.--lbs].
Figure 6
Center ScrewReceptacle AssemblyCover Open
Screwdriver (Ref)
9. Place the cover over the receptacle(s), andsecure it to mounting plate using the attachinghardware. See Figure 7.
Figure 7
Cover Installed
Cover andAttaching Hardware
ReceptacleAssembly
3.2. Combination DCR Kit1. Install the mounting plate and receptacleassembly as described in Paragraph 3.1.
2. If installing a modular jack(s), install the modularjack mounting plate using the adhesive--backedfoam tape or customer--supplied mountinghardware, then proceed as follows:
a. Center the modular jack bracket over thescribe lines of the mounting plate, then secure itusing the adhesive--backed foam tape (providedwith the bracket). See Figure 8, Detail A.
b. Terminate the undercarpet twisted--pair cableto the modular jack according to the instructionsincluded with the modular jack.
c. Insert the modular jack into the bracket withthe movable latch facing the base of the bracketuntil it is secure. Using tape, secure the cable tothe floor. See Figure 8, Detail B.
Detail B
Figure 8
Modular JackBracket
Scribe Lines
Foam Tape
Modular JackInstalled in Bracket
Cable Terminatedto Modular Jack
Tape
Movable Latch FacingBase of Bracket
Detail A
Breakout TabRemoved
Detail C
MountingPlate
Mounting Hole(2 Places)
Foam Tape(2 Places)
408- 3129Undercarpet Power Cabling System 3-Conductor DCR Kits
Rev D4 of 4 Tyco Electronics Corporation
d. Remove the break--out tab(s) from the coverthat correspond to the modular jack(s). SeeFigure 8, Detail C.
3. Secure the cover to the mounting plate usingthe attaching hardware. See Figure 9.
Figure 9
Attaching Hardware(4 Places)
ReceptacleAssembly
Blank (Ref)
4. REMOVAL
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, disconnect theelectrical power before beginning work on anycircuit.
1. Remove the attaching hardware securing thecover to the mounting plate, then remove thecover. Refer to Figure 10.
2. Remove the two outer screws of the receptacleassembly, open the cover, then remove the centerscrew from the receptacle assembly. Lift thereceptacle assembly from the mounting plate.
3. Remove the tape from the top shield within 0.6to 0.9 m [2 to 3 ft] of the mounting plate, and slidethe top shield out of the top shield bonding clips.
4. Remove the hardware securing the mountingplate and slide the mounting plate out frombetween the cable and bottom vinyl shield.
Figure 10
Cover
MountingPlate
ReceptacleAssembly
Top Shield
5. Lay the top shield and top vinyl shield backaway from the installation.
6. Install Floor Fitting Patch Kit 1479151--1according to 408--8635.
For dead--end application, trim the cable toeliminate the hole; then install the cableinsulators.
DO NOT repair or re--use components afterremoval.
5. REVISION SUMMARY
Revisions to this instruction sheet include:
S Modified Figure 1S Added product part numbers to Section 1S Modified Section 2S Modified Section 3 for clarityS Added reference to Step 2, and product partnumber to NOTE and Step 6.c of Section 3.1
S Added Steps 2 and 3 to Paragraph 3.2S Added Figure 8 and modified Figure 9S Removed Step 7 and previous Figure 10
TE Connectivity, TE connectivity (logo), and TE (logo) are trademarks. Other logos, product and/or company names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
1 of 4
Instruction Sheet
TOOLING ASSISTANCE CENTER 1-800-722-1111PRODUCT INFORMATION 1-800-522-6752
This controlled document is subject to change.For latest revision and Regional Customer Service, visit our website at www.te.com
408-10412AMP NETCONNECT* Undercarpet Cabling System Flush Mount Wall Transition Box Kits 1375045-[ ] 06 JUN 13 Rev B
Figure 1
1. INTRODUCTION
Flush mount transition wall box kits 1375045-[ ] are designed to house and protect connectors mating round cable to undercarpet power or communications cable. Dash number indicates color of the wall box cover.
NOTEWall Transition Box 554805-1 and Wall Transition Box Cover 1-553292-[ ] together contain all of the components contained in this wall transition box kit.
The wall transition box accepts one of the following transition blocks (available separately):
— power transition block 554862-1
— universal transition block 2111682-1 (for use with category 5e and category 6 cable)
NOTEDimensions in this instruction sheet are in metric units [with U.S. customary units in brackets]. Figures are not drawn to scale.
NOTEi
To obtain information on AMP NETCONNECT products, call PRODUCT INFORMATION at the number at the bottom of this page or visit the AMP NETCONNECT website at www.ampnetconnect.com.
2. DESCRIPTION
Each wall box kit consists of a wall box, cover, green ground screw, four cover mounting screws, and two stainless steel bonding clips. The wall box features seven ½-in. and ¾-in. round knockouts for round cable entry point, and slot knockout for the undercarpet cable exit point. See Figure 1.
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that a qualified electrician install the wall transition box kit.
DANGERTo avoid personal injury, ALWAYS DISCONNECT electrical power before beginning work on any circuit.
NOTEThe location of the wall box should be determined by consulting the floor plan layout.
3.1. Wall Box
1. For power cable application, ensure that the two stainless steel bonding clips are attached to the wall box as shown in Figure 1. Communications cable application does not require the bonding clips.
NOTEStainless steel bonding clip 554178-1 is also available separately.
2. Remove the knockouts from the wall box as required for the application (round knockouts for round cable and slot knockout for undercarpet cable). DO NOT remove the slot knockout if installing power cable behind the wall (described in Paragraph 3.2,B).
3. Cut an opening the size of the wall box in the wall. Position the opening at least 18 mm [.687 in.] above the baseboard to allow clearance for installing the cover. Refer to Figure 2.
Cover Mounting Screw (6-32×.75 in.]) (Qty: 4)
Green Ground Screw (10-32×.375 in.])
Cover 1-553292-[ ] (Also Available Separately)
Stainless Steel Bonding Clip (Qty: 2)
½-in. and ¾-in. Round Knockout (7 Places)
Slot Knockout
Wall Box 554805-1 (Also Available Separately)
NOTEi!NOTEi
NOTEi
408-10412
2 of 4Rev B
4. Position the wall box in the wall opening so that it is parallel to the floor and the “UP” arrow (located on back of wall box) is pointing toward the ceiling. Using two suitable screws (customer supplied), secure the wall box to the wall studs.
NOTECustomer-supplied switch box supports or support clips may be used to secure the wall box to wall plaster or drywall instead of wall studs.
3.2. Undercarpet Power Cable
Install the vinyl floor preparation (for slab-on-grade application), power cable, power transition block, and top shield according to the instructions included with the product.
NOTEInstruction sheet included with product is:408-3154 — Vinyl Floor Preparation and408-3154 — Undercarpet Power Cable408-3176 — Power Transition Block Assembly408-3150 — Top Shield and Bonding Clips
NOTEAttach the top shield to the wall box using the stainless steel bonding clips or two 8-32×3/8-in. screws (customer supplied). Refer to Figure 2.
Then, proceed with the following:
A. Outside of Wall
If installing power cable on the outside of the wall, the power cable and top shield should be concealed behind the baseboard. Refer to Figure 2.
Figure 2
B. Behind Wall
NOTEIf the round cable enters the wall box from the bottom, the power cable MUST exit from the FRONT of the wall box, and the power cable MUST be installed on the outside of the wall. Refer to Paragraph 3.2,A.
1. Cut an opening approximately 152.4×12.7 mm [6.0×.50 in.] in the wall just above the floor for the power cable to exit. See Figure 3.
Figure 3
2. If a bottom shield is NOT required, proceed to Step 3. If a bottom shield is required, install a piece of top shield to the back of the portion of the power cable located inside the wall as follows:
NOTEThe piece of top shield is used as a “bottom shield”. A bottom shield is recommended for protection of the power cable inside the wall.
a. Cut a piece of top shield approximately 457 mm [18 in.] long or as needed to extend approximately 25.4 mm [1.0 in.] into the wall box and 152.4 mm [6.0 in.] outside the wall. Refer to Figure 4.
b. Trim the corners of the top shield at a 30° angle from the end that will extend into the wall box. Cut the end of the top shield that will extend from the wall so that it is square with the floor. See Figure 4.
c. Feed the square end of the top shield into the slot knockout of the wall box and through the opening in the wall until approximately 25.4 mm [1.0 in.] of the trimmed end is located in the wall box and 152.4 mm [6.0 in.] extends from the opening in the wall.
d. If the vinyl floor preparation is used, install the top shield (used as a “bottom shield”) on top of the vinyl floor preparation. See Figure 4.
3. Feed the power cable into the opening in the wall and through the slot knockout of the wall box. If a bottom shield is used, install the power cable on top of the bottom shield.
NOTEi
NOTEi
NOTEi
Stainless Steel Bonding Clip (Ref)
Baseboard
Top Shield
Wall Box Secured to Wall
Screw (Ref)
18 mm [.687 in.]Opening to Baseboard
Power Cable
NOTEi
Opening in WallWall Box
NOTEi
408-10412
3 of 4Rev B
Figure 4
4. Install the power transition block onto the end of the power cable that is in the wall box according to the instruction sheet included with the power transition block. DO NOT fasten the transition block to the wall box at this time. See Figure 5.
Figure 5
5. Insert the top shield into the opening in the wall and through the slot knockout of the wall box. See Figure 6.
6. Using the two stainless steel bonding clips, secure the top shield to the wall box. See Figure 6.
7. Fasten the power transition block to the wall box.
8. If bottom shield is used, use Top Shield Bonding Clip 553534-1 (available separately) to connect the top and bottom shields together at the floor. Make sure to place the clips approximately 152.4 mm [6.0 in.] from the wall. See Figure 6.
Figure 6
3.3. Undercarpet Communications Cable
Install the communications transition block and communications cable according to the instructions included with the product.
NOTEInstruction sheet included with product is:408-3368 —Universal Communications Transition Block
(for Use with Category 5e and Category 6)408-3194 —Undercarpet Communications Cable
A. Outside of Wall
When installing communications cable on the outside of the wall, conceal the communications cable behind the baseboard.
B. Behind Wall
NOTEIf the round cable enters the wall box from the bottom, the communications cable MUST exit from the FRONT of the wall box and the communications cable MUST be installed on the outside of the wall. Refer to Paragraph 3.3,A.
1. Cut an opening approximately 152.4×12.7mm [6.0×.50 in.] in the wall just above the floor for the communications cable to exit. See Figure 3.
Each Corner of Top Shield Trimmed at 30° Angle
Slot Knockout in Wall Box
Opening in Wall
End of Top Shield Trimmed Square with Floor
25 mm [1.0 in.]
152.4 mm [6.0 in.]
Wall Box
Vinyl Floor Preparation
Installing Top Shield Used as Bottom Shield
Cable Entering Opening in Wall
Power Transition Block (Not Fastened to Wall Box)
End of Cable in Wall Box
Top Shield Inserted into Opening in Wall
Top Shield Through Slot Knockout of Wall Box Stainless Steel Bonding Clips
Securing Top Shield to Wall Box
Top Shield Bonding Clips Securing Top Shield to Bottom Shield (If Used)
Edge of Bottom Shield
152.4 mm [6.0 in.]Top Shield Bonding Clip to Wall
Power Transition Block Fastened to Wall Box
NOTEi
NOTEi
408-10412
4 of 4Rev B
2. Feed the communications cable into the opening in the wall and through the slot knockout of the wall box.
3. Mount the communications transition block to the wall box.
4. Secure the communications cable to the communications transition block according to the instruction sheet included with the communications transition block.
3.4. Cover
1. Orient the cover so that the “UP” arrow (located on the inside of the cover) is pointing toward the top of the wall box.
2. Using the four cover mounting screws, secure the cover to the wall box. See Figure 1.
4. REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR
Components of the wall box kit are not repairable. DO NOT use any defective or damaged components
5. REVISION SUMMARY
Revisions to this instruction sheet include:
• Removed AMP NETCONNECT logo
• Changed name of transition block in Section 1
• Changed title of 408-3368 in and deleted 408-10009 from Paragraph 3.3
TE Connectivity, TE connectivity (logo), and TE (logo) are trademarks. Other logos, product and/or company names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Customer Manual
TOOLING ASSISTANCE CENTER 1-800-722-1111
This controlled document is subject to change.For latest revision and Regional Customer Service, visit our website at www.te.com
Layout and Planning for AMP NETCONNECT* Undercarpet Cabling System 04 JUN 13 Rev J
Document Part Number 1518331-1
409-5566
2 of 27Rev J
PRODUCT INFORMATION
CALL TOLL FREE 1-800-722-1111 (CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES AND PUERTO RICO ONLY)
PRODUCT INFORMATION offers a means of providing product and technical assistance.
To obtain information on AMP NETCONNECT products, call PRODUCT INFORMATION or visit the AMP NETCONNECT website at www.ampnetconnect.com.
409-5566
3 of 27Rev J
1. INTRODUCTION
AMPNETCONNECT undercarpet cabling system is an alternative to conventional round cable for the distribution of power and communications virtually anywhere on the floor without the limitations of underfloor ducts, walls, and utility poles. This customer manual includes physical and functional descriptions of the components in the system and suggestions and considerations for system layouts.
The undercarpet power system is a branch circuit wiring method per Article 324 (Type FCC) of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and Rule 12-800 of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). The power cable and components are Listed by UL under files E73212 and E73213, respectively. The power cable and components are Certified by CSA under File 7189.
The undercarpet communications system is a communications wiring method per Article 800 of the NEC and Rule 60-322 of the CEC. The communications cable is Listed by UL to US (Type CMUC) and Canadian (Type CMH) safety standards under File E138034.
The system has the capability of providing power and communications in a variety of locations including, but not limited to, retail, gaming, and open office spaces as allowed by code. The system components are designed so that the installation, removal and relocation of cable and individual devices may be accomplished without major modification to walls, floors, or other building structural components. Additionally, the system eliminates the need for unsightly power poles.
As the product description implies, undercarpet cabling is only for use under carpet, specifically modular carpet squares as governed by NEC and CEC requirements. TE Connectivity does not condone or warrant any other use of this product.
When reading this manual, pay particular attention to DANGER, CAUTION, and NOTE statements.
Denotes an imminent hazard which may result in moderate or severe injury.
Denotes a condition which may result in product or equipment damage.
Highlights special or important information.
Reasons for reissue of this customer manual are provided in Section 5, REVISION SUMMARY.
Dimensions in this manual are in metric units [with U.S. customary units in brackets].
This customer manual is intended to assist professional engineers, contractors, facilities managers, and electrical design personnel in making accurate layouts, working drawings, and material lists for the undercarpet power and communications cabling system. TE cannot assume responsibility for knowledge of local codes and construction practices that may affect installations of this type. Any working drawing or layout must be reviewed and approved by a licensed professional engineer in accordance with appropriate federal and state laws governing such practices.
Any layouts or drawings MUST conform to NEC or CEC as appropriate, as well as any state, city, county, or local building code requirements. TE cannot be responsible for any misuse or misapplication of the product or for any code violations resulting from misuse or misapplication of the product.
TE reserves the right to make product revisions at any time which may affect layout methods as stated herein. If any question exists, contact TE prior to performing any layout work.
DANGER
STOP
!CAUTION
NOTE
i
NOTE
i
NOTE
i
409-5566
4 of 27Rev J
2. DESCRIPTION
This undercarpet power and communications cabling system consists of five types of components:
1. Transition fittings are used in walls, floors, or columns to house connectors that make the transition between round and undercarpet (flat) cable. The power transition between round and flat cable is made using unique insulation-piercing transition blocks that require only a screwdriver for termination. The communications transition is made using wiring blocks that require standard punch-down tools.
2. Cable includes flat, flexible power cable with separable conductor legs, a protective vinyl shield bonded to both sides of the cable, and a grounded, protective, steel top shield; and 4-pair, unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) flat communication cable.
3. Outlets include direct-connecting receptacle (DCR) and communications floor fittings, which are floor-mounted enclosures designed to house power or communications receptacles. The DCR provides integral duplex receptacles, and the communications floor fitting allows installation of standard SL series modular jacks or multimedia inserts.
4. Accessories include special cable tapping and splicing connectors, along with insulators that provide increased flexibility in wiring.
5. Comprehensive kits provide everything needed to install or retrofit a single room with service for power and communications (4 ports of any combination of voice or data and 2 duplex power receptacles).
A common configuration of the system that applies to many installations is summarized in Figure 1.
Figure 1
Common System Configuration
Communications Transition Block
Flush Mount Wall Transition Box (Cover Not Shown)
Power Transition Block
Top Shield (Shown Cut Away for Clarity)
Power Cable
Floor PreparationSpray Adhesive
(Along Edges of Top Shield)
Not Shown: — Hold-Down Tape (Use As Required to Attach Top Shield and Cable to Floor)— (2) Top Shield Bonding Clips (Use At Re-Direction Points of Top Shield)
Top Shield (Shown Cut Away for Clarity)
Combination DCR (Duplex Receptacle and Blank)Not Shown: Modular Jack and Bracket (Installed in DCR)
Data Cable
409-5566
5 of 27Rev J
A thorough understanding of the physical and functional description of components is necessary before planning the layout. The following information will aid in the identification and selection of components when planning the layout and when using the Material Take-Off List (covered in Section 5).
2.1. Power
A. Power Transition Block (Interface with Building Wiring)
The power transition block features a plastic block, copper-alloy terminals, a zinc-plated steel baseplate, and screws. The block is designed to make the transition from round conductors to flat conductors at the transition fitting and from flat conductors to round conductors at the floor fitting. See Figure 2.
A common screwdriver is used to terminate the flat conductors. When the silver pan-head screws are tightened, the baseplate is drawn up, pulling the cable against the insulation-piercing contact points that make the electrical connection. The color-coded pan-head screws on the top of the terminals make standard electrical connections to round conductors.
For installation instruction, refer to 408-3176.
Figure 2
B. Power Transition Fittings
Power transition fittings provide an interface point between round and undercarpet flat cable. Fittings are available in flush- or surface-mount configurations for wall or floor transition locations. Stainless steel bonding clips should be used to hold the flat cable in place. See Figure 3.
Flush-mount floor fittings require through-floor access, such as by core drilling or trenching at the fitting location.
Each flush floor outlet box kit includes a base, base cover, disposable concrete cover, and outlet blanking plate(s). Outlet cover plates and carpet plates are available separately.
The surface-mount power whip kit includes an integral power transition block; all other transition fittings do not include a power transition block.
Flush Floor Outlet Box Kits 2111353-1 (single-gang) and 2111353-2 (double-gang) each consist of Outlet Box Kit 1375130-1 or 1375130-2, Thomas & Betts outlet cover plate(s), and a carpet plate. These kits require a customer-supplied receptacle.
For installation instruction, refer to:
408-3144 Power whip kits
408-10336 Surface-mount wall box kits
408-10412 Flush-mount wall box kits
408-10425 Flush floor outlet box kits
408-10444 Surface-mount floor cover kits (use with Wall Box 1375033-1)
Power Transition Block 554862-1(3- and 5-Conductor)
NOTE
i
Thomas & Betts is a trademark.
409-5566
6 of 27Rev J
Figure 3
Surface-Mount Wall Box Kits 1375032-[ ]
Wall Box 1375033-1
Cover (1375034-[ ])
Power Whip Kits 554181-[ ] (3- and 5-Conductor)
Note: Suffix of part number with brackets indicates color of product.
Adapter Bracket Accommodates 12.7-mm [.50-in.] Trade Size Conduit and Fittings
The undercarpet power cable is available in 3- or 5-conductor, which correspond with round wire size 12 AWG (20 A). The cable consists of flat copper conductors placed side-by-side, laminated plastic strips that separate and insulate the conductors, and polyester jacket. The jacket material is flame-retardant, has excellent dielectric properties, and resists moisture and object penetration. All conductors are marked and color coded for ease of identification and to maintain proper polarity during installation. The insulation between adjacent conductors is perforated so that the conductors can be separated without exposing bare copper conductors. A blue vinyl shield is bonded to both sides of the cable for increased cushioning and abrasion resistance. See Figure 4.
For installation instruction, refer to 408-3154.
■ Green and yellow color-coded conductors denote isolated ground.Figure 4
D. Direct Connecting Receptacle (DCR) Power Outlet
Each DCR includes a galvanized-steel mounting plate, a thermoplastic receptacle assembly, a plastic cover, copper-alloy terminals, stainless steel bonding clips, and attaching hardware. The low-profile receptacle is terminated directly to flat cable. Tightening the screws allows the terminal tines to pierce the cable insulation and engage the conductors. The spring-loaded receptacle covers are closed (to protect the contacts) until a plug is inserted. An adapter housing assembly is available separately to complete termination for the 5-conductor single duplex DCR. See Figure 5.
For installation instruction, refer to:
408-3129 3-conductor DCR
408-3131 5-conductor DCR
LENGTHm [ft]
UNDERCARPET CABLE
3-CONDUCTOR5-CONDUCTOR
Standard Ground Isolated Ground ■
076.2 [250] 3-553079-1 3-553239-1 3-553820-1
015.24 [50] 3-553079-3 3-553239-3 3-553820-3
30.48 [100] 3-553079-4 3-553239-4 3-553820-4
3-Conductor Cable 5-Conductor Cable
70.4 mm [2.77 in.] Copper Conductors
117.3 mm [4.62 in.] Copper Conductors
76.2 mm [3.00 in.] Blue Vinyl Shield
124 mm [4.88 in.] Blue Vinyl Shield
Black
White
GreenBlue or Green and Yellow ■
Black
RedWhite
Green
Detail
Polyester Film
Copper Conductor
Blue Vinyl Shields
1.30+0.10/-0.05 mm [.051+.004/-.002 in.]
409-5566
8 of 27Rev J
Figure 5
2.2. Communications
A. Communications Transition Block
The communication transition block features six 4-pair punch-down 110Connect blocks for input of round cable and output of undercarpet (flat) cable. A standard punch-down tool can be used to terminate the conductors. The kit includes a mounting tray assembly and wiring block. See Figure 6.
For termination instruction, refer to:
408-3368 Universal Communications Transition Block 2111682-1 (For Use with Category 5e and Category 6 Cable)
Figure 6
Dual Duplex DCR Kit Combination DCR Kit
(Duplex Receptacle and Blank) Single Duplex DCR Kit
Adapter Housing Assembly (Required for 5-Conductor)
NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS
DCR KITDESCRIPTION
20 A 15 A
3
553947-[ ] 554128-[ ] Single
554192-[ ] 554321-[ ] Dual
554142-[ ] 554319-[ ] Combination
5554186-[ ] 554136-[ ] Single—Standard Ground
558650-[ ] 554592-[ ] Single—Isolated Ground
Note: Suffix of part number with brackets indicates color of product.
Stainless Steel Bonding Clip
554178-1
Universal Communications Transition Block Kit 2111682-1 (For Use with Category 5e and Category 6 Cable)
409-5566
9 of 27Rev J
B. Communications Transition Fittings
Communications transition fittings provide an interface point between round and undercarpet (flat) cable. Fittings are available in flush- or surface-mount configurations for wall or floor transition locations. The communications transition block is available separately. The flush floor outlet box kit includes an outlet cover and carpet ring; the mounting straps and outlets are available separately. See Figure 7.
Flush mount floor fittings require through-floor access, such as by core drilling or trenching at the fitting location.
For installation instruction, refer to:
408-3107 Flush fitting wall frame and cover
408-10336 Surface-mount wall box kits
408-10412 Flush-mount wall box kits
408-10425 Flush floor outlet box kits
408-10444 Surface-mount floor cover kits (use with Wall Box 1375033-1)
Figure 7
NOTE
i
Flush Fitting Wall Frame Box 553739-2
Flush Fitting Wall Frame Cover (553095-1)
Surface-Mount Wall Box Kits 1375032-[ ]
Surface-Mount Floor Cover Kits 2111420-[ ]
(Use with Wall Box 1375033-1)
Flush-Mount Wall Box Kits 1375045-[ ]
Single-Gang (Shown) and Double-Gang Flush Floor Outlet Box Kits
Note: Suffix of part number with brackets indicates color of product.
409-5566
10 of 27Rev J
C. Undercarpet Communications Cable
The 4-pair, unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) undercarpet communications cable features ramped wings, which eliminate the need for top and bottom taping. The cable meets all Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) transmission for system testing requirements. See Figure 8.
A hold-down tape should be used to attach the cable to the floor surface; optionally, a spray adhesive may be used. Also, a top shield may be used to help protect the cables from external abuse such as high traffic areas. If more than two cable runs exit the distribution point, the inner wing of each cable must be removed using a cable notcher tool (available separately). Refer to Paragraph 2.3, Accessories.
For installation instruction, refer to 408-3194.
Figure 8
D. Communications Floor Fitting
The floor fitting includes a galvanized steel mounting plate and a plastic cover. The 2-port and direct connecting receptacle (DCR) combination fittings can each house two 4-pair mated cables, and 2 surface-mount jacks or 2Category 5e or Category 6 110Connect modular jacks. The 4-port floor fitting can accommodate twice as many cables and jacks as the 2-port floor fitting. See Figure 9.
The low-profile multimedia floor fitting can accommodate up to 4 modular jacks and 2 SVGA connectors. The cover features 4 knockouts, which will accept ACO single-port installation kits.
The multimedia floor fitting includes an integral modular jack bracket (the modular jack is available separately). For all other low-profile floor fittings, the modular jack brackets are available separately. See Paragraph 2.2, E.
For installation instruction, refer to:
408-3129 Combination direct-connecting receptacle (DCR) kits (3-conductor, 20A and 15A)
408-3179 Low-profile floor fitting kits (2-port and 4-port)
Category 5e and Category 6 modular jack kits are intended for use with the low-profile communications floor fittings. The SL Series modular jack kit includes a modular jack with strain relief and bracket (for mounting). The bracket is not required for the low-profile multi-media floor fitting. See Figure 9.
The modular jack is designed to accept the wires following the T568A/B wiring pattern and terminated using the following tooling, which is available separately:
Impact Tool 1583608-1
Modular Plug Hand Tool Kit 1-231666-0 (408-9767)
SL Series Modular Jack Assembly Tool Kit 1725150-1 (408-8858)
Accepts Modular Jack or Super Graphic Video Array (SGVA) Connector
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
0558054-1 SL Series Modular Jack Kit, Category 5e
1933377-1 SL Series Modular Jack Kit, Category 6
SL Series Modular Jack Kits
Bracket (1499543-1) Modular Jack
409-5566
12 of 27Rev J
2.3. Accessories
The following paragraphs describe the accessories, which are intended for use, required for use (indicated by required), or are optional for use (indicated by optional) in power and/or communications systems.
A. Floor Preparation
The floor preparation is a yellow, vinyl material that is designed to protect the cable from floor moisture, chemical reaction, and abrasion in slab-on-grade or sub-grade level applications. This shield is placed over the circuit path on the concrete surface and under the cable. See Figure 11.
For installation instruction, refer to 408-3154.
Figure 11
B. Top Shield, Spray Adhesive, Hold-Down Tape, and Bonding Clips
The top shield is made of corrosion-resistant steel material. The top shield is a fully-grounded component that covers the entire system and provides physical protection for the cable. It is electrically connected to the ground to provide fault protection and minimize hazards. The penetration-resistant steel is designed to protect the cable against hazards such as thumb tacks and chair legs.
A spray adhesive and hold-down tape should be used to attach the top shield to the floor surface. A top shield bonding clip, which is a copper alloy device, should be used to electrically and mechanically connect the top shields at taps, splices, and re-direction points. See Figure 12.
Top Shield 553536-[ ] (3- or 5-Conductor) (168.15-mm [6.62-in.] Wide Roll)
Power (Required) – Communications (Optional)
Hold-Down Tape 553481-1 (50.8 mm [2.0 in.] by 54.86 m [180 ft] Roll)
Power – Communications
Top Shield Bonding Clip 553534-1
(2 Required at Each Tap, Splice, and Redirection Point)
Power
Spray Adhesive 6-553453-2
Power
0.25 mm [.010 in.]
Stainless Steel Bonding Clip 554178-1
(Used with Power Transition Fittings and Outlets)
Power
LENGTH (m [ft]) TOP SHIELD
76.2 [250] 553536-1
15.24 [50] 553536-3
76.2 [250] 553536-4
409-5566
13 of 27Rev J
C. Tap and Splice Connectors, Insulator Kit, Floor Fitting Patch Kit, and Tooling
Tap and splice connectors are copper-alloy devices with insulation-piercing lances. With the use of a hand crimping tool, they are designed to electrically connect two flat conductor cables. Five-conductor to 3-conductor taps allow more efficient cable runs with a minimum of power transition fittings. Splice connectors allow electrical connections between the end of one roll of cable and the beginning of another roll of cable and also permits the extension of existing cable runs. See Figure 13.
An insulator, which includes two identical insulator assemblies, is required when the cable is spliced, tapped, dead-ended, or a fitting was removed. Each insulator assembly has vinyl on one side and adhesive-faced foam (covered by paper backing) on the other side. The two assemblies are placed together around the cable to form the insulator. The insulator is designed to protect and insulate the tap and splice connectors and protect exposed conductor ends or areas.
Floor Fitting Patch Kit 1479151-1 is required for taps, splices, cable ending, cable repair, and DCR abandonment. The kit consists of a pair of insulator assemblies, a piece of top shield, a roll of hold-down tape, and 4 top shield bonding clips.
For installation instruction, refer to:
408-3218 Tap and splice connectors
408-8635 Insulator kit
Figure 13
D. Tooling
A cable notcher tool must be used to cut a notch in the edge of the communications cable at turns to create a smooth radius in the cable. A crimping hand tool assembly must be used to crimp the tap and splice connectors to the power cable. See Figure 14.
For instruction on using the tools, refer to:
Cable notcher tool (instructions included with tool)
Conference Room Kits 1479050-1 (Category 5e) and 1933466-1 (Category 6) provide all the components needed to install or retrofit a single room with service for power and communications (4 ports of any combination of voice or data and 2 duplex power receptacles). Figure 15 lists the components for each kit.
Figure 15
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PART NUMBERAMOUNTPER KIT
REFER TO
COMPREHENSIVE KIT 1479050-1
(Category 5e)
COMPREHENSIVE KIT 1933466-1
(Category 6)
Communications Cable 1499119-1 1499539-1 30.5 m [100 ft] Figure 8
Undercarpet PRO-CRIMPER* III Hand Tool Assembly 91392-1(For Power Tap and Splice Connectors)
Power
409-5566
15 of 27Rev J
3. LAYOUT
3.1. Preparation
Before any of the components in the undercarpet cabling system are installed, an accurate and scaled layout plan that shows the location and orientation of all the components should be made. This plan will serve the following purposes:
— to locate the components so as to avoid interference
— to provide working drawings for the actual installation
— to define the number and type of components needed
— to provide a permanent record that can be referenced for maintenance or for future relocations
Figure 2 shows an example of an open office design and gives the identification of symbols referenced in the layout procedure.
Figure 16
Legend
Open Office Design
Installation
Floor Plan Layout
Interior Wall
Power Transition Point
Power Cable
Power Tap
Power DCR
Power/Communications Combination Fitting
Communications Transition Point
Communications Cable
Communications Fitting (Data/Voice)
409-5566
16 of 27Rev J
3.2. Planning
A. Power
The undercarpet power cables have the same current-carrying capacity ratings as conventional round wire conductors of the same size (AWG) designation. Use the appropriate articles in the NEC for round wire applications as a guideline for making branch circuit and voltage drop calculations for the flat conductor cable applications. Include all round cable as well as flat cable applications in a system when making calculations. Appropriate code references are as follows:
— for number of outlets required, the total load, and the location of electrical outlets, NEC Article 210 applies
— for number of branch circuits required, NEC Article 220 applies
— for specifics on flat conductor cable Type FCC, NEC Article 324 applies
The following considerations should be kept in mind when planning the power floor layout:
1. The maximum cable run should be calculated using an average DC resistance of 1.64 ohms per 305 m [1,000 ft] for cable size 12 AWG.
2. Conduit and round wire should be used to distribute power through columns, interior walls, and underfloor ducts; then, undercarpet cable should be used for actual service to the work area.
3. Circuits should be loaded with a fewer number of outlets than design capacity; thereby, allowing for reserve capacity for future planning.
4. The 5-conductor cable can be used as a 2- or 3-circuit main run with single-circuit outlets tapped as required, permitting additional circuits to be run from each transition box.
5. Cable taps, although designed to be fast and economical, still involve additional material and labor; therefore, when laying the power system, taps should be minimized by making additional bends with the cable.
6. Planning communication outlet locations can minimize bends and manipulation of the power layout. Use of a combination power and communications fitting can economize both systems on a floor plan. This planning will assure proper cable approach to a combination fitting.
Refer to Figure 17.
B. Communications
The undercarpet communications cables have the same performance ratings as conventional round twisted-pair cabling of the same category designation. Consider the appropriate category performance required for the application, and refer to appropriate articles in the NEC for communications circuit installations when planning the layout. Appropriate code references are as follows:
— for communications circuits, NEC Article 800 applies
— for specifics on undercarpet communications cable Type CMUC, NEC Article 800.179 applies
The following considerations should be kept in mind when planning the communications floor layout:
1. Round wire should be used to distribute communications through columns, interior walls, and underfloor ducts; then, undercarpet cable should be used for actual service to the work area.
2. Extra capacity should be left at most transition points to allow for future expansion.
3. Communications cables are typically installed after the power system and may cross over top of the power cable top shield, but should not run on top of the top shield or other communications cables for any distance. Crossings should not occur at a power tap, splice, or cable bend.
4. The preferred method for combined power and communications systems layout is to use the "fingers" approach, where a given area is fed from one direction with power circuits and the other directions are fed with communications circuits. The alternative method is to feed both from the same direction.
Refer to Figure 18 for additional cable routing recommendations and dimensions.
409-5566
17 of 27Rev J
Figure 17
Recommended distance from floor to mounted wall box is
approximately height of base board.
Make turns by folding power cable at any angle up to
90 degrees.
Minimum distance from a 90-degree power cable bend to another cable bend is 203 mm [8 in.] centerline-to-centerline.
Power cable taps must be made at a 90-degree angle to the main cable run.
Two taps require a minimum of 0.30 m [1 ft] between junction points.
Power cable must not exit transition fitting at any angle
other than 90 degrees.
Extend power cable a minimum of 0.30 m [1 ft] beyond
transition fitting before an angle.
Do not curve power cable
around obstacles.
Bend power cable at 90-degree angle around obstacles.
Do not run power cable on top of another cable
for any distance.
Power cables may cross another cable
at a 90-degree angle.
Do not cross power cables
at floor fittings.
A tap and a power cable with a 90-degree bend will offer
This encapsulated installation procedure serves as an aid in identifying system components, indicating where they are used and showing how they are installed. The outline of the sequence of installation may be helpful for layout planning. For specific instructions, refer to the instruction sheets packaged with the components.
4.1. Power System
Refer to Figure 19.
Preferred Method (“Fingers” Approach) Power and Communications Fed from Different Directions
Alternative MethodPower and Communications Fed from Same Direction
Layout using taps Same layout without taps Layout using taps Same layout without taps
Recommended distance from floor to mounted wall box is
approximately height of base board.
Make gradual turns in communications cable
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
Do not fold communications cable
around obstacles.
Gradually bend communications cable
around obstacles.
Do not run communications cable on top of another cable
for any distance.
Communications cables may cross another cable
at a 90-degree angle.
Do not feed communications cables through to next
floor fitting.
Run separate communications cable to each floor fitting outlet.
Column (Ref) Column (Ref)
Walls/Obstacles (Ref)
Walls/Obstacles (Ref)
Communications Floor Plan Layout
409-5566
19 of 27Rev J
Figure 19 (Cont’d)
1. Locate and mount power supply transition fittings on walls and floor.
2. Lay out circuit centerlines on floor with chalk line. 3. Use mounting plates as patterns, mark screw hole locations.
4. Drill holes and install outlet anchors. 5. Scrape, patch, clean, and vacuum floor on cable path. Clean entire floor.
7. Connect cable to transition blocks at power supply transition fittings.
Surface Wall Mount Flush Floor MountFlush Wall Mount
101.6 mm[4 in.] Min
Chalk Line
Chalk Line
Chalk Line
Patching Compound
Floor Preparation Circuit Chalk Line
Fitting Location
Step 1 Remove screws
Step 2 Loosen remaining screws
Step 3 Install cable
Step 4 Tap screws through cable
Step 5 Tighten screws
409-5566
20 of 27Rev J
Figure 19 (Cont’d)
8. Lay cable. 9. Establish direction for 0.91 m [3 ft] or 1.22 m [4 ft] then crease. Fold cable at corners. Tape as required.
10. a. Install cable to tap at branch circuits. 10. b. Install cable to splice as required.
11. Connect cables with tap or splice connectors as required.
12. Seal splices and taps with insulator kit.
Note: See 408-3128 for recommended method to interface with another existing cabling system.
13. Mount floor fitting base plate.
Note: Perform a continuity check before installing the top shield.
14. Trim and connect top shield at floor fittings. Use top shield bonding clips to join top shield at splices, taps, and corners.
Edge Tape
Cable
Direction of Run
Cable
Cable Tap
Splice Wire Sizes 10 and 12 AWG
Cable Ends Trimmed with 3.18-mm [1/8-in.] Gap
Floor Fitting Base Plate
Trim
Tape
Stainless Steel Top Shield Bonding Clips
Top Shield
409-5566
21 of 27Rev J
Figure 19 (End)
15. Spray primer along the edge of the top shield and on floor. Apply tape to both edges of the top shield.
16. Assemble skirt to fitting.
17. Install carpet squares.
Primer Width
Top Shield
TapePrimer
409-5566
22 of 27Rev J
4.2. Communications System
Refer to Figure 20.
Figure 20 (Cont’d)
1. Locate and mount transition fittings.
2. Scrape, patch, clean, and vacuum floor on cable path. Clean entire floor.
3. Lay out circuit centerlines on floor with chalk line.
4. Use mounting plates as patterns, mark screw hole locations. The floor fitting may be attached to the floor by adhesive-backed foam tape or by screws into outlet anchors. If outlet anchors are used, drill holes and thoroughly clean floor.
5. The twisted-pair cable does not require a top or bottom shield. Cross-tape as required along the cable run, placing the cable bow pointed up while stretching to remove any slack.
6. Flex the cable wings while removing cable from the reel. Start laying the cable from the distribution point (wall box or floor fitting). Where more than two cable runs must exit the distribution point, remove the inner “wing” and place the cables side by side. Then place tape over the area.
7. Directional changes are made by notching the wings and bending the cable to form a gradual turn.
8. Mate cable connectors and fasten cable at floor fitting.
9. Mount floor fittings, and install carpet squares.
Hold-Down Tape Each Run
152.4 mm [6.00 in.] (Typ)
3 or More Runs
7.87 mm [.312 in.] (Typ)
To Remove Wings, Cut to Groove, Flex, and Tear Wing Back Slowly By Hand
254 mm [10.0 in.] Min Radius
406.4 mm [16.00 in.]
Min
Hold-Down Tape
Notches
409-5566
24 of 27Rev J
5. MATERIAL TAKE-OFF PROCEDURE
This procedure calculates the materials needed to install the system using the Power System Material Take-off List and the Communications System Material Take-Off List. Proceed as follows:
1. After completing the floor layout, assign identification numbers or letters to each power or communications circuit run exiting from each transition fitting.
2. Starting at the transition fittings, survey each circuit run for the components needed. Use the floor plan scale to determine the approximate length of cable, floor preparation, and top shield. Refer to Figure 21 for the components needed for each application. Then, using the appropriate Material Take-Off List, enter the quantity of each component under the assigned circuit number.
Figure 21
APPLICATIONSPECIFY AND ORDER
POWER COMMUNICATIONS
Transition from round to flat cable
(1) Power Transition Block and
(1) Wall or Floor Box with Cover
or
(1) Power Whip Kit
(1) Communications Transition Block Kit and
(1) Wall or Floor Box with Cover
Install cable
Power Cable and
Floor Preparation (Approx 0.30 m [1 ft] per 0.30 m [1 ft] of Cable) and
Top Shield (Approx 0.30 m [1 ft] per 0.30 m [1 ft] of Cable) and
Hold-Down Tape (Approx 1 Roll per 23 m [75 ft] of Cable) and
Spray Adhesive(Approx 1 Can per 30.5 m [100 ft] of Cable)
Communications Cable and
Hold-Down Tape(Approx 1 Roll per m [1,800 ft] of Cable)
Optional: Top Shield (Approx 0.30 m [1 ft] per 0.30 m [1 ft] of Cable)
Install floor outlet
(1) 3-Conductor DCR
or
(1) 5-Conductor DCR and
(1) 5-Conductor Adapter Housing Assembly
(1) Low-Profile Floor Fitting and
(1) Modular Jack Kit (per Cable)
or
(1) Multi-Media Kit and (1) Modular Jack Kit or SVGA Connector(1) (per Cable)
Tap cable
(1) Tap Connector (per Conductor) and
(2) Top Shield Bonding Clips and
(1) Insulator Kit and
(1) Crimping Hand Tool
—
Splice cable
(1) Splice Connector (per Conductor) and
(2) Top Shield Bonding Clips and
(1) Insulator Kit and
(1) Crimping Hand Tool
—
Create directional turn in cable (2) Top Shield Bonding Clips (1) Cable Notcher Tool
Dead end cable (1) Insulator Kit —
Repair cable (1) Floor Fitting Patch Kit —
409-5566
25 of 27Rev J
3. Reading across the list, combine the totals of each component in each circuit run, and enter the total quantity in the last column.
4. Calculate the necessary scrap factor on components such as cable, floor preparation, top shield, tape, and spray adhesive. Allow for final variations that might occur on site.
4. Suggested guidelines for power applications are:
— Order equal amounts of cable, floor preparation, and top shield.
— For each roll of cable, order a set of cable splices and 1 insulator kit.
— For every 23 m [75 ft] of power cable, order 1 roll (approximately 54.86 m [180 ft]) of hold-down tape.
— For every 30.5m [100 ft] of power cable, order 1 can of spray adhesive.
4. Suggested guideline for communications applications is:
— For every 548.6 m [1,800 ft] of communications cable, order 1 roll (approximately 54.86 m [180 ft]) of hold-down tape.
5. Adjust final figures where possible to accommodate standard packaging of product available from the distributor.
6. REVISION SUMMARY
Revisions to this customer manual include:
• Removed AMP NETCONNECT logo
• Replaced transition block kits 1479384-1 and 1479985-1 with 2111682-1 in Paragraph 2.2.A, Figure 15, and Communications System Material Take-Off List
• Removed “with foam tape and lacing strip” from, changed name of 408-3368, and changed “multiple 4-pair” to “six 4-pair” in Paragraph 2.2.A, and removed Category 6 transition block from Figure 6
